GL

Operator's Manual
GL Operator's Manual

É1665846501ZËÍ
1665846501

Order no. 6515 0547 13 Part no. 1665846501 Edition A 2015

Symbols X This symbol indicates an instruction Publication details
Registered trademarks: that must be followed. Internet
RBluetooth® X Several of these symbols in succes-
is a registered trademark of
sion indicate an instruction with sev- Further information about Mercedes-Benz
Bluetooth SIG Inc.
eral steps. vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found
RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
(Y This symbol tells you where you can on the following websites:
RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks
page) find more information about a topic. http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
of DOLBY Laboratories.
YY This symbol indicates a warning or an http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada
RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are
instruction that is continued on the only)
registered trademarks of Daimler AG. next page.
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of
Dis‐ This font indicates a display in the
Johnson Controls. play multifunction display/COMAND dis- Editorial office
RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trade- play.
marks of Apple Inc. ©Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated
Parts of the software in the vehicle are pro-
RLogic7® is a registered trademark of Har- tected by copyright © 2005 or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,
man International Industries. The FreeType Project without written permission from Daimler AG.
RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are reg- http://www.freetype.org. All rights
istered trademarks of Microsoft Corpora- reserved.
Vehicle manufacturer
tion.
RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius
Daimler AG
XM Radio Inc.
Mercedesstraße 137
RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq-
70327 Stuttgart
uity Digital Corporation.
Germany
RGracenote® is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are reg-
istered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC.
In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-
lowing symbols:
G WARNING
Warning notes make you aware of dangers
which could pose a threat to your health or
life, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with infor-
mation on environmentally aware actions or
disposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you to

dangers that could lead to damage to your
vehicle.
i Practical tips or further information that
could be helpful to you. As at 09.09.2013
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual
carefully and familiarize yourself with the
vehicle before driving. For your own safety
and a longer vehicle life, follow the instruc-
tions and warning notices in this manual.
Ignoring them could result in damage to the
vehicle or personal injury to you or others.
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow
instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-
Benz Limited Warranty.
The equipment or product designation of your
vehicle may vary depending on:
Rmodel
Rorder
Rcountry specification
Ravailability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right
to introduce changes in the following areas:
Rdesign
Requipment
Rtechnical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations.
The following are integral components of the
vehicle:
ROperator's Manual
RMaintenance Booklet
REquipment-dependent supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all
times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all
documents on to the new owner.
The technical documentation team at
Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant
motoring.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
A Daimler Company

1665846501 É1665846501ZËÍ
 Contents 3

Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 33

Introduction ......................................... 24 Safety ................................................... 43

Opening and closing ........................... 81

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .. 105

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 127

Climate control ................................. 145

Driving and parking .......................... 165

On-board computer and displays .... 273

Stowage and features ...................... 341

Maintenance and care ...................... 371

Breakdown assistance ..................... 387

Wheels and tires ............................... 405

Technical data ................................... 445

4 Index

1, 2, 3 ... Parking .......................................... 230

Towing a trailer .............................. 232
115 V socket ...................................... 355 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 76
12 V socket Adaptive Brake Assist
see Sockets Display message ............................ 300
360° camera Function/notes ................................ 72
Cleaning ......................................... 382 Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Function/notes ............................. 237 Display message ............................ 308
4ETS Function/notes ............................. 134
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac- Switching on/off ........................... 134
tion System) Additives (engine oil) ........................ 452
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel ADS (Adaptive Damping System)
drive) .................................................. 257 Function/notes ............................. 220
Air bags
A Deployment ..................................... 58
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Display message ............................ 303
Display message ............................ 293 Front air bag (driver, front
Function/notes ................................ 68 passenger) ....................................... 51
Important safety notes .................... 68 Important safety notes .................... 50
Warning lamp ................................. 329 Introduction ..................................... 50
Accident Knee bag .......................................... 52
Automatic measures after an acci- PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica-
dent ................................................. 60 tor lamp ........................................... 45
Activating/deactivating cooling Side impact air bag .......................... 52
with air dehumidification ................. 155 Window curtain air bag .................... 53
Active Blind Spot Assist Air-conditioning system
Activating/deactivating (on- see Climate control
board computer) ............................ 284 Air filter (display message) .............. 311
Display message ............................ 316 AIR FLOW ........................................... 157
Function/information .................... 249 AIRMATIC package
Trailer towing ................................. 252 ADS (Adaptive Damping System) ... 220
Active Curve System Function/notes ............................. 219
Display message ............................ 313 Level control .................................. 221
Function/notes ............................. 220 Air vents
Active Driving Assistance package .. 249 Glove box ....................................... 163
Active Lane Keeping Assist Important safety notes .................. 162
Activating/deactivating (on- Rear ............................................... 163
board computer) ............................ 284 Setting ........................................... 162
Display message ............................ 315 Setting the center air vents ........... 162
Function/information .................... 252 Setting the side air vents ............... 163
Trailer towing ................................. 255 Alarm
Active light function ......................... 133 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 78
Active Parking Assist Switching off (ATA) .......................... 78
Display message ............................ 316 Switching the function on/off
Exiting a parking space .................. 231 (ATA) ................................................ 78
Function/notes ............................. 228 Alarm system
Important safety notes .................. 228 see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
 Index 5

Ambient lighting Automatic engine switch-off (ECO

Setting the brightness (on-board start/stop function) .......................... 172
computer) ...................................... 286 Automatic headlamp mode .............. 128
Setting the color (on-board com- Automatic transmission
puter) ............................................. 286 Accelerator pedal position ............. 179
AMG adaptive sport suspension Automatic drive program ............... 181
system ................................................ 223 Changing gear ............................... 179
AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 289 DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 176
Anti-lock braking system Display message ............................ 323
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Drive program display .................... 176
Anti-Theft Alarm system Driving tips .................................... 179
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Emergency running mode .............. 185
Approach/departure angle .............. 202 Engaging drive position .................. 178
Ashtray ............................................... 353 Engaging neutral ............................ 177
Assistance display (on-board com- Engaging park position automati-
puter) .................................................. 283 cally ............................................... 177
Assistance menu (on-board com- Engaging reverse gear ................... 177
puter) .................................................. 283 Engaging the park position ............ 176
ASSYST PLUS Kickdown ....................................... 179
Displaying a service message ........ 377 Manual drive program .................... 181
Hiding a service message .............. 377 Manual drive program (AMG vehi-
Notes ............................................. 376 cles) ............................................... 182
Resetting the service interval dis- Manual drive program (vehicles
play ................................................ 377 with the ON&OFFROAD package) .. 182
Service message ............................ 376 Overview ........................................ 176
Special service requirements ......... 377 Problem (malfunction) ................... 185
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Program selector button ................ 180
Activating/deactivating ................... 78 Pulling away ................................... 170
Function ........................................... 78 Starting the engine ........................ 170
Switching off the alarm .................... 78 Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 180
ATTENTION ASSIST Trailer towing ................................. 179
Activating/deactivating ................. 284 Transmission position display ........ 176
Display message ............................ 312 Transmission positions .................. 178
Automatic transmission emer-
Function/notes ............................. 241
Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 280 gency mode ....................................... 185
Axle load, permissible (trailer tow-
Audio system
ing) ...................................................... 459
see separate operating instructions
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
see Qualified specialist workshop
B
Authorized workshop Bag hook ............................................ 348
see Qualified specialist workshop Ball coupling
AUTO lights Installing ........................................ 266
Display message ............................ 308 Removing ....................................... 270
see Lights Storing ........................................... 270
Automatic car wash (care) ............... 378 BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 69
Automatic engine start (ECO start/ BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System
stop function) .................................... 172 PLUS) .................................................... 69
6 Index

Battery (SmartKey) Bulbs

Checking .......................................... 85 see Replacing bulbs
Important safety notes .................... 85
Replacing ......................................... 85 C
Battery (vehicle)
California
Charging ........................................ 395
Important notice for retail cus-
Display message ............................ 309
tomers and lessees .......................... 26
Important safety notes .................. 393
Calling up a malfunction
Jump starting ................................. 397
Overview ........................................ 393 see Display messages
Belt Car
see Seat belts see Vehicle
Blind Spot Assist Care
Activating/deactivating ................. 284 360° camera ................................. 382
Display message ............................ 316 Carpets .......................................... 385
Notes/function .............................. 245 Car wash ........................................ 378
Trailer towing ................................. 247 Display ........................................... 383
see Active Blind Spot Assist Exhaust pipe .................................. 382
BlueTEC Exterior lights ................................ 381
Gear or selector lever .................... 384
Adding DEF .................................... 188
Interior ........................................... 383
BlueTEC (DEF) .................................... 450
Matte finish ................................... 380
Brake Assist
Night View Assist Plus ................... 383
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Notes ............................................. 377
Brake fluid
Paint .............................................. 379
Display message ............................ 299 Plastic trim .................................... 384
Notes ............................................. 452 Power washer ................................ 379
Brake lamps Rear view camera .......................... 382
Changing bulbs .............................. 140 Roof lining ...................................... 385
Display message ............................ 306 Seat belt ........................................ 385
Brakes Seat cover ..................................... 384
ABS .................................................. 68 Sensors ......................................... 381
Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 72 Steering wheel ............................... 384
BAS .................................................. 69 Trim pieces .................................... 384
BAS PLUS ........................................ 69 Washing by hand ........................... 379
Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 452 Wheels ........................................... 380
Display message ............................ 293 Windows ........................................ 381
High-performance brake system .... 197 Wiper blades .................................. 381
Important safety notes .................. 196 Wooden trim .................................. 384
Maintenance .................................. 197 Cargo compartment cover
Parking brake ................................ 192 Notes/how to use ......................... 348
Riding tips ...................................... 196 Cargo compartment enlargement
Warning lamp ................................. 328 Important safety notes .................. 346
Breakdown Cargo compartment floor
see Flat tire Opening/closing ............................ 349
see Towing away Stowage well (under) ..................... 349
Brightness control (instrument
Cargo tie down rings ......................... 347
cluster lighting) ................................... 35
 Index 7

Car key Information about using auto-

see SmartKey matic climate control ..................... 154
CD player/CD changer (on-board Maximum cooling .......................... 159
computer) .......................................... 281 Overview of systems ...................... 146
Center console Problems with cooling with air
Lower section .................................. 39 dehumidification ............................ 156
Upper section .................................. 38 Problem with the rear window
Central locking defroster ........................................ 161
Automatic locking (on-board com- Rear control panel ......................... 150
puter) ............................................. 287 Rear control panel (3-zone auto-
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 82 matic climate control with addi-
Changing bulbs tional rear-compartment climate
Brake lamps ................................... 140 control) .......................................... 152
High-beam headlamps ................... 139 Refrigerant ..................................... 454
Low-beam headlamps .................... 138 Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 454
Child-proof locks Setting the air distribution ............. 158
Important safety notes .................... 66 Setting the airflow ......................... 158
Rear doors ....................................... 67 Setting the air vents ...................... 162
Children Setting the climate mode (AIR
In the vehicle ................................... 61 FLOW) ............................................ 157
Restraint systems ............................ 62 Setting the temperature ................ 157
Special seat belt retractor ............... 61 Switching air-recirculation mode
Child seat on/off ............................................ 161
Forward-facing restraint system ...... 66 Switching on/off ........................... 154
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat Switching residual heat on/off ...... 161
anchors ............................................ 63 Switching the rear window
On the front-passenger seat ............ 65 defroster on/off ............................ 160
Rearward-facing restraint system .... 65 Switching the ZONE function on/
Top Tether ....................................... 64 off .................................................. 159
Cigarette lighter ................................ 354 Climate control system
Cleaning Automatic engine start .................. 172
Mirror turn signal ........................... 381 Automatic engine switch-off .......... 172
Trailer tow hitch ............................. 382 Deactivating/activating ................. 173
Climate control General information ....................... 172
Important safety notes .................. 171
3-zone automatic climate control
Introduction ................................... 171
with additional rear-compartment
Coat hooks ......................................... 349
climate control ............................... 152
Automatic climate control (3- Cockpit
zone) .............................................. 150 Overview .......................................... 34
Controlling automatically ............... 156 see Instrument cluster
Cooling with air dehumidification .. 155 COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
Defrosting the windows ................. 160 Operation/notes .............................. 70
Defrosting the windshield .............. 159 COMAND
Dual-zone automatic climate con- ON&OFFROAD menu ..................... 263
trol ................................................. 147 see separate operating instructions
General notes ................................ 146 COMAND display
Indicator lamp ................................ 156 Cleaning ......................................... 383
8 Index

Combination switch .......................... 131 D

Consumption statistics (on-board
computer) .......................................... 277 Data
Convenience closing feature .............. 97 see Technical data
Daytime running lamps
Convenience opening feature ............ 97
Display message ............................ 307
Coolant (engine)
Function/notes ............................. 128
Checking the level ......................... 375
Switching on/off (on-board com-
Display message ............................ 308
puter) ............................................. 285
Filling capacity ............................... 453
Declarations of conformity ................. 28
Important safety notes .................. 452
DEF
Temperature (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 289 Adding ........................................... 188
Temperature gauge ........................ 274 Display message ............................ 311
Warning lamp ................................. 336 Filling capacity ............................... 451
Cooling Important safety notes .................. 450
Delayed switch-off
see Climate control
Copyright ............................................. 31 Exterior lighting (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 286
Cornering light function
Interior lighting .............................. 287
Display message ............................ 305
Diagnostics connection ...................... 28
Function/notes ............................. 133
Crash-responsive emergency light- Diesel .................................................. 449
Differential lock (display mes-
ing ....................................................... 137
sage) ................................................... 314
Crosswind Assist ................................. 75
Digital speedometer ......................... 278
Crosswind driving assistance ............ 75
DIRECT SELECT lever
Cruise control
Automatic transmission ................. 176
Activating ....................................... 204
Display messages
Activation conditions ..................... 204
Cruise control lever ....................... 204 ASSYST PLUS ................................ 376
Deactivating ................................... 205 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 292
Display message ............................ 319 Driving systems ............................. 312
Driving system ............................... 203 Engine ............................................ 308
Function/notes ............................. 203 General notes ................................ 292
Important safety notes .................. 204 Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 292
Storing and maintaining current KEYLESS-GO .................................. 326
speed ............................................. 204 Lights ............................................. 305
Cup holder Safety systems .............................. 293
SmartKey ....................................... 325
Center console .............................. 351
Tires ............................................... 320
Important safety notes .................. 350
Vehicle ........................................... 323
Rear compartment ......................... 352
Distance recorder
Temperature controlled ................. 351
Third row of seats .......................... 352 see Odometer
Customer Assistance Center see Trip odometer
(CAC) ..................................................... 29 Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 338
Customer Relations Department ....... 29 Distance warning function
Activating/deactivating ................. 283
Function/notes ................................ 70
Warning lamp ................................. 338
 Index 9

DISTRONIC PLUS Driving lamps

Activating ....................................... 208 see Daytime running lamps
Activation conditions ..................... 208 Driving off-road
Cruise control lever ....................... 208 see Off-road driving
Deactivating ................................... 212 Driving safety systems
Display message ............................ 317 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 68
Displays in the multifunction dis- ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 76
play ................................................ 213 Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 72
Driving tips .................................... 213 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 69
Function/notes ............................. 206 BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System
Important safety notes .................. 207 PLUS) ............................................... 69
Setting the specified minimum COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST .... 70
distance ......................................... 211 Distance warning function ............... 70
Warning lamp ................................. 338 EBD (electronic brake force distri-
Doors bution) ............................................. 75
Automatic locking (on-board com- ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-
puter) ............................................. 287 gram) ............................................... 73
Automatic locking (switch) ............... 90 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction
Central locking/unlocking System) ........................................... 73
(SmartKey) ....................................... 82 Important safety information ........... 68
Control panel ................................... 42 Overview .......................................... 68
Display message ............................ 324 PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 76
Emergency locking ........................... 90 STEER CONTROL ............................. 77
Emergency unlocking ....................... 90 Driving systems
Important safety notes .................... 88 360°camera .................................. 237
Opening (from inside) ...................... 89 Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 249
Overview .......................................... 88 Active Curve System ...................... 220
Power closing feature ...................... 90 Active Driving Assistance pack-
Drinking and driving ......................... 194 age ................................................. 249
Drive program Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 252
Automatic ...................................... 181 Active Parking Assist ..................... 228
Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 176 ADS ............................................... 220
Manual ........................................... 181 AIRMATIC package ........................ 219
Manual (AMG vehicles) .................. 182 AMG adaptive sport suspension
Manual (vehicles with the system ........................................... 223
ON&OFFROAD package) ................ 182 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 241
Off-road program (vehicles with Blind Spot Assist ............................ 245
the ON&OFFROAD package) .......... 259 Cruise control ................................ 203
SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 289 Display message ............................ 312
see On-road programs DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 206
Driver's door HOLD function ............................... 218
see Doors Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 247
Driving abroad Level control (vehicles with AIR-
Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 377 MATIC package) ............................. 221
Symmetrical low beam .................. 128 Level control (vehicles with the
Driving in mountainous terrain ON&OFFROAD package) ................ 214
Approach/departure angle ............ 202 On-road programs .......................... 255
10 Index

PARKTRONIC ................................. 225 EBD (electronic brake force distri-

Rear view camera .......................... 232 bution)
Driving tips Display message ............................ 295
Automatic transmission ................. 179 Function/notes ................................ 75
Brakes ........................................... 196 ECO display
Break-in period .............................. 166 Function/notes ............................. 195
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 213 On-board computer ....................... 278
Downhill gradient ........................... 196 Electronic Stability Program
Drinking and driving ....................... 194 see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Driving abroad ............................... 128 Emergency
Driving in winter ............................. 198 Automatic measures after an acci-
Driving on flooded roads ................ 198 dent ................................................. 60
Driving on sand .............................. 201 Emergency release
Driving on wet roads ...................... 198 Driver's door .................................... 90
Driving over obstacles ................... 202 Vehicle ............................................. 90
Exhaust check ............................... 194 Emergency spare wheel
Fuel ................................................ 194 General notes ................................ 440
General .......................................... 194 Important safety notes .................. 440
Hydroplaning ................................. 198 Removing ....................................... 441
Icy road surfaces ........................... 198 Storage location ............................ 441
Limited braking efficiency on sal- Technical data ............................... 443
ted roads ....................................... 196 Emergency Tensioning Devices
Off-road driving .............................. 200 Activation ......................................... 58
Off-road fording ............................. 198 Emergency unlocking
Snow chains .................................. 409 Tailgate ............................................ 95
Symmetrical low beam .................. 128 Emissions control
Tire ruts ......................................... 202
Service and warranty information .... 25
Towing a trailer .............................. 265
Engine
Traveling uphill ............................... 202
Check Engine warning lamp ........... 335
Wet road surface ........................... 196
Display message ............................ 308
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)
ECO start/stop function ................ 171
Display message ............................ 314
Engine number ............................... 447
Function/notes ............................. 258
Irregular running ............................ 175
DVD video
Jump-starting ................................. 397
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 281 Starting problems .......................... 175
Starting the engine with the
E SmartKey ....................................... 170
EASY-ENTRY feature Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 170
Activating/deactivating ................. 287 Switching off .................................. 191
Function/notes ............................. 121 Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 402
EASY-EXIT feature Engine electronics
Crash-responsive ........................... 122 Problem (malfunction) ................... 175
Function/notes ............................. 121 Engine jump starting
Switching on/off ........................... 287 see Jump starting (engine)
Engine oil
Adding ........................................... 374
Additives ........................................ 452
 Index 11

Checking the oil level ..................... 373 F

Checking the oil level using the
dipstick .......................................... 373 Filler cap
Display message ............................ 310 see Fuel filler flap
Filling capacity ............................... 451 Flat tire
Notes about oil grades ................... 451 MOExtended tires .......................... 389
Notes on oil level/consumption .... 373 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 389
Temperature (on-board com- TIREFIT kit ...................................... 390
puter) ............................................. 289 see Emergency spare wheel
Viscosity ........................................ 452 Floormats ........................................... 369
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Folding the rear bench seat for-
gram) wards/back ....................................... 346
AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 289 Fording
Characteristics ................................. 74 Off-road ......................................... 198
Deactivating/activating ................... 74 On flooded roads ........................... 198
Display message ............................ 293 Fuel
ETS/4ETS ........................................ 73 Additives ........................................ 449
Function/notes ................................ 73 Consumption statistics .................. 277
General notes .................................. 73 Displaying the current consump-
Important safety information ........... 73 tion ................................................ 278
Trailer stabilization ........................... 75 Displaying the range ...................... 278
Warning lamp ................................. 331 Driving tips .................................... 194
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys- Fuel gauge ....................................... 35
tem) ...................................................... 73 Grade (gasoline) ............................ 448
Exhaust check ................................... 194 Important safety notes .................. 448
Exhaust pipe (cleaning instruc- Low outside temperatures ............. 450
tions) .................................................. 382 Premium-grade unleaded gaso-
Exterior lighting line ................................................. 448
see Lights Problem (malfunction) ................... 188
Exterior mirrors Quality (diesel) ............................... 449
Refueling ........................................ 185
Adjusting ....................................... 122
Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 448
Dipping (automatic) ....................... 123
Fuel filler flap
Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 123
Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 123 Opening ......................................... 187
Folding in when locking (on-board Fuel filter (display message) ............ 311
computer) ...................................... 288 Fuel level
Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 123 Calling up the range (on-board
Setting ........................................... 123 computer) ...................................... 278
Storing settings (memory func- Fuel tank
tion) ............................................... 124 Capacity ........................................ 448
Storing the parking position .......... 124 Problem (malfunction) ................... 188
Eyeglasses compartment ................. 344 Fuses
Allocation chart ............................. 402
Before changing ............................. 402
Dashboard fuse box ....................... 403
Fuse box in the engine compart-
ment .............................................. 403
12 Index

Fuse box under rear bench seat .... 404 Hood

Important safety notes .................. 402 Closing ........................................... 373
Display message ............................ 324
G Important safety notes .................. 372
Opening ......................................... 372
Garage door opener
Horn ...................................................... 34
Clearing the memory ..................... 368
Hydroplaning ..................................... 198
General notes ................................ 365
Important safety notes .................. 366
Opening/closing the garage door .. 368 I
Programming (button in the rear- Ignition lock
view mirror) ................................... 366 see Key positions
Gear indicator (on-board com- Immobilizer .......................................... 78
puter) .................................................. 289 Indicator lamps
Genuine parts ...................................... 24 see Warning and indicator lamps
Glove box ........................................... 343 Indicators
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (defini- see Turn signals
tion) .................................................... 427 Insect protection on the radiator .... 373
Inspection
H see ASSYST PLUS
Handbrake Instrument cluster
see Parking brake Overview .......................................... 35
Hazard warning lamps ...................... 132 Warning and indicator lamps ........... 36
Headlamps Instrument cluster lighting .............. 274
Fogging up ..................................... 135 Interior lighting
see Automatic headlamp mode Automatic control .......................... 136
Head restraints Delayed switch-off (on-board
Adjusting ....................................... 108 computer) ...................................... 287
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 109 Emergency lighting ........................ 137
Adjusting (manually) ...................... 109 Manual control ............................... 136
Adjusting (rear) .............................. 110 Overview ........................................ 135
Installing/removing (rear) .............. 110 Reading lamp ................................. 135
Luxury ............................................ 109 Setting the brightness of the
Heating ambient lighting (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 286
see Climate control
Setting the color of the ambient
High-beam headlamps
lighting (on-board computer) ......... 286
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 134
Changing bulbs .............................. 139
J
Display message ............................ 306
Switching on/off ........................... 132 Jack
Hill start assist .................................. 171 Storage location ............................ 388
HOLD function Using ............................................. 431
Deactivating ................................... 219 Jump starting (engine) ...................... 397
Display message ............................ 315
Function/notes ............................. 218
 Index 13

K Active light function ....................... 133

Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 134
KEYLESS-GO Automatic headlamp mode ............ 128
Convenience closing feature ............ 98 Cornering light function ................. 133
Display message ............................ 326 Driving abroad ............................... 128
Locking ............................................ 83 Hazard warning lamps ................... 132
Removing the Start/Stop button ... 169 High beam flasher .......................... 132
Start/Stop button .......................... 167 High-beam headlamps ................... 132
Starting the engine ........................ 170 Light switch ................................... 128
Unlocking ......................................... 83 Low-beam headlamps .................... 129
Key positions Parking lamps ................................ 130
KEYLESS-GO .................................. 167 Rear fog lamp ................................ 130
SmartKey ....................................... 167 Setting the brightness of the
Kickdown ambient lighting (on-board com-
Driving tips .................................... 179 puter) ............................................. 286
Manual drive program .................... 183 Setting the color of the ambient
Knee bag .............................................. 52 lighting (on-board computer) ......... 286
Standing lamps .............................. 131
L Switching the daytime running
Lamps lamps on/off (on-board com-
see Warning and indicator lamps puter) ............................................. 285
Lane Keeping Assist Switching the exterior lighting
delayed switch-off on/off (on-
Activating/deactivating ................. 284
board computer) ............................ 286
Display message ............................ 315
Switching the surround lighting
Function/information .................... 247
on/off (on-board computer) .......... 286
see Active Lane Keeping Assist
Turn signals ................................... 131
Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 290
see Interior lighting
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
see Replacing bulbs
anchors ................................................ 63
Light sensor (display message) ....... 308
Level control (display message) ...... 312
Loading guidelines ............................ 342
Level control (vehicles with AIR-
Locking
MATIC package)
see Central locking
Basic settings ................................ 222
Locking (doors)
Function/notes ............................. 221
Automatic ........................................ 90
Important safety notes .................. 221
Level control (vehicles with the Emergency locking ........................... 90
From inside (central locking but-
ON&OFFROAD package)
ton) .................................................. 89
Basic settings ................................ 215
Locking centrally
Function/notes ............................. 214
see Central locking
Important safety notes .................. 214
Locking verification signal (on-
License plate lamp (display mes-
board computer) ............................... 287
sage) ................................................... 306
Low-beam headlamps
Light function, active
Changing bulbs .............................. 138
Display message ............................ 307
Display message ............................ 305
Lights
Activating/deactivating the inte-
rior lighting delayed switch-off ....... 287
14 Index

Setting for driving abroad (sym- Memory function ............................... 124

metrical) ........................................ 128 Message memory (on-board com-
Switching on/off ........................... 129 puter) .................................................. 292
LOW RANGE Mirrors
Display message ............................ 314 see Exterior mirrors
Off-road gear ................................. 261 see Rear-view mirror
LOW RANGE off-road gear ................ 261 see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)
Lumbar support Mobile phone
Adjusting (on the seat) .................. 116 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 281
Luxury head restraints ..................... 109 Modifying the programming
(SmartKey) ........................................... 83
M MOExtended tires .............................. 389
Mounting wheels
M+S tires ............................................ 408
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 434
Malfunction message
Mounting a new wheel ................... 433
see Display messages
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 430
Matte finish (cleaning instruc-
Raising the vehicle ......................... 431
tions) .................................................. 380
Removing a wheel .......................... 433
mbrace
Securing the vehicle against roll-
Call priority .................................... 361 ing away ........................................ 430
Display message ............................ 299 MP3
Downloading destinations
Operation ....................................... 281
(COMAND) ..................................... 361
see separate operating instructions
Downloading routes ....................... 364
Multifunction display
Emergency call .............................. 358
Function/notes ............................. 276
General notes ................................ 357
Permanent display ......................... 285
Geo fencing ................................... 365
Multifunction steering wheel
Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 363
Operating the on-board computer .. 275
MB info call button ........................ 360
Overview .......................................... 37
Remote vehicle locking .................. 363
Roadside Assistance button .......... 359
Search & Send ............................... 362 N
Self-test ......................................... 358 Navigation
Speed alert .................................... 365 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 279
System .......................................... 358 see separate operating instructions
Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 365 Night View Assist Plus
Vehicle remote malfunction diag- Activating/deactivating ................. 243
nosis .............................................. 364 Cleaning ......................................... 383
Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 363 Problem (malfunction) ................... 245
Mechanical key Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-
Function/notes ................................ 84 cle ....................................................... 166
Inserting .......................................... 85
Locking vehicle ................................ 90 O
Removing ......................................... 84
Unlocking the driver's door .............. 90 Occupant Classification System
Media Interface (OCS)
see Separate operating instructions Conditions ....................................... 53
Memory card (audio) ......................... 281 Faults ............................................... 57
 Index 15

Operation ......................................... 54 On-board computer

System self-test ............................... 56 AMG menu ..................................... 289
Occupant safety Assistance menu ........................... 283
Automatic measures after an acci- Audio menu ................................... 280
dent ................................................. 60 Convenience submenu .................. 287
Children in the vehicle ..................... 61 Displaying a service message ........ 377
Important safety notes .................... 45 Display messages .......................... 292
Pets in the vehicle ........................... 67 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 213
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu- Factory settings submenu ............. 289
pant protection) ............................... 60 Important safety notes .................. 274
OCS Instrument cluster submenu .......... 285
Conditions ....................................... 53 Lighting submenu .......................... 285
Faults ............................................... 57 Menu overview .............................. 277
Operation ......................................... 54 Message memory .......................... 292
System self-test ............................... 56 Navigation menu ............................ 279
Odometer ........................................... 277 On and Offroad menu .................... 289
Off-road driving Operation ....................................... 275
Approach/departure angle ............ 457 RACETIMER ................................... 290
Checklist after driving off-road ...... 201 Service menu ................................. 284
Checklist before driving off-road .... 200 Settings menu ............................... 285
Fording depth ................................ 456 Standard display ............................ 277
General information ....................... 200 Telephone menu ............................ 281
Important safety notes .................. 199 Trip menu ...................................... 277
Maximum gradient climbing abil- Vehicle submenu ........................... 287
ity .................................................. 457 Video DVD operation ..................... 281
Traveling uphill ............................... 202 On-road programs
Off-road programs (vehicles with AUTO program ............................... 255
the ON&OFFROAD package) Function/notes ............................. 255
Displays in the COMAND display ... 263 Snow program ............................... 256
Function/notes ............................. 259 SPORT program ............................. 256
Off-road program 1 ........................ 260 Trailer program .............................. 257
Off-road program 2 ........................ 260 Opening and closing the side trim
Off-road system panels ................................................. 139
4MATIC .......................................... 257 Operating safety
DSR ............................................... 258 Declaration of conformity ................ 28
LOW RANGE off-road gear ............. 261 Important safety notes .................... 27
Off-road 4ETS .................................. 73 Operating system
Off-road ABS .................................... 69 see On-board computer
Off-road ESP® .................................. 75 Operator's Manual
Off-road programs (vehicles with Vehicle equipment ........................... 25
the ON&OFFROAD package) .......... 259 Outside temperature display ........... 275
Oil Overhead control panel ...................... 41
see Engine oil Override feature
On and Offroad menu (on-board Rear side windows ........................... 67
computer) .......................................... 289
16 Index

P Power closing feature ......................... 90

Power washers .................................. 379
Paint code number ............................ 446
Power windows
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 379
see Side windows
Panic alarm .......................................... 44
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant
Panorama roof with power tilt/
protection)
sliding panel
Display message ............................ 299
Important safety notes .................... 99
Operation ......................................... 60
Opening/closing ............................ 101
PRE-SAFE® Brake
Opening/closing the roller sun-
Activating/deactivating ................. 284
blind ............................................... 102
Display message ............................ 301
Problem (malfunction) ................... 103
Function/notes ................................ 76
Resetting ....................................... 102
Warning lamp ................................. 338
Parking
Program selector button .................. 180
Important safety notes .................. 190
Protection of the environment
Parking brake ................................ 192
Position of exterior mirror, front- General notes .................................. 24
passenger side ............................... 124 Pulling away
Rear view camera .......................... 232 Trailer ............................................ 171
see PARKTRONIC Pulling away (automatic transmis-
Parking aid sion) .................................................... 170
Active Parking Assist ..................... 228
see Exterior mirrors Q
see PARKTRONIC Qualified specialist workshop ........... 29
Parking assistance
see PARKTRONIC R
Parking brake
Display message ............................ 296 RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 290
Electric parking brake .................... 192 Radar sensor system
Warning lamp ................................. 334 Activating/deactivating ................. 287
Parking lamps Display message ............................ 315
Switching on/off ........................... 130 Radiator cover ................................... 373
PARKTRONIC Radio
Deactivating/activating ................. 227 Selecting a station ......................... 280
Driving system ............................... 225 see separate operating instructions
Function/notes ............................. 225 Radio-controlled devices (instal-
Important safety notes .................. 225 ling) ..................................................... 369
Problem (malfunction) ................... 228 Radio-wave reception/transmis-
Range of the sensors ..................... 225 sion in the vehicle
Trailer towing ................................. 227 Declaration of conformity ................ 28
Warning display ............................. 226 Reading lamp ..................................... 135
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF Rear compartment
Indicator lamp .................................. 45 Exit/entry position (3rd row of
Problems (malfunction) .................. 303 seats) ............................................. 112
Pets in the vehicle ............................... 67 Setting the air vents ...................... 163
Plastic trim (cleaning instruc- Rear fog lamp
tions) .................................................. 384 Switching on/off ........................... 130
 Index 17

Rear seats Reversing feature

Adjusting ....................................... 111 Panorama sliding sunroof .............. 100
Display message ............................ 324 Roller sunblinds ............................. 101
Rear view camera Side windows ................................... 95
Cleaning instructions ..................... 382 Sliding sunroof ............................... 100
Function/notes ............................. 232 Tailgate ............................................ 91
Switching on/off ........................... 233 Reversing lamps (display mes-
Rear-view mirror sage) ................................................... 307
Anti-glare (manual) ........................ 122 Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 26
Dipping (automatic) ....................... 123 Roller sunblind
Rear window defroster Panorama roof with power tilt/
Problem (malfunction) ................... 161 sliding panel .................................. 101
Switching on/off ........................... 160 Rear side windows ......................... 353
Rear window wiper Roof carrier ........................................ 350
Replacing the wiper blade .............. 142 Roof lining and carpets (cleaning
Switching on/off ........................... 141 guidelines) ......................................... 385
Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys- Roof load (maximum) ........................ 455
tem) Route (navigation)
Important safety notes .................. 454 see Route guidance (navigation)
Refueling Route guidance (navigation) ............ 279
Fuel gauge ....................................... 35
Important safety notes .................. 185 S
Refueling process .......................... 186
see Fuel Safety
Remote control Children in the vehicle ..................... 61
Programming (garage door Child restraint systems .................... 62
opener) .......................................... 366 Occupant Classification System
Replacing bulbs (OCS) ............................................... 53
Important safety notes .................. 137 Safety system
Overview of bulb types .................. 138 see Driving safety systems
Removing/replacing the cover Seat belts
(front wheel arch) .......................... 138 Adjusting the driver's and front-
Reporting safety defects .................... 29 passenger seat belt ......................... 49
Reserve (fuel tank) Adjusting the height ......................... 48
see Fuel Cleaning ......................................... 385
Reserve fuel Correct usage .................................. 47
Fastening ......................................... 48
Display message ............................ 310
Important safety guidelines ............. 46
Warning lamp ................................. 335
Introduction ..................................... 46
see Fuel
Releasing ......................................... 49
Residual heat (climate control) ........ 161
Switching belt adjustment on/off
Restraint system
(on-board computer) ...................... 288
Display message ............................ 301
Warning lamp ................................. 327
Introduction ..................................... 44
Warning lamp (function) ................... 49
Warning lamp ................................. 334
Seats
Warning lamp (function) ................... 45
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 108
Adjusting the head restraint .......... 108
Cleaning the cover ......................... 384
18 Index

Correct driver's seat position ........ 106 Hinged side windows ....................... 96
Entry position (3rd row of seats) .... 113 Important safety information ........... 95
Exit position (3rd row of seats) ...... 114 Opening/closing .............................. 96
Folding down/up (third row of Overview .......................................... 95
seats) ............................................. 111 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 99
Folding the 2nd row of seats Resetting ......................................... 98
forward electrically ........................ 115 Sliding sunroof
Folding the 2nd row of seats Important safety notes .................... 99
forward manually ........................... 112 Opening/closing ............................ 100
Folding the rear bench seat for- Problem (malfunction) ................... 103
wards/back ................................... 346 Resetting ....................................... 100
Important safety notes .................. 107 see Panorama roof with power
Overview ........................................ 107 tilt/sliding panel
Seat heating problem .................... 118 SmartKey
Seat ventilation problem ................ 119 Changing the battery ....................... 85
Storing settings (memory func- Changing the programming ............. 83
tion) ............................................... 124 Checking the battery ....................... 85
Switching seat heating on/off ....... 116 Convenience closing feature ............ 98
Switching seat ventilation on/off .. 118 Convenience opening feature .......... 97
Selector lever Display message ............................ 325
Cleaning ......................................... 384 Door central locking/unlocking ....... 82
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 381 Important safety notes .................... 82
Service menu (on-board com- Loss ................................................. 87
puter) .................................................. 284 Mechanical key ................................ 84
Service products Overview .......................................... 82
Brake fluid ..................................... 452 Positions (ignition lock) ................. 167
Coolant (engine) ............................ 452 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 87
DEF special additives ..................... 450 Starting the engine ........................ 170
Engine oil ....................................... 451 Snow chains
Fuel ................................................ 448 Information .................................... 409
Important safety notes .................. 447 Snow drive program ....................... 256
Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys- Sockets
tem) ............................................... 454 Center console .............................. 355
Washer fluid ................................... 453 General notes ................................ 354
Settings Luggage compartment ................... 355
Factory (on-board computer) ......... 289 Rear compartment ......................... 355
On-board computer ....................... 285 Specialist workshop ............................ 29
Setting the air distribution ............... 158 Special seat belt retractor .................. 61
Setting the airflow ............................ 158 Speed, controlling
SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 289 see Cruise control
Side impact air bag ............................. 52 Speedometer
Side marker lamp (display mes- Digital ............................................ 278
sage) ................................................... 307 In the Instrument cluster ................. 35
Side windows Segments ...................................... 275
Cleaning ......................................... 381 Selecting the unit of measure-
Convenience closing feature ............ 97 ment .............................................. 285
Convenience opening feature .......... 97 see Instrument cluster
 Index 19

Standing lamps T
Display message ............................ 307
Switching on/off ........................... 131 Tachometer ........................................ 275
Start/stop function Tailgate
see ECO start/stop function Display message ............................ 324
Starting (engine) ................................ 169 Emergency unlocking ....................... 95
STEER CONTROL .................................. 77 Important safety notes .................... 91
Limiting the opening angle ............... 94
Steering (display message) .............. 325
Opening/closing (automatically
Steering wheel
from inside) ...................................... 94
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 120
Opening/closing (automatically
Adjusting (manually) ...................... 119
from outside) ................................... 92
Button overview ............................... 37
Opening/closing (from outside) ....... 92
Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 275
Opening dimensions ...................... 455
Cleaning ......................................... 384
Power closing .................................. 90
Important safety notes .................. 119
Tail lamps
Paddle shifters ............................... 180
Display message ............................ 306
Steering wheel heating .................. 120
Tank
Storing settings (memory func-
see Fuel tank
tion) ............................................... 124
Tank content
Steering wheel heating
Fuel gauge ....................................... 35
Problem (malfunction) ................... 121
Technical data
Switching on/off ........................... 120
Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 180 Capacities ...................................... 447
Emergency spare wheel ................. 443
Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 290
Information .................................... 446
Stowage areas ................................... 342
Tires/wheels ................................. 434
Stowage compartments
Trailer loads ................................... 459
Armrest (under) ............................. 344 Vehicle data ................................... 455
Center console .............................. 344 TELEAID
Center console (rear) ..................... 344
Call priority .................................... 361
Cup holders ................................... 350
Downloading destinations
Eyeglasses compartment ............... 344
(COMAND) ..................................... 361
Glove box ....................................... 343
Downloading routes ....................... 364
Important safety information ......... 343
Emergency call .............................. 358
Stowage net ................................... 345
General notes ................................ 357
Stowage net ....................................... 345
Geo fencing ................................... 365
Summer tires ..................................... 408 Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 363
Sun visor ............................................ 352 MB info call button ........................ 360
Surround lighting (on-board com- Remote vehicle locking .................. 363
puter) .................................................. 286 Roadside Assistance button .......... 359
Suspension tuning Search & Send ............................... 362
AMG adaptive sport suspension Self-test ......................................... 358
system ........................................... 224 Speed alert .................................... 365
SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 289 System .......................................... 358
SUV Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 365
(Sport Utility Vehicle) ....................... 27 Vehicle remote malfunction diag-
Switching air-recirculation mode nosis .............................................. 364
on/off ................................................. 161 Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 363
20 Index

Telephone Tires
Accepting a call ............................. 282 Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 428
Display message ............................ 325 Average weight of the vehicle
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 281 occupants (definition) .................... 427
Number from the phone book ........ 282 Bar (definition) ............................... 426
Redialing ........................................ 282 Changing a wheel .......................... 429
Rejecting/ending a call ................. 282 Characteristics .............................. 426
Temperature Checking ........................................ 407
Coolant .......................................... 274 Curb weight (definition) ................. 428
Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 289 Definition of terms ......................... 426
Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 289 Direction of rotation ...................... 429
Outside temperature ...................... 275 Display message ............................ 320
Setting (climate control) ................ 157 Distribution of the vehicle occu-
Theft deterrent systems pants (definition) ............................ 429
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 78 DOT, Tire Identification Number
Immobilizer ...................................... 78 (TIN) ............................................... 426
Through-loading ................................ 345 DOT (Department of Transporta-
Time tion) (definition) ............................. 427
see separate operating instructions GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 290 (definition) ..................................... 427
TIREFIT kit .......................................... 390 GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (defi-
Tire pressure nition) ............................................ 427
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 414 GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-
Checking manually ........................ 413 inition) ........................................... 427
Display message ............................ 320 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
Important safety notes .................. 414 ing) (definition) .............................. 427
Maximum ....................................... 412 Important safety notes .................. 406
Notes ............................................. 411 Increased vehicle weight due to
Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 392 optional equipment (definition) ...... 427
Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 392 Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 427
Recommended ............................... 410 Labeling (overview) ........................ 423
Tire pressure loss warning sys- Load bearing index (definition) ...... 428
tem Load index ..................................... 425
General notes ................................ 413 Load index (definition) ................... 427
Important safety notes .................. 413 M+S tires ....................................... 408
Restarting ...................................... 414 Maximum loaded vehicle weight
Tire pressure monitor (definition) ..................................... 427
Checking the tire pressure elec- Maximum load on a tire (defini-
tronically ........................................ 416 tion) ............................................... 428
Function/notes ............................. 414 Maximum permissible tire pres-
General notes ................................ 414 sure (definition) ............................. 428
Important safety notes .................. 415 Maximum tire load ......................... 425
Radio type approval for the tire Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 428
pressure monitor ........................... 417 MOExtended tires .......................... 408
Restarting ...................................... 417 Optional equipment weight (defi-
Warning lamp ................................. 339 nition) ............................................ 428
Warning message .......................... 416 PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-
inition) ........................................... 428
 Index 21

Replacing ....................................... 429 Power supply ................................. 271

Service life ..................................... 408 Pulling away with a trailer .............. 171
Sidewall (definition) ....................... 428 Removing the ball coupling ............ 270
Speed rating (definition) ................ 427 Storing the ball coupling ................ 270
Storing ........................................... 430 Trailer drive program ..................... 257
Structure and characteristics Trailer loads ................................... 459
(definition) ..................................... 426 Towing away
Temperature .................................. 422 Important safety guidelines ........... 399
TIN (Tire Identification Number) Installing the towing eye ................ 400
(definition) ..................................... 428 Removing the towing eye ............... 401
Tire bead (definition) ...................... 428 With both axles on the ground ....... 401
Tire pressure (definition) ................ 428 With the rear axle raised ................ 401
Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 427 Tow-starting
Tire size (data) ............................... 434 Emergency engine starting ............ 402
Tire size designation, load-bearing Important safety notes .................. 399
capacity, speed rating .................... 423 Trailer coupling
Tire tread ....................................... 407 see Towing a trailer
Tire tread (definition) ..................... 428 Trailer loads and drawbar nose-
Total load limit (definition) ............. 429 weights ............................................... 270
Traction ......................................... 422 Trailer towing
Traction (definition) ....................... 428 Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 252
Tread wear ..................................... 422 Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 255
TWR (permissible trailer drawbar Blind Spot Assist ............................ 247
noseweight) (definition) ................. 428 PARKTRONIC ................................. 227
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Permissible trailer loads and
Standards ...................................... 421 drawbar noseweights ..................... 270
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Transfer case ..................................... 185
Standards (definition) .................... 427 Transmission
Wear indicator (definition) ............. 429 see Automatic transmission
Wheel and tire combination ........... 436 Transmission position display ......... 176
Wheel rim (definition) .................... 427 Transmission position display
see Flat tire (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 176
Tool Transporting the vehicle .................. 401
see Vehicle tool kit Traveling uphill
Top Tether ............................................ 64
Brow of hill ..................................... 203
Towing a trailer Driving downhill ............................. 203
Active Parking Assist ..................... 232 Maximum gradient-climbing capa-
Axle load, permissible .................... 459 bility ............................................... 203
Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 382 Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-
Coupling up a trailer ...................... 267 tions) .................................................. 384
Decoupling a trailer ....................... 269 Trip computer (on-board com-
Driving tips .................................... 265 puter) .................................................. 277
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Trip odometer
gram) ............................................... 75
Calling up ....................................... 277
Important safety notes .................. 264
Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 278
Installing the ball coupling ............. 266
Trunk
Mounting dimensions .................... 458
see Tailgate
22 Index

Turn signals Vehicle dimensions ........................... 455

Display message ............................ 305 Vehicle emergency locking ................ 90
Switching on/off ........................... 131 Vehicle identification number
TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) (defi- see VIN
nition) ................................................. 428 Vehicle identification plate .............. 446
Type identification plate Vehicle level
see Vehicle identification plate AMG adaptive sport suspension
system ........................................... 224
U Vehicle level (display message) ....... 312
Unlocking Vehicle maintenance
Emergency unlocking ....................... 90 see ASSYST PLUS
From inside the vehicle (central Vehicle tool kit .................................. 388
unlocking button) ............................. 89 Video
Operating the DVD ......................... 281
V VIN ...................................................... 446

Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 352 W

Vehicle
Correct use ...................................... 29 Warning and indicator lamps
Data acquisition ............................... 30 ABS ................................................ 329
Display message ............................ 323 Brakes ........................................... 328
Equipment ....................................... 25 Check Engine ................................. 335
Individual settings .......................... 285 Coolant .......................................... 336
Limited Warranty ............................. 30 Distance warning ........................... 338
Loading .......................................... 418 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 338
Locking (in an emergency) ............... 90 ESP® .............................................. 331
Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 82 ESP® OFF ....................................... 332
Lowering ........................................ 434 Overview .......................................... 36
Maintenance .................................... 26 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ............... 45
Parking for a long period ................ 193 Reserve fuel ................................... 335
Pulling away ................................... 170 Restraint system ............................ 334
Raising ........................................... 431 Seat belt ........................................ 327
Reporting problems ......................... 29 Tire pressure monitor .................... 339
Securing from rolling away ............ 430 Warranty .............................................. 25
Towing away .................................. 399 Washer fluid
Transporting .................................. 401 Display message ............................ 325
Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 90 Wheel and tire combination
Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 82 see Tires
Vehicle data ................................... 455 Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 434
Vehicle battery Wheel chock ...................................... 430
see Battery (vehicle) Wheels
Vehicle data ....................................... 455 Changing a wheel .......................... 429
Vehicle data (off-road driving) Checking ........................................ 407
Approach/departure angle ............ 457 Cleaning ......................................... 380
Fording depth ................................ 456 Cleaning (warning) ......................... 430
Maximum gradient climbing abil- Emergency spare wheel ................. 440
ity .................................................. 457 Important safety notes .................. 406
 Index 23

Interchanging/changing ................ 429 Z

Mounting a new wheel ................... 433
Mounting a wheel .......................... 430 ZONE function
Overview ........................................ 406 Switching on/off ........................... 159
Removing a wheel .......................... 433
Storing ........................................... 430
Tightening torque ........................... 434
Wheel size/tire size ....................... 434
Window curtain air bag
Display message ............................ 302
Operation ......................................... 53
Windows
see Side windows
Windshield
Defrosting ...................................... 159
Infrared reflective .......................... 369
Windshield washer fluid
see Windshield washer system
Windshield washer system
Adding washer fluid ....................... 376
Notes ............................................. 453
Windshield wipers
Problem (malfunction) ................... 143
Rear window wiper ........................ 141
Replacing the wiper blades ............ 141
Switching on/off ........................... 140
Winter driving
Slippery road surfaces ................... 198
Snow chains .................................. 409
Winter operation
General notes ................................ 408
Overview ........................................ 408
Radiator cover ............................... 373
Snow drive program ....................... 256
Winter tires
M+S tires ....................................... 408
Wiper blades
Cleaning ......................................... 381
Important safety notes .................. 141
Replacing ....................................... 141
Replacing (rear window) ................ 142
Replacing (windshield) ................... 141
Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 384
Workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
24 Introduction

Protection of the environment Rchange gear in good time and use each gear
only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
General notes
Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.
H Environmental note Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-
Daimler's declared policy is one of compre- tion.
hensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources
that form the basis of our existence on this Environmental concerns and recom-
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner mendations
that takes the requirements of both nature Wherever the operating instructions require
and humanity into account. you to dispose of materials, first try to regen-
You too can help to protect the environment erate or re-use them. Observe the relevant
by operating your vehicle in an environmen- environmental rules and regulations when
tally responsible manner. disposing of materials. In this way you will
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, help to protect the environment.
transmission, brake and tire wear are affected
by these factors:
Roperating conditions of your vehicle Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
Ryour personal driving style
H Environmental note
You can influence both factors. You should
bear the following in mind: Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major
assemblies and parts which are of the same
Operating conditions:
quality as new parts. They are covered by the
Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con- same Limited Warranty entitlements as new
sumption. parts.
Ralways make sure that the tire pressures
are correct. ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.
ces, as well as control units and sensors for
these restraint systems, may be installed in
Rremove roof racks once you no longer need
the following areas of your vehicle:
them.
Rdoors
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute
to environmental protection. You should Rdoor pillars
therefore adhere to the service intervals. Rdoor sills
Ralways have service work carried out at a Rseats
qualified specialist workshop. Rcockpit
Personal driving style: Rinstrument cluster
Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when Rcenter console
starting the engine. Do not install accessories such as audio
Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle systems in these areas. Do not carry out
is stationary. repairs or welding. You could impair the
Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance operating efficiency of the restraint sys-
from the vehicle in front. tems.
Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and Have aftermarket accessories installed at a
braking. qualified specialist workshop.
 Introduction 25

You could jeopardize the operating safety of The Operator's Manual and Maintenance
your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels Booklet are important documents and should
as well as accessories relevant to safety be kept in the vehicle.
which have not been approved by Mercedes.
This could lead to malfunctions in safety-rel-
evant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use Service and vehicle operation
only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of
equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and Warranty
accessories that have been specifically The implied warranty for your vehicle applies
approved for your vehicle. in accordance with the warranty terms and
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to conditions in the Service and Warranty Infor-
strict quality control. Every part has been spe- mation booklet.
cifically developed, manufactured or selected Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. replace and repair all factory-installed parts in
Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should accordance with the following warranty terms
therefore be used. and conditions:
More than 300,000 different genuine RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
Mercedes-Benz parts are available for REmission System Warranty
Mercedes-Benz models.
REmission Performance Warranty
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers main-
RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-
tain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
for necessary service and repair work. In addi- setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode
tion, strategically located parts delivery cen- Island and Vermont Emission Control Sys-
ters provide quick and reliable parts service. tem Warranty
RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon
Always specify the vehicle identification num-
ber (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes- laws)
Benz parts (Y page 446). Replacement parts and accessories are cov-
ered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Acces-
sories warranties. These are available at any
Operator's Manual authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Vehicle equipment i Should you lose your Service and War-

ranty Information booklet, have an author-
This Operator's Manual describes all models ized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a
and all standard and optional equipment of replacement. The new Service and War-
your vehicle available at the time of going to ranty Information booklet will be posted to
print. Country-specific differences are possi- you.
ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions. The equipment in your vehicle may
therefore differ from that shown in the
descriptions and illustrations.
The original purchase agreement lists all sys-
tems installed in your vehicle.
Should you have any questions concerning
equipment and operation, please consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Z
26 Introduction

Information for customers in Califor- Maintenance

nia
The Service and Warranty Booklet describes
Under California law you may be entitled to a all the necessary maintenance work which
replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the should be done at regular intervals.
purchase price or lease price, if after a rea- Always have the Service and Warranty Book-
sonable number of repair attempts let with you when you bring the vehicle to an
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its author- authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The ser-
ized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or vice advisor will record every service for you
more substantial defects or malfunctions in in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
the vehicle that are covered by its express
warranty. During the period of 18 months
from original delivery of the vehicle or the Roadside Assistance
accumulation of 18,000 miles (approximately
29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
whichever occurs first, a reasonable number Program offers technical help in the event of a
of repair attempts is presumed for a retail breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside
buyer or lessee if one or more of the following Assistance Hotline are answered by our
occurs: agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunc- (USA)
tion results in a condition that is likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury if the 1-800-387-0100 (Canada)
vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunc- For additional information, refer to the
tion has been subject to repair two or Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-
more times, and you have directly noti- gram brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assis-
fied Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing tance" section in the Service and Warranty
of the need for its repair, booklet (Canada). You will find both in your
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunc- vehicle literature portfolio.
tion of a less serious nature than cate-
gory (1) has been subject to repair four or
more times and you have directly notified Change of address or change of own-
us in writing of the need for its repair, or ership
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of In the event of a change of address, please
repair of the same or different substantial send us the "Notification of Address Change"
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative in the Service and Guarantee booklet or sim-
total of more than 30 calendar days. ply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-
tance Center (USA) at the hotline number
Please send your written notice to:
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Service Center (Canada) at
Customer Assistance Center 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in con-
One Mercedes Drive tacting you in a timely manner should the
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the
entire literature in the vehicle so that it is
available to the next owner.
If you have purchased a used car, please send
us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in
 Introduction 27

the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road
call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance conditions. There is a risk of an accident.
Center (USA) at the hotline number Always adapt your speed and driving style to
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or the vehicle's driving characteristics and to the
Customer Service (Canada) at prevailing road and weather conditions.
1-800-387-0100.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll-
over rate than other types of vehicles.
Vehicle operation outside the USA Failure to operate this vehicle safely may
and Canada result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign and severe or fatal injury.
countries, please be aware that: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is sig-
Rservice facilities or replacement parts may nificantly more likely to die than a person
not be readily available. wearing a seat belt.
Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic You and all vehicle occupants should always
converter may not be available. Leaded fuel wear your seat belts.
may cause damage to the catalytic con-
verter.
Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower
Operating safety
octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause Important safety notes
engine damage.
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available G WARNING
for delivery in Europe through our European If you do not have the prescribed service/
Delivery Program. For details, consult an maintenance work or any required repairs
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to carried out, this can result in malfunctions or
one of the following addresses. system failures. There is a risk of an accident.
In the USA Always have the prescribed service/mainte-
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC nance work as well as any required repairs
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive G WARNING
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 If you switch off the ignition while driving,
In Canada safety-relevant functions are only available
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
European Delivery Department for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
Sports Utility Vehicle
G WARNING
G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
Due to the high center of gravity, the vehicle twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
may start to skid and roll over in the event of hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk
an abrupt steering maneuver and/or when of fire.

Z
28 Introduction

When driving off road or on unpaved roads, parts of the exhaust system, they can catch
check the vehicle's underside regularly. In fire.
particular, remove parts of plants or other In such situations, have the vehicle
flammable materials which have become checked and repaired immediately at a
trapped. In the case of damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. If on con-
qualified specialist workshop. tinuing your journey you notice that driving
safety is impaired, pull over and stop the
G WARNING vehicle immediately, paying attention to
Modifications to electronic components, their road and traffic conditions. In such cases,
software as well as wiring can impair their visit a qualified specialist workshop.
function and/or the function of other net-
worked components. In particular, systems
relevant to safety could also be affected. As a Declarations of conformity
result, these may no longer function as inten-
Vehicle components which receive
ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
and/or transmit radio waves
the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
accident and injury. USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec- comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Oper-
tronic components or their software. You ation is subject to the following two condi-
should have all work to electrical and elec- tions: 1) These devices may not cause harm-
tronic equipment carried out at a qualified ful interference, and 2) These devices must
specialist workshop. accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired oper-
If you make any changes to the vehicle elec- ation. Changes or modifications not expressly
tronics, the general operating permit is ren- approved by the party responsible for com-
dered invalid. pliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment."
! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high
comply with Industry Canada license-exempt
curb or an unpaved road RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a following two conditions: (1) These devices
curb or a hole in the road may not cause interference, and (2) These
Ra heavy object strikes the undercarriage devices must accept any interference, includ-
or parts of the chassis ing interference that may cause undesired
In situations like this, the body, the under- operation of the device."
carriage, chassis parts, wheels or tires
could be damaged without the damage
being visible. Components damaged in this Diagnostics connection
way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of The diagnostics connection is only intended
an accident, no longer withstand the strain for the connection of diagnostic equipment at
they are designed to. a qualified specialist workshop.
If the underbody paneling is damaged,
combustible materials such as leaves, G WARNING
grass or twigs can gather between the If you connect equipment to the diagnostics
underbody and the underbody paneling. If connection in the vehicle, it may affect the
these materials come in contact with hot operation of the vehicle systems. As a result,
 Introduction 29

the operating safety of the vehicle could be Ralterations,

installation work and modifica-
affected. There is a risk of an accident. tions
Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos- Rwork on electronic components
tics connection in the vehicle.

G WARNING Correct use

Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the If you remove any warning stickers, you or
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. others could fail to recognize certain dangers.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is Leave warning stickers in position.
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Observe the following information when driv-
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are ing your vehicle:
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter Rthe safety notes in this manual
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
Rthe Technical Data section in this manual
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use Rtraffic rules and regulations
loose floormats and do not place floormats on Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to
top of one another. motor vehicles

! If the engine is switched off and equip-

ment on the diagnostics connection is Problems with your vehicle
used, the starter battery may discharge.
If you should experience a problem with your
Connecting equipment to the diagnostics vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
connection can lead to emissions monitoring affect its safe operation, we urge you to con-
information being reset, for example. This tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the immediately to have the problem diagnosed
requirements of the next emissions test dur- and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to
ing the main inspection. your satisfaction, please discuss the problem
again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or con-
tact us at one of the following addresses.
Qualified specialist workshop In the USA
An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a Customer Assistance Center
qualified specialist workshop. It has the nec- Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
essary specialist knowledge, tools and quali-
One Mercedes Drive
fications to correctly carry out the work
required on your vehicle. This is especially the Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
case for work relevant to safety. In Canada
Observe the notes in the Maintenance Book- Customer Relations Department
let. Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
Always have the following work carried out at 98 Vanderhoof Avenue
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center: Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Rwork relevant to safety
Rservice and maintenance work
Reporting safety defects
Rrepair work
USA only:

Z
30 Introduction

The following text is published as required of information about the performance or status
manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. of various systems, including but not limited
Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the to, engine, throttle, steering or brake sys-
"National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act tems, that is stored and can be read out with
of 1966". suitable devices, particularly when the vehi-
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect cle is serviced. The data obtained is used to
which could cause a crash or could cause properly diagnose and service your vehicle or
injury or death, you should immediately to further optimize and develop vehicle func-
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety tions.
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notify-
ing Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may COMAND/mbrace (Canada: TELEAID)
open an investigation, and if it finds that a If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it mbrace, additional data about the vehicle’s
may order a recall and remedy campaign. operation, the use of the vehicle in certain
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in situations, and the location of the vehicle may
individual problems between you, your be compiled through COMAND or the mbrace
dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. system.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle For additional information please refer to the
Safety Hotline toll-free at COMAND User Manual and/or the mbrace
1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go Terms and Conditions.
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,
SW., Washington, DC 20590. Event data recorders
You can also obtain other information about This vehicle is equipped with an event data
motor vehicle safety from recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
http://www.safercar.gov is to record data that will assist in under-
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed
in certain crash or near crash-like situations,
Limited Warranty such as during air bag deployment or when
! Follow the instructions in this manual hitting a road obstacle. The EDR is designed
about the proper operation of your vehicle to record data related to vehicle dynamics
as well as about possible vehicle damage. and safety systems for a short period of time,
Damage to your vehicle that arises from typically 30 seconds or less.
culpable contraventions against these The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
instructions is not covered either by the such data as:
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the Rhow various systems in your vehicle are
New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. operating
Rwhether or not the driver and passenger
seat belts are fastened
Data stored in the vehicle
Rhow far (if at all) the driver is depressing the
Data recording accelerator and/or brake pedal and
Rhow fast the vehicle is traveling
This vehicle is capable of recording diagnostic
information relating to vehicle operation, mal- This data can help provide a better under-
functions, and user settings. This may include standing of the circumstances in which
 Introduction 31

crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is February 2013, 13 states have enacted laws
recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial relating to EDRs.
crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and
no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, Information on copyright
and crash location) are recorded. However,
other parties, such as law enforcement, can General information
combine the EDR data with the type of per- Information on license for free and open-
sonal identification data routinely acquired source software used in your vehicle and its
during a crash investigation. electronic components is available on the fol-
Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is nee- lowing website:
ded to read data that is recorded by an EDR, http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
and special equipment is required. In addition opensource
to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties
that have the special equipment, such as law
enforcement, can read the information by
accessing the vehicle or the EDR.
EDR data may be used in civil and criminal
matters as a tool in accident reconstruction,
accident claims, and vehicle safety. Since the
Crash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to
extract data from the EDR is commercially
available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all lia-
bility arising from the extraction of this infor-
mation by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz per-
sonnel.
MBUSA will not share EDR data with others
without the consent of the vehicle owners or,
if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of
the lessee. Exceptions to this representation
include responses to subpoenas by law
enforcement; by federal, state or local gov-
ernment; in connection with or arising out of
litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries
and affiliates; or, as required by law.
Warning: The EDR is a component of the Sup-
plemental Restraint System ("SRS") Module.
Tampering with, altering, modifying or remov-
ing the EDR component may result in a mal-
function of the SRS Module and other sys-
tems.
State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that
conflict with federal regulation are pre-emp-
ted. This means that in the event of such con-
flict, the federal regulation governs. As of

Z
32
 33

Cockpit ................................................. 34
Instrument cluster .............................. 35
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 37

At a glance
Center console .................................... 38
Overhead control panel ...................... 41
Door control panel .............................. 42
 34 Cockpit

Cockpit
At a glance

Function Page Function Page

: Steering wheel paddle F Adjusts the steering wheel
shifters 180 manually 119
; Combination switch 131 G Adjusts the steering wheel
electrically 119
= Instrument cluster 35
Steering wheel heating 120
? Horn
H Cruise control lever 204
A DIRECT SELECT lever 176
I Opens the hood 372
B PARKTRONIC warning dis-
play 225 J Diagnostics connection 28

C Overhead control panel 41 K Electric parking brake 192

D Climate control systems 146 L Light switch 128

E Ignition lock 167 M Night View Assist Plus 243

Start/Stop button 167
 Instrument cluster 35

Instrument cluster
Displays and controls

At a glance
Function Page Function Page
: Speedometer with seg- ? Coolant temperature 274
ments 275
A Multifunction display 276
; Fuel gage
B Instrument cluster lighting 274
= Tachometer 275
 36 Instrument cluster

Warning and indicator lamps

At a glance

Function Page Function Page

: L Low-beam head- F 6 Restraint system 44
lamps 129
G ü Seat belt 327
; T Parking lamps 130
H % Diesel engine: pre-
= ÷ ESP® 331 glow 170
? K High-beam head- I ? Coolant 336
lamps 132
J R Rear fog lamp 130
A Electric parking brake (red) 334
K ; Check Engine 335
F (USA only)
! (Canada only) L 8 Reserve fuel 335

B ! Electric parking brake M å ESP® OFF 331

(yellow) 334 N ! ABS 329
C · Distance warning 338 O Brakes 328
D #! Turn signals 131 $ (USA only)
E h Tire pressure monitor 339 J (Canada only)
 Multifunction steering wheel 37

Multifunction steering wheel

At a glance
Function Page Function Page
: Multifunction display 276 A =;
; COMAND display; see the Selects a menu 275
separate operating instruc- 9:
tions Selects a submenu or
scrolls through lists 275
= ?
a
Switches on the Voice Con-
To confirm your selection 275
trol System; see the sepa-
rate operating instructions Hiding display messages 292

? ~ B %
Rejects or ends a call 281 Back 275
Exits phone book/redial Switches off the Voice Con-
memory trol System; see the sepa-
rate operating instructions
6
Makes or accepts a call
Switches to the redial mem-
ory
WX
Adjusts the volume
8
Mute
 38 Center console

Center console
Center console, upper section
At a glance

Function Page Function Page

: COMAND; see the separate B £ Hazard warning
operating instructions lamps 132
; c Seat heating 116 C 4 5 PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp 45
= s Seat ventilation 118
D å ESP® 73
? c PARKTRONIC 225
A ¤ ECO start/stop func-
tion 171
 Center console 39

Center console, lower section

At a glance
i Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package Function Page
Function Page J Á Level control 214
F Cup holder 350 K Ã DSR (Downhill Speed
Ashtray 353 Regulation) 258
Cigarette lighter 354 L p Manual drive program 181
Socket 354
M Selector wheel for on-road
G COMAND controller; see programs 255
the separate operating Selector wheel for off-road
instructions programs 259
H d ON&OFFROAD menu N Stowage compartment with
button 263 Media Interface 344
I + LOW RANGE off-road
gear 261
 40
At a glance Center console

i Vehicles without the ON&OFFROAD pack- Function Page

age and AMG vehicles
I Ã DSR (Downhill Speed
Function Page Regulation) 258
F Cup holder 350 J e Adaptive Damping
Ashtray 353 System 220
Cigarette lighter 354 à Adjusts the AMG
Socket 354 adaptive damping system
(AMG vehicles) 224
G COMAND controller; see
the separate operating K Stowage compartment with
instructions Media Interface 344

H Á Level control 221

 Overhead control panel 41

Overhead control panel

At a glance
Function Page Function Page
: p Switches the left- C Eyeglasses compartment 344
hand reading lamp on/off 135
D F Roadside Assistance
; c Switches the front call button (mbrace sys-
interior lighting on 136 tem) 359
= u Switches the rear E G SOS button (mbrace
interior lighting on/off 136 system) 358
? | Switches the front F ï MB Info call button
interior lighting/automatic (mbrace system) 360
interior lighting control off 136
G Rear-view mirror 122
A p Switches the right-
hand reading lamp on/off 135 H Buttons for the garage door
opener 368
B 2 Opens/closes the
sliding sunroof 100 I Microphone for mbrace
(emergency call system),
3 Opens/closes the telephone and Voice Con-
panorama roof with power
trol System1
tilt/sliding panel with roller
sunblinds 101

1 Voice Control System only available in combination with COMAND. Observe the additional operating instruc-
tions.
 42 Door control panel

Door control panel

At a glance

Function Page Function Page

: Opens the door 89 B W Opens/closes the
side windows 96
; % & Unlocks/locks
the vehicle 89 C q Opens/closes the
tailgate 94
= r 45 =
Stores settings for the seat, D ± Opens/closes the
exterior mirrors and steer- hinged power side windows 96
ing wheel (memory func-
tion) 124 E n Activates/deacti-
vates the override feature
? Adjusts the seats 107 for the side windows in the
rear compartment 67
A 7Zö\
Adjusts and folds the exte-
rior mirrors in/out electri-
cally 122
 43

Useful information .............................. 44

Panic alarm .......................................... 44
Occupant safety .................................. 44
Children in the vehicle ........................ 61

Safety
Pets in the vehicle .............................. 67
Driving safety systems ....................... 68
Theft deterrent locking system ......... 78
 44 Occupant safety

Useful information Occupant safety

Restraint system: introduction
i This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional equip- The restraint system reduces the risk of occu-
ment of your vehicle available at the time of pants hitting parts of the vehicle interior in the
publication of the Operator's Manual.
Safety

event of an accident. Furthermore, the

Country-specific differences are possible. restraint system may also reduce the forces
Please note that your vehicle may not be exerted on the vehicle occupants when an
equipped with all features described. This accident occurs.
also applies to safety-related systems and The restraint system includes:
functions.
RSeat belt system
i Read the information on qualified special- RAir bags
ist workshops (Y page 29). RChild restraint system
RChild seat securing system

Panic alarm The components of the restraint system work

in conjunction with each other. They can only
offer the intended level of protection if all
vehicle occupants:
Rare correctly wearing their seat belts.
(Y page 47)
Radjust their seat and head restraint prop-
erly (Y page 107).
The driver is also responsible for ensuring
that the steering wheel has been correctly
positioned. Observe the information relating
to the correct driver's seat position
(Y page 106).
X To activate: press ! button : for at
least one second. Always ensure the air bag can inflate properly
An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting if deployed (Y page 50).
flashes. An air bag supplements a correctly fastened
X To deactivate: press ! button : seat belt and is an additional safety device
again. providing increased protection for vehicle
occupants in appropriate accident situations.
or
For example, if the protection already provi-
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
ded by a correctly fastened seat belt will suf-
or fice, the air bags are not deployed. Further-
X Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button. more, only the air bags that would increase
The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the vehi- the degree of protection afforded to the vehi-
cle. cle occupants in the event of an accident are
deployed. Seat belts and air bags generally do
not protect against objects penetrating the
vehicle from the outside.
Information on the restraint system operation
can be found under "Triggering of belt ten-
sioners and air bags" (Y page 58).
 Occupant safety 45

See “Children in the vehicle” for information G WARNING

on children traveling with you as well as vehi- If restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint
cle restraint systems (Y page 61). system components may be triggered unin-
tentionally or might not be triggered at all in
the event of an accident with a high rate of
Important safety notes

Safety
vehicle deceleration. This can affect the Emer-
G WARNING gency Tensioning Device or air bag, for exam-
ple. This poses an increased risk of injury or
Modifications to the restraint system may
even fatal injury.
cause it to no longer work as intended. The
restraint system may then not perform its Have the restraint system checked and
intended protective function and may fail in an repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as
accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example. soon as possible.
This poses an increased risk of injury or even
fatal injury.
Never modify parts of the restraint system. PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic lamp
components or their software.
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system to
accommodate a person with disabilities, con-
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
details. USA only: for further information con-
tact our Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1‑800‑367‑6372).

Restraint system warning lamp

The functions of the restraint system are PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp :
checked after the ignition is switched on and is part of the Occupant Classification System
at regular intervals while the engine is run- (OCS).
ning. Therefore, malfunctions can be detec-
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
ted in good time.
informs you about the status of the front-
The 6 restraint system warning lamp in passenger front air bag.
the instrument cluster lights up when the igni-
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
tion is switched on. It goes out no later than a
lamp:
few seconds after the engine is started. The
components of the restraint system are in Ris lit: the front-passenger front air bag is
operational readiness. deactivated. They will then not be deployed
A malfunction has occurred if the 6 in the event of an accident.
restraint system warning lamp: Rdoes not light up: the front-passenger

Rdoes not light up after the ignition is front air bag is enabled. If, in the event of an
switched on accident, all deployment criteria are met,
the front-passenger front air bag is
Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with
deployed.
the engine running
Rlights up again while the engine is running

Z
 46 Occupant safety

Depending on the person in the front- of seats and the seat belts in the third row
passenger seat, the front-passenger front air of seats
bag must either be disabled or enabled; see If the seat belt is pulled quickly or suddenly
the following points. You must make sure of from the belt sash guide, the inertia reel
this both before and during a journey. locks. The belt strap cannot be pulled out fur-
ther.
Safety

RChildren in a child restraint system:

whether the front-passenger front air bag is Emergency Tensioning Devices tighten the
enabled or deactivated depends on the seat belts in an accident, pulling them close
installed child restraint system, and the age against the occupant's body. They do not,
and size of the child. Therefore, be sure to however, pull vehicle occupants back
observe the notes on the "Occupant clas- towards the backrest.
sification system (OCS)" (Y page 53) and Emergency Tensioning Devices do not cor-
on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 61). rect an incorrect seat position or incorrectly
There you will also find instructions on worn seat belts.
backwards- and forwards-facing child When activated, the belt force limiters reduce
restraint systems on the front-passenger the force exerted by the seat belt on the vehi-
seat. cle occupants.
RAll other persons: depending on the clas-
The belt force limiters for the front seats are
sification of the person in the front- synchronized with the front air bags, which
passenger seat, the front-passenger front absorb part of the deceleration force. This
air bag is enabled or deactivated makes it possible to reduce the forces to
(Y page 53). Be sure to observe the notes which vehicle occupants are subjected during
on "Seat belts“ (Y page 46) and "Air bags" an accident.
(Y page 50). There you can also find infor-
mation on the correct seat position. ! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied,
do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle
of the front-passenger seat. This may oth-
Seat belts erwise lead to the triggering of the Emer-
gency Tensioning Device in the event of an
Introduction accident, which will then need to be
A correctly fastened seat belt is the most replaced.
effective means of restraining the movement
of vehicle occupants in the event of an acci- Important safety notes
dent or overturn. This reduces the risk of The use of seat belts and child restraint sys-
vehicle occupants coming into contact with tems is required by law in:
parts of the vehicle interior or being thrown
Rall 50 states
from the vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt
helps to keep the vehicle occupants in the Rthe U.S. territories
best position in relation to the air bag. Rthe District of Columbia
The seat belt system consists of: Rall Canadian provinces

RSeat belts Even where this is not required by law, all

REmergency Tensioning Devices for the vehicle occupants should correctly fasten
front seat belts and the outer seat belts in their seat belts before starting the journey.
the second and third row of seats G WARNING
RBelt force limiters for the front seat belts If the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it can-
and the outer seat belts in the second row not protect as intended. Furthermore, an
 Occupant safety 47

incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause addi- appropriate to the age, weight and size of
tional injury, for example, in an accident, dur- the child
ing braking or when abruptly changing direc- Ralways observe the instructions and safety
tion. This poses an increased risk of injury or notes in the "Children in the vehicle" sec-
even fatal injury. tion of this Operator's Manual
(Y page 61) in addition to the child

Safety
Make sure that all vehicle occupants are
seated properly with a correctly fastened seat restraint system manufacturer's installa-
belt. tion instructions
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and
G WARNING safety notes on the "Occupant classifica-
The seat belt does not offer the intended level tion system (OCS)" (Y page 53)
of protection if you have not moved the back-
G WARNING
rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
The seat belts may not perform their intended
ing or in the event of an accident, you could
protective function if:
slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal dirty, bleach or dyed
injury. Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or
Adjust the seat properly before beginning extremely dirty
your journey. Always ensure that the backrest Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt
is in an almost vertical position and that the anchorages or inertia reels have been modi-
shoulder section of your seat belt is routed fied
across the center of your shoulder. Seat belts may be damaged in an accident,
although the damage may not be visible, e.g.
G WARNING due to splinters of glass. Modified or damaged
Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannot seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident.
fasten the seat belt correctly without an addi- Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices
tional suitable restraint system. If the seat could accidentally trigger or fail to deploy
belt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protect when necessary. This poses an increased risk
as intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fas- of injury or even fatal injury.
tened seat belt can cause additional injury, for Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-
example, in an accident, during braking or an sioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia
abrupt change of direction. This poses an reels. Make sure that the seat belts are
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. undamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-
For this reason, always secure persons under ing an accident, have the seat belts checked
5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraint immediately at a qualified specialist work-
systems. shop.

If a child younger than 12 years and under 5 ft Only use seat belts that have been approved
(1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Ralways secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz Proper use of the seat belts
vehicle. The child restraint system must be Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(Y page 46).
All vehicle occupants must be wearing the
seat belt correctly before beginning the jour-

Z
 48 Occupant safety

ney. Also make sure that all vehicle occu- the "Loading guidelines" for securing objects,
pants are always wearing the seat belt cor- luggage or loads (Y page 342).
rectly while the vehicle is in motion.
When fastening the seat belt, always make Fastening and adjusting the seat belts
sure that: Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
Safety

Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to the (Y page 46) and the notes on correct use of
belt buckle belonging to that seat. seat belts (Y page 47).
Rthe seat belt is tight across your body.
Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter
coat.
Rthe seat belt is not twisted.
Only then can the forces which occur be
distributed over the area of the belt.
Rthe shoulder section of the belt is always
routed across the center of your shoulder.
The shoulder section of the belt must not
come into contact with your neck or be
routed under your arm. If possible, adjust
the seat belt to the appropriate height.
Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low down
as possible across your lap.
The lap belt must always be routed across
your hip joints and not across your abdo- X Adjust the seat (Y page 106).
men. This applies particularly to pregnant The seat backrest must be in an almost
women. If necessary, push the lap belt vertical position.
down to your hip joint and pull it tight using X Pull the seat belt smoothly from belt sash
the shoulder section of the belt. guide = and engage belt tongue ; into
Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, belt buckle :.
pointed or fragile objects. The seat belt on the driver’s seat and the
If you have such items located on or in your front-passenger seat may be tightened
clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, automatically, see "Belt adjustment"
store these in a suitable place. (Y page 49).
Ronly one person is using a seat belt at a X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder
time. section of the seat belt to tighten the belt
Infants and children must never travel sit- across your body.
ting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the
event of an accident, they could be crushed
between the vehicle occupant and seat
belt.
Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if
the seat belt is also being used by one of the
vehicle's occupants.
Seat belts are only intended to secure and
restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe
 Occupant safety 49

Safety
The shoulder section of the seat belt must
always be routed across the center of the
shoulder. Adjust the belt sash guide if neces-
sary.
X To raise: slide the belt guide upwards.
The belt guide will engage in various posi- X Press release button :, hold belt
tions. tongue ; and guide it back towards belt
X To lower: hold belt guide release : and
outlet =.
slide the belt guide downwards.
X Let go of belt guide release : in the
Seat belt adjustment
desired position and make sure that the The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of
belt guide engages. the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. This
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are function adjusts the driver's and front-
equipped with a special seat belt retractor to passenger seat belt to the upper body of the
securely fasten child restraint systems in the occupants.
vehicle. Further information can be found The belt strap is tightened slightly when:
under "Special seat belt retractor" Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle
(Y page 61). and
Rthe ignition is switched on
Releasing seat belts
The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain
! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled tightening force if any slack is detected
up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue between the vehicle occupant and the seat
will be trapped in the door or in the seat belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly
mechanism. This could damage the door, while it is adjusting.
the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam- You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on
aged seat belts can no longer fulfill their and off in the on-board computer
protective function and must be replaced. (Y page 288).
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Belt warning for the driver and front
passenger
The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-
ment cluster is a reminder that all occupants
must fasten their seat belts. It may light up

Z
 50 Occupant safety

continuously or flash. In addition, there may However, no system available today can com-
be a warning tone. pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.
Regardless of whether the driver's and front- It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury
passenger seat belts have already been fas- caused by an air bag due to the high speed at
tened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights which the air bag must be deployed.
up for six seconds each time the engine is
Safety

started. If, after six seconds, the driver or Important safety notes
front-passenger seat belt has not been fas-
tened and the doors are closed, the 7 seat G WARNING
belt warning lamp lights up. As soon as the If you do not sit in the correct seat position,
driver's and front-passenger seat belts are the air bag cannot protect as intended and
fastened or a front door is opened again, the could even cause additional injury when
7 seat belt warning lamp goes out. deployed. This poses an increased risk of
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after injury or even fatal injury.
the engine is started, an additional warning To avoid hazardous situations, always make
tone will sound. This warning tone stops after sure that all of the vehicle's occupants:
six seconds or when the driver's seat belt is Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly,
fastened. including pregnant women
If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph Rare sitting correctly and maintain the great-
(25 km/h) once and the driver's and front- est possible distance to the air bags
passenger seat belts are not fastened, a
Rfollow the following instructions
warning tone sounds. A warning tone also
sounds with increasing intensity for Always make sure that there are no objects
60 seconds or until the driver or front between the air bag and the vehicle's occu-
passenger have fastened their seat belts. pants.
If the driver or front passenger unfasten their RAdjust the seats properly before beginning
seat belts during the journey, the seat belt your journey. Always make sure that the
warning is activated again. seat is in an almost upright position. The
i For more information on the 7 seat center of the head restraint must support
belt warning lamp, see "Warning and indi- the head at about eye level.
cator lamps in the instrument cluster, seat RMove the driver's and front-passenger
belts" (Y page 327). seats as far back as possible. The driver's
seat position must allow the vehicle to be
driven safely.
Air bags ROnly hold the steering wheel on the out-

Introduction side. This allows the air bag to be fully

deployed.
The installation point of an air bag can be rec- RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-
ognized by the AIR BAG symbol. ing. Do not lean forwards or lean against
An air bag complements the correctly fas- the door or side window. You may other-
tened seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat wise be in the deployment area of the air
belt. The air bag provides additional protec- bags.
tion in applicable accident situations. RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in
Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the
The different air bag systems function inde- dashboard, for example. Your feet may oth-
pendently from one another (Y page 58).
 Occupant safety 51

erwise be in the deployment area of the air G WARNING

bag. If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects
RFor this reason, always secure persons less such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer
than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint function correctly. There is an increased risk
systems. Up to this height, the seat belt of injury.
cannot be worn correctly.

Safety
Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects
If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also to it.
observe the following notes:
RAlways secure children under 12 years of G WARNING
age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) in height in Sensors to control the air bags are located in
suitable child restraint systems. the doors. Modifications or work not per-
RChild restraint systems should be installed formed correctly to the doors or door panel-
on the rear seats. ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the
ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing function of the sensors being impaired. The air
child restraint system to the front- bags might therefore not function properly
passenger seat when the front-passenger any more. Consequently, the air bags cannot
front air bag is disabled. If the PASSENGER protect vehicle occupants as they are
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently designed to do. There is an increased risk of
lit, the front-passenger front air bag is dis- injury.
abled (Y page 45). Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
RAlways observe the instructions and safety Always have work on the doors or door pan-
notes on the "Occupant Classification Sys- eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-
tem (OCS)" (Y page 53) and on "Children shop.
in the vehicle" (Y page 61) in addition to
the child restraint system manufacturer's Front air bags
installation instructions.
Objects in the vehicle interior may pre-
vent the air bag from functioning cor-
rectly. Before starting your journey and to
avoid risks resulting from the speed of the air
bag as it deploys, make sure that:
Rthere are no people, animals or objects
between the vehicle occupants and an air
bag.
Rthere are no objects between the seat, door
and B-pillar.
Driver's air bag : inflates in front of the
Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang on
steering wheel; front-passenger air bag ;
the grab handles or coat hooks.
inflates in front of and above the glove box.
Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are
When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-
attached to the vehicle within the deploy-
tional head and thorax protection on the front
ment area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side
seats.
windows, rear side trim or side walls.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects
shows you the status of the front-passenger
are in the pockets of your clothing. Store
front air bag (Y page 45).
such objects in a suitable place.

Z
 52 Occupant safety

Front-passenger air bag ; is only deployed

if:
Rthe Occupant Classification System (OCS)
recognizes that the front-passenger seat is
occupied (Y page 53)
Safety

Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp is not lit (Y page 54)
Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a
high accident severity

Driver's knee bag Front side impact air bags : and side impact
air bags in the 2nd row of seats ; inflate next
to the outer cushions of the seat backrest.
When deployed, the side impact air bag offers
additional protection for the thorax. Further-
more, on the front seats additional protection
is offered for the pelvis. However, it does not
protect your:
Rhead
Rneck
Rarms

Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steer- In the event of a side impact, the side impact
ing column. The driver's knee bag is triggered air bag is deployed on the side on which an
together with the front air bag. impact occurs.
The driver's knee bag offers additional thigh, The side impact air bag on the front-
knee and lower leg protection for the occu- passenger side (front) deploys in the follow-
pant in the driver's seat. ing situations:
Rthe OCS system detects that the front-
Side impact air bags passenger seat is occupied, or
Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on
G WARNING
the front-passenger seat
Unsuitable seat covers could restrict or even
If the belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on
prevent the deployment of the air bags inte-
the front-passenger seat, the side impact air
grated into the seats. Consequently, the air
bag on the front-passenger side deploys at
bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as
the onset of the applicable accident situation.
they are designed to do. In addition, the func-
In this case, it will deploy regardless of
tion of the Occupant Classification System
whether the front-passenger seat is occupied
(OCS) could be restricted. This poses an
or not.
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
You should only use seat covers that have
been approved for the respective seat by
Mercedes-Benz.
 Occupant safety 53

Window curtain air bags disabled: the OCS system detects that the
front-passenger seat is occupied, but the seat
belt tongue is not inserted in the belt buckle
of the front-passenger seat.

Prerequisites

Safety
To be classified correctly, the front passenger
must sit:
Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly
Rin an almost upright position with their
back against the seat backrest
Window curtain air bags : are integrated Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possi-
into the side of the roof frame and deploy in ble
the area extending from the front door (A-pil- If the front passenger does not observe these
lar) to the rear side window (D-pillar). conditions, OCS may produce a false classi-
When deployed, the window curtain air bag fication, e.g. because the front passenger:
offers additional protection for the head. Rtransfers their weight by supporting them-
However, it does not protect your chest or selves on a vehicle armrest
arms. Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised
In the event of a side impact, the window cur- from the seat cushion
tain air bag is deployed on the side on which If it is absolutely necessary to install a child
the impact occurs. restraint system on the front-passenger seat,
If the system determines that window curtain be sure to observe the correct positioning of
air bag deployment can offer additional pro- the child restraint system. Never place
tection to that provided by the seat belt, a objects under or behind the child restraint
window curtain air bag may deploy in other system, e.g. cushions. The entire base of the
accident situations (Y page 58). child restraint system must always rest on the
seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The
backrest of the forwards-facing child restraint
Occupant Classification System system must, as far as possible, be resting on
(OCS) the backrest of the front-passenger seat.
Introduction The child restraint system must not touch the
roof or be put under strain by the head
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat back-
categorizes the person in the front-passenger rest and the head restraint position accord-
seat. Depending on that result, the front- ingly.
passenger front air bag is either enabled or Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function
deactivated. correctly. Always observe the child restraint
The system does not deactivate: system manufacturer's installation instruc-
Rthe side impact air bag tions.
Rthe window curtain air bag
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices
In the following situation, the side impact air
bag and Emergency Tensioning Device are

Z
 54 Occupant safety

Occupant Classification System opera- G WARNING

tion (OCS) If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is
disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of
an accident and cannot perform its intended
Safety

protective function. A person in the front-

passenger seat could then, for example, come
into contact with the vehicle's interior, espe-
cially if the person is sitting too close to the
dashboard. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp : Rthe classification of the person in the front-
informs you whether the front-passenger passenger seat is correct and the front-
front air bag is deactivated. passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the bled in accordance with the person in the
ignition lock, or press the Start/Stop but- front-passenger seat
ton once or twice on vehicles with KEY- Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved
LESS-GO. back as far back as possible.
The system carries out a self-diagnosis. Rthe person is seated correctly.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp Make sure, both before and during the jour-
must light up for approximately six seconds. ney, that the status of the front-passenger
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp front air bag is correct.
then displays the status of the front-
passenger front air bag. If the status of the G WARNING
front-passenger front air bag changes while If you secure a child in a child restraint system
the vehicle is in motion, an air bag display on the front-passenger seat and the
message may appear in the instrument clus- PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is
ter (Y page 303). When the front-passenger off, the front-passenger front air bag can
seat is occupied, always pay attention to the deploy in the event of an accident. The child
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp. Be could be struck by the air bag. This poses an
aware of the status of the front-passenger increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
front air bag both before and during the jour- Make sure that the front-passenger front air
ney. bag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
lamp:
Ris lit, the front-passenger front air bag is
deactivated. They will then not be deployed
in the event of an accident.
Rdoes not light up: the front-passenger
front air bag is enabled. If, in the event of an
accident, all deployment criteria are met,
the front-passenger front air bag is
deployed.
 Occupant safety 55

G WARNING child's stature. It is recommended that you

If you secure a child in a forward-facing child install the restraint system on a suitable
restraint system on the front-passenger seat rear seat.
and you position the front-passenger seat too Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a
close to the dashboard, the child could, in the person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager
or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG

Safety
event of an accident:
OFF indicator lamp lights up and remains lit
Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte-
after the system self-test depending on the
rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-
result of the classification or, alternatively,
cator lamp is lit, for example
goes out.
Rbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER
- if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off
lamp is off, move the front-passenger
This poses an increased risk of injury or even seat as far back as possible. Alterna-
fatal injury. tively, a person of small stature can sit on
Move the front-passenger seat as far back as a rear seat.
possible. Always make sure that the shoulder - if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature
belt sash guide to the shoulder belt guide on should not use the front-passenger seat.
the child restraint system. The shoulder belt Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by an
strap must be routed forwards and down-
adult or a person of a stature correspond-
wards from the vehicle belt sash guide. If nec-
ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR
essary, adjust the vehicle belt sash guide and
BAG OFF indicator lamp goes out after the
the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always
system self-test. This indicates that the
observe the child restraint system manufac-
front-passenger front air bag is activated.
turer's installation instructions.
If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure
If OCS determines that: to observe the notes on "Children in the vehi-
cle" (Y page 61).
Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp When OCS is malfunctioning, the red 6
lights up after the system self-test and restraint system warning lamp in the instru-
remains lit. This indicates that the front- ment cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG
passenger front air bag is deactivated. OFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously.
The front-passenger front air bag is deactiva-
Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a
ted in this case and does not deploy during an
child of up to 12 months old, in a standard
accident. Have the system checked by quali-
child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR
fied technicians as soon as possible. Consult
BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The
system self-test and remains lit. This indi-
front-passenger seat should only be repaired
cates that the front-passenger front air bag
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
is deactivated.
If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or
But in the case of a 12-month-old child, in a
the seat cushion is damaged, have the nec-
standard child restraint system, the
essary repair work carried out at an author-
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
can go out after the system self-test. This
indicates that the front-passenger front air For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
bag is activated. The result of the classifi- mends that you only use seat accessories
cation is dependent on, among other fac- that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
tors, the child restraint system and the

Z
 56 Occupant safety

If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not bled in accordance with the person in the
mean that the front-passenger front air bag front-passenger seat
will also deploy. The Occupant Classification Rthe person is seated properly with a cor-
System (OCS) categorizes the occupant in the rectly fastened seatbelt
front-passenger seat. Depending on that
Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved
result, the front-passenger front air bag is
Safety

back as far back as possible

either enabled or deactivated.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
System self-test lamp remains lit when it should not, the front-
passenger seat may not be used. Do not
G DANGER install a child restraint system on the front-
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi-
lamp does not light up during the system self- cation System (OCS) checked and repaired
test, then the system is malfunctioning. The immediately at a qualified specialist work-
front-passenger front air bag might be trig- shop.
gered unintentionally or might not be trig-
gered at all in the event of an accident with G WARNING
high deceleration. This poses an increased Objects between the seat surface and the
risk of injury or even fatal injury. child restraint system could affect OCS oper-
In this case the front-passenger seat may not ation. This could result in the front-passenger
be used. Do not install a child restraint system air bag not functioning as intended during an
on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu- accident. This poses an increased risk of
pant Classification System (OCS) checked injury or even fatal injury.
and repaired immediately at a qualified spe- Do not place any objects between the seat
cialist workshop. surface and the child restraint system. The
entire base of the child restraint system must
G DANGER always rest on the seat cushion of the front-
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator passenger seat. The backrest of the forwards-
lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the facing child restraint system must, as far as
front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will possible, be resting on the backrest of the
not be deployed in the event of an accident. In front-passenger seat. Always comply with the
this case, the front-passenger front air bag child restraint system manufacturer's instal-
cannot perform its intended protective func- lation instructions.
tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front-
passenger seat.
After the system self-test, the PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp displays the sta-
That person could, for example, come into tus of the front-passenger front air bag
contact with the vehicle's interior, especially (Y page 54).
if the person is sitting too close to the dash-
board. This poses an increased risk of injury or
For more information about the OCS, see
even fatal injury.
"Problems with the Occupant Classification
System" (Y page 57).
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
Rthe classification of the person in the front-
passenger seat is correct and the front-
passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-
 Occupant safety 57

Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 56).
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The PASSENGER AIR The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is

Safety
BAG OFF indicator incorrect.
lamp lights up and X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the per-
remains lit, even son on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 53).
though the front- X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the
passenger seat is occu-
front-passenger seat may not be used.
pied by an adult or a
X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized
person of a stature cor-
responding to that of an Mercedes-Benz Center.
adult.
The PASSENGER AIR OCS is malfunctioning.
BAG OFF indicator X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the
lamp does not light up child seat.
and/or does not stay X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests
on.
on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of
The front-passenger the forwards-facing child restraint system must, as far as pos-
seat is: sible, be resting on the backrest of front-passenger seat. If nec-
Runoccupied essary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.
Roccupied by the X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the
weight of a child up seat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight with the front-
to 12 months old in a passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and
child restraint sys- the child restraint system being pulled too tightly.
tem X Check the installation of the child restraint system.
Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the
child restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint
accordingly.
X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto
the seat.
X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off, do
not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat.
It is recommended that you install the restraint system on a
suitable rear seat.
X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

Z
 58 Occupant safety

Deployment of Emergency Tensioning released. The 6 restraint system warning

Devices and air bags lamp will light up.
Only in rare cases will the bang affect your
Important safety notes hearing. The powder released is generally not
G WARNING hazardous to health, it could however cause
short-term breathing difficulties in people
Safety

The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has
with asthma or other respiratory problems. In
been deployed. There is a risk of injury.
order to prevent breathing difficulties, you
Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a should leave the vehicle as soon as it is safe to
deployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe- do so, or open the window.
cialist workshop as soon as possible.
Air bags and pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners
contain perchlorate material, which may
G WARNING require special handling or environmental
A deployed air bag no longer offers any pro- protection measures. Check with your local
tection and cannot provide the intended pro- government’s disposal guidelines. California
tection in an accident. There is an increased residents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
risk of injury. HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/
Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special- index.cfm.
ist workshop in order to have a deployed air
bag replaced. Method of operation
It is important for your safety and that of any During the first stage of a collision, the
passengers to have deployed air bags restraint system control unit evaluates impor-
replaced and to have any malfunctioning air tant physical data relating to vehicle deceler-
bags repaired. This will help to make sure the ation or acceleration, such as:
air bags continue to perform their protective RDuration
function for the vehicle occupants in the
RDirection
event of a crash.
RIntensity
G WARNING Based on the evaluation of this data, the
Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices restraint system control unit triggers the belt
that have been deployed are no longer opera- tensioners in the event of a frontal or rear
tional and are unable to perform their inten- collision.
ded protective function. This poses an An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. triggered if:
Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Ten-
Rthe ignition is switched on
sioning Devices which have been triggered
immediately replaced at a qualified specialist Rthe restraint system components are ready

workshop. for operation, see “Restraint system warn-

ing lamp” (Y page 45)
An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® to Rthe belt tongue is inserted into the buckle
trigger the tightening of the seat belt in haz- on the respective front seat
ardous situations. This procedure is reversi- The belt tensioners in the rear compartment
ble. are triggered independently of the lock status
If the Emergency Tensioning Devices or air of the seat belts.
bags are deployed, you will hear a bang and a
small amount of powder may also be
 Occupant safety 59

If the restraint system control unit detects a The vehicle may be considerably deformed
high accident severity, additional compo- without an air bag being deployed. This is the
nents of the restraint system are activated case if only relatively easily deformable parts
independently of one another in certain fron- have been hit and a high rate of deceleration
tal collision situations: has not been reached. Conversely, an air bag
may be deployed even though the vehicle suf-

Safety
RFront air bags and driver's knee bag
fers only minor deformation. This is the case
RWindowbag, if the system determines that
if, for example, very rigid vehicle parts such as
it can offer additional protection to that
the longitudinal body members are hit in an
provided by the seat belt
accident and the rate of deceleration is suffi-
Depending on the person occupying the front- cient.
passenger seat, the front-passenger air bag is
If the restraint system control unit detects a
activated or deactivated. The front-passenger
side impact or an overturn situation, the rel-
front air bag can only be deployed in an acci-
evant restraint system components are acti-
dent if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica-
vated independently of one another depend-
tor lamp is off. Observe the information on the
ing on the apparent type of accident. If addi-
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
tional protection for the vehicle occupants is
(Y page 45).
determined in this situation, the belt tension-
Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. ers are also triggered.
During the first deployment stage, the front
RSide impact air bags on the side of the col-
air bag fills with propellant gas which reduces
the risk of injury. The second stage is then lision, regardless of Emergency Tensioning
triggered within milliseconds, filling the front Device and use of the seat belt on the driv-
air bag with the maximum amount of propel- er's side and the outer seats on the second
lant gas. row
The deployment thresholds for the Emer- The sidebag on the front-passenger side
gency Tensioning Devices and air bags are deploys under the following conditions:
calculated on the basis of the vehicle decel- - the OCS system detects that the front-
eration or acceleration occurring at various passenger seat is occupied or
points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emp- - the belt tongue has engaged in the belt
tive in nature. The air bag must be deployed buckle of the front-passenger seat.
on time, at the start of the collision. RWindow curtain air bag on the side of the
The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera- collision, regardless of seat belt use and
tion and the direction of the force are essen- whether front-passenger seat is occupied
tially determined by: RWindowbags on the driver's and front-
Rdistribution of the force during the impact passenger sides in certain overturn situa-
Rcollision angle tions if the system determines that they
can offer additional protection to that pro-
Rdeformation characteristics of the vehicle
vided by the seat belt
Rcharacteristics of the object with which the
vehicle has collided i Not all air bags are deployed in an acci-
Factors which can only be seen and measured dent. The various air bag systems work
after the collision has occurred do not play a independently of each other.
decisive role in the deployment of an airbag,
nor do they provide an indication of air bag
deployment.

Z
 60 Occupant safety

How the air bag system works is deter- PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures
mined by the severity of the accident detec- depending on the hazardous situation detec-
ted, especially the vehicle deceleration or ted:
acceleration, and the apparent type of acci- Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned.
dent:
Rif the vehicle skids, the sliding sunroof and
Safety

Rfrontal collision the side windows are closed so that only a

Rside impact small gap remains. The panorama roof with
Rrollover power tilt/sliding panel is completely
closed.
Rvehicles with the memory function: the
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in an
protection system) unfavorable position.
Rvehicles with a multicontour seat: the air
Introduction
pressure in the side bolsters of the seat
In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE® backrest is increased.
takes pre-emptive measures to protect the If the hazardous situation passes without
vehicle occupants. resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens
the belt pre-tensioning. On vehicles with mul-
Important safety notes ticontour seats, the air pressure in the side
bolsters is reduced again. All settings made
! Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell or behind the seats. There is a dan- by PRE-SAFE® can then be reversed.
ger that the seats and/or objects could be If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced:
damaged when PRE-SAFE® is activated. X Move the seat backrest or seat back
Although your vehicle is equipped with PRE- slightly when the vehicle is stationary.
SAFE®, the possibility of injury in the event of The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and
an accident cannot be ruled out. Always the locking mechanism is released.
adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of
road and weather conditions and maintain a the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Infor-
safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive mation about the convenience function can
carefully. be found under "Belt adjustment"
(Y page 49).
Function
PRE-SAFE® intervenes: Automatic measures after an acci-
Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. when dent
BAS is activated
Immediately after an accident, the following
Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when phys-
measures are implemented, depending on
ical limits are exceeded and the vehicle the type and severity of the impact:
understeers or oversteers severely
Rby activating the hazard warning lamps
Ron vehicles with the Active Driving Assis-
tance package: if BAS PLUS intervenes Rthe emergency lighting is activated
powerfully or the radar sensor system Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked
detects an imminent danger of collision in Rthe front side windows are lowered
certain situations
 Children in the vehicle 61

Rin vehicles with a memory function: the When leaving the vehicle, always take the
electrically adjustable steering wheel is SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
raised leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Rthe engine is switched off
Rvehicles with mbrace: automatic emer- G WARNING

Safety
gency call If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
Children in the vehicle fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
Important safety notes
Accident statistics show that children G WARNING
secured in the rear seats are safer than chil- If the child restraint system is subjected to
dren secured in the front-passenger seat. For direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises dren may burn themselves on these parts,
that you install a child restraint system on a particularly on the metal parts of the child
rear seat. Children are generally better pro- restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
tected there. If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
If a child younger than 12 years and under 5 ft you, always ensure that the child restraint
(1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-
Ralways secure the child in a child restraint tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehi- restraint system has been exposed to direct
cles. The child restraint system must be sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
appropriate to the age, weight and size of child in it. Never leave children unattended in
the child the vehicle.
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
safety notes in this section in addition to their seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-
the child restraint system manufacturer's ting properly. Particular attention must be
installation instructions paid to children.
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
safety notes on the "Occupant classifica- (Y page 46) and the notes on correct use of
tion system (OCS)" (Y page 53) seat belts (Y page 47).
G WARNING A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- proper seat belt positioning for children over
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example: 41 lbs (18 kg) or until they reach a height
where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly with-
Rrelease the parking brake.
out a booster seat.
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
Rstart the engine. Special seat belt retractor
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
G WARNING
an accident and injury. If the seat belt is released while driving, the
child restraint system will no longer be
secured properly. The special seat belt retrac-
tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a

Z
 62 Children in the vehicle

portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot Child restraint system
be immediately refastened. There is an
The use of seat belts and child restraint sys-
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
tems is required by law in:
Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-
Rall 50 states
tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate
Rthe U.S. territories
Safety

the special seat belt retractor and secure the

child restraint system properly. Rthe District of Columbia
Rall Canadian provinces
All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driv-
If you install a rearward-facing child restraint
er's seat belt, are equipped with a special seat
system on the center rear seat, the rear arm
belt retractor. When activated, the special
rest must be folded back as far as possible.
seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belt
cannot slacken once the child seat is secured. You can obtain further information about the
correct child restraint system from any
Installing a child restraint system:
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Make sure you observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation instruc- G WARNING
tions. If the child restraint system is installed incor-
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt
rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as
outlet. intended. The child cannot then be restrained
in the event of an accident, heavy braking or
X Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle.
sudden changes of direction. There is an
Activating the special seat belt retractor: increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia Make sure that you observe the child restraint
reel retract it again. system manufacturer's installation instruc-
While the seat belt is retracting, you should tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,
hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat that the base of the child restraint system is
belt retractor is enabled. always resting completely on the seat cush-
X Push the child restraint system down so
ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under
that the seat belt is tight and does not or behind the child restraint system. Only use
loosen. child restraint systems with the original cover
designed for them. Only replace damaged
Removing a child restraint system/deactivat- covers with genuine covers.
ing the special seat belt retractor:
X Make sure you observe the child restraint G WARNING
system manufacturer's installation instruc- If the child restraint system is installed incor-
tions. rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in
X Press the belt buckle release button, hold the event of an accident, heavy braking or a
the belt tongue and guide it back towards sudden change in direction. The child
the belt outlet. restraint system could be thrown about, strik-
The special seat belt retractor is deactiva- ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased
ted. risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Always install child restraint systems prop-
erly, even if they are not being used. Make
sure that you observe the child restraint sys-
tem manufacturer's installation instructions.
 Children in the vehicle 63

You will find further information on stowing LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur-
objects, luggage or loads under "Loading ing system
guidelines" (Y page 342).
G WARNING
G WARNING LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems
Child restraint systems or their securing sys- do not offer sufficient protective effect for

Safety
tems which have been damaged or subjected children whose weight is greater than 48 lbs
to a load in an accident can no longer protect (22 kg) who are secured using the safety belt
as intended. The child cannot then be integrated in the child restraint system. In the
restrained in the event of an accident, heavy event of an accident, a child might not be
braking or sudden changes of direction. There restrained correctly. This poses an increased
is an increased risk of injury, possibly even risk of injury or even fatal injury.
fatal.
If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg),
Replace child restraint systems which have only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
been damaged or subjected to a load in an systems with which the child is also secured
accident as soon as possible. Have the secur- with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the
ing systems on the child restraint system child restraint system with the Top Tether
checked at a qualified specialist workshop, belt, if available.
before you install a child restraint system
again. Always comply with the manufacturer's
installation and operating instructions for the
If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child on child restraint system used.
the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe
Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-
the information on the "Occupant Classifica-
type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is
tion System (OCS)" (Y page 53). There you
engaged correctly in both LATCH-type (ISO-
will also find information on deactivating the
FIX) securing rings
front-passenger front air bag.
To ensure that the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
All child restraint systems must meet the fol-
restraint system can perform its protective
lowing standards:
function as intended, the backrest of the
RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand- respective outer seat in the second row must
ards 213 and 225 be in the upright position.
RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
! When installing the child restraint system,
213 and 210.2 make sure that the seat belt for the middle
Confirmation that the child restraint system seat does not get trapped. The seat belt
corresponds to the standards can be found could otherwise be damaged.
on an instruction label on the child restraint
system. This confirmation can also be found
in the installation instructions that are inclu-
ded with the child restraint system.
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte-
rior and on the child restraint system.

Z
 64 Children in the vehicle

Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may

also be used and can be installed using the
vehicle's seat belt system. Install child seats
according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Safety

Top Tether
Introduction
Top Tether provides an additional connection
between a child restraint system, secured
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings for the outer with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount,
seat in the second row of seats
and the rear seat. This helps reduce the risk of
Installation indicator : shows the installa- injury even further. If the child restraint sys-
tion location of LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing tem has a Top Tether belt, this should be used
rings ;. at all times.

Important safety notes

G WARNING
If the rear seats or the rear seat backrests are
not locked, they could fold forwards in the
event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden
changes of direction. As a result, child
restraint systems cannot perform their inten-
ded protective function. Rear seats and rear
seat backrests that are not locked can also
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings for the third cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of
row of seats an accident. This poses an increased risk of
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings ; for injury or even fatal injury.
two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint sys- Always lock the rear seats and rear seat
tems are installed on the left and right: backrests after installing a Top Tether belt.
Ron the rear seat backrests of the outer Observe the lock verification indicator. Adjust
seats in the second row the rear seat backrests so that they are in an
Ron the backrests of the seats in the third
upright position.
row of seats If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and
Before installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child locked, this will be shown in the multifunction
restraint system on the second row of seats: display in the instrument cluster.
X Move the rear seat backrests in the second
row to an upright position (Y page 111).
X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system on both LATCH-type (ISO-
FIX) securing rings ;.
ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for
specially designed child restraint systems on
the rear seats.
 Children in the vehicle 65

Top Tether anchorage points Rwhen cargo compartment cover : is

installed, Top Tether belt B, runs
between rear seat backrests ; and
cargo compartment cover :
Rwhen the safety net is installed, Top
Tether belt B runs between rear seat

Safety
backrests ; and the safety net.
X Tension Top Tether belt B. Make sure you
observe the child restraint system manu-
facturer's installation instructions.
X If necessary, push head restraint = back
down slightly (Y page 110). Make sure you
The Top Tether anchorages for the second do not interfere with the correct routing of
row of seats are fitted on the rear of the rear Top Tether belt B.
seat backrests. For the third row of seats, use
the lashing eyelets in the luggage compart-
ment floor. Child restraint system on the front-
passenger seat
General notes
Accident statistics show that children
secured in the rear seats are safer than chil-
dren secured in the front-passenger seat. For
this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises
that you install a child restraint system on a
rear seat.
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child
restraint system to the front-passenger seat,
X Move head restraint = upwards. be sure to observe the instructions and safety
X Fit the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint notes on the "Occupant classification system
system with Top Tether. Make sure you (OCS)" (Y page 53).
observe the child restraint system manu- You can thus avoid the risks that could arise
facturer's installation instructions. as a result of:
X Route Top Tether belt B under head
Ran incorrectly categorized person in the
restraint = between both head restraint front-passenger seat
bars.
Rthe unintentional deactivation of the front-
X Guide Top Tether belt B downward
passenger front air bag
between cargo compartment cover : and
Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child
rear seat backrests ;.
restraint system, e.g. too close to the dash-
X Hook Top Tether hook A of Top Tether belt
board
B into Top Tether anchorage ?.
Make sure that: Rearward-facing child restraint system
RTop Tether hook A is hooked into Top
If it is absolutely necessary to install a rear-
Tether anchorage ?, as shown
ward-facing child restraint system on the
RTop Tether belt B is not twisted
front-passenger seat, always make sure that

Z
 66 Children in the vehicle

the front-passenger front air bag is deactiva- Child-proof locks

ted. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp is permanently lit (Y page 45) Important safety notes
is the front-passenger front air bag deactiva-
ted.
G WARNING
If children are traveling in the vehicle, they
Always observe the child restraint system
Safety

could:
manufacturer's installation and operating
instructions. Ropen doors, thus endangering other people
or road users
Forward-facing child restraint system Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming
traffic
If it is absolutely necessary to install a
Roperate vehicle equipment and become
forward-facing child restraint system on the
front-passenger seat, always move the front- trapped
passenger seat as far back as possible. The There is a risk of an accident and injury.
entire base of the child restraint system must Always activate the child-proof locks and
always rest on the seat cushion of the front- override feature if children are traveling in the
passenger seat. The backrest of the child vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take
restraint system must, as far as possible, lie the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
flat against the backrest of the front- leave children unattended in the vehicle.
passenger seat. The child restraint system
must not touch the roof or be put under strain Override feature for:
by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the Rthe rear doors (Y page 67)
seat backrest and the head restraint position Rthe rear side windows (Y page 67)
accordingly. Always make sure that the shoul-
der belt strap is correctly routed from the G WARNING
vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulder belt If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
guide on the child restraint system. The shoul- cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
der belt strap must be routed forwards and Rrelease the parking brake.
downwards from the vehicle belt sash guide.
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt sash
guide and the front-passenger seat accord- parking position P.
ingly. Rstart the engine.

Always observe the child restraint system In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
manufacturer's installation and operating ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
instructions. an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
 Pets in the vehicle 67

G WARNING Override feature for the rear side win-

If the child restraint system is subjected to dows
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
dren may burn themselves on these parts,
particularly on the metal parts of the child

Safety
restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
you, always ensure that the child restraint
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-
tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
restraint system has been exposed to direct
sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
child in it. Never leave children unattended in
the vehicle. X To activate/deactivate: press button :.
If indicator lamp ; is lit, operation of the
Child-proof locks for the rear doors rear side windows is disabled. Operation is
only possible using the switches in the driv-
er's door. If indicator lamp ; is off, oper-
ation is possible using the switches in the
rear compartment.

Pets in the vehicle

G WARNING
If you leave animals unattended or unsecured
in the vehicle, they could press buttons or
You secure each door individually with the switches, for example.
child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door As a result, they could:
secured with a child-proof lock cannot be Ractivate vehicle equipment and become
opened from inside the vehicle. When the trapped, for example
vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened
Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby
from the outside.
endangering other road users
X To activate: press the child-proof lock
Unsecured animals could also be flung around
lever up in the direction of arrow :. the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-
X Make sure that the child-proof locks are den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-
working properly. cle occupants. There is a risk of an accident
X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock and injury.
lever down in the direction of arrow ;. Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-
cle. Always secure animals properly during
the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-
port box.

Z
 68 Driving safety systems

Driving safety systems snow chains. Only in this way will the driv-
ing safety systems described in this section
Overview of driving safety systems work as effectively as possible.
In this section, you will find information about
the following driving safety systems:
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Safety

RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

(Y page 68) General information
RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 69)
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way
RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus) that the wheels do not lock when you brake.
(Y page 69) This allows you to continue steering the vehi-
RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST (distance cle when braking.
warning function and adaptive Brake The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument
Assist) (Y page 70) cluster lights up when the ignition is switched
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) on. It goes out when the engine is running.
(Y page 73)
REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)
Important safety notes
(Y page 75) i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 76) tion (Y page 68).
RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 76)
G WARNING
RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 77) If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when
braking. The steerability and braking charac-
teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-
Important safety notes ally, further driving safety systems are deac-
If you fail to adapt your driving style or tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-
become distracted, the driving safety sys- ding and accidents.
tems can neither reduce the risk of accident Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-
nor override the laws of physics. Driving diately at a qualified specialist workshop.
safety systems are merely aids designed to
assist driving. You are responsible for the dis- When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,
tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed including driving safety systems, will also
and for braking in good time. Always adapt become inoperative. Observe the information
your driving style to suit the prevailing road on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 328) and
and weather conditions and maintain a safe display messages which may be shown in the
distance from the vehicle in front. Drive care- instrument cluster (Y page 293).
fully. ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph
(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface condi-
i The driving safety systems described only tions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even
work as effectively as possible when there
when you only brake gently.
is adequate contact between the tires and
the road surface. Please pay special atten-
tion to the notes on tires, recommended
minimum tire tread depths, etc.
(Y page 406).
In wintry driving conditions, always use
winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary,
 Driving safety systems 69

Braking Braking
X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until
brake pedal vigorously until the braking sit- the emergency braking situation is over.
uation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
X To make a full brake application: The brakes will function as usual once you

Safety
depress the brake pedal with full force. release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a
pulsing in the brake pedal.
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica-
PLUS)
tion of hazardous road conditions, and func-
tions as a reminder to take extra care while General information
driving.
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
Off-road ABS tion (Y page 68).
BAS PLUS is only available in vehicles equip-
An ABS system specifically suited to off-road
ped with DISTRONIC PLUS.
terrain is activated automatically once the off-
road program is activated (Y page 259). For BAS PLUS to assist you, the radar sensor
system must be operational.
At speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h), the front
wheels lock cyclically during braking. The dig- With the help of the radar sensor system, BAS
ging-in effect achieved in the process reduces PLUS can detect obstacles that are in the
the stopping distance on off-road terrain. This path of your vehicle for an extended period of
limits steering capability. time.
If the radar sensor system is malfunctioning,
BAS PLUS will not be available. The brake
BAS (Brake Assist System) system is still available with complete brake
boosting effect and BAS.
General information
BAS PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of
BAS operates in emergency braking situa- a collision with a vehicle or reduce the effects
tions. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, of such a collision. If BAS PLUS detects a
BAS automatically boosts the braking force, danger of collision, you are assisted when
thus shortening the stopping distance. braking.

Important safety notes Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- G WARNING
tion (Y page 68). BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify
G WARNING objects and complex traffic situations.
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance In such cases, BAS PLUS may:
in an emergency braking situation is Rintervene unnecessarily
increased. There is a risk of an accident. Rnot intervene
In an emergency braking situation, depress There is a risk of an accident.
the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
the wheels from locking.
uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the
intervention in a non-critical driving situation.

Z
 70 Driving safety systems

G WARNING When driving at a speed above 20 mph

BAS PLUS does not react: (30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal
sharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises the
Rto people or animals brake pressure to a value adapted to the traf-
Rto oncoming vehicles fic situation.
Rto crossing traffic BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in haz-
Safety

Rwhen cornering ardous situations with vehicles in front within

As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all a speed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and
critical situations. There is a risk of an acci- 155 mph (250 km/h).
dent. At speeds of up to approximately 40 mph
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- (70 km/h), BAS PLUS can also react to sta-
uation and be ready to brake. tionary objects. Examples of stationary
objects are stopped or parked vehicles.
In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-
i If BAS PLUS demands particularly high
ognition can be impaired.
braking force, preventative passenger pro-
Recognition by the radar sensor system is tection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activa-
also impaired in the event of: ted simultaneously.
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover- X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
ing the sensors emergency braking situation is over.
Rthere is interference by other radar sources ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for
BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes func-
example in parking garages tion as usual again, if:
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
Ryou release the brake pedal.
motorbike
Rthere is no longer a risk of collision.
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
Rno obstacle is detected in front of your
relative to the center of your vehicle
vehicle.
Following damage to the front end of the vehi-
cle, have the configuration and operation of If you have activated DSR (Y page 258), BAS
the radar sensors checked at a qualified spe- PLUS is likewise deactivated.
cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-
sions at low speeds where there is no visible
damage to the front of the vehicle. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
General notes
Function
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST consists of
To avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates the Adaptive Brake Assist and the distance warn-
brake force necessary if: ing function, which are described in the fol-
Ryou approach an obstacle, and lowing.
RBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collision
When driving at a speed under 20 mph Distance warning function
(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal, Important safety notes
BAS PLUS is activated. The increase in brake
pressure will be carried out at the last possi- i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
ble moment. tion (Y page 68).
 Driving safety systems 71

G WARNING and the · distance warning lamp will light

The distance warning function does not react: up in the instrument cluster.
X Brake immediately in order to increase the
Rto people or animals
distance from the vehicle in front.
Rto oncoming vehicles
or
Rto crossing traffic

Safety
X Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do
Rwhen cornering
so.
Thus, the distance warning function cannot
Due to the nature of the system, particularly
provide a warning in all critical situations.
complicated but non-critical driving condi-
There is a risk of an accident.
tions may also cause the system to display a
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- warning.
uation and be ready to brake.
With the help of the radar sensor system, the
distance warning function can detect obsta-
G WARNING
cles that are in the path of your vehicle for an
The distance warning function cannot always extended period of time.
clearly identify objects and complex traffic
Up to a speed of about 40 mph (70 km/h), the
situations.
distance warning function can also react to
In such cases, the distance warning function stationary obstacles, such as stopped or
may: parked vehicles.
Rgive an unnecessary warning If you approach an obstacle and the distance
Rnot give a warning warning function detects a risk of a collision,
There is a risk of an accident. the system will initially alert you both visually
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- and acoustically.
uation and do not rely solely on the distance In particular, the detection of obstacles can
warning function. be impaired if:
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover-
Function ing the sensors
X To activate/deactivate: activate or deac-
Rthere is snow or heavy rain
tivate the distance warning function in the
Rthere is interference by other radar sources
on-board computer (Y page 283).
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for
If the distance warning function is not activa- example in parking garages
ted, the æ symbol appears in the assis-
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
tance graphics display.
motorbike
The distance warning function can help you to
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
minimize the risk of a front-end collision with
relative to the center of your vehicle
a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such
Rnew vehicles or after the COLLISION PRE-
a collision. If the distance warning function
detects that there is a risk of a collision, you VENTION ASSIST system has been serv-
will be warned visually and acoustically. The iced
distance warning function cannot prevent a Observe the notes in the section on break-
collision without your intervention. ing-in (Y page 166).
Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h), Following damage to the front end of the vehi-
the distance warning function warns you if cle, have the configuration and operation of
you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An the radar sensor checked at a qualified spe-
intermittent warning tone will then sound, cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-

Z
 72 Driving safety systems

sions at low speeds where there is no visible Should you approach an obstacle and Adap-
damage to the front of the vehicle. tive Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli-
sion, Adaptive Brake Assist calculates the
Adaptive Brake Assist braking force necessary to avoid a rear-end
collision. Should you apply the brakes vigo-
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- rously, Adaptive Brake Assist will automati-
Safety

tion (Y page 68). cally increase the braking force to a level suit-
G WARNING able for the traffic conditions.
Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
identify objects and complex traffic situa- emergency braking situation is over.
tions. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist may: The brakes will work normally again if:
Rintervene unnecessarily Ryou release the brake pedal.
Rnot intervene Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision.
There is a risk of an accident. Rno obstacle is detected in front of your
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- vehicle.
uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.
intervention in a non-critical driving situation. Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: if adaptive Brake
Assist requires particularly high brake pres-
G WARNING sure, preventive passenger protection meas-
Adaptive Brake Assist does not react: ures (PRE-SAFE®) are deployed simultane-
Rto people or animals ously.
Rto oncoming vehicles Up to vehicle speeds of around 155 mph
Rto crossing traffic (250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capable
Rto stationary obstacles
of reacting to moving objects that have
already been recognized as such at least once
Rwhen cornering
over the period of observation. Adaptive
As a result, Adaptive Brake Assist may not Brake Assist does not react to stationary
intervene in all critical conditions. There is a obstacles.
risk of an accident. If Adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the
uation and be ready to brake. brake system remains available with full
brake boosting effect and BAS.
Due to the nature of the system, particularly
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
complicated but non-critical driving condi-
be impaired if there is:
tions may also cause Brake Assist to inter-
vene. Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover-
Adaptive Brake Assist aids you in braking dur- ing the sensors
ing hazardous situations at speeds above Rthere is snow or heavy rain
4 mph (7 km/h) and uses the radar sensor Rthere is interference by other radar sources
system to evaluate the traffic situation. Rthere are strong radar reflections, for
With the help of Adaptive Brake Assist, the example in parking garages
distance warning signal can detect obstacles Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
that are in the path of your vehicle for an motorbike
extended period of time.
 Driving safety systems 73

Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line Off-road 4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-
relative to the center of your vehicle tem)
Rnew vehicles or after the COLLISION PRE-
A 4ETS system specifically suited to off-road
VENTION ASSIST system has been serv- terrain is activated automatically once the off-
iced road program is activated (Y page 259).

Safety
Observe the notes in the section on break-
ing-in (Y page 166). Important safety notes
Following damage to the front end of the vehi-
cle, have the configuration and operation of G WARNING
the radar sensor checked at a qualified spe- If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to
cialist workshop. This also applies to colli- stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-
sions at low speeds where there is no visible ing safety systems are deactivated. This
damage to the front of the vehicle. increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
! Only operate the vehicle for a maximum of
General notes ten seconds on a brake test dynamometer.
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- Switch off the ignition.
tion (Y page 68). Application of the brakes by ESP® may oth-
ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, erwise destroy the brake system.
i.e. power transmission between the tires and ! A function or performance test should
the road surface. only be carried out on a two-axle dyna-
If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating mometer. Before you operate the vehicle
from the direction desired by the driver, one on such a dynamometer, please consult a
or more wheels are braked to stabilize the qualified workshop. You could otherwise
vehicle. The engine output is also modified to damage the drive train or the brake system.
keep the vehicle on the desired course within ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp
physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when in the instrument cluster lights up continu-
pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® ously when the engine is running.
can also stabilize the vehicle during braking. If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warn-
ing lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) available due to a malfunction.
4ETS traction control is part of ESP®. Observe the information on warning lamps
Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi- (Y page 331) and display messages which
vidually if they spin. This enables you to pull may be shown in the instrument cluster
away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for (Y page 293).
example if the road surface is slippery on one i Only use wheels with the recommended
side. In addition, more drive torque is trans- tire sizes. Only then will ESP® function
ferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. properly.
Traction control remains active, even if you
deactivate ESP®.
In appropriate driving situations, activate the
off-road program (Y page 259).

Z
 74 Driving safety systems

Characteristics of ESP® It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol-

lowing situations:
General information
Rwhen using snow chains
If the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out before
Rindeep snow
beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically
Ron sand or gravel
active.
Safety

If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations
lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. described above no longer apply. ESP® will
If ESP® intervenes: otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehi-
cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel
X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum- starts to spin.
stances.
X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an
necessary when pulling away. extended period with ESP® deactivated.
You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevail-
ing road and weather conditions. Deactivating/activating ESP®
ECO start/stop function
The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically when the vehicle
stops moving. The engine starts automati-
cally when the driver wants to pull away again.
ESP® remains in its previously selected sta-
tus. Example: if ESP® was deactivated before
the engine was switched off, ESP® remains
deactivated when the engine is switched on
again.
X To switch off: press button :.
Deactivating/activating ESP® The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.
Important safety notes
You can select between the following states X To switch on: press button :.
of ESP®: The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
RESP® is activated.
RESP® is deactivated. Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated
If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels
G WARNING
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-
the instrument cluster flashes. In such situa-
bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
tions, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.
of skidding and an accident.
If you deactivate ESP®:
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-
bed in the following. RESP® no longer improves driving stability.
Rengine torque is no longer limited and the
drive wheels are able to spin.
 Driving safety systems 75

The spinning of the wheels results in a cut- ESP® trailer stabilization does not work if
ting action for better traction on loose sur- ESP® is deactivated or disabled because of a
faces. malfunction.
Rtraction control is still activated.
RESP® still provides support when you Crosswind Assist

Safety
brake.
General information
Off-road ESP®
(vehicles with Off-Road Strong crosswinds can cause your vehicle to
Engineering package) deviate from a straight course. The crosswind
driving assistance function integrated into
An ESP® system specifically suited to off-road ESP® significantly reduces these effects.
terrain is activated automatically once the off- ESP® intervenes automatically according to
road program is activated (Y page 259). the direction and intensity of the crosswinds
Off-road ESP® intervenes with a delay if there affecting your vehicle.
is oversteering or understeering, thus improv- ESP stabilities the vehicle with braking inter-
ing traction. ventions to assist you in keeping the vehicle
in the lane.
ESP® trailer stabilization Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds
above 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving
General information
straight ahead or cornering gently.
ESP® trailer stabilization is not available in
AMG vehicles. Important safety notes
If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to Crosswind Assist does not work if ESP® is
swerve, ESP® assists you in this situation. deactivated or disabled because of a mal-
ESP® slows the vehicle down by braking and function.
limiting the engine output until the vehicle/
trailer combination has stabilized.
EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu-
Important safety notes tion)
G WARNING General information
If road and weather conditions are poor,
trailer stabilization will not be able to prevent EBD monitors and controls the brake pres-
the vehicle/trailer combination from swerv- sure on the rear wheels to improve driving
ing. Trailers with a high center of gravity can stability while braking.
tip over before ESP® can detect this. There is
a risk of an accident. Important safety notes
Always adapt your driving style to the prevail- i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
ing road and weather conditions. tion for driving safety systems (Y page 68).
If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer G WARNING
combination) begins to lurch, you can only If EBD has malfunctioned, the rear wheels can
stabilize the vehicle/trailer combination by still lock, e.g. under full braking. This increa-
depressing the brake firmly. ses the risk of skidding and an accident.
Trailer stabilisation is active above speeds of You should therefore adapt your driving style
about 37 mph (60 km/h). to the different handling characteristics. Have

Z
 76 Driving safety systems

the brake system checked at a qualified spe- a collision unless you also brake. Automatic
cialist workshop. emergency braking cannot prevent a colli-
sion. There is a risk of an accident.
Observe information regarding indicator and Always apply the brakes yourself and try to
warning lamps (Y page 329) as well as dis- take evasive action.
play messages (Y page 295).
Safety

G WARNING
ADAPTIVE BRAKE PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly iden-
tify objects and complex traffic conditions.
ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may:
and offers increased braking comfort. In addi-
tion to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE Rgive an unnecessary warning and then
also has the HOLD function (Y page 218) and brake the vehicle
hill start assist (Y page 171). Rnot give a warning or intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
PRE-SAFE® Brake situation and be ready to brake, especially if
General information PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate the
intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 68). In order to maintain the appropriate distance
to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a col-
PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles
lision, you must apply the brakes yourself.
with DISTRONIC PLUS.
For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driv- G WARNING
ing, the radar sensor system must be opera- PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react:
tional. Rto people or animals
With the help of the radar sensor system, Rto oncoming vehicles
PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles that Rto crossing traffic
are in front of your vehicle for an extended
Rwhen cornering
period of time.
PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimize As a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neither
the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead, and give warnings nor intervene in all critical sit-
reduce the effects of such a collision. If PRE- uations. There is a risk of an accident.
SAFE® Brake has detected a risk of collision, Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
you will be warned visually and acoustically as uation and be ready to brake.
well as by automatic braking. PRE-SAFE®
In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-
Brake cannot prevent a collision without your
ognition can be impaired.
intervention.
Recognition by the radar sensor system is
Important safety notes also impaired in the event of:
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover-
G WARNING ing the sensors
PRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehi- Rinterference by other radar sources
cle by a partial application of the brakes if a Rstrong radar reflections, for example in
danger of collision is detected. There may be parking garages
 Driving safety systems 77

Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front
motorbike remains and you do not brake, take evasive
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle
relative to the center of your vehicle may perform automatic emergency braking,
Following damage to the front end of the vehi- up to the point of full brake application. Auto-
matic emergency braking is not performed

Safety
cle, have the configuration and operation of
the radar sensors checked at a qualified spe- until immediately prior to an imminent acci-
cialist workshop. This also applies to colli- dent.
sions at low speeds where there is no visible You can prevent the intervention of the PRE-
damage to the front of the vehicle. SAFE® Brake at any time by:
Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further.
Function Ractivating kickdown.
X To activate/deactivate: activate or deac- Rreleasing the brake pedal.
tivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is
computer (Y page 284). ended automatically if:
If the PRE-SAFE® Brake is not activated, the Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle.
æ symbol appears in the multifunction
Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision.
display.
Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in
Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h),
front of your vehicle.
this function warns you if you rapidly
approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent If you have activated DSR (Y page 258), PRE-
warning tone will then sound and the · SAFE® Brake is deactivated.
distance warning lamp will light up in the
instrument cluster.
STEER CONTROL
X Brake immediately to defuse the situation.
or General information
X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a
so. noticeable steering force to the steering
PRE-SAFE® Brake can also brake the vehicle wheel in the direction required for vehicle
automatically under the following conditions: stabilization.
Rthe driver and front-passenger have their This steering assistance is provided in partic-
seat belts fastened ular if:
and Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on

Rthe vehicle speed is between approx-

a wet or slippery road surface when you
imately 4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph brake.
(200 km/h) Rthe vehicle starts to skid.

At speeds of up to approximately 40 mph

(70 km/h) PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detect
Important safety notes
stationary objects. Examples of stationary i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
objects are stopped or parked vehicles. tion (Y page 68).
i If there is an increased risk of collision,
preventive passenger protection measures
(PRE-SAFE®) are activated.

Z
 78 Theft deterrent locking system

No steering support is provided from STEER ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

CONTROL, if:
RESP® is malfunctioning.
Rthe lighting is faulty.
Power steering will, however, continue to
Safety

function.

Theft deterrent locking system

Immobilizer
X To activate with the SmartKey: remove X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey
the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or KEYLESS-GO.
X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm sys-
ignition off and open the driver's door. tem is armed after approximately
X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. 15 seconds.
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from X To deactivate using the SmartKey:
being started without the correct SmartKey. unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the or
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Any- X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
one can start the engine if a valid SmartKey X To deactivate using KEYLESS-GO: unlock
has been left inside the vehicle.
the vehicle with KEYLESS-GO.
i The immobilizer is always deactivated or
when you start the engine. X Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-
In the event that the engine cannot be star- board. The SmartKey must be inside the
ted when the starter battery is fully vehicle.
charged, the immobilizer may be faulty.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the alarm system is armed and you open:
USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). Ra door
Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key
Rthe tailgate
Rthe hood
X To turn the alarm off with the SmartKey:
press the % or & button on the
SmartKey.
The alarm is switched off.
or
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
The alarm is switched off.
 Theft deterrent locking system 79

X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:

grasp the outside door handle. The Smart-
Key must be outside the vehicle.
The alarm is switched off.
or

Safety
X Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-
board. The SmartKey must be inside the
vehicle.
The alarm is switched off.
The alarm is not switched off, even if you
close the open door that triggered it, for
example.
i If the alarm continues for more than
30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call
system automatically notifies the Cus-
tomer Assistance Center. This is done
either by text message or data connection.
The emergency call system sends the mes-
sage or data provided that:
Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace ser-
vice.
Rthe mbrace service has been activated
properly.
Rthe necessary mobile phone network is
available.

Z
80
 81

Useful information .............................. 82

SmartKey ............................................. 82
Doors .................................................... 88
Cargo compartment ............................ 91
Side windows ...................................... 95
Sliding sunroof .................................... 99

Opening and closing

 82 SmartKey

Useful information G WARNING

If you attach heavy or large objects to the
i This Operator's Manual describes all SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-
models and all standard and optional equip- tionally turned in the ignition lock. This could
ment of your vehicle available at the time of cause the engine to be switched off. There is a
publication of the Operator's Manual. risk of an accident.
Country-specific differences are possible. Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the
Please note that your vehicle may not be SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before
Opening and closing

equipped with all features described. This inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
also applies to safety-related systems and
functions. ! Keep the SmartKey away from strong
i Read the information on qualified special- magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote
ist workshops (Y page 29). control function could be affected.
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the
vicinity of powerful electrical installations.
SmartKey Do not keep the SmartKey:
Important safety notes Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile
phone or another SmartKey
G WARNING Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, foil
they could:
Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other This can affect the functionality of the
people or road users. SmartKey.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key in the tem-
Roperate the vehicle's equipment. perature-controlled cup holder. Otherwise,
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in the KEYLESS-GO key will not be recognized.
motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease the parking brake.
SmartKey functions
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
RStart the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.

G WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected : & To lock the vehicle
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or ; F To open/close the tailgate
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even = % To unlock the vehicle
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
X To unlock centrally: press button =.
vehicle.
 SmartKey 83

If you do not open the vehicle within KEYLESS-GO checks whether a valid Smart-
approximately 40 seconds of unlocking: Key is in the vehicle by periodically establish-
Rthe vehicle is locked again. ing a radio connection between the vehicle
and the SmartKey. This happens:
Rthe theft deterrent locking system is
armed again. Rwhen the external door handles are
touched
X To lock centrally: press button :.
Rwhen starting the engine
The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks: Rwhile the vehicle is in motion

Opening and closing

Rthe doors
Rthe tailgate
Rthe fuel filler flap
The turn signals flash once when unlocking
and three times when locking.
You can also set an audible signal to confirm
that the vehicle has been locked. The audible
signal can be activated and deactivated using
the on-board computer (Y page 287).
When it is dark, the surround lighting also
comes on if it is activated in the on-board X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner
computer (Y page 286).
surface of the door handle.
X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor sur-

KEYLESS-GO face :.
X Convenience closing feature: touch
General notes recessed sensor surface ; for an exten-
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by ded period.
any of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEY- Further information on the convenience clos-
LESS-GO key in the vehicle. ing feature (Y page 97).
If you pull on the handle of the tailgate, only
Locking/unlocking centrally the cargo compartment of the vehicle is
You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using unlocked.
KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry
the SmartKey with you. You can combine the
functions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a con- Changing the settings of the locking
ventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by system
using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it You can change the settings of the locking
using the & button on the SmartKey. system. This means that only the driver's door
When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the
the distance between the SmartKey and the vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you fre-
corresponding door handle must not be quently travel on your own.
greater than 3 ft (1 m). X To change the setting: press and hold
down the % and & buttons simulta-
neously for approximately six seconds until

Z
 84 SmartKey

the battery check lamp flashes twice There are several ways to turn off the alarm:
(Y page 85). X To deactivate the alarm with the Smart-
i If the setting of the locking system is Key: press the % or & button on the
changed within the signal range of the vehi- SmartKey.
cle, pressing the & or % button: or
Rlocks
or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
Runlocks the vehicle or
Opening and closing

The SmartKey now functions as follows: X To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESS-
X To unlock the driver's door: press the GO: press the Start/Stop button in the igni-
% button once. tion lock. The SmartKey must be in the
X To unlock centrally: press the % but-
vehicle.
ton twice. or
X To lock centrally: press the & button.
X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-
GO. The SmartKey must be outside the
The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol- vehicle.
lows:
If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical
X To unlock the driver's door: touch the key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked
inner surface of the door handle on the automatically.
driver's door.
X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the
X To unlock centrally: touch the inner sur-
SmartKey into the ignition lock.
face of the door handle on the front-
passenger door or the rear door.
Removing the mechanical key
X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor
surface on one of the door handles
(Y page 83).
X To restore the factory settings: press
and hold down the % and & buttons
simultaneously for approximately six sec-
onds until the battery check lamp flashes
twice (Y page 85).

Mechanical key
General notes X Push release catch : in the direction of
the arrow and at the same time remove
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or mechanical key ; from the SmartKey.
unlocked with the SmartKey, use the
For further information about:
mechanical key.
Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 90)
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm Runlocking the cargo compartment
system will be triggered (Y page 78). (Y page 95)
Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 90)
 SmartKey 85

Inserting the mechanical key The battery is discharged if battery check

lamp : does not light up briefly.
X Push mechanical key ; completely into
X Change the battery (Y page 85).
the SmartKey until it engages and release
catch : is back in its basic position. i If the SmartKey battery is checked within
the signal reception range of the vehicle,
pressing the & or % button:
SmartKey battery Rlocks or

Opening and closing

Runlocks the vehicle
Important safety notes
i You can get a battery at any qualified spe-
G WARNING cialist workshop.
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-
ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in Replacing the battery
severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal
injury. You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention Key (Y page 84).
immediately.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have

the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate
material, which may require special handling
and regard for the environment. National
guidelines must be observed during disposal.
In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/Hazard-
ousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.
X Press mechanical key ; into the opening
Checking the battery in the SmartKey in the direction of the
arrow until battery compartment cover :
opens. Do not hold battery compartment
cover : closed while doing so.
X Remove battery compartment cover :.

X Press the & or % button.

The battery is working properly if battery
check lamp : lights up briefly.

Z
 86 SmartKey

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your

palm until battery = falls out.
X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-
minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth
to do so.
X Make sure that the surface of the battery is
free of lint, grease and other contaminants.
Opening and closing

X Insert the front tabs of battery compart-

ment cover : into the housing first and
then press to close it.
X Insert mechanical key ; into the Smart-
Key.
X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons
on the vehicle.
 SmartKey 87

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

You cannot lock or The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
unlock the vehicle X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control
using the SmartKey. function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the
driver's door handle from close range and press the % or

Opening and closing

& button.
If this does not work:
X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 85) and replace it if nec-
essary (Y page 85).
X Lock (Y page 90) or unlock (Y page 90) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.

The SmartKey is faulty.

X Lock (Y page 90) or unlock (Y page 90) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lock There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
or unlock the vehicle X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of
using KEYLESS-GO. the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door
handle from close range and press the % or & button.

There is a malfunction with KEYLESS-GO.

X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of
the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door
handle from close range and press the % or & button.
X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

If this does not work:

X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 85) and replace it if nec-
essary (Y page 85).
X Lock (Y page 90) or unlock (Y page 90) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.

You have lost a Smart- X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist work-
Key. shop.
X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost the X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
mechanical key. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

Z
 88 Doors

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low.
started using the X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
SmartKey. lighting, and try to start the engine again.
If this does not work:
X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary
Opening and closing

(Y page 395).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 397).
or
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot be A door is open. Therefore, the SmartKey cannot be detected as
started using KEYLESS- easily.
GO. The SmartKey is in X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again.
the vehicle.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

Doors G WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected
Important safety notes
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
G WARNING cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
they could: vehicle.
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
G WARNING
people or road users.
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip
Roperate the vehicle's equipment. over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-
motion if, for example, they: larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-
Rrelease the parking brake. den change in direction.
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of Always store objects so that they cannot be
park position P flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping before the
RStart the engine.
journey.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the You should preferably place luggage or loads
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never in the cargo compartment. Observe the load-
leave children or animals unattended in the ing guidelines (Y page 342).
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
 Doors 89

Unlocking and opening doors from

the inside
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked. You can only open
the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they
are not secured by the child-proof locks
(Y page 67).

Opening and closing

If the vehicle has been locked with the Smart-
Key or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from
the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm sys-
tem. Switch off the alarm (Y page 78). : To unlock
; To lock
X To unlock: press button :.
X To lock: press button ;.
If the front-passenger door is closed, the
vehicle locks.
Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be
locked or unlocked.
You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from
the inside if the vehicle has been locked with
the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
X Front door: pull door handle ;. You can open a front door from inside the
If the door is locked, locking knob : pops vehicle even if it has been locked.
up. The door is unlocked and can be If the vehicle has been locked using the lock-
opened. ing button for the central locking, or has been
X Rear door: pull up locking knob : on the locked automatically, and a door is opened
relevant rear door. from the inside:
The rear door is unlocked and can be Rthe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had
opened. previously been fully unlocked
Ronly the door which has been opened form
the inside is unlocked if only the driver's
Centrally locking and unlocking the door had been previously unlocked
vehicle from the inside
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle
from the inside. The buttons are located on
both front doors.

Z
 90 Doors

Automatic locking feature Unlocking the driver's door (mechan-

ical key)
If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with
the SmartKey, use the mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm
system will be triggered (Y page 78).
Opening and closing

X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-

Key (Y page 84).
X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of
the driver's door as far as it will go.
X To disarm: press and hold button : for
about five seconds until a tone sounds.
X To arm: press and hold button ; for about
five seconds until a tone sounds.
i If you press one of the two buttons and do
not hear a tone, the relevant setting has
already been selected.
The vehicle is locked automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are
turning.
You could therefore be locked out if: X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise
to position 1.
Rthe vehicle is being pushed. The door is unlocked.
Rthe vehicle is being towed.
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove
Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer. it.
You can also switch the automatic locking X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-
function on and off using the on-board com- Key.
puter (Y page 287).

Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)

Power closing
If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the
Power closing pulls the doors and trunk lid SmartKey, use the mechanical key.
into their locks automatically even if they are
X Open the driver's door.
only partly closed.
X Close the front-passenger door, the rear
X To power close a door: push the door into
doors and the tailgate.
the lock up to the first detent position.
X Press the locking button (Y page 89).
Power closing will pull the door fully closed.
X Check whether the locking knobs on the
X To power close the tailgate: lightly press
the tailgate downwards. front-passenger door and the rear doors
Power closing will pull the tailgate fully are still visible. Press down the locking
closed. knobs by hand, if necessary.
X Close the driver's door.
 Cargo compartment 91

X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart- Turn off the engine before opening the tail-
Key (Y page 84). gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of
the driver's door as far as it will go. G WARNING
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-

Opening and closing

larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-
den change in direction.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping before the
journey.

X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the
it will go to position 1. rear when opened. Therefore, make sure
that there is sufficient clearance above and
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove
behind the tailgate.
it.
X Make sure that the doors and the tailgate i Tailgate opening dimensions
are locked. (Y page 455).
X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart- You should preferably place luggage or loads
Key. in the cargo compartment. Observe the load-
ing guidelines (Y page 342).
i If you lock the vehicle as described above,
Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargo com-
the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-
partment. You could otherwise lock yourself
theft alarm system is not armed.
out.
You can:
Cargo compartment Rclose the tailgate manually from outside
Ropen and close the tailgate automatically
Important safety notes
from outside
G WARNING Ropen and close the tailgate automatically
If persons, particularly children are subjected from inside
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or Rlimit the opening angle of the tailgate
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even Runlock the tailgate from inside with the
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the emergency release
vehicle.

G WARNING Tailgate reversing feature

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate On vehicles with tailgate remote closing fea-
is open when the engine is running, particu- ture, the tailgate is equipped with automatic
larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes obstacle recognition with a reversing feature.
could enter the passenger compartment. If a solid object blocks or restricts the tailgate
There is a risk of poisoning. when automatically opening or closing, this

Z
 92 Cargo compartment

procedure is stopped. If the tailgate is stop- Closing

ped during the closing procedure, it will open
again automatically. The automatic obstacle
recognition with reversing function is only an
aid. It is not a substitute for your attentive-
ness when opening and closing the tailgate.
G WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
Opening and closing

Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-

gers
Rover the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closing
movement X Pull the tailgate down using recess :.
This means that the reversing feature cannot X Allow the tailgate to drop into the lock.
prevent someone being trapped in these sit- X Lock the vehicle if necessary with the &
uations. There is a risk of injury.
button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-
Make sure that no body parts are in close GO.
proximity during the closing procedure.
If somebody becomes trapped: i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the
cargo compartment, the tailgate will not
Rpress the F button on the SmartKey, or
lock.
Rpress the remote operating switch on the
driver’s door, or
Rpress the closing or locking button on the Opening/closing automatically from
tailgate, or outside
Rpull the handle on the tailgate
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Opening and closing manually from Parts of the body could become trapped dur-
outside ing automatic closing of the tailgate. More-
over, people, e.g. children, may be standing in
Opening
the closing area or may enter the closing area
during the closing process. There is a risk of
injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
closing area during the closing process.
Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process:
Rpress the F button on the SmartKey.
Rpress the remote operating switch on the
driver's door.
Rpress the closing or locking button on the
X Press the % button on the SmartKey. tailgate.
X Pull handle : and release it. Rpull the handle on the tailgate.
The tailgate opens automatically.
 Cargo compartment 93

G WARNING Rpress the closing or locking button on the

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust tailgate.
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate Rpull the handle on the tailgate.
is open when the engine is running, particu-
larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes
could enter the passenger compartment.
There is a risk of poisoning.
Turn off the engine before opening the tail-

Opening and closing

gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

! The tailgate swings upwards and to the

rear when opened. Therefore, make sure
that there is sufficient clearance above and
behind the tailgate.
i Tailgate opening dimensions Closing and locking button (example: vehicle with
(Y page 455). KEYLESS-GO)

i Notes on the reversing feature for the tail- X To close: press closing button : on the
gate (Y page 91). tailgate.
or
Opening the tailgate automatically X Press and hold the F button on the
SmartKey until the tailgate closes.
You can open the tailgate automatically with
the SmartKey or the handle in the tailgate. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: you can simulta-
X Press and hold the F button on the neously close and lock the tailgate.
SmartKey until the tailgate opens. XPress locking button ; on the tailgate.
or If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected outside
X If the tailgate is unlocked, pull the handle the vehicle, the tailgate closes and locks.
and let it go again immediately. All the doors must be shut and the Smart-
Key located in the vicinity of the tailgate.
Closing the tailgate automatically i The tailgate cannot be opened and closed
with the SmartKey if there is a SmartKey in
G WARNING the ignition.
Parts of the body could become trapped dur- If the tailgate touches an object while clos-
ing automatic closing of the tailgate. More- ing, the closing procedure is interrupted
over, people, e.g. children, may be standing in and the tailgate reopens.
the closing area or may enter the closing area
i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the
during the closing process. There is a risk of
cargo compartment, the tailgate will not
injury.
lock.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
closing area during the closing process.
Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process:
Rpress the F button on the SmartKey.
Rpress the remote operating switch on the
driver's door.

Z
 94 Cargo compartment

Opening/closing automatically from Opening and closing

inside
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped dur-
ing automatic closing of the tailgate. More-
over, people, e.g. children, may be standing in
Opening and closing

the closing area or may enter the closing area

during the closing process. There is a risk of
injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
closing area during the closing process. You can open and close the tailgate from the
driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary
Use one of the following options to stop the
and unlocked.
closing process:
X To open: pull remote operating switch :
Rpress the F button on the SmartKey.
for the tailgate until the tailgate opens.
Rpress the remote operating switch on the X To close: turn the SmartKey to position 1
driver's door.
or 2 in the ignition lock.
Rpress the closing or locking button on the
X Press remote operating switch for tail-
tailgate.
gate : until the tailgate is closed.
Rpull the handle on the tailgate.

G WARNING Limiting the opening angle of the tail-

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gate
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate
is open when the engine is running, particu- Important safety notes
larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes
! Make sure there is sufficient clearance to
could enter the passenger compartment.
open the tailgate fully when setting the
There is a risk of poisoning.
opening angle. The tailgate could otherwise
Turn off the engine before opening the tail- be damaged. Ideally, set the opening angle
gate. Never drive with the tailgate open. outside.
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the
Activating
rear when opened. Therefore, make sure
that there is sufficient clearance above and You can limit the opening angle of the tail-
behind the tailgate. gate. This is possible in the top half of its
i Tailgate opening dimensions opening range, up to approximately 4 in
(Y page 455). (10 cm) before the stop.
This could be useful, for example, if there is
i Notes on the reversing feature for the tail- insufficient space above the tailgate.
gate (Y page 91).
X To open the tailgate: pull the handle on
the tailgate.
X To stop the opening procedure at the
desired position: press the closing button
 Side windows 95

(Y page 92) in the tailgate or pull the handle X Turn mechanical key ; 90° clockwise.
on the outside of the tailgate again. X Push mechanical key ; in the direction of
X To store the position: press and hold the the arrow and open the tailgate.
closing button in the tailgate until you hear X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-
a short tone. Key.
The opening angle limiter is activated. The
tailgate will now stop in the stored position i When you lock the vehicle (Y page 90),
when opening. the cargo compartment is also locked.

Opening and closing

Deactivating
Side windows
X Press and hold the closing button
(Y page 92) in the tailgate until you hear Important safety notes
two short tones. G WARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts
could become trapped between the side win-
Tailgate emergency release dow and the door frame as the side window
Important safety notes moves. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody touches the side win-
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the dow during the opening procedure. If some-
rear when opened. Therefore, make sure body becomes trapped, release the switch or
that there is sufficient clearance above and pull the switch to close the side window again.
behind the tailgate.
i Tailgate opening dimensions G WARNING
(Y page 455). While closing the side windows, body parts in
the closing area could become trapped. There
If the tailgate can no longer be opened from
is a risk of injury.
outside the vehicle, use the emergency
release on the inside of the tailgate. When closing make sure that no parts of the
body are in the closing area. If somebody
Opening becomes trapped, release the switch or press
the switch to open the side window again.

G WARNING
If children operate the side windows they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
Activate the override feature for the rear side
windows. When leaving the vehicle, always
take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi-
cle. Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.
X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-
Key (Y page 84).
Side window reversing feature
X Insert mechanical key ; into the opening
in paneling :. The side windows are equipped with an auto-
matic reversing feature. If a solid object
Z
 96 Side windows

blocks or restricts a side window during the = Rear right

closing process, the side window opens again ? Rear left
automatically. However, the automatic
reversing feature is only an aid and does not X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
relieve you of the responsibility of paying ignition lock.
attention when closing a side window. X To open: press the corresponding switch.
X To close: pull the corresponding switch.
G WARNING
The reversing feature does not react: i If you press/pull the switch beyond the
Opening and closing

point of resistance, automatic operation is

Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
started in the corresponding direction. You
gers can stop automatic operation by pressing/
Rover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closing pulling the switch again.
movement
i You can continue to operate the side win-
Rduring resetting
dows after you switch off the engine or
Rwhen closing the side window again man- remove the SmartKey. This function is
ually immediately after automatic reversing available for up to five minutes or until the
This means that the reversing feature cannot driver's or front-passenger door is opened.
prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
uations. There is a risk of injury.
i The side windows cannot be operated
from the rear when the override feature for
Make sure that no body parts are in close the side windows is activated (Y page 67).
proximity during the closing procedure. If
someone becomes trapped, press the switch
to open the side window again. Opening and closing the hinged side
windows
Opening and closing the side win- Opening and closing
dows The hinged side windows are operated elec-
The switches for all side windows are located trically from the from the driver's seat.
on the driver's door. There is also a switch on
each door for the corresponding side window.
The switches on the driver's door take prec-
edence.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position

1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
X To open fully: press switch : and release.

: Front left
; Front right
 Side windows 97

X To close fully: pull switch : and release. X Press and hold the % button again until
X To stop the closing procedure: press the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
switch : again. panel is in the desired position.
Both hinged side windows open fully. X To interrupt convenience opening:

i If the hinged side windows are blocked release the % button.

when closing, the closing procedure is
interrupted and the hinged side windows
open again fully. Convenience closing feature

Opening and closing

Important safety notes
Convenience opening G WARNING
General notes When the convenience closing feature is oper-
ating, parts of the body could become trapped
You can ventilate the vehicle before you start in the closing area of the side window and the
driving. To do this, the SmartKey is used to sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
carry out the following functions simultane- Observe the complete closing procedure
ously: when the convenience closing feature is oper-
Runlock the vehicle ating. Make sure that no body parts are in
Ropen the side windows close proximity during the closing procedure.
Ropen the hinged side windows
When you lock the vehicle, you can simulta-
Ropen the sliding sunroof or the panorama
neously:
roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the
Rclose the side windows
roller sunblinds
Rclose the hinged side windows
Rswitch on the seat ventilation for the driv-
er's seat Rclose the sliding sunroof or the panorama
roof with power tilt/sliding panel
i The convenience opening feature can
On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
only be operated using the SmartKey. The
tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the
SmartKey must be close to the vehicle. For
roller sunblinds.
vehicles without KEYLESS-GO, the Smart-
Key must be near the driver's door handle. Proceed as follows if someone is trapped:
RRelease the & button to interrupt the
Convenience opening closing procedure.
RPress and hold the % button to open.
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: point the
tip of the SmartKey at the door handle on Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
the driver's door. RRelease the sensor surfaces on the exterior
X Press and hold the % button until the door handle to interrupt the closing proce-
side windows and the sliding sunroof or the dure.
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding RTo open, pull the same door handle imme-
panel are in the desired position. diately and hold it firmly. The door windows
If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof and the sliding sunroof will open for as long
with power tilt/sliding panel are closed, the as the door handle is held but the door is
roller sunblinds are opened first. not opened.

Z
 98 Side windows

i Notes on the automatic reversing feature sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with
for: power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.
Rthe side window (Y page 95) i Make sure you only touch recessed sen-
Rthe sliding sunroof (Y page 100) sor surface :.
X Make sure that all the side windows and the
Using the SmartKey sliding sunroof or panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel are closed.
The SmartKey must be in the vicinity of the
Opening and closing

vehicle, on vehicles without KEYLESS-GO the On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
SmartKey must be near the door handle. tilt/sliding panel:
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: point the X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the
tip of the SmartKey at the door handle on door handle again until the roller sunblinds
the driver's door. of the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-
X Press and hold the & button until the ing panel close.
side windows and the sliding sunroof or the X To interrupt convenience closing:
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding release recessed sensor surface : on the
panel are fully closed. door handle.
X Make sure that all the side windows and the
sliding sunroof or panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel are closed. Resetting the side windows
On vehicles with a panorama roof with power If a side window can no longer be closed fully,
tilt/sliding panel: you must reset it.
X Press and hold the & button again until X Close all the doors.
the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
with power tilt/sliding panel close. ignition lock.
X To interrupt convenience closing: X Pull the corresponding switch on the door
release the & button. control panel until the side window is com-
pletely closed. (Y page 96)
Using KEYLESS-GO X Hold the switch for an additional second.

The KEYLESS-GO key must be outside the If the side window opens again slightly:
vehicle. All the doors must be closed. X Immediately pull the corresponding switch
on the door control panel until the side win-
dow is completely closed (Y page 96).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
X If the corresponding side window remains
closed after the button has been released,
the side window has been reset correctly. If
this is not the case, repeat the steps above
again.

X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the

door handle until the side windows and the
 Sliding sunroof 99

Problems with the side windows

G WARNING
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window
closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the
body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release

Opening and closing

the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

A side window cannot X Remove the objects.
be closed because it is X Close the side window.
blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window
guide.
A side window cannot If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again
be closed and you can- slightly:
not see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed with increased force.
If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens
again slightly:
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.

Sliding sunroof If somebody becomes trapped:

Important safety notes Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rduring automatic operation, push the
Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding
switch briefly in any direction
sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel. In this section, the term "sliding The opening or closing procedure will be stop-
sunroof" refers to both types of sliding sun- ped.
roof.
G WARNING
G WARNING If children operate the sliding sunroof they
While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, could become trapped, particularly if they are
body parts in close proximity could become left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
trapped. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the
Make sure that no body parts are in close SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
proximity during the opening and closing pro- leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
cedures.

Z
100 Sliding sunroof

! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of Operating the sliding sunroof
snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may
occur. Opening and closing
Do not allow anything to protrude from the
sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could
be damaged.
i Resonance noises can occur in addition to
the usual airflow noises when the sliding
Opening and closing

sunroof is open. They are caused by minor

pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.
Change the position of the sliding sunroof
or open a side window. The noise will be
reduced or eliminated.
Overhead control panel
: To raise
Sliding sunroof reversing feature
; To open
The sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto- = To close/lower
matic reversing feature. If a solid object
blocks or restricts the sliding sunroof during X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
the closing process, the sliding sunroof opens ignition lock.
again automatically. However, the automatic X Press or pull the 2 switch in the corre-
reversing feature is only an aid and does not sponding direction.
relieve you of the responsibility of paying i If you press the 2 switch beyond the
attention when closing the sliding sunroof. point of resistance, an automatic opening/
closing process is started in the corre-
G WARNING
sponding direction. You can stop automatic
The reversing feature does not react: operation by operating the switch again.
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- When opening and raising the roof, auto-
gers matic operation is only available if the slid-
Rover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closing ing sunroof is in the closed position.
movement The sun protection cover automatically opens
Rduring resetting along with the sliding sunroof. You can open
Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again man- or close the sun protection cover manually
ually immediately after automatic reversing when the sliding sunroof is raised or closed.
This means that the reversing feature cannot i You can continue to operate the sliding
prevent someone being trapped in these sit- sunroof after switching off the engine or
uations. There is a risk of injury. removing the SmartKey from the ignition
Make sure that no body parts are in close lock. This function is available for up to five
proximity during the closing procedure. minutes or until the driver's or front-
If somebody becomes trapped: passenger door is opened.
Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Resetting
Rduring automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction ! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be
The closing process is stopped. opened or closed fully after resetting, con-
tact a qualified specialist workshop.
 Sliding sunroof 101

Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not move The automatic raising feature is available
smoothly. only when the sliding sunroof is closed.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
Operating the roller sunblinds for the
X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
(Y page 100).
panel
X Keep the 2 switch pressed for another
second. Important safety notes

Opening and closing

X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be
G WARNING
fully opened and closed again
(Y page 100). When opening or closing the roller sunblind,
parts of the body could be trapped between
X If this is not the case, repeat the steps
the roller sunblind and the frame or sliding
above again.
sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
When opening or closing make sure that no
parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller
Operating the panorama roof with
sunblind.
power tilt/sliding panel
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rduring automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction
The opening or closing procedure will be stop-
ped.

The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interior

from sunlight. The roller sunblinds can only be
opened and closed together when the pano-
rama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is
Overhead control panel closed.
: To raise
; To open Roller sunblind reversing feature
= To close/lower The roller sunblinds are equipped with an
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding automatic reversing feature. If a solid object
panel can only be operated when the roller blocks or restricts a roller sunblind during the
sunblind is open (Y page 102). closing process, the roller sunblind opens
X To open and close: turn the SmartKey to
again automatically. However, the automatic
reversing feature is only an aid and does not
position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
relieve you of the responsibility of paying
X Press or pull the 2 switch in the corre-
attention when closing the roller sunblinds.
sponding direction.
i If you press the 2 switch beyond the G WARNING
point of resistance, an automatic opening/ The reversing feature especially does not
closing process is started in the corre- react to soft, light and thin objects such as
sponding direction. You can stop automatic small fingers. This means that the reversing
operation by operating the switch again. feature cannot prevent someone being trap-

Z
102 Sliding sunroof

ped in these situations. There is a risk of

injury.
When closing make sure that no parts of the
body are in the sweep of the roller sunblind.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rduring automatic operation, push the
Opening and closing

switch briefly in any direction

The closing process is stopped.
Overhead control panel
Opening and closing the roller sun- : To open
blinds
; To open
= To close
Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-
ing panel and the roller sunblinds if the pan-
orama roof with power tilt/sliding panel or
the roller sunblinds do not move smoothly.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Pull the 2 switch repeatedly to the point
of resistance in the direction of arrow =
until the panorama roof with power tilt/
Overhead control panel sliding panel is fully closed.
: To open X Keep the 2 switch pulled for an addi-
; To open tional second.
= To close X Pull the 2 switch repeatedly to the point
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the of resistance in the direction of arrow =
ignition lock. until the roller sunblinds are fully closed.
X Press or pull the 2 switch in the corre- X Keep the 2 switch pulled for an addi-

sponding direction. tional second.

X Make sure that the panorama roof with
i If you press/pull the 2 switch beyond
the point of resistance, automatic opera- power tilt/sliding panel (Y page 101) and
tion is started in the corresponding direc- the roller sunblinds (Y page 102) can be
tion. You can stop automatic operation by fully opened again.
pressing/pulling the switch again. X If this is not the case, repeat the steps
above again.
Resetting the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel and the roller
sunblinds
! If the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-
ing panel and the roller sunblinds cannot be
fully opened or closed after resetting, con-
tact a qualified specialist workshop.
 Sliding sunroof 103

Problems with the sliding sunroof

Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel. In this section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to both types of sliding sunroof.
G WARNING
If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding
sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts
of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of

Opening and closing

injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rduring automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction
The closing process is stopped.

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact
a qualified specialist workshop.
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The sliding sunroof can- If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens
not be closed and you again slightly:
cannot see the cause. X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 2
switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resist-
ance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and then
reopens slightly:
X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 2
switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resist-
ance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment fea-
ture.

i Note on the automatic reversing feature of the sliding sunroof (Y page 100).

Z
104
 105

Useful information ............................ 106

Correct driver's seat position .......... 106
Seats .................................................. 107
Steering wheel .................................. 119
Mirrors ............................................... 122
Memory function .............................. 124

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

106 Correct driver's seat position

Useful information X Observe the safety guidelines on seat

adjustment (Y page 107).
i This Operator's Manual describes all X Make sure that seat = is adjusted prop-
models and all standard and optional equip- erly.
ment of your vehicle available at the time of Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 108)
publication of the Operator's Manual. When adjusting the seat, make sure that:
Country-specific differences are possible.
Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag
Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This as possible.
also applies to safety-related systems and Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position.
functions. Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost

i Read the information on qualified special-
ist workshops (Y page 29). vertical position.
Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so that
your thighs are gently supported.
Correct driver's seat position Ryou can depress the pedals properly.
X Check whether the head restraint is adjus-
G WARNING ted properly.
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do When doing so, make sure that you have
the following while driving: adjusted the head restraint so that the back
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, of your head is supported at eye level by the
steering wheel or mirrors center of the head restraint. Also make
Rfasten the seat belt
sure that you have adjusted the head
restraint so that the back of your head is as
There is a risk of an accident. close to the head restraint as possible. This
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- will be the case if the head restraint is
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt adjusted correctly (Y page 109).
before starting the engine. X Observe the safety guidelines on steering
wheel adjustment (Y page 119).
X Make sure that steering wheel : is adjus-
ted properly.
Adjusting the steering wheel manually
(Y page 119)
Adjusting the steering wheel electrically
(Y page 120)
When adjusting the steering wheel, make
sure that:
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent.
Ryou can move your legs freely.
Ryou can see all the displays in the instru-
ment cluster clearly.
X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts
(Y page 46).
 Seats 107

X Check whether you have fastened seat accidentally press the electrical seat adjust-
belt ; properly (Y page 48). ment buttons and become trapped. There is a
The seat belt should: risk of injury.
Rfit snugly across your body While moving the seats, make sure that your
Rbe routed across the middle of your shoul- hands or other body parts do not get under the
der lever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-
tem.
Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip
joints
G WARNING
X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mir-
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
ror and the exterior mirrors in such a way

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
that you have a good view of road and traf-
seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
fic conditions (Y page 122).
Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one
X Vehicles with a memory function: save
has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror
settings with the memory function
G WARNING
(Y page 124).
If head restraints are not installed and adjus-
ted correctly, they cannot provide protection
as intended. There is an increased risk of
Seats injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
Important safety notes event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints instal-
G WARNING led. Before driving off, make sure for every
Children could become trapped if they adjust vehicle occupant that the center of the head
the seats, particularly when unattended. restraint supports the back of the head at
There is a risk of injury. about eye level.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never G WARNING
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The seat belt does not offer the intended level
of protection if you have not moved the back-
G WARNING rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do ing or in the event of an accident, you could
the following while driving: slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
Radjust
abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
the driver's seat, head restraint,
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
steering wheel or mirrors
injury.
Rfasten the seat belt
Adjust the seat properly before beginning
There is a risk of an accident. your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- is in an almost vertical position and that the
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt shoulder section of your seat belt is routed
before starting the engine. across the center of your shoulder.

G WARNING G WARNING
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or According to accident statistics, children are
other vehicle occupants could be trapped and safer when properly restrained on the rear
thereby injured. Children in particular could seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,

Z
108 Seats

we strongly recommend that children be For more information, contact a qualified

placed in the rear seat whenever possible. specialist workshop.
Regardless of seating position, children 12 i Further related subjects:
years old and under must be seated and prop-
RImportant safety notes on air bags
erly secured in an appropriately sized child
restraint system or booster seat recommen- (Y page 50)
ded for the size and weight of the child. For RCargo compartment enlargement (fold-
additional information, see the "Children in ing down the rear bench seat)
the vehicle" section. (Y page 346)
A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is sig- RSecuring children in the vehicle
(Y page 62)
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

nificantly increased if the child restraints are

not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the
child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. Adjusting the seats electrically

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat

heating, observe the following information:
Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If
liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as
soon as possible.
Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
switch on the seat heating. The seat
heating should also not be used to dry
the seats.
Rclean the seat covers as recommended;
: Head restraint height
see "Interior care".
; Seat cushion angle
Rdo not transport heavy loads on the
seats. Do not place sharp objects on the = Seat height
seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. ? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
The seats should only be occupied by A Backrest angle
passengers, if possible. i Vehicles with memory function: if PRE-
Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do
SAFE® has been triggered, the front-
not cover the seats with insulating mate- passenger seat will be moved to a better
rials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat cov- position if it was previously in an unfavora-
ers, child seats or booster seats. ble position.
! Make sure that there are no objects in the i You can store the seat settings using the
footwell under or behind the seats when memory function (Y page 124).
moving the seats back. There is a risk that
the seats and/or the objects could be dam-
aged. Adjusting the head restraints
i It is not possible to remove the head General notes
restraints from the front seats. The rear-
compartment head restraints, however, Pay attention to the important safety notes
can be removed (Y page 110). (Y page 107).
 Seats 109

Do not rotate the head restraints of the front There are several notches.
and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust X To move backwards: press and hold
the height and angle of the head restraints to release button : and push the head
the correct position. restraint backwards.
X When the head restraint is in the desired
Adjusting the head restraints manually position, release the button and make sure
Adjusting the head restraint height that the head restraint is engaged in posi-
tion.
i Adjust the head restraint so that the back
of your head is as close to the head

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

restraint as possible.

Adjusting the head restraints electri-

cally
X To adjust the head restraint height: slide
the switch for head restraint adjustment
(Y page 108) up or down in the direction of
the arrow.
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired position. Adjusting the luxury head restraints
X To lower: press release catch : in the
direction of the arrow and push the head
restraint down to the desired position.

Adjusting the fore/aft position of the

head restraint

X To adjust the side bolsters of the head

restraint: push or pull right and/or left-
hand side bolster : into the desired posi-
tion.
X To adjust the fore/aft position of the

With this function you can adjust the distance head restraint: push or pull the head
between the head restraint and the back of restraint in the direction of arrow ;.
the seat occupant's head. i Adjust the head restraint so that the back
X To adjust forwards: pull the head restraint
of your head is as close to the head
forwards in the direction of the arrow until restraint as possible.
it engages.

Z
110 Seats

Rear seat head restraints Rear seats (second and third row of
seats)
Adjusting the rear seat head restraint
height Important safety notes
G WARNING
If the seat and backrest are not engaged, they
can fold forwards, e.g. in the event of sudden
braking or an accident.
RThis will cause the vehicle occupants to be
forced into the seat belt by a seat or back-
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

rest which is not engaged. The seat belt can

no longer offer the intended level of pro-
tection and could even cause injuries.
RA child restraint system would no longer be
X Once the head restraint is fully lowered, anchored or positioned correctly and would
press release catch :. not be able to perform its required function.
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the RThe seat backrests cannot restrain objects
desired position. or loads in the cargo compartment.
X To lower: press release catch : and push There is an increased risk of injury.
the head restraint down until it is in the Always make sure that the seat and backrest
desired position. are engaged as described:
Removing and installing the rear seat Rbefore traveling with a passenger on a seat

head restraints with the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature

Rafter you have adjusted the seat
Rafter the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature has
been used
Rafter the cargo compartment enlargement
has been folded forwards

G WARNING
The seat does not engage in the entry/exit
position. The seat could fold back suddenly,
e.g. when accelerating, braking, changing
direction suddenly or in the event of an acci-
X To remove: pull the head restraint up to dent. Persons in the sweep of the seat could
the stop. become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
X Press release catch : and pull the head Always fold back a seat which has been folded
restraint out of the guides. forwards before you pull away. Make sure that
X To re-install: insert the head restraint so the seat and backrest engage fully.
that the notches on the bar are on the left
when viewed in the direction of travel. G WARNING
X Push the head restraint down until you hear Children could become trapped if they adjust
it engage in position. the seats, particularly when unattended.
There is a risk of injury.
 Seats 111

When leaving the vehicle, always take the compartment could otherwise be dam-
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never aged.
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Make sure that the seats in the third row
are empty and not blocked before folding
G WARNING them down.
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle The 3rd row of seats consists of two electri-
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the cally foldable individual seats, which can be
seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury. lowered into the cargo compartment.
Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one If the seat is not correctly locked in position,
has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. the display message: 3rd Seat Row,

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Right Not Locked appears in the multifunc-
Adjusting the backrest angle (second tion display.
row of seats) If you fold the seat back until it engages, the
display message disappears.
Pull the backrest firmly to ensure that it is fully
engaged.
The switches for folding the left or right-hand
seats up and down are marked: L for the left-
hand seat when viewed in the direction of
travel, R for the right-hand seat when viewed
in the direction of travel.
Folding forwards/back in the rear com-
partment
You can adjust the angle of the backrests in
the second row of seats. There are ten detent
positions to choose from.
X Pull the left or right release lever ;
upwards in the direction of the arrow until
relevant backrest : is fully released.
X Pull backrest : forwards in the direction of
the arrow and allow it to engage.
X To ensure that the backrest has engaged,
lean firmly against backrest :.
Example: R switch
Folding the seats up/down (third row of X To fold down: fold the right-hand outer
seats) seat in the second row of seats forwards
(Y page 113).
General notes X Briefly pull switch :.
! Make sure that there is nothing on the The seat folds up.
folded-down seats in the cargo compart- X To stop the automatic folding: briefly pull
ment. The cargo compartment must be switch : again.
empty for the third row of seats to be folded
up. The seats or the objects in the cargo

Z
112 Seats

X To fold down: briefly press switch :.

The seat folds down.
X To stop the automatic folding: briefly
press switch : again.

Folding down/up in the cargo compart-

ment
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

If you drop objects underneath the seats in

the 3rd row, you can remove the panel in
order to reach beneath the seat.
X To open: fold the corresponding seat up or
down (Y page 111).
X Once the seat is folded halfway up or down,
briefly press the button again to stop the
Example: L switch automatic movement.
X To fold down: fold the right-hand outer X Grasp the panel recess.
seat in the second row of seats forwards
X Pull the panel in the direction of the arrow
(Y page 113).
and remove it.
X Briefly press switch :.
X To close: fold the corresponding seat up or
The seat folds up.
down (Y page 111).
X To stop the automatic folding: briefly
X Once the seat is folded halfway up or down,
press switch : again.
briefly press the button again to stop the
X To fold down: briefly pull switch :.
automatic movement.
The seat folds down.
X Attach the panel using the guide pins.
X To stop the automatic folding: briefly pull
X Push the panel downwards until it engages.
switch : again.
X Fold the seat up and down fully to check
that the panel is seated correctly.
Detachable panel (third row of seats)
! If there are objects underneath the seat, Folding down the seats in the second
the seat can no longer be folded up or down row manually
fully. The seat could be damaged.
Only drive with the panel completely instal- Important safety notes
led. G WARNING
If the seat and backrest are not engaged, they
can fold forwards, e.g. in the event of sudden
braking or an accident.
RThis will cause the vehicle occupants to be
forced into the seat belt by a seat or back-
rest which is not engaged. The seat belt can
 Seats 113

no longer offer the intended level of pro- i Further related subjects:

tection and could even cause injuries. RCargo compartment enlargement (fold-
RA child restraint system would no longer be ing the second row of seats forwards)
anchored or positioned correctly and would (Y page 346)
not be able to perform its required function. RFolding the seats in the third row for-
RThe seat backrests cannot restrain objects wards/back (Y page 111)
or loads in the cargo compartment.
Entry position
There is an increased risk of injury.
Always make sure that the seat and backrest
are engaged as described:

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Rbefore traveling with a passenger on a seat
with the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
Rafter you have adjusted the seat
Rafter the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature has
been used
Rafter the cargo compartment enlargement
has been folded forwards

G WARNING The release handle for the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT

The seat does not engage in the entry/exit feature is located on the entry side on the
position. The seat could fold back suddenly, back of each outer seat in the second row of
e.g. when accelerating, braking, changing seats.
direction suddenly or in the event of an acci- X Move the head restraint to the lowest posi-
dent. Persons in the sweep of the seat could tion (Y page 110).
become trapped. There is a risk of injury. X Pull release handle ; in the direction of
Always fold back a seat which has been folded the arrow to the pressure point and hold it
forwards before you pull away. Make sure that in this position.
the seat and backrest engage fully. The backrest folds forwards.
You have two options for folding the seat
General notes
down fully.
To enter or exit the third row of seats: the
X Pull release handle ; again in the direction
outer left and right seats of the second row
of the arrow to the pressure point and hold
can be folded down.
it in this position.
One of the outer seats of the 2nd row is in the
or
entry/exit position: the multifunction display
X Pull on release loop : in the direction of
shows, e.g. the 2nd Seat Row, Right Not
Locked display message. the arrow and hold in this position.
X Lift up the seat until it folds forwards.
If you fold the seat back until it engages, the
display message disappears. i Vehicles with memory function:
Pull the backrest firmly to ensure that it is fully The front seats move forwards slightly.
engaged.

Z
114 Seats

X Pull on release loop : in the direction of

the arrow and hold in this position.
The backrest folds forwards.
X Pull on release loop : again in the direc-
tion of the arrow and hold in this position.
X Lift up the seat until it folds forwards.

i Vehicles with memory function:

The front seats move forwards slightly.
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Entry position
Exit position
G WARNING
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one
has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
Exit position
i Further related subjects: i Vehicles with memory function:
RImportant safety notes on air bags In order to return the front seat to the saved
(Y page 50) position, call up the saved seat setting
RSecuring children in the vehicle using the memory buttons.
(Y page 62)
Moving the outer seats back to the normal
position (second row of seats)
G WARNING
If the seat and backrest are not engaged, they
can fold forwards, e.g. in the event of sudden
braking or an accident.
RThis will cause the vehicle occupants to be
forced into the seat belt by a seat or back-
rest which is not engaged. The seat belt can
no longer offer the intended level of pro-
tection and could even cause injuries.
If you wish to exit the third row of seats, fold RA child restraint system would no longer be
down the outer seat on the right-hand side as anchored or positioned correctly and would
follows. not be able to perform its required function.
The release loop for the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT RThe seat backrests cannot restrain objects
feature is located at the bottom on the back of or loads in the cargo compartment.
each outer seat in the second row.
There is an increased risk of injury.
 Seats 115

Always make sure that the seat and backrest Always make sure that the seat and backrest
are engaged as described: are engaged as described:
Rbefore traveling with a passenger on a seat Rbefore traveling with a passenger on a seat
with the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature with the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
Rafter you have adjusted the seat Rafter you have adjusted the seat
Rafter the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature has Rafter the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature has
been used been used
Rafter the cargo compartment enlargement Rafter the cargo compartment enlargement
has been folded forwards has been folded forwards

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

G WARNING G WARNING
The seat does not engage in the entry/exit The seat does not engage in the entry/exit
position. The seat could fold back suddenly, position. The seat could fold back suddenly,
e.g. when accelerating, braking, changing e.g. when accelerating, braking, changing
direction suddenly or in the event of an acci- direction suddenly or in the event of an acci-
dent. Persons in the sweep of the seat could dent. Persons in the sweep of the seat could
become trapped. There is a risk of injury. become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
Always fold back a seat which has been folded Always fold back a seat which has been folded
forwards before you pull away. Make sure that forwards before you pull away. Make sure that
the seat and backrest engage fully. the seat and backrest engage fully.

X To lock the seat: fold back the seat until it General notes
engages. To enter or exit the third row of seats: the
X Fold back the backrest until it engages. outer left and right seats of the second row
can be folded down electrically.
Folding down the seats in the second One of the outer seats of the second row is in
row electrically the entry/exit position: the multifunction dis-
play shows, e.g. the 2nd Seat Row, Right
Important safety notes Not locked display message.
G WARNING If you fold the seat back until it engages, the
If the seat and backrest are not engaged, they display message disappears.
can fold forwards, e.g. in the event of sudden Pull the backrest firmly to ensure that it is fully
braking or an accident. engaged.
RThis will cause the vehicle occupants to be i Further related subjects:
forced into the seat belt by a seat or back- RCargo compartment enlargement (fold-
rest which is not engaged. The seat belt can
ing the second row of seats forwards)
no longer offer the intended level of pro-
(Y page 346)
tection and could even cause injuries.
RFolding the seats in the third row for-
RA child restraint system would no longer be
wards/back (Y page 111)
anchored or positioned correctly and would
not be able to perform its required function. Folding down the seats
RThe seat backrests cannot restrain objects The seats can be folded down electrically if
or loads in the cargo compartment. the vehicle is stationary and the respective
There is an increased risk of injury. rear door is open.

Z
116 Seats

Switching the seat heating on/off

Switching on/off
G WARNING
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to
become very hot. The health of persons with
limited temperature sensitivity or a limited
ability to react to excessively high tempera-
tures may be affected or they may even suffer
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

X Press button :. burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.

The head restraint retracts, the backrest Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on
folds forwards and the seat folds forwards. repeatedly.
The seat can be manually returned to its
initial position (Y page 112).

Adjusting the multicontour seat

You can set the multicontour seat using
COMAND. See the separate COMAND Oper-
ating Instructions.

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

Driver's and front-passenger seat

: To raise the backrest contour

Rear seats
; To soften the backrest contour
The three red indicator lamps in the button
= To lower the backrest contour
indicate the heating level you have selected.
? To harden the backrest contour
The system automatically switches down
You can adjust the contour of the front seat from level 3 to level 2 after approximately
backrests individually to provide optimum eight minutes.
support for your back.
The system automatically switches down
from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten
minutes.
 Seats 117

The system automatically switches off

approximately 35 minutes after it is set to
level 1.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 167).
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired heating level is set.
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
heating may switch off.

Z
118 Seats

Problems with the seat heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The seat heating has The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-
switched off prema- sumers are switched on.
turely or cannot be X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as
switched on. the rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating will
switch back on automatically.
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Switching on/off

The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons

indicate the ventilation level you have selec-
ted.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 167).
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired ventilation level is set.
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
ventilation may switch off.
i You can open the side windows and the
sliding sunroof using the "Convenience
opening" feature (Y page 97). The seat ven-
tilation of the driver's seat automatically
switches to the highest level.
 Steering wheel 119

Problems with the seat ventilation

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The seat ventilation has The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-
switched off prema- sumers are switched on.
turely or cannot be X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as
switched on. the rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat ventilation will
switch back on automatically.

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel Before starting off, make sure the steering
wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering
Important safety notes wheel while the vehicle is in motion.
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
: Release lever
G WARNING ; To adjust the steering wheel height
Children could injure themselves if they = To adjust the steering wheel position
adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of (fore-and-aft adjustment)
injury.
X Push release lever : down completely.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
The steering column is unlocked.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
position.
X Push release lever : up completely.

Adjusting the steering wheel man- The steering column is locked.

ually X Check if the steering column is locked.
When doing so, try to push the steering
G WARNING wheel up or down or try to move it in the
If the steering wheel is unlocked while the fore-and-aft direction.
vehicle is in motion, it could change position
unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.

Z
120 Steering wheel

Adjusting the steering wheel electri- Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when you
cally remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock,
the steering wheel heating is deactivated.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switch
off the ignition and open the driver's door, the
steering wheel heating is deactivated.
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

: To adjust the steering wheel height

; To adjust the steering wheel position
(fore-and-aft adjustment)
The steering wheel can also be adjusted when
the SmartKey is removed from the ignition
lock.
i Further related subjects:
REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
(Y page 121)
RStoring settings (Y page 124)

Steering wheel heating

Switching on/off

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-

tion lock (Y page 167).
X To switch on/off: turn the lever in the
direction of arrow : or ;.
Indicator lamp = lights up or goes out.
 Steering wheel 121

Problems with the steering wheel heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The steering wheel The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-
heating has switched sumers are switched on.
off prematurely or can- X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as
not be switched on. the rear window defroster or interior lighting.

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

in and out of your vehicle easier.
Important safety notes You can activate and deactivate the EASY-
G WARNING ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board com-
puter (Y page 287).
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
the steering wheel, you and other vehicle
occupants – particularly children – could
Position of the steering wheel when the
become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak- The steering wheel swings upwards when
ing adjustments, make sure that no one has you:
any body parts in the sweep of the steering Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
wheel. Ropen the driver's door with KEYLESS-GO in
Move the steering wheel adjustment lever if position 1
there is a risk of entrapment by the steering
Ropen the driver's door and the SmartKey is
wheel. The adjustment process is stopped.
in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock
Press one of the memory function position i The steering wheel only moves upwards if
buttons. This function is only available on it has not already reached the upper stop.
vehicles with memory function.
G WARNING Position of the steering wheel for driv-
If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-
ing
ture, they can become trapped, particularly The steering wheel is moved to the last selec-
when unattended. There is a risk of injury. ted position when:
When leaving the vehicle, always take the Rthe driver's door is closed
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
Ryou insert the SmartKey into the ignition
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
lock
G WARNING or
Ryou press the Start/Stop button once on
If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT
feature is making adjustments, you could lose vehicles with KEYLESS-GO
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an When you close the driver's door with the
accident. ignition switched on, the steering wheel is
Always wait until the adjustment process is also automatically moved to the previously
complete before driving off. set position.
The last position of the steering wheel is
stored when you switch off the ignition or
Z
122 Mirrors

when you store the setting with the memory For this reason, always make sure of the
function (Y page 124). actual distance from the road users traveling
behind by glancing over your shoulder.
Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature
If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is
triggered in an accident, the steering column
will move upwards when the driver's door is
opened. This occurs irrespective of the posi-
tion of the SmartKey in the ignition lock. This
makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

the occupants.
The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is
only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY fea-
ture is activated in the on-board computer
(Y page 287). X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 167).
X Press button : for the left-hand exterior
Mirrors
mirror or button ; for the right-hand exte-
Rear-view mirror rior mirror.
The indicator lamp in the corresponding
button lights up in red.
The indicator lamp goes out again after
some time. You can adjust the selected
mirror using adjustment button = as long
as the indicator lamp is lit.
X Press adjustment button = up, down, or to
the left or right until you have adjusted the
exterior mirror to the correct position. You
should have a good overview of traffic con-
ditions.
X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever : The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger
forwards or back. field of vision.
The exterior mirrors are heated automatically
if the rear window defroster is switched on
Exterior mirrors and the outside temperature is low.
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
G WARNING
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side reduces the size of the image. Visible
objects are actually closer than they appear.
This means that you could misjudge the dis-
tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.
when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
 Mirrors 123

Folding the exterior mirrors in or out Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as
electrically soon as you lock the vehicle from the out-
side.
Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automat-
ically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and
then open the driver's or front-passenger
door.

Exterior mirror pushed out of position

If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

position, proceed as follows:
X Vehicles without electrically folding
exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
into the correct position manually.
ignition lock (Y page 167).
X Vehicles with electrically folding exte-
X Briefly press button :.
rior mirrors: press and hold button for
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
folding the mirrors : (Y page 123) until
i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are you hear a click and then the mirror engage
always folded out fully while driving. They in position.
could otherwise vibrate. The mirror housing is engaged again and
i If you are driving faster than 30 mph you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual
(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the (Y page 122).
exterior mirrors.

Setting the exterior mirrors Automatic anti-glare mirrors

If the battery has been disconnected or com- The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror
pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must on the driver's side automatically go into anti-
be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise glare mode if the following conditions are met
not fold in when you select the "Fold in mir- simultaneously:
rors when locking" function in the on-board Rthe ignition is switched on and
computer (Y page 288). Rincident light from headlamps strikes the
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni- sensor in the rear-view mirror.
tion lock (Y page 167).
i The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode
X Briefly press button :.
if reverse gear is engaged or if the interior
lighting is switched on.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
automatically
If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function
is activated in the on-board computer:
(Y page 288)

Z
124 Memory function

Parking position for the exterior mir- Using the memory button
ror on the front-passenger side You can position the front-passenger side
exterior mirror in such a way that you can see
Setting and storing the parking position the rear wheel on that side as soon as you
Using reverse gear engage reverse gear. This setting can be
stored using memory button M ?.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 167).
X With the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side activated, use adjustment
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

button = to adjust the exterior mirror. In

the exterior mirror, the rear wheel and the
curb should be visible.
X Press memory button M ? and one of the
arrows on adjustment button = within
three seconds.
: Button for the driver's side exterior mirror The parking position is stored if the exterior
; Button for the front-passenger side exte- mirror does not move.
rior mirror X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat
= Adjustment button the steps.
? Memory button M
You can position the front-passenger side Calling up a stored parking position set-
exterior mirror in such a way that you can see ting
the rear wheel on that side as soon as you X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
engage reverse gear. You can store this posi- tion lock (Y page 167).
tion.
X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-
X Bring the vehicle to a standstill.
passenger side using button ;.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
X Engage reverse gear.
tion lock (Y page 167). The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on side moves to the stored parking position.
the front-passenger side.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
X Engage reverse gear.
side moves back to its original position:
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph
side moves to the preset parking position.
(15 km/h)
X Use adjustment button = to adjust the
Rif you press button : for the exterior mir-
exterior mirror to a position that allows you
to see the rear wheel and the curb. ror on the driver's side
The parking position is stored.
i If you shift the transmission to another Memory function
position, the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side returns to the driving posi- Storing settings
tion.
G WARNING
If you use the memory function on the driver's
side while driving, you could lose control of
 Memory function 125

the vehicle as a result of the adjustments

being made. There is a risk of an accident.
Only use the memory function on the driver's
side when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNING
When the memory function adjusts the seat or
steering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-
pants – particularly children – could become
trapped. There is a risk of injury.

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

While the memory function is making adjust- X Adjust the seat (Y page 108).
ments, make sure that no one has any body
X On the driver's side, adjust the steering
parts in the sweep of the seat or steering
wheel (Y page 120) and the exterior mirrors
wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-
(Y page 122).
diately release the memory function position
X Press the M memory button and then press
button. The adjustment process is stopped.
one of the storage position buttons 1, 2 or
G WARNING 3 within three seconds.
Children could become trapped if they acti- The settings are stored in the selected pre-
vate the memory function, particularly when set position. A tone sounds when the set-
unattended. There is a risk of injury. tings have been completed.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the The memory function can still be used if the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never SmartKey has been removed.
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

With the memory function, you can store up Calling up a stored setting
to three different settings, e.g. for three dif- XPress the button for storage position 1, 2 or
ferent people.
3. Keep pressing until the seat, steering
The following settings are stored as a single wheel and exterior mirrors are in the stored
memory preset: position.
Rposition of the seat, backrest and head i The setting procedure is interrupted as
restraint soon as you release the storage position
Rdriver's side: steering wheel position buttons.
Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mir-
rors on the driver's and front-passenger
sides

Z
126
 127

Useful information ............................ 128

Exterior lighting ................................ 128
Interior lighting ................................. 135
Replacing bulbs ................................. 137
Windshield wipers ............................ 140

Lights and windshield wipers

128 Exterior lighting

Useful information Setting the exterior lighting

Setting options
i This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional equip- Exterior lighting can be set using:
ment of your vehicle available at the time of Rthe light switch
publication of the Operator's Manual.
Rthe combination switch (Y page 131)
Country-specific differences are possible.
Please note that your vehicle may not be Rthe on-board computer (Y page 285)
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and Light switch
functions.
Operation
i Read the information on qualified special-
ist workshops (Y page 29).
Lights and windshield wipers

Exterior lighting
General notes
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you drive with the lights switched
on even during the daytime. In some coun-
tries, operation of the headlamps varies due
to legal requirements and self-imposed obli- 1 W Left-hand standing lamps
gations. 2 X Right-hand standing lamps
3 T Parking lamps, license plate and
Driving abroad instrument cluster lighting
4 Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control-
Conversion to symmetrical low beam led by the light sensor
Switch the headlamps to symmetrical low 5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
beam in countries in which traffic drives on B R Rear fog lamp
the opposite side of the road from the country If you hear a warning tone when you leave the
where the vehicle is registered. This prevents vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
glare to oncoming traffic. When using sym-
X Turn the light switch to Ã.
metrical lights, the edge of the road is not lit
as widely and as far ahead as normal. The exterior lighting (except the parking/
Have the headlamps converted at a qualified standing lamps) switches off automatically if
specialist workshop as close to the border as you:
possible before driving in these countries. Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey in
Conversion to asymmetrical low beam position 0.
after returning
Automatic headlamp mode
Have the headlamps converted back to asym-
metrical low-beam headlamps at a qualified G WARNING
specialist workshop as soon as possible after When the light switch is set to Ã, the low-
crossing the border again. beam headlamps may not be switched on
 Exterior lighting 129

automatically if there is fog, snow or other X To switch on automatic headlamp

causes of poor visibility due to the weather mode: turn the light switch to Ã.
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an Only for Canada:
accident.
The daytime running lamps improve the visi-
In such situations, turn the light switch to bility of your vehicle during the day. The day-
L. time running lamps function is required by law
in Canada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's When the engine is running and the vehicle is
lighting at all times. stationary: if you move the selector lever from
a drive position to P, the daytime running
lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after
three minutes.

Lights and windshield wipers

When the engine is running, the vehicle is
stationary and in bright ambient light: if you
turn the light switch to T, the daytime
running lamps and parking lamps switch on.
If the engine is running and you turn the light
switch to L, the manual settings take
precedence over the daytime running lamps.
USA only:
1 W Left-hand standing lamps The daytime running lamps improve the visi-
2 X Right-hand standing lamps bility of your vehicle during the day. To do this,
3 T Parking lamps, license plate and the daytime running lamps function must be
instrument cluster lighting switched on using the on-board computer
4 Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control- (Y page 285).
led by the light sensor If the engine is running and you turn the light
5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps switch to T or L, the manual settings
B R Rear fog lamp take precedence over the daytime running
lamps.
à is the favored light switch setting. The
light setting is automatically selected accord- i In the USA, the daytime running lamps are
ing to the brightness of the ambient light deactivated upon delivery from the factory.
(exception: poor visibility due to weather con-
Low-beam headlamps
ditions such as fog, snow or spray):
RSmartKey
G WARNING
in position 1 in the ignition lock:
the parking lamps are switched on or off When the light switch is set to Ã, the low-
automatically depending on the brightness beam headlamps may not be switched on
of the ambient light. automatically if there is fog, snow or other
causes of poor visibility due to the weather
RWith the engine running: if you have acti-
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an
vated the daytime running lamps function
accident.
via the on-board computer, the daytime
running lamps or the low-beam headlamps In such situations, turn the light switch to
and parking lamps are switched on or off L.
automatically depending on the brightness
of the ambient light.

Z
130 Exterior lighting

3 T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting
4 Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control-
led by the light sensor
5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
B R Rear fog lamp
The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your
vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of
thick fog. Please take note of the country-
specific regulations for the use of rear fog
1 W Left-hand standing lamps lamps.
2 X Right-hand standing lamps X To switch on the rear fog lamps: turn the
Lights and windshield wipers

3 T Parking lamps, license plate and SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2
instrument cluster lighting or start the engine.
4 Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control- X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.
led by the light sensor X Press the R button.
5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps The yellow R indicator lamp in the
B R Rear fog lamp instrument cluster lights up.
Even if the light sensor does not detect that it X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the
is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam R button.
headlamps switch on when the ignition is The yellow R indicator lamp in the
switched on and the light switch is set to the instrument cluster goes out.
L position. This is a particularly useful
function in the event of rain and fog. Parking lamps
X To switch on the low-beam headlamps: ! If the battery has been excessively dis-
turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to charged, the parking lamps or standing
position 2 or start the engine. lamps are automatically switched off to
X Turn the light switch to L.
enable the next engine start. Always park
The green L indicator lamp in the instru- your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit
ment cluster lights up. according to legal standards. Avoid the
continuous use of the T parking lamps
Rear fog lamp for several hours. If possible, switch on the
X right or the W left standing lamp.

1 W Left-hand standing lamps

2 X Right-hand standing lamps
 Exterior lighting 131

X To switch on the standing lamps: the

SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is in
position 0.
X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side
of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of
the vehicle).

Combination switch
Turn signal
1 W Left-hand standing lamps
2 X Right-hand standing lamps

Lights and windshield wipers

3 T Parking lamps, license plate and
instrument cluster lighting
4 Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control-
led by the light sensor
5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
B R Rear fog lamp
X To switch on: turn the light switch to T.
The green T indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
: High-beam headlamps
Standing lamps ; Turn signal, right
= High-beam flasher
? Turn signal, left
X To indicate briefly: press the combination
switch briefly to the pressure point in the
direction of arrow ; or ?.
The corresponding turn signal flashes three
times.
X To indicate: press the combination switch
beyond the pressure point in the direction
of arrow ; or ?.
1 W Left-hand standing lamps
2 X Right-hand standing lamps
3 T Parking lamps, license plate and
instrument cluster lighting
4 Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control-
led by the light sensor
5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
B R Rear fog lamp
Switching on the standing lamps ensures the
corresponding side of the vehicle is illumina-
ted.

Z
132 Exterior lighting

High-beam headlamps High-beam flasher

: High-beam headlamps : High-beam headlamps

Lights and windshield wipers

; Turn signal, right ; Turn signal, right

= High-beam flasher = High-beam flasher
? Turn signal, left ? Turn signal, left
X To switch on the high-beam headlamps: X To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the
turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to ignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start the
position 2 or start the engine. engine.
X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Pull the combination switch in the direction
X Press the combination switch beyond the of arrow =.
pressure point in the direction of arrow :.
In the à position, the high-beam head-
lamps are only switched on when it is dark Hazard warning lamps
and the engine is running.
The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up when the high-beam
headlamps are switched on.
X To switch off the high-beam head-
lamps: move the combination switch back
to its normal position.
The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster goes out.
i Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist:
when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, it
controls activation of the high-beam head- X To switch on the hazard warning lamps:
lamps (Y page 134). press button :.
All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a
turn signal using the combination switch,
only the turn signal lamp on the corre-
sponding side of the vehicle will flash.
X To switch off the hazard warning lamps:
press button :.
 Exterior lighting 133

The hazard warning lamps automatically Cornering light function

switch on if:
Ran air bag is deployed or
Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a
speed of above 45 mph (70 km/h) and
comes to a standstill
The hazard warning lamps switch off auto-
matically if the vehicle reaches a speed of
above 6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full
brake application.
i The hazard warning lamps still operate if
the ignition is switched off. The cornering light function improves the illu-

Lights and windshield wipers

mination of the road over a wide angle in the
direction you are turning, enabling better vis-
Active light function
ibility in tight bends, for example. It can only
be activated when the low-beam headlamps
are switched on.
Active:
Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph
(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or
turn the steering wheel
Rif you are driving at speeds between
25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h)
and turn the steering wheel
The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short
The active light function is a system that time, but is automatically switched off after
moves the headlamps according to the steer- no more than three minutes.
ing movements of the front wheels. In this
way, relevant areas remain illuminated while
driving. This allows you to recognize pedes-
trians, cyclists and animals.
Active: when the lights are switched on.

Z
134 Exterior lighting

Adaptive Highbeam Assist have lights, or may recognize them too late. In
this or similar situations, the automatic high-
General notes beam headlamps will not be deactivated or
activated regardless. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Always carefully observe the traffic conditions
and switch off the high-beam headlamps in
good time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into

account road, weather or traffic conditions.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You
are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's
Lights and windshield wipers

lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and

traffic conditions.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be restricted if there is:
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
snow
You can use this function to set the head- Rdirt on the sensors or the sensors are
lamps to change between low beam and high obscured
beam automatically. The system recognizes
vehicles with their lights on, either approach-
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist
ing from the opposite direction or traveling in
on/off
front of your vehicle, and consequently
switches the headlamps from high beam to
low beam.
The system automatically adapts the low-
beam headlamp range depending on the dis-
tance to the other vehicle. Once the system
no longer detects any other vehicles, it reac-
tivates the high-beam headlamps.
The system's optical sensor is located behind
the windshield near the overhead control
panel.
: High-beam headlamps
Important safety notes
; Turn signal, right
G WARNING = High-beam flasher
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize ? Turn signal, left
road users: X To switch on: turn the light switch to Ã.
Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians X Press the combination switch beyond the
Rwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists pressure point in the direction of arrow :.
Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier The _ indicator lamp in the multifunc-
tion display lights up when it is dark and the
In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist
may fail to recognize other road users that
 Interior lighting 135

light sensor activates the low-beam head- Interior lighting

lamps.
If you are driving at speeds above approx- Overview of interior lighting
imately 16 mph (25 km/h):
The headlamp range is set automatically
depending on the distance between the
vehicle and other road users.
If you are driving at speeds above approx-
imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other
road users have been detected:
The high-beam headlamps are switched on
automatically. The K indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster also lights up.

Lights and windshield wipers

If you are driving at speeds below approx- Overhead control panel
imately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other road : p To switch the left-hand front reading
users have been detected or the roads are lamp on/off
adequately lit: ; c To switch the front interior lighting
The high-beam headlamps are switched off on
automatically. The K indicator lamp in = v To switch the on/off
the instrument cluster goes out. The _ ? | To switch the front interior lighting/
indicator lamp in the multifunction display
automatic interior lighting control off
remains lit.
A p To switch the right-hand front read-
X To switch off: move the combination
ing lamp on/off
switch back to its normal position or move
B To switch the automatic interior lighting
the light switch to another position.
control on
The _ indicator lamp in the multifunc-
tion display goes out.

Headlamps fogged up on the inside

Certain climatic and physical conditions may
cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This
moisture does not affect the functionality of
the headlamp.

Rear overhead control panel (second row of seats)

: To switch the reading lamp on/off

Z
136 Interior lighting

? | To switch the front interior lighting/

automatic interior lighting control off
A p To switch the right-hand front read-
ing lamp on/off
B To switch the automatic interior lighting
control on
X To switch on: set the switch to center
position B.
X To switch off: set the switch to the |
position.
Rear overhead control panel (third row of seats)
: Reading lamp
The interior lighting automatically switches
on if you:
Lights and windshield wipers

Runlock the vehicle

Interior lighting control Ropen a door
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition
General notes
lock.
In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from The interior light is activated for a short while
discharging, the interior lighting functions are when the SmartKey is removed from the igni-
automatically deactivated after some time tion lock. You can activate this delayed
except for when the SmartKey is in position 2 switch-off using the on-board computer
in the ignition lock. (Y page 287).
The color and brightness of the ambient light-
ing can be adjusted using the on-board com- Manual interior lighting control
puter (Y page 286).

Automatic interior lighting control

Overhead control panel

: p To switch the left-hand front reading
lamp on/off
Overhead control panel ; c To switch the front interior lighting
: p To switch the left-hand front reading on
lamp on/off = v To switch the rear interior lighting
; c To switch the front interior lighting on/off
on ? | To switch the front interior lighting/
= v To switch the rear interior lighting automatic interior lighting control off
on/off
 Replacing bulbs 137

A p To switch the right-hand front read- observed, the lights must be switched on
ing lamp on/off before starting the engine.
B To switch the automatic interior lighting G WARNING
control on
Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot
X To switch the front interior lighting on: when operating. If you change a bulb, you
set the switch to the c position. could burn yourself on these components.
X To switch the interior lighting off: set the There is a risk of injury.
switch to the | position or (if the door is Allow these components to cool down before
closed) to the center position. changing a bulb.
X To switch the rear interior lighting on/
off: press the u button. Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or if
its glass tube has been scratched.
X To switch the reading lamps on/off:
The bulb may explode if:

Lights and windshield wipers

press the p button.
Ryou touch it
Rit is hot
Crash-responsive emergency lighting Ryou drop it

The interior lighting is activated automatically Ryou scratch it

if the vehicle is involved in an accident. Only operate bulbs in enclosed lamps
X To switch off the crash-responsive designed for that purpose. Only install spare
emergency lighting: press the hazard bulbs of the same type and the specified volt-
warning lamp button. age.
or Marks on the glass tube reduce the service
life of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube
X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the
with your bare hands. If necessary, clean the
SmartKey.
glass tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and
rub it off with a lint-free cloth.
Protect bulbs from moisture during opera-
Replacing bulbs
tion. Do not allow bulbs to come into contact
Important safety notes with liquids.
There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbs
G DANGER that you cannot replace. Replace only the
Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can get bulbs listed (Y page 138). Have the bulbs that
an electric shock if you remove the cover of you cannot replace yourself changed at a
the Xenon bulb and touch the electrical con- qualified specialist workshop.
tacts. There is a risk of fatal injury.
If you require assistance changing bulbs, con-
Never touch the parts or the electrical con- sult a qualified specialist workshop.
tacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have work on
If the new bulb still does not light up, consult
the Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified spe-
a qualified specialist workshop.
cialist workshop.
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs, vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
you can recognize this by the following: the that these function correctly at all times.
cone of light from the Xenon bulbs moves Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
from the top to the bottom and back again
when you start the engine. For this to be

Z
138 Replacing bulbs

Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types

You can change the following bulbs. The bulb
type can be found in the legend.

X To remove: switch off the lights.

X Turn the front wheels inwards.
Lights and windshield wipers

X Remove securing pin ; using a suitable

Halogen headlamps tool.

: Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W X Slide cover : up and remove it.

; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W X To install: insert cover : again and slide it

down until it engages.
X Insert securing pin ;.

Low-beam headlamps (halogen head-

lamps)

Tail lamp
: Brake lamp: P 21 W-L

Changing the front bulbs

Removing and installing the cover in the X Remove the cover in the front wheel hous-
front wheel housing ing (Y page 138).
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise
You must remove the cover from the front
wheel housing before you can change the and pull it out.
front bulbs. X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
pull it out.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn
it clockwise.
 Replacing bulbs 139

X Align housing cover : and turn it clock- Changing the rear bulbs
wise until it engages.
X Replace the cover in the front wheel hous-
Opening and closing the service flap
ing (Y page 138).

High-beam headlamps (halogen head-

lamps)

Lights and windshield wipers

Left-hand service flap

X Switch off the lights.

X Open the hood.
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise
and pull it out.
X Pull lever = upwards and remove bulb
holder ;.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
Right-hand service flap
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
You must open the service flap in the cargo
X Simultaneously press bulb holder ; and
compartment before you can change the
pull lever = downwards.
bulbs in the brake lamp.
X Align housing cover : and turn it clock-
wise until it engages.
X To open: release service flap : at the top,
e.g. with a screwdriver, and swing it down-
ward in the direction of the arrow.
X Right side: remove the first-aid kit before-
hand and pull the parcel net down.
X To close: reinsert service flap :.

Z
140 Windshield wipers

Brake lamp ! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due

to optical influences and the windshield
becoming dirty in dry weather conditions,
the windshield wipers may be activated
inadvertently. This could then damage the
windshield wiper blades or scratch the
windshield.
For this reason, you should always switch
off the windshield wipers in dry weather.

X Switch off the lights.

Lights and windshield wipers

X Open the cargo compartment.

X Open the service flap (Y page 139).
X Turn bulb holder : counter-clockwise and
remove it.
X Take bulb out of bulb holder :.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder :.
X Insert bulb holder : into the lamp and turn Combination switch
it clockwise. 1 $ Windshield wiper off
X Close the service flap (Y page 139). 2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor
set to low sensitivity)
3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor
Windshield wipers set to high sensitivity)
4 ° Continuous wipe, slow
Switching the windshield wipers 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast
on/off
B í Single wipe
! Do not operate the windshield wipers C î To wipe with washer fluid
when the windshield is dry, as this could
X Switch on the ignition.
damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust
that has collected on the windshield can X Turn the combination switch to the corre-
scratch the glass if wiping takes place when sponding position.
the windshield is dry. In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate
If it is necessary to switch on the windshield wiping frequency is set automatically accord-
wipers in dry weather conditions, always ing to the intensity of the rain. In the Å
use washer fluid when operating the wind- position, the rain sensor is more sensitive
shield wipers. than in the Ä position, causing the wind-
shield wipers to wipe more frequently.
! If the windshield wipers leave smears on
the windshield after the vehicle has been If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield
washed in an automatic car wash, wax or will no longer be wiped properly. This could
other residues may be the reason for this. prevent you from observing the traffic condi-
Clean the windshield using washer fluid tions.
after washing the vehicle in an automatic
car wash.
 Windshield wipers 141

Switching the rear window wiper on/ Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when
off you change the wiper blade. If you release
the wiper arm without a wiper blade and it
falls onto the windshield/rear window, the
windshield/rear window may be damaged
by the force of the impact.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the wiper blades changed at a qualified
specialist workshop.
! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,
make sure that you touch only the wiper
arm of the wiper.

Lights and windshield wipers

Combination switch Changing the windshield wiper blades
: è Rear window wiper switch
2 b To wipe with washer fluid Removing the wiper blades
3 I To switch on intermittent wiping X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping lock.
5 ô To wipe with washer fluid X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind-
shield.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 167).
X Turn switch : on the combination switch
to the corresponding position.
When the rear window wiper is switched on,
the icon appears in the instrument cluster.

Replacing the wiper blades

Important safety notes
G WARNING X Firmly press release knob : and pull wiper
If the windshield wipers begin to move while blade ; upwards from the wiper arm in the
you are changing the wiper blades, you could direction of the arrow.
be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
ignition before changing the wiper blades.

! Never open the hood/tailgate if a wiper

arm has been folded away from the wind-
shield/rear window.
Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a
wiper blade back onto the windshield/rear
window.

Z
142 Windshield wipers

Installing the wiper blades Installing a wiper blade

X Place new wiper blade ; onto wiper
arm :.
X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper
blade ; in the opposite direction to the
arrow until it engages.
X Make sure that wiper blade ; is seated
correctly.
X Position wiper blade ; parallel to wiper
arm :.
X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear win-
dow.
X Position new wiper blade : in the retainer
Lights and windshield wipers

on the wiper arm and slide it into place in

the direction of the arrow.
The wiper blade audibly engages.
X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated
correctly.
X Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind-
shield.

Replacing the rear window wiper blade

Removing a wiper blade

X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition

lock.
X Fold wiper arm : away from the rear win-
dow until it engages.
X Position wiper blade ; at a right angle to
wiper arm :.
X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper
blade ; in the direction of the arrow until
it releases.
X Remove wiper blade ;.
 Windshield wipers 143

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The windshield wipers Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield
are jammed. wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the
ignition lock.
or
X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the
driver's door.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

Lights and windshield wipers

The windshield wipers The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.
fail completely. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.

Z
144
 145

Useful information ............................ 146

Overview of climate control sys-
tems ................................................... 146
Operating the climate control sys-
tems ................................................... 154
Setting the air vents ......................... 162

Climate control
146 Overview of climate control systems

Useful information i The integrated filter filters out most par-

ticles of dust and soot and completely fil-
i This Operator's Manual describes all ters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pol-
models and all standard and optional equip- lutants and odors. A clogged filter reduces
ment of your vehicle available at the time of the amount of air supplied to the vehicle
publication of the Operator's Manual. interior. For this reason, you should always
Country-specific differences are possible. observe the interval for replacing the filter,
Please note that your vehicle may not be which is specified in the Maintenance
equipped with all features described. This Booklet. As it depends on environmental
also applies to safety-related systems and conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the
functions. interval may be shorter than stated in the
Maintenance Booklet.
i Read the information on qualified special-
ist workshops (Y page 29). i It is possible that the residual heat func-
tion may be activated automatically an hour
after the SmartKey has been removed in
Climate control

Overview of climate control systems order to dry the air-conditioning system.

The vehicle is then ventilated for 30
General notes minutes.
Observe the settings recommended on the
following pages. The windows could other-
wise fog up.
To prevent the windows from fogging up:
Rswitch off climate control only briefly
Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only
briefly
Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifi-
cation function
Rswitch on the defrost windshield function
briefly, if required
Climate control regulates the temperature
and the humidity in the vehicle interior and
filters undesirable substances out of the air.
Climate control can only be operated when
the engine is running. Optimum operation is
only achieved with the side windows and roof
closed.
The residual heat function can only be acti-
vated or deactivated with the ignition
switched off (Y page 161).
i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period
during warm weather, e.g. using the con-
venience opening feature (Y page 97).
This will speed up the cooling process and
the desired interior temperature will be
reached more quickly.
 Overview of climate control systems 147

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

Climate control
USA only
Front control panel
: To set the temperature, left (Y page 157)
; To defrost the windshield (Y page 159)
= To switch maximum cooling on/off (Y page 159)
? To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 155)
A To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 160)
B To set the temperature, right (Y page 157)
C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 161)
D To set the air distribution (Y page 158)
E To increase the airflow (Y page 158)
F To reduce the airflow (Y page 158)
G To switch climate control on/off (Y page 154)
H To set climate control to automatic (Y page 156)
148
Climate control Overview of climate control systems

Canada only
Front control panel
: To set the temperature, left (Y page 157)
; To defrost the windshield (Y page 159)
= To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 159)
? To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 155)
To switch the residual heat function on/off (Y page 161)
A To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 160)
B To set the temperature, right (Y page 157)
C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 161)
D To set the air distribution (Y page 158)
E To increase the airflow (Y page 158)
F To reduce the airflow (Y page 158)
G To switch climate control on/off (Y page 154)
H To set climate control to automatic (Y page 156)

Rear control panel

: To set rear-compartment climate control to automatic
; To switch rear-compartment climate control on/off
 Overview of climate control systems 149

= To direct the airflow through the rear air vents

? To direct the airflow through the footwell vents

Optimum use of dual-zone automatic

climate control
The following contains notes and recommen-
dations on optimum use of the dual-zone
automatic climate control.
RActivate climate control using the à and
¿/Á buttons. The indicator lamps in
the à and ¿/Á buttons light up.
RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" func-
tion briefly until the windshield is clear

Climate control
again.
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.
if there are unpleasant outside odors or
when in a tunnel. The windows could oth-
erwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn
into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
RUse the ZONE function to adopt the tem-
perature settings on the driver's side for
the front-passenger side as well. The indi-
cator lamp above the á button goes
out.
RVehicles with COMAND: if you change the
settings of the climate control system, the
climate status display appears for approx-
imately three seconds at the bottom of the
screen in the COMAND display. See also
the separate COMAND operating instruc-
tions. You will see the current settings of
the various climate control functions.
During automatic engine switch-off, the cli-
mate control system only operates at a
reduced capacity. If you require the full cli-
mate control output, you can switch off the
ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO
button (Y page 173).
150 Overview of climate control systems

Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control

Climate control

USA only
Front control panel
: To set the temperature, left (Y page 157)
; To defrost the windshield (Y page 159)
= To switch maximum cooling on/off (Y page 159)
? To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 155)
A To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 160)
B To set the temperature, right (Y page 157)
C To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 159)
D To switch climate control on/off (Y page 154)
E To set the air distribution (Y page 158)
F To increase the airflow (Y page 158)
G To reduce the airflow (Y page 158)
H Display
I To adjust the climate mode settings (Y page 157)
J To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 161)
K To set climate control to automatic (Y page 156)

Rear control panel

L To increase the airflow (Y page 158)
M To set the temperature (Y page 157)
N To set rear-compartment climate control to automatic (Y page 156)
O To direct the airflow through the rear air vents (Y page 158)
P To direct the airflow through the footwell vents (Y page 158)
Q To switch rear-compartment climate control on/off (Y page 154)
R To reduce the airflow (Y page 158)
 Overview of climate control systems 151

Climate control
Canada only
Front control panel
: To set the temperature, left (Y page 157)
; To defrost the windshield (Y page 159)
= To switch the residual heat function on/off (Y page 161)
? To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 155)
A To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 160)
B To set the temperature, right (Y page 157)
C To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 159)
D To switch climate control on/off (Y page 154)
E To set the air distribution (Y page 158)
F To increase the airflow (Y page 158)
G To reduce the airflow (Y page 158)
H Display
I To adjust the climate mode settings (Y page 157)
J To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 161)
K To set climate control to automatic (Y page 156)

Rear control panel

L To increase the airflow (Y page 158)
M To set the temperature (Y page 157)
N To set rear-compartment climate control to automatic (Y page 156)
O To direct the airflow through the rear air vents (Y page 158)
P To direct the airflow through the footwell vents (Y page 158)
Q To switch rear-compartment climate control on/off (Y page 154)
R To reduce the airflow (Y page 158)
152 Overview of climate control systems

Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control with additional rear-com-
partment climate control
Climate control

USA only
Front control panel
: To set the temperature, left (Y page 157)
; To defrost the windshield (Y page 159)
= To switch maximum cooling on/off (Y page 159)
? To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 155)
Switching the residual heat function on/off (Y page 161)
A To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 160)
B To set the temperature, right (Y page 157)
C To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 159)
D To switch rear-compartment climate control on/off (Y page 154)
E To set the air distribution (Y page 158)
F To increase the airflow (Y page 158)
G To reduce the airflow (Y page 158)
To switch off climate control
H Display
I To adjust the climate mode settings (Y page 157)
J To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 161)
K To set climate control to automatic (Y page 156)

Rear control panel

L To increase the airflow (Y page 158)
M To set the temperature (Y page 157)
N To set rear-compartment climate control to automatic (Y page 156)
O To direct the airflow through the rear air vents (Y page 158)
P To direct the airflow through the footwell vents (Y page 158)
 Overview of climate control systems 153

Q To switch rear-compartment climate control on/off (Y page 154)

R To reduce the airflow (Y page 158)

Climate control
Canada only
Front control panel
: To set the temperature, left (Y page 157)
; To defrost the windshield (Y page 159)
= To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 159)
? To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 155)
Switching the residual heat function on/off (Y page 161)
A To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 160)
B To set the temperature, right (Y page 157)
C To switch rear-compartment climate control on/off
D To switch climate control on/off (Y page 154)
E To set the air distribution (Y page 158)
F To increase the airflow (Y page 158)
G To reduce the airflow (Y page 158)
H Display
I To adjust the climate mode settings (Y page 157)
J To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 161)
K To set climate control to automatic (Y page 156)

Rear control panel

L To increase the airflow (Y page 158)
M To set the temperature (Y page 157)
N To set rear-compartment climate control to automatic (Y page 156)
O To direct the airflow through the rear air vents (Y page 158)
P To direct the airflow through the footwell vents (Y page 158)
154 Operating the climate control systems

Q To switch rear-compartment climate control on/off (Y page 154)

R To reduce the airflow (Y page 158)

Optimum use of 3-zone automatic cli- During automatic engine switch-off, the cli-
mate control mate control system only operates at a
reduced capacity. If you require the full cli-
The following contains instructions and rec- mate control output, you can switch off the
ommendations to enable you to get the most ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO
out of your 3-zone automatic climate control. button (Y page 173).
RActivate climate control using the à and
¿/Á buttons. The indicator lamps
above the à and ¿/Á buttons Operating the climate control sys-
light up. tems
RIn automatic mode, you can also use the
ñ button to set a climate mode Switching climate control on/off
Climate control

(FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). The General notes

MEDIUM level is recommended.
RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
When the climate control is switched off, the
air supply and air circulation are also
ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" func-
switched off. The windows could fog up.
tion briefly until the windshield is clear Therefore, switch off climate control only
again. briefly
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.
if there are unpleasant outside odors or i Switch on climate control primarily using
when in a tunnel. The windows could oth- the à button (Y page 156).
erwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn In the rear compartment, you can also switch
into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. climate control on and off using the à and
RUse the ZONE function to adopt the tem- ^ buttons.
perature settings on the driver's side for
the front-passenger side and the rear com- Activating/deactivating
partment as well. The indicator lamp above
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
the á button goes out.
tion lock (Y page 167).
RUse the residual heat function if you want to
X To activate: press the à button.
heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when
the ignition is switched off. The residual The indicator lamp in the à button lights
heat function can only be activated or deac- up. Airflow and air distribution are set to
tivated with the ignition switched off. automatic mode.
RVehicles with COMAND: if you change the or
settings of the climate control system, the X Press the ^ button.

climate status display appears for approx- The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes
imately three seconds at the bottom of the out. The previously selected settings are
screen in the COMAND display. See also restored.
the separate COMAND operating instruc- X To deactivate: press the ^ button.
tions. You will see the current settings of The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
the various climate control functions. up.
 Operating the climate control systems 155

Activating/deactivating cooling with

air dehumidification
General notes
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu-
midification" function, the air inside the vehi-
cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi-
cle will also not be dehumidified. The win-
dows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, only
deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidifi-
cation" function briefly.
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" func-
tion is only available when the engine is run-
ning. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and
dehumidified according to the temperature
selected.

Climate control
Condensation may drip from the underside of
the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is
normal and not a sign that there is a malfunc-
tion.

Activating/deactivating

Example: ¿ button
X To activate: press the ¿/Á button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿/Á but-
ton lights up.
X To deactivate: press the ¿/Á but-
ton.
The indicator lamp in the ¿/Á but-
ton goes out. The "Cooling with air dehu-
midification" function has a delayed switch-
off feature.
156 Operating the climate control systems

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The indicator lamp in Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a
the ¿/Á button malfunction.
flashes three times or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
remains off. The "Cool-
ing with air dehumidifi-
cation" function cannot
be switched on.

Setting climate control to automatic Activating/switching

General notes
Climate control

If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu-

midification" function, the air inside the vehi-
cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi-
cle will also not be dehumidified. The win-
dows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, only
deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidifi-
cation" function briefly.
In automatic mode, the set temperature is
maintained automatically at a constant level.
The system automatically regulates the tem- X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
perature of the dispensed air, the airflow and tion lock (Y page 167).
the air distribution. X Set the desired temperature.
Automatic mode will achieve optimal opera- X To activate: press the à button.
tion if cooling with air dehumidification is also The indicator lamp in the à button lights
activated. If necessary, cooling with air dehu- up. Automatic air distribution and airflow
midification can be deactivated. are activated.
In the rear compartment, you can also switch X To switch to manual mode: press the
climate control for the rear seats to automatic _ button.
mode using the à button.
or
X Press the I or K button.
The indicator lamp in the à button goes
out.
3-zone automatic climate control: when
automatic mode is activated, you can select a
climate mode (Y page 157).
 Operating the climate control systems 157

Adjusting the climate mode settings 3-zone automatic climate control

You can select the following climate mode
settings in automatic mode:
FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly
cooler
MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting
DIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly
warmer and with less draft

Automatic climate control zones

You can select different temperature settings
for the driver's and front-passenger sides as

Climate control
well as for the rear compartment.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 167).
X To increase/reduce the temperature in
the front: turn control : or B clockwise
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- or counter-clockwise (Y page 150).
tion lock (Y page 167).
Only change the temperature setting in
X Press the à button.
small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
X Press the ñ button repeatedly until the X To increase/reduce the temperature in
desired climate mode appears in the dis- the rear compartment using the front
play. control panel: press the á button.
The indicator lamp in the á button goes
out.
Setting the temperature X Turn control : clockwise or counter-

Dual-zone automatic climate control clockwise (Y page 150).

Only change the temperature setting in
Different temperatures can be set for the small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
driver's and front-passenger sides. The temperature setting for the driver's
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- side is adopted for the rear compartment
tion lock (Y page 167). and the front-passenger side.
X To increase/reduce: turn control : or B X To increase/decrease the rear compart-
clockwise or counter-clockwise ment temperature using the rear con-
(Y page 147). trol panel: turn control M clockwise or
Only change the temperature setting in counter-clockwise on the rear control
small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). panel (Y page 150).
Only change the temperature setting in
small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
158 Operating the climate control systems

Setting the air distribution Adjusting

Air distribution settings
Front control panel
P Directs the airflow through the center
vents
O Directs air through the footwell air
vents
S Directs the airflow through the center
and footwell vents
¯ Directs air through the defroster vents
b Directs the airflow through the X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
defroster and center vents (Canada tion lock (Y page 167).
only) X Press the _ button repeatedly until the
Climate control

a Directs air through the defroster and desired symbol appears in the display.
footwell vents
_ Directs the airflow through the
defroster, center and footwell air vents Setting the airflow
(Canada only)
Rear control panel
M Directs the airflow through the rear
center and rear side air vents
O Directs air through the footwell air
vents
i Using the rear control panel, you can also
activate both air distribution positions
simultaneously. In order to do this, press
both air distribution buttons. The air is then
routed through all rear air vents. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 167).
i Regardless of the air distribution setting,
X To increase: press the K button.
airflow is always directed through the side
air vents. The side air vents can only be X To reduce: press the I button.
closed when the controls on the side air
vents are turned downwards. i You can use 3-zone automatic climate
control to set the airflow in the rear com-
partment separately.
 Operating the climate control systems 159

Switching the ZONE function on/off Switching on/off

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 167).
X To activate: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights
up.
The climate control system switches to the
following functions:
Rhigh airflow
Rhigh temperature
Rair distribution to the windshield and
X To switch on: press the á button. front side windows
The indicator lamp above the á button Rair-recirculation mode off
lights up.
X To deactivate: press the ¬ button.

Climate control
Dual-zone automatic climate control: the
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
temperature setting for the driver's side is
out. The previously selected settings are
not adopted for the front-passenger side.
restored. Air-recirculation mode remains
3-zone automatic climate control: the tem- deactivated.
perature setting for the driver's side is not
or
adopted for the front-passenger side and
the rear compartment. X Press the à button.
X To switch off: press the á button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
out. Airflow and air distribution are set to
The indicator lamp above the á button
automatic mode.
goes out.
or
Dual-zone automatic climate control: the
temperature setting for the driver's side is X Turn controls : or B clockwise or coun-
adopted for the front-passenger side. ter-clockwise:
3-zone automatic climate control: the tem- Dual-zone climate control (Y page 147)
perature setting for the driver's side is 3-zone automatic climate control
adopted for the front-passenger side and (Y page 150)
the rear compartment. or
X Press the K or I button.

Defrosting the windshield

General notes MAX COOL maximum cooling
The MAX COOL function is only available in
You can use this function to defrost the wind-
vehicles for the USA.
shield or to defrost the inside of the wind-
shield and the side windows.
Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" func-
tion as soon as the windshield is clear again.
160 Operating the climate control systems

Rear window defroster

General notes
The rear window defroster has a high current
draw. You should therefore switch it off as
soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,
the rear window defroster switches off auto-
matically after several minutes.
If the battery voltage is too low, the rear win-
dow defroster may switch off.
MAX COOL is only operational when the
engine is running. Switching on/off
X To activate: press the Ù button.
The indicator lamp in the button lights up.
X To activate: press off-road button Ù
Climate control

again.
The indicator lamp goes out. The previously
selected settings are restored.
When you activate MAX COOL, climate con-
trol switches to the following functions:
Rmaximum cooling
Rmaximum airflow
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
Rair-recirculation mode on
tion lock (Y page 167).
X Press the ¤ button.

Defrosting the windows The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights

up or goes out.
Windows fogged up on the inside
X Activate the ¿/Á cooling with air
dehumidification function.
X Activate automatic mode Ã.
X If the windows continue to fog up, activate
the "windshield defrosting" function
(Y page 159).
i You should only select this setting until
the windshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outside

XPress the _ button repeatedly until the
P or O symbol appears in the dis-
play.
i You should only select this setting until
the windshield is clear again.
 Operating the climate control systems 161

Problems with the rear window defroster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The rear window The battery has not been sufficiently charged.
defroster has deactiva- X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading
ted prematurely or can- lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.
not be activated. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window
defroster can be activated again.

Activating/deactivating air-recircula- high outside temperatures, air-recircula-

tion mode tion mode is automatically activated. When
air-recirculation mode is activated auto-
General notes matically, the indicator lamp in the d
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if button is not lit.

Climate control
unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle Outside air is added after about
from outside. The air already inside the vehi- 30 minutes.
cle will then be recirculated. XTo deactivate: press the d button.
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the The indicator lamp in the d button goes
windows can fog up more quickly, in particu- out.
lar at low temperatures. Only use air-recircu- i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto-
lation mode briefly to prevent the windows matically:
from fogging up.
Rafter approximately five minutes at out-
Activating/deactivating side temperatures below approximately
41 ‡ (5 †)
Rafter approximately five minutes if cool-
ing with air dehumidification is deactiva-
ted
Rafter approximately 30 minutes at out-
side temperatures above approximately
41 ‡ (5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehu-
midification" function is activated

Activating/deactivating the residual

heat function
The operation of air-recirculation mode is the
same for all control panels. General notes
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
The residual heat function is only available on
tion lock (Y page 167). vehicles for Canada.
X To activate: press the d button.
It is possible to make use of the residual heat
The indicator lamp in the d button lights of the engine to continue heating the station-
up. ary vehicle for up to 30 minutes after the
i In the event of high pollution levels (3- engine has been switched off. The heating
zone automatic climate control only) or at time depends on the set interior temperature.
162 Setting the air vents

Switching on/off In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air

through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
please observe the following notes:
Rkeep the air inlet grille on the hood and in
the engine compartment on the front-
passenger side free of blockages, such as
ice, snow or leaves.
Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles
in the vehicle interior.
i For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjust
the sliders of the air vents to the center
position.
XTo activate: press the Ì / Á button.
The indicator lamp in the Ì/Á but-
ton lights up. Setting the center air vents
Climate control

i The blower will run at a low speed regard-

less of the airflow setting.
i If you activate the residual heat function
at high temperatures, only the ventilation
will be activated. The blower runs at
medium speed.
X To deactivate: press the Ì/Á but-
ton.
The indicator lamp in the Ì/Á but-
ton goes out.
Residual heat is deactivated automatically: : Center air vent, left
Rafter approximately 30 minutes ; Center air vent, right
Rwhen the ignition is switched on = Center vent thumbwheel, right
Rif the battery voltage drops ? Center vent thumbwheel, left
X To open/close: turn thumbwheels =
and ? to the right or left.
Setting the air vents
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in
the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There
is a risk of injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
maintain a sufficient distance to the air out-
lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior.
 Setting the air vents 163

Setting the side air vents X To open/close: turn thumbwheel :

clockwise or counter-clockwise.

Setting the rear-compartment air

vents
Setting the center vents in the rear com-
partment

: Side window defroster vent

; Side air vent
= Control for side air vent

Climate control
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel = up or
down.

Setting the glove box air vent Example: center vents with rear control panel
: Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel
! Close the air vent when heating the vehi-
; Rear-compartment air vent, right
cle.
= Rear control panel
At high outside temperatures, open the air
vent and activate the "cooling with air dehu- ? Rear-compartment air vent, left
midification" function. Otherwise, temper- X To open/close: turn thumbwheel : up or
ature-sensitive items stored in the glove down.
box could be damaged.
Setting the B-pillar air vent
Second row of seats

: Air vent thumbwheel

; Air vent
When automatic climate control is activated,
the glove box can be ventilated, for instance : B-pillar air vent
to cool its contents. The level of airflow ; Thumbwheel for B-pillar air vent
depends on the airflow and air distribution X To open/close: turn thumbwheel ; to the
settings. left or right.

Z
164 Setting the air vents

B-pillar air vent in the headliner

: B-pillar air vent
; Thumbwheel for B-pillar air vent
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel ; up or
down.
Climate control

Third row of seats

B-pillar air vent in the headliner

: B-pillar air vent
; Thumbwheel for B-pillar air vent
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel ; up or
down.
 165

Useful information ............................ 166

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle
............................................................. 166
Driving ............................................... 166

Driving and parking

Automatic transmission ................... 176
Refueling ............................................ 185
Parking ............................................... 190
Driving tips ........................................ 194
Driving systems ................................ 203
Towing a trailer ................................. 264
166 Driving

Useful information RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to

brake the vehicle.
i This Operator's Manual describes all RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator
models and all standard and optional equip- pedal beyond the point of resistance (kick-
ment of your vehicle available at the time of down).
Driving and parking

publication of the Operator's Manual. After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase
Country-specific differences are possible. the engine speed gradually and accelerate
Please note that your vehicle may not be the vehicle to full speed.
equipped with all features described. This Additional breaking-in notes for AMG vehi-
also applies to safety-related systems and cles:
functions.
RDo not drive faster than 85 mph
i Read the information on qualified special- (140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles
ist workshops (Y page 29). (1,500 km).
ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum
engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle
RChange gear in good time.
Important safety notes RIdeally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km),

The sensor system of some driving and driv- drive in program C.

ing safety systems adjusts automatically i You should also observe these notes on
while a certain distance is being driven after breaking in if the engine or parts of the drive
the vehicle has been delivered or after train on your vehicle have been replaced.
repairs. Full system effectiveness is not
reached until the end of this teach-in proce- i Always observe the respective speed lim-
dure. its.
New and replaced brake pads and discs only
reach their optimum braking effect after sev-
Driving
eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen-
sate for this by applying greater force to the Important safety notes
brake pedal.
G WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
The more you look after the engine when it is
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
new, the more satisfied you will be with its
performance in the future. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
RYou should therefore drive at varying vehi- the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
cle and engine speeds for the first securely and as specified in order to ensure
1000 miles (1500 km). sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throt- loose floormats and do not place floormats on
tle, during this period. top of one another.
RChange gear in good time, before the tach-
ometer needle is Ô of the way to the red
area of the tachometer.
 Driving 167

G WARNING driving at full throttle when the engine is

Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage cold.
of the pedals, e.g.:
Rshoes with thick soles Key positions

Driving and parking

Rshoes with high heels
Rslippers
SmartKey
There is a risk of an accident.
Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
usage of the pedals.

G WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk g To remove the SmartKey
of an accident. 1 Power supply for some consumers, such
Do not switch off the ignition while driving. as the windshield wipers
2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)
G WARNING and drive position
If the parking brake has not been fully 3 To start the engine
released when driving, the parking brake can:
i The SmartKey can be turned in the igni-
Roverheat and cause a fire
tion lock even if it is not the correct Smart-
Rlose its hold function.
Key for the vehicle. The ignition is not
There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release switched on. The engine cannot be started.
the parking brake fully before driving off.
KEYLESS-GO
! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use
the engine's full performance until it has General notes
reached operating temperature. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with
Only shift the automatic transmission to a SmartKey featuring an integrated KEYLESS-
the desired drive position when the vehicle GO function and a detachable Start/Stop but-
is stationary. ton.
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the
wheels when pulling away on slippery ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the
roads. You could otherwise damage the vehicle.
drive train. When you insert the Start/Stop button into
! AMG vehicles: at low engine oil temper- the ignition lock, the system needs approx-
atures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the maximum imately two seconds recognition time. You
engine speed is restricted in order to pro- can then use the Start/Stop button.
tect the engine. To protect the engine and Pressing the Start/Stop button several times
maintain smooth engine operation, avoid in succession corresponds to the different
key positions in the ignition lock. This is only

Z
168 Driving

the case if you are not depressing the brake three seconds. This function operates inde-
pedal. pendently of the ECO start/stop automatic
If you depress the brake pedal and press the engine switch-off function.
Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi- Key positions with KEYLESS-GO
ately.
Driving and parking

A check which periodically establishes a radio

connection between the vehicle and the
SmartKey determines whether a valid Smart-
Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example,
when starting the engine.
To start the vehicle without actively using the
SmartKey:
Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted in
the ignition lock.
Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
: Start/Stop button
Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the
; Ignition lock
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 83).
Do not keep the SmartKey: As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light
Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile
up. If an indicator lamp does not go out after
phone or another SmartKey
starting the engine or lights up while driving,
Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal
see (Y page 328).
foil
If Start/Stop button : has not yet been
Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case
pressed, this corresponds to the SmartKey
This can impair the functionality of the KEY- being removed from the ignition.
LESS-GO key. X To switch on the power supply: press
Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key in the tem- Start/Stop button : once.
perature-controlled cup holder (Y page 351). The power supply is switched on. You can
Otherwise, the KEYLESS-GO key will not be now activate the windshield wipers, for
recognized. example.
If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey's i The power supply is switched off again if:
remote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a
Rthe driver's door is opened and
short time:
Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice
Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignition
when in this position.
with the Start/Stop button.
X To switch on the ignition: press Start/
Ryou will not be able to start the engine with
the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is Stop button : twice.
unlocked again. The ignition is switched on.
If you lock the vehicle centrally using the but- i The ignition is switched off when:
ton on the front door (Y page 89), you can Rthedriver's door is opened and
continue to start the engine with the Start/ Ryou press Start/Stop button : once
Stop button. when in this position.
i The engine can be turned off while the
vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding
the Start/Stop button for approximately
 Driving 169

Additionally, children could set the vehicle in

motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease the parking brake.
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P

Driving and parking

RStart the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
= Start/Stop button USA
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
? Start/Stop button Canada
reach of children.
Removing the Start/Stop button
You can remove the Start/Stop button from G WARNING
the ignition lock and start the vehicle as nor- Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
mal using the SmartKey. gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
It is only possible to switch between KEY-
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
LESS-GO mode and SmartKey operation
the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
when the transmission is in position P.
out sufficient ventilation.
X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition
lock ;. G WARNING
i You do not have to remove the Start/Stop Flammable materials introduced through
button from the ignition lock when you environmental influence or by animals can
leave the vehicle. You should, however, ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or
always take the SmartKey with you when parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk
leaving the vehicle. As long as the Smart- of fire.
Key is in the vehicle: Carry out regular checks to make sure that
Rthe
there are no flammable foreign materials in
vehicle can be started using the
the engine compartment or in the exhaust
Start/Stop button
system.
Relectrically powered equipment can be
operated. ! Do not depress the accelerator when
starting the engine.
Starting the engine General notes
Important safety notes i Vehicles with a gasoline engine: the
G WARNING catalytic converter is preheated for up
30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
the engine may change during this time.
they could:
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.

Z
170 Driving

Automatic transmission Pulling away

X Shift the transmission to position P Automatic transmission
(Y page 176).
The transmission position display in the G WARNING
multifunction display shows If the engine speed is above the idling speed
Driving and parking

P (Y page 176). and you engage transmission position D or R,

the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is
i You can start the engine in transmission a risk of an accident.
position P and N.
When engaging transmission position D or R,
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
Starting procedure with the SmartKey
not simultaneously accelerate.
X To start a gasoline engine: turn the
SmartKey to position 3 in the ignition lock X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
(Y page 167) and release it as soon as the depressed.
engine is running. X Shift the transmission to position D or R
X To start a diesel engine: turn the Smart- (Y page 176).
Key to position 2 in the ignition lock X Release the brake pedal.
(Y page 167). X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
The % preglow indicator lamp in the The electric parking brake (Y page 192) is
instrument cluster lights up. automatically released.
X When the % preglow indicator lamp The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
goes out, turn the SmartKey to position 3 only) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-
(Y page 167) and release it as soon as the ter goes out.
engine is running.
i It is only possible to shift the transmission
i You can start the engine without preglow from position P to the desired position if
if the engine is warm. you depress the brake pedal. Only then is
the parking lock released. If the brake
Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine pedal is not depressed, the DIRECT SELECT
lever can still be moved but the parking lock
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
remains engaged.
depressed.
X To start a gasoline engine: press the i The vehicle locks centrally once you have
Start/Stop button (Y page 167) once. pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors
The engine starts. drop down.
X To start a diesel engine: press the Start/ You can open the doors from the inside at
Stop button once (Y page 167). any time.
Preglow is activated and the engine starts. You can also deactivate the automatic lock-
ing feature (Y page 287).
i The Start/Stop button can be used to
start the vehicle without inserting the i Upshifts take place at higher engine
SmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/ speeds after a cold start. This helps the
Stop button must be inserted in the ignition catalytic converter to reach its operating
lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehi- temperature more quickly.
cle. This mode for starting the engine oper-
ates independently of the ECO start/stop
automatic engine start function.
 Driving 171

Pulling away with a trailer Therefore, quickly move your foot from the
brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never
leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start
assist.

Driving and parking

X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.
The vehicle is then held for about a second.
X Pull away.

Hill start assist is not active if:

Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on a
downhill gradient.
Rthe transmission is in position N.
To ensure that you do not roll backwards
when pulling away on an uphill slope, engage Rthe electric parking brake is applied.
the electric parking brake. RESP® is malfunctioning.

X Press and hold handle :.

The electric parking brake continues to
brake and prevent the vehicle from rolling ECO start/stop function
backwards. Introduction
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in the instrument clus- The ECO start/stop function switches the
ter remains on. engine off automatically if the vehicle is stop-
X Depress the accelerator pedal.
ped under certain conditions.
X As soon as the vehicle/trailer combination
The engine starts automatically when the
is held by the driving force of the engine, driver wants to pull away again. The ECO
release lever :. start/stop function thereby helps you to
The electric parking brake is released. reduce the fuel consumption and emissions
of your vehicle.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-
Important safety notes
ter goes out.
G WARNING
Hill start assist If the engine is switched off automatically and
you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted
Hill start assist helps you when pulling away
automatically. The vehicle may begin moving.
forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It
There is a risk of accident and injury.
holds the vehicle for a short time after you
have removed your foot from the brake pedal. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
This gives you enough time to move your foot the ignition and secure the vehicle against
from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal rolling away.
and to depress it before the vehicle begins to
roll.
G WARNING
After a short time, hill start assist will no lon-
ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.

Z
172 Driving

General notes Rthe system detects that the windshield is

not fogged up when the air-conditioning
system is switched on.
Rthe hood is closed.
Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's
Driving and parking

seat belt is fastened.

If conditions for automatic engine switch-off
have not been fulfilled, the ¤ symbol will
: ECO start/stop display be shown in yellow.
If the ¤ symbol is shown in green in the i All of the vehicle's systems remain active
multifunction display, the ECO start/stop when the engine has been stopped auto-
function switches the engine off automati- matically.
cally if the vehicle stops moving.
Every time you switch on the engine using the i The HOLD function can be activated if the
SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the ECO engine has been switched off automati-
start/stop function is activated. cally. It is then not necessary to continue
applying the brakes during the automatic
If the ECO start/stop function has been man- stop phase. When you depress the accel-
ually deactivated (Y page 173) or a malfunc- erator pedal, the engine starts automati-
tion has caused the system to be deactivated, cally and the braking effect of the HOLD
the ¤ symbol is not displayed. function is deactivated.
AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop function
is only available in drive program C. i All vehicles (apart from AMG vehicles):
automatic engine switch-off can take place
For further information on automatic engine
a maximum of four times consecutively (ini-
switch-off (Y page 172) and automatic
tial stop then repeated three times). The
engine start (Y page 172).
¤ symbol is shown in yellow in the mul-
tifunction display after the engine has been
Automatic engine switch-off started automatically for the fourth time.
If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N, When the ¤ symbol is shown in green in
the ECO start/stop function switches off the the multifunction display, automatic engine
engine automatically. switch-off is again possible.
The ECO start/stop function is operational i AMG vehicles: times which the engine
and the ¤ symbol is displayed in green in can be automatically switched off.
the multifunction display, if:
Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit Automatic engine start
green.
The engine starts automatically if:
Rno off-road program has been selected.
Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function
Rthe outside temperature is within the range
by pressing the ECO button.
that is suitable for the system.
Rin transmission position D or N the brake
Rthe engine is at normal operating temper-
pedal is released and the HOLD function is
ature.
not active.
Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.
has been reached.
Ryou engage reverse gear R.
Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.
 Driving 173

Ryou move the transmission out of position (Y page 172) are fulfilled, the ¤ symbol
P. is shown in green in the multifunction dis-
Ryou switch to drive program S or M (AMG play.
vehicles). If not all conditions for automatic engine
Ryou switch to an off-road program (except switch-off (Y page 172) are fulfilled, the

Driving and parking

for AMG vehicles). ¤ symbol is shown in yellow in the mul-
Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the
tifunction display. If this is the case, the
ECO start/stop function is not available.
driver's door.
Rthe vehicle starts to roll. i If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/
Rthe brake system requires this. stop function has been deactivated man-
Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi- ually or as the result of a malfunction. The
ates from the set range. engine will then not be switched off auto-
matically when the vehicle stops.
Rthe system detects moisture on the wind-
shield when the air-conditioning system is AMG vehicles
switched on.
Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low.

i Shifting the transmission to position P

does not start the engine.
i If you shift the transmission from R to D,
the ECO start/stop function is available
again once the ¤ symbol reappears in
green in the multifunction display.

Deactivating/activating the ECO start/

stop function X To switch off: in drive program C, press
ECO button :.
All vehicles (except AMG vehicles)
or
X Switch to drive program S or M
(Y page 180).
Indicator lamp ; and the ¤ ECO sym-
bol in the multifunction display go out.
X To activate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. If drive pro-
gram S or M is active, the automatic trans-
mission switches to drive program C.
If all conditions for automatic engine
switch-off (Y page 172) are fulfilled, the
X To deactivate: press ECO button :. ¤ symbol is shown in green in the mul-
Indicator lamp ; and the ¤ symbol in tifunction display.
the multifunction display go out. If the conditions for automatic engine
X To activate: press ECO button :. switch-off are not all fulfilled (Y page 172),
Indicator lamp ; lights up. If all conditions the ¤ symbol is lit yellow. If this is the
for automatic engine switch-off

Z
174 Driving

case, the ECO start/stop function is not

available.
i If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/
stop function has been deactivated man-
ually or as the result of a malfunction. The
Driving and parking

engine will then not be switched off auto-

matically when the vehicle stops.
 Driving 175

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The engine does not RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.
start. The starter motor RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.

Driving and parking

can be heard. X Before attempting to start the engine again, turn the SmartKey
in the ignition back to position 0 or press the Start/Stop button
repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go
out.
X Try to start the engine again (Y page 169). Avoid excessively
long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain
the battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or
start. You cannot hear discharged.
the starter motor. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 397).

If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two
minutes.
X Try to start the engine again.

If the engine still does not start:

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicles with a gaso- There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical

line engine: component of the engine management system.
The engine is not run- X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
ning smoothly and is Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic con-
misfiring. verter and damage it.
X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.

The coolant tempera- The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine
ture gauge shows a is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
value above 248 ‡ X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to
(120 †). cool down.
X Check the coolant level (Y page 375). Observe the warning
notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.

Z
176 Automatic transmission

Automatic transmission mission position P, R, N or D appears in the

transmission position display (Y page 176)
Important safety notes in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
Transmission position and drive pro-
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
Driving and parking

gram display
and you engage transmission position D or R,
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is ! If the transmission position display in the
a risk of an accident. multifunction display is not working, you
When engaging transmission position D or R, should pull away carefully to check whether
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do the desired transmission position is
not simultaneously accelerate. engaged. Ideally, you should select trans-
mission position D and, in AMG vehicles,
G WARNING drive program C or S.
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
tral position N when you switch off the engine.
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an
accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-
cle from rolling away by applying the parking
brake. Transmission position and drive program display
: Transmission position display
; Drive program display
DIRECT SELECT lever The current transmission position and drive
program appear in the multifunction display.
Overview of transmission positions
i The arrows in the transmission position
display show how and into which transmis-
sion positions you can change using the
DIRECT SELECT lever.

Engaging park position P

! If the engine speed is too high or the vehi-
cle is moving, do not shift the automatic
transmission directly from D to R, from R to
D or directly to P. The automatic transmis-
sion could otherwise be damaged.
j Park position with parking lock
k Reverse gear
i Neutral
h Drive
The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the
steering column.
i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns
to its original position. The current trans-
 Automatic transmission 177

Shifting to neutral N
G WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:

Driving and parking

Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
j Park position with parking lock motion if, for example, they:
k Reverse gear Rrelease the parking brake.
i Neutral Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
h Drive park position P
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direc- RStart the engine.
tion of arrow P. There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
Engaging park position P automatically SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
Park position P is automatically engaged if:
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
Ryou switch off the engine using the Smart-
reach of children.
Key and remove the SmartKey.
Ryou switch off the engine using the Start/ X If the transmission is in position D or R:
Stop button and open one of the front push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down
doors. to the first point of resistance.
Ryou open the driver's door when the vehicle X If the transmission is in position P: depress
is stationary or driving at very low speed the brake pedal and push the DIRECT
and the transmission is in position D or R. SELECT lever up or down to the first point of
resistance.
Engaging reverse gear R If the engine has been switched off, the auto-
! Only shift the automatic transmission to R matic transmission automatically shifts to N.
when the vehicle is stationary. If you want the automatic transmission to
remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the
X If the transmission is in position D or N:
vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with
push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the
a towing system, observe the following notes:
first point of resistance.
Using the SmartKey:
X If the transmission is in position P: depress
the brake pedal and push the DIRECT RMake sure that the ignition is switched on.
SELECT lever up past the first point of RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the
resistance. brake pedal and keep it depressed.
RShiftto neutral N.
RRelease the brake pedal.

Z
178 Automatic transmission

RIfthe electric parking brake is engaged, Transmission positions

release it.
RSwitch off the ignition and leave the Smart- B Park position
Key in the ignition lock. Do not shift the transmission into
Using KEYLESS-GO: position P (Y page 190) unless the
Driving and parking

RMake
vehicle is stationary. The parking
sure that the ignition is switched on.
lock should not be used as a brake
RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the
when parking. Always apply the
brake pedal and keep it depressed. electronic parking brake in addi-
REngage park position P. tion to the parking lock in order to
RRelease the brake pedal. secure the vehicle.
RRemove the Start/Stop button from the If the vehicle electronics are mal-
ignition lock. functioning, the transmission may
RInsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. be locked in position P. Have the
RSwitch on the ignition.
vehicle electronics checked imme-
diately at a qualified specialist
RDepress the brake pedal and keep it
workshop.
depressed.
The automatic transmission shifts
RShift to neutral N.
to P automatically if you:
RRelease the brake pedal.
Rremove the SmartKey
RIf the electric parking brake is engaged,
Rswitch off the engine when in R
release it.
or D and open one of the front
RSwitch off the ignition and leave the Smart-
doors
Key in the ignition lock.
C Reverse gear
Engaging drive position D Only shift the transmission to R
X If the transmission is in position R or N: when the vehicle is stationary.
push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past
the first point of resistance.
X If the transmission is in position P: depress
the brake pedal and push the DIRECT
SELECT lever down past the first point of
resistance.
 Automatic transmission 179

A Neutral Kickdown
Do not shift the transmission to N Use kickdown for maximum acceleration.
while driving. Otherwise, the auto- X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
matic transmission could be dam- pressure point.
aged. The automatic transmission shifts to a

Driving and parking

No power is transmitted from the lower gear depending on the engine speed.
engine to the drive wheels. X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
Releasing the brake pedal will allow desired speed is reached.
you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. The automatic transmission shifts back up.
to push it or tow it.
If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: Rocking the vehicle free
only shift the transmission to posi-
tion N if the vehicle is in danger of Shifting the transmission repeatedly between
gears D and R may help to free the vehicle if it
skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
has become stuck in slush or snow. The vehi-
If you switch off the engine using cle's engine management system limits the
the SmartKey or the Start/Stop speed to a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h) when
button, the automatic transmission shifting back and forth. To shift back and forth
shifts to neutral N automatically. between transmission positions D and R,
! Rolling in neutral N can damage move the DIRECT SELECT lever up and down
the drive train. past the point of resistance.
7 Drive Towing a trailer
The automatic transmission
changes gear automatically. All X Drive in the middle of the engine speed
forward gears are available. range on uphill gradients.
X Depending on the uphill or downhill gradi-
ent, use left-hand steering wheel paddle
Driving tips shifter (Y page 180) to select a lower gear,
even if cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS
Changing gear are activated.
The automatic transmission shifts to the indi-
vidual gears automatically when it is in trans-
mission position D. This automatic gear shift-
ing behavior is determined by:
Rthe selected drive program (Y page 180)
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
(Y page 179)
Rthe road speed

Accelerator pedal position

Your style of driving influences how the auto-
matic transmission shifts gear:
Rlittle throttle: early upshifts
Rmore throttle: late upshifts
Z
180 Automatic transmission

Program selector button As well as this permanent drive program M,

you can also activate temporary drive pro-
General notes gram M (Y page 181).
i AMG vehicles: the automatic transmis-
sion switches to automatic drive program C
Driving and parking

each time the engine is started.

i Drive program M is not saved after the
engine has been switched off. If required,
you must select the drive program again
after starting the engine.
Drive program on vehicles with the
ON&OFFROAD package
Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package M Manual Permanent manual gear-
X Briefly press program selector button :. shifting
The letter M appears in the multifunction
display. The manual drive program M is Drive programs on AMG vehicles
activated.
C Controlled Comfortable, economical
Efficiency driving
S Sport Sporty driving style
M Manual Permanent manual gear-
shifting

i For further information on the automatic

drive program, see (Y page 181).

AMG vehicles Steering wheel paddle shifters

X Press program selector button : repeat-
edly until the letter for the desired gearshift
program appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
The program selector button allows you to
choose between different driving character-
istics.
i The permanent drive program M is avail-
able on the following vehicles:
RVehicles with the
ON&OFFROAD package In the manual drive program, you can change
RAMG vehicles gears manually using steering wheel paddle
Further information about permanent drive shifters : and ;.
program M (Y page 182).
 Automatic transmission 181

Further information about permanent drive dle shifters. The transmission must be in posi-
program M (Y page 182). tion D.
Further information about temporary drive All vehicles (except AMG vehicles and
program M (Y page 181). vehicles with the
ON&OFFROAD package): you can activate
i You can only change gear with the steer-

Driving and parking

manual drive program M using the steering
ing wheel paddle shifters when the trans-
wheel paddle shifters.
mission is in position D.
AMG vehicles: you can activate manual drive
program M in automatic drive programs C and
Automatic drive program (AMG vehi- S.
cles) Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package:
if manual drive program M is deactivated
Automatic drive programs C and S using the program selector button, you can
Drive program C is characterized by the fol- activate manual drive program M using the
lowing: steering wheel paddle shifters.
Rcomfort-oriented engine and transmission i As well as temporary drive program M,
settings you can also activate permanent drive pro-
Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from gram M (Y page 180).
the automatic transmission shifting up Further information about permanent drive
sooner program M (Y page 182).
Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in
forward and reverse gears, unless the Activating
accelerator pedal is depressed fully X Shift the transmission to position D.
Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddle
stability on slippery road surfaces, for shifter (Y page 180).
example Manual drive program M is temporarily acti-
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up vated. The selected gear and M appear in
sooner. This results in the vehicle being the multifunction display.
driven at lower engine speeds and the
Shifting gears
wheels being less likely to spin
Drive program S is characterized by the fol- If you pull on the left or right steering wheel
paddle shifter, the automatic transmission
lowing:
switches to manual drive program M for a
Rsporty engine and transmission settings limited amount of time. Depending on which
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up paddle shifter is pulled, the automatic trans-
later mission immediately shifts into the next gear
Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher down or up, if permitted.
as a result of the later automatic transmis- X To shift up: pull the right-hand steering
sion shift points wheel paddle shifter (Y page 180).
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
Manual drive program M next gear.
General notes i If the maximum engine speed on the cur-
rently engaged gear is reached and you
In this drive program, you can briefly change continue to accelerate, the automatic
gear yourself by using the steering wheel pad-

Z
182 Automatic transmission

transmission automatically shifts up in You can also deactivate manual drive pro-
order to prevent engine damage. gram M yourself:
XTo shift down: pull on the left-hand steer- X Pull on the right-hand steering wheel pad-
ing wheel paddle shifter (Y page 180). dle shifter and hold it in place (Y page 180).
The automatic transmission shifts down to or
Driving and parking

the next gear. X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the
i If the engine exceeds the maximum transmission position.
engine speed when shifting down, the auto- or
matic transmission protects against engine
X AMG vehicles: use the program selector
damage by not shifting down.
button to change the drive program
i Automatic down shifting occurs when (Y page 180).
coasting. Manual drive program M is deactivated.
The automatic transmission switches into
Shift recommendation
the automatic drive program that was last
selected, i.e. E or S.
or
X Vehicles with the
ON&OFFROAD package: use the selector
wheel to switch to the on-road program
(Y page 255) or the off-road program
(Y page 259).
The gearshift recommendations assist you in
adopting an economical driving style. The rec-
ommended gear is shown in the multifunction
display.
Manual drive program
X Shift to recommended gear ; according General information
to gearshift recommendation : when
In this drive program, you can permanently
shown in the multifunction display of the
change gear yourself by using the steering
instrument cluster.
wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must
Deactivating be in position D.
If you have activated manual drive program i As well as this permanent drive program
M, it will remain active for a certain amount of M, you can also activate temporary drive
time. Under certain conditions the minimum program M (Y page 181).
amount of time is extended, e.g. in the case of
lateral acceleration, during an overrun phase Switching on the manual drive program
or when driving on steep terrain.
In manual drive program M, you can change
If manual drive program M has been deacti-
gear using the steering wheel paddle shifters
vated, the automatic transmission shifts into
if the transmission is in position D. You can
the automatic drive program that was last
see the currently selected drive program and
selected.
which gear is engaged in the multifunction
display.
 Automatic transmission 183

X AMG vehicles: press the program selector

button (Y page 180) until M appears in the
multifunction display.
X Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD pack-
age: press the program selector button

Driving and parking

(Y page 180).
The letter M appears in the multifunction
: Gear indicator
display.
; Upshift indicator

Shifting up (all vehicles except AMG Before the engine speed reaches the red area,
vehicles) an upshift indicator will be shown in the mul-
tifunction display.
X If the color in the speedometer multifunc-
tion display changes to red and the UP dis-
play message is shown, shift up a gear.

Downshifting
X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle
X If corresponding gearshift recommenda- shifter (Y page 180).
tion : appears in the multifunction display The automatic transmission shifts down to
on the instrument cluster, pull on the right- the next gear.
hand steering wheel paddle shifter
(Y page 180). Maximum acceleration
The automatic transmission shifts to rec- X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle
ommended gear ;. shifter until the transmission selects the
optimum gear according to the speed.
Shifting up (AMG vehicles)
i If you slow down or stop without shifting
! In manual drive program M, the automatic down, the automatic transmission auto-
transmission does not shift up automati- matically shifts down.
cally even when the engine limiting speed
for the current gear is reached. When the Kickdown
engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel You can also use kickdown for maximum
supply is cut to prevent the engine from acceleration in manual drive program M.
overrevving. Always make sure that the
engine speed does not reach the red area of X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of pressure point.
engine damage. The automatic transmission shifts to a
lower gear depending on the engine speed.
X Shift back up once the desired speed is
reached.
i All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): if
you apply full throttle, the automatic trans-
mission shifts up to the next gear when the
maximum engine speed is reached. This
prevents the engine from overrevving.

Z
184 Automatic transmission

i AMG vehicles: it is not possible to use

kickdown in manual drive program M.

Switching off the manual drive program

X Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD pack-
Driving and parking

age: press the program selector button

(Y page 180).
The M message in the multifunction display
goes out.
X AMG vehicles: press the program selector
button (Y page 180) repeatedly until C or S
appears in the multifunction display.
 Refueling 185

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The transmission has The transmission is losing oil.
problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-

Driving and parking

shop immediately.

The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode.

is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.
The transmission no X Stop the vehicle.
longer changes gear.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Switch off the engine.
X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is
selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop immediately.

Transfer case Refueling

! Performance tests may only be carried Important safety notes
out on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake
system or transfer case could otherwise be G WARNING
damaged. Contact a qualified specialist Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
workshop for a performance test. incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-
sion.
! Because ESP® is an automatic system,
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
the engine and ignition must be switched
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
off (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 or Start/
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
Stop button in position 0 or 1) when the
refueling.
electric parking brake is being tested on a
brake dynamometer (maximum
G WARNING
10 seconds).
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
Braking triggered automatically by ESP® There is a risk of injury.
may seriously damage the brake system.
You must make sure that fuel does not come
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
with either the front or the rear axle raised, and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
as doing so will damage the transmission. vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
This section is only valid for vehicles with 4-
wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always trans-
mitted to both axles.

Z
186 Refueling

If you or others come into contact with fuel, ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
observe the following: gasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-
tion if you accidentally refuel with the
RWash away fuel from skin immediately
wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter
using soap and water.
the fuel system. Even small amounts of the
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
Driving and parking

wrong fuel could result in damage to the

immediately rinse them thoroughly with fuel system and the engine. Notify a quali-
clean water. Seek medical assistance with- fied specialist workshop and have the fuel
out delay. tank and fuel lines drained completely.
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
ing. fuel system.
RImmediately change out of clothing which ! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted
has come into contact with fuel. surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
paintwork.
G WARNING ! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.
Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection
ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and system could be blocked by particles from
explosion. the fuel can.
Always touch the vehicle body before opening
Do not get into the vehicle again during the
the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump
refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic
nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is
charge could build up again.
thereby discharged.
If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray
G WARNING out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: For further information on fuel and fuel quality
(Y page 448).
If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash
point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.
When the engine is running, exhaust system
Refueling
components could overheat without being
noticed. There is a risk of fire. General information
Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline
Pay attention to the important safety notes
with diesel fuel.
(Y page 185).
! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles with The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto-
a diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel matically when you open or close the vehicle
vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
switch on the ignition if you accidentally The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed
refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the 8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow
fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small next to the filling pump indicates the side of
amounts of the wrong fuel could result in the vehicle.
damage to the fuel system and the engine.
The repair costs are high. Notify a qualified
specialist workshop and have the fuel tank
and fuel lines drained completely.
 Refueling 187

Opening the fuel filler flap Closing the fuel filler flap
X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.
X Close the fuel filler flap.

Driving and parking

i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the
vehicle.
i If you are driving with the fuel filler cap
open, the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp
flashes.
In addition, the ; Check Engine warning
: To open the fuel filler flap lamp may light up (Y page 335).
; To insert the fuel filler cap A message appears in the multifunction
= Fuel type to be used display (Y page 310).
? Tire pressure table For further information on warning and indi-
cator lamps in the instrument cluster, see
X Switch the engine off. (Y page 335).
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock.
X KEYLESS-GO: open the driver’s door.
This corresponds to key position 0: "key
removed".
The driver’s door can be closed again.
X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
arrow :.
The fuel filler flap swings up.
X Turn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwise
and remove it.
X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder
bracket on the inside of filler flap ;.
X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place
and refuel.
X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
i Vehicles with a diesel engine: the filler
neck is designed for refueling at diesel fill-
ing pumps.
i Do not add any more fuel after the pump
stops filling for the first time. Otherwise,
fuel may leak out.

Z
188 Refueling

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

This section provides descriptions of and solutions to safety-relevant problems. Descriptions
of and solutions to further problems can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual.
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Driving and parking

Fuel is leaking from the The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
vehicle.
G WARNING
Risk of explosion or fire.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove
it immediately (Y page 167).
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

DEF (BlueTEC vehicles only) Start Not Poss message appears in the
multifunction display and the engine does not
Important notes on use start, you must add DEF.
To function properly, BlueTEC exhaust gas X Add at least 1 gal (3.8 l) of DEF.
aftertreatment must be operated with the X Switch on the ignition for at least 60 sec-
reducing agent DEF. Adding DEF is one of the onds.
tasks performed during maintenance. Under X Start the engine.
normal operating conditions, a tank of DEF
lasts until the next service due date. i Have the DEF tank refilled at a qualified
When the supply of DEF is almost used up, the specialist workshop.
Check Additive See Operator's Manual Use the special DEF refill bottle when adding
message is shown in the multifunction dis- DEF between maintenance intervals. Contact
play. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center with
If you drive the vehicle faster than 10 mph any questions or, if necessary, contact Road-
(16 km/h), the Check Additive See Oper‐ side Assistance (Y page 26).
ator's Manual message goes out after If the outside temperature is below 12 ‡
approximately one minute. (Ò11 †) it may be difficult to top up. If DEF is
When the supply of DEF is down to a reserve frozen and there is an active warning indica-
of approximately 1 gal (3.8 l) the Refill tor, it may not be possible to add DEF. Park
AdBlue/DEF See Operator's Manual mes- the vehicle in a warmer place, e.g. in a garage,
sage is shown in the multifunction display. until DEF has become fluid again. It will then
When the DEF supply drops to a minimum, the be possible to add DEF again. Alternatively,
Remaining Starts: 16 message is shown have the DEF tank refilled at a qualified spe-
in the multifunction display. cialist workshop.
If the Refill AdBlue/DEF No Start in Further information about BlueTEC exhaust
XXXX km message is shown in the multifunc- gas aftertreatment and DEF is available at any
tion display, you can still drive the vehicle authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
over the distance shown. If DEF is not refilled,
you will subsequently be unable to start the
engine. If the Refill AdBlue/DEF Eng.
 Refueling 189

Important safety notes on the refilling permitted if the vehicle is not parked on a
procedure level surface. There is a danger of overfill-
ing, which could result in damage to com-
DEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust
ponents of the BlueTEC exhaust gas after-
gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is:
treatment.
Rnot poisonous

Driving and parking

! Rinse surfaces that have come into con-
Rcolorless and odorless
tact with DEF immediately with water or
Rnot flammable remove DEF using a damp cloth and cold
When you open the DEF container, small water. If the DEF has already crystallized,
amounts of ammonia vapor may be released. use a sponge and cold water to clean it. DEF
Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and are residues crystallize after time and contam-
particularly irritating to the skin, to mucous inate the affected surfaces.
membranes and to the eyes. You may expe- ! DEF is not a fuel additive and must not be
rience a burning sensation in your eyes, nose added to the fuel tank. If DEF is added to
and throat. Coughing and watering of the the fuel tank, this can lead to engine dam-
eyes are possible. age.
Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEF
tank only in well-ventilated areas. For further information on DEF, see
(Y page 450).
DEF must not come into contact with your
skin, eyes or clothing and must not be swal- You will find further information on DEF in the
lowed. Keep DEF away from children. printed Operator's Manual under "Technical
data".
If you or other persons come into contact with
DEF, observe the following:
Opening the DEF filler cap
RRinse DEF from your skin immediately with
soap and water.
RIf DEF comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical assistance with-
out delay.
RIf DEF has been swallowed, rinse your
mouth out immediately. Drink plenty of
water. Seek medical assistance without
delay.
RChange out of clothing contaminated with
DEF immediately. The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto-
! Only use DEF in accordance with matically when you open or close the vehicle
ISO 22241. Do not mix any additives with with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
DEF, and do not dilute DEF with water. This X Switch the ignition off.
may destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas after- X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
treatment system. arrow :.
The fuel filler flap swings up.
! The vehicle must be parked on level
X Turn blue DEF filler cap ; counter-clock-
ground to fill the DEF tank. The DEF tank
can only be filled as intended with the vehi- wise and remove it.
cle parked on a level surface. This avoids DEF filler cap ; is secured with a plastic
false level readings. Filling the tank is not strip.

Z
190 Parking

DEF refill bottle Closing the DEF filler cap

! Only screw on the DEF refill bottle hand-
tight. It could otherwise be damaged.
Driving and parking

X Mount DEF filler cap ; on the filler neck

and turn it clockwise.
X Unscrew the protective cap from DEF refill X To close the fuel filler flap, press it in the

bottle :. direction of arrow :.

X Place DEF refill bottle : on the filler neck X Drive faster than 10 mph (16 km/h).

as shown and screw it on clockwise until The Check Additive See Operator's
hand-tight. Manual message goes out after approx-
X Press DEF refill bottle : towards the filler
imately one minute.
neck. i If the Check Additive See Opera‐
The DEF tank is filled. This may take up to tor's Manual message continues to be
one minute. shown in the multifunction display, you
i When DEF refill bottle : is no longer must add more DEF.
pressed, filling stops and the bottle may be
taken off again after being only partially
emptied.
Parking
X Release DEF refill bottle :. Important safety notes
X Turn DEF refill bottle : counter-clockwise
G WARNING
and remove it.
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
X Screw the protective cap onto DEF refill
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
bottle : again. hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust
DEF refill bottles can be obtained at many gas gas flow. There is a risk of fire.
stations or at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-
Center. Refill bottles without a threaded cap rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-
do not provide overfill protection. DEF may cle which are hot. Take particular care not to
leak if overfilled. Mercedes Benz offers spe- park on dry grassland or harvested grain
cial refill bottles with a threaded seal. These fields.
are available at any authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center. G WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
 Parking 191

more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an
of an accident. accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving. After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-
G WARNING cle from rolling away by applying the parking

Driving and parking

If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- brake.
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
Rrelease the parking brake. Using the SmartKey
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the X Apply the electric parking brake.
parking position P. X Shift the transmission to position P.
Rstart the engine. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- tion lock and remove it.
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of The immobilizer is activated.
an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the i If you turn off the engine with the Smart-
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never Key and then remove it from the ignition
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. lock or open a front door, the automatic
transmission shifts to P automatically.
! Always secure the vehicle correctly If you shift the automatic transmission to N
against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle before switching off the engine, the auto-
or its drivetrain could be damaged. matic transmission remains in N even if a
To ensure that the vehicle is secured against door is opened.
rolling away unintentionally:
Using KEYLESS-GO
Rthe electric parking brake must be applied.
Rthe transmission must be in position P and X Apply the electric parking brake.
the SmartKey must be removed from the X Shift the transmission to position P.
ignition lock. X Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 167).
Rthe front wheels must be turned towards The engine stops and all the indicator
the curb on steep uphill or downhill gradi- lamps in the instrument cluster go out.
ents.
Rthe empty vehicle must be secured at the
i If you turn off the engine with the Start/
Stop button, the automatic transmission
front axle with a wheel chock or similar, for
shifts to N. If you then open one of the front
example, on uphill or downhill gradients.
doors, the automatic transmission shifts to
Ra laden vehicle must also be secured at the
P.
rear axle with a wheel chock or similar, for
example, on uphill or downhill gradients. i In the event of an emergency, the engine
can be turned off while the vehicle is in
motion by pressing and holding the Start/
Switching off the engine Stop button for three seconds.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
tral position N when you switch off the engine.

Z
192 Parking

Electric parking brake Applying/releasing manually

General notes
G WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
Driving and parking

cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:

Rrelease the parking brake.
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
Rstart the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of X To engage: push handle :.
an accident and injury. When the electric parking brake is
When leaving the vehicle, always take the engaged, the F (USA only) or !
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never (Canada only) red indicator lamp lights up
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. in the instrument cluster.
i The electric parking brake can also be
The function of the electric parking brake is applied when the SmartKey is removed.
dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on- X To release: pull handle :.
board voltage is low or there is a malfunction
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
in the system, it may not be possible to apply
only) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-
the released parking brake.
ter goes out.
X If this is the case, only park the vehicle on i The electric parking brake can only be
level ground and secure it to prevent it roll- released:
ing away.
Rif the SmartKey is in position 1 in the
X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-
ignition lock (Y page 167) or
tion P.
Rif the ignition was switched on using the
It may not be possible to release an applied Start/Stop button.
parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or To ensure that you do not roll backwards
there is a malfunction in the system. Contact when pulling away on an uphill slope, engage
a qualified specialist workshop. the electric parking brake (Y page 171).
i The electric parking brake performs a
function test at regular intervals while the Applying automatically
engine is switched off. The sounds that can The electric parking brake is applied auto-
be heard while this is occurring are normal. matically:
Rif DISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to a
standstill or
Rif the HOLD function is keeping the vehicle
stationary
 Parking 193

In addition, at least one of the following con- Emergency braking

ditions must be fulfilled:
Rthe engine is switched off.
Rthe driver's door is open and the seat belt is
not fastened.

Driving and parking

Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy
period.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
lights up.
i The electric parking brake is not automat-
ically engaged if the engine is switched off X While driving, push handle : of the electric
by the ECO start/stop function. parking brake.
The vehicle can also be braked during an
Releasing automatically emergency by using the electric parking
The electric parking brake is released auto- brake.
matically when all of the following conditions i The vehicle is braked for as long as the
are fulfilled: handle of the electric parking brake is
Rthe engine is running. pressed. The longer the electric parking
Rthe transmission is in position D or R. brake handle is depressed, the greater the
Rthe seat belt has been fastened.
braking force.
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. During braking:
If the transmission is in position R, the trunk Ra warning tone sounds
lid must be closed. Rthe Release Park. Brake message
If your seat belt is not fastened, the following appears
conditions must be fulfilled to automatically Rthe red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
release the electric parking brake: only) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-
Rthe driver's door is closed. ter flashes
Ryou have shifted out of transmission posi- When the vehicle has been braked to a stand-
tion P or you have previously driven faster still, the electric parking brake is engaged.
than 2 mph (3 km/h).
i Ensure that you do not depress the accel- Parking the vehicle for a long period
erator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise the
parking brake will be released and the vehi- If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
cle will start to move. four weeks, the battery may be damaged by
exhaustive discharging.
X Connecting a trickle charger.

i You can obtain information about trickle

chargers from a qualified specialist work-
shop.
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a
result of lack of use.

Z
194 Driving tips

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and Drive sensibly – save fuel

seek advice.
Observe the following tips to save fuel:
X The tires should always be inflated to the
Driving tips recommended tire pressure.
Driving and parking

X Remove unnecessary loads.

General notes X Remove roof carriers when they are not
Important safety notes needed.
X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.
G WARNING X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
X Have all maintenance work carried out as
safety-relevant functions are only available
indicated by the service intervals in the
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
Maintenance Booklet or by the service
for example, the power steering and the brake
interval display.
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk Fuel consumption also increases when driv-
of an accident. ing in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in
Do not switch off the ignition while driving. hilly terrain.

G WARNING Drinking and driving

If you operate mobile communication equip- G WARNING
ment while driving, you will be distracted from
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
driving are very dangerous combinations.
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-
is stationary. ment.
Observe the legal requirements for the coun- The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-
try in which you are driving. Some jurisdic- dent is greatly increased when you drink or
tions prohibit the driver from using a mobile take drugs and drive.
phone while driving a vehicle. Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
If you make a call while driving, always use anyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-
hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone ing drugs.
when the traffic situation permits. If you are
unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop Emission control
before operating the telephone.
G WARNING
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
(approximately 50 km/h) the vehicle covers a
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
second.
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
out sufficient ventilation.

Certain engine systems are designed to keep

the level of poisonous components in exhaust
fumes within legal limits.
 Driving tips 195

These systems only work at peak efficiency if Apart from driving style, consumption is
they are serviced exactly in accordance with dependent on many factors such as, e.g.:
the manufacturer's specifications. For this Rload
reason, all work on the engine must be carried
Rtire pressure
out by qualified and authorized Mercedes-
Rcold start

Driving and parking

Benz technicians.
Rchoice of route
The engine settings must not be changed
under any circumstances. Furthermore, all Relectrical consumers switched on
specific service work must be carried out at These factors are not included in the ECO dis-
regular intervals and in accordance with the play.
Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details The evaluation of your driving style is carried
can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. out using the following three categories:
RAcceleration (evaluation of all accelera-
tion processes):
ECO display
- The bar fills up: moderate acceleration,
especially at higher speeds
- The bar empties: sporty acceleration
RConstant (assessment of driving behavior
at all times):
- The bar fills up: constant speed and
avoidance of unnecessary acceleration
Example: ECO display and deceleration
- The bar empties: fluctuations in speed
The ECO display provides feedback on how
economical your driving characteristics are. RCoasting (assessment of all deceleration
The ECO display assists you in achieving the processes):
most economical driving style for the selec- - The bar fills up: anticipatory driving,
ted settings and prevailing conditions. Your keeping your distance and early release
driving style can significantly influence the of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast
vehicle's consumption. without use of the brakes.
The ECO display consists of three bars: - The bar empties: frequent braking

RAcceleration i An economical driving style specially

RConstant requires driving at moderate engine
RCoasting speeds.
The percent value is the average value of the To achieve a higher value in the categories
three bars. The three bars and the mean value Acceleration and Constant
Constant, observe the
begin at the value of 50%. A higher percent- gearshift recommendations.
age indicates a more economical driving i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g.
style. on the highway, only the bar for Constant
The ECO display does not indicate the actual will change.
fuel consumption. A fixed percentage count
in the ECO display does not indicate a fixed i The ECO display summarizes the driving
consumption. characteristics from the start of the journey
to its completion. For this reason, the bars
change dynamically at the beginning of the
journey. On longer journeys, there are

Z
196 Driving tips

fewer changes. For more dynamic changes, Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never
carry out a manual reset. depress the brake pedal and the accelerator
For further information on the ECO display, pedal at the same time.
see (Y page 278).
! Depressing the brake pedal constantly
Driving and parking

results in excessive and premature wear to

Braking the brake pads.
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy
Important safety notes load, do not stop the vehicle immediately.
G WARNING Drive on for a short while. This allows the air-
flow to cool the brakes more quickly.
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
an attempt to increase the engine's braking
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. Wet roads
There is an increased danger of skidding and If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain
accidents. without braking, there may be a delayed reac-
Do not shift down for additional engine brak- tion from the brakes when braking for the first
ing on a slippery road surface. time. This may also occur after the vehicle has
been washed or driven through deep water.
Downhill gradients You then have to depress the brake pedal
more firmly. Maintain a greater distance from
! On long and steep gradients, you must the vehicle in front.
reduce the load on the brakes by shifting
After driving on a wet road or having the vehi-
early to a lower gear. This allows you to take
cle washed, brake firmly while paying atten-
advantage of the engine braking effect and
tion to the traffic conditions. This will warm up
helps avoid overheating and excessive
the brake discs, thereby drying them more
wear of the brakes.
quickly and protecting them against corro-
When you take advantage of the engine sion.
braking effect, a drive wheel may not turn
for some time, e.g. on a slippery road sur- Limited braking performance on salt-
face. This could cause damage to the drive treated roads
train. This type of damage is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz warranty. If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt
residue may form on the brake discs and
Do not depress the brake pedal continuously
brake pads. This can result in a significantly
while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. causing the
longer braking distance.
brakes to rub by constantly applying light
RBrake occasionally to remove any possible
pressure to the pedal. This results in exces-
sive and premature wear to the brake pads. salt residue. Make sure that you do not
endanger other road users when doing so.
Heavy and light loads RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the
beginning and end of a journey.
G WARNING RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while ahead.
driving, the braking system can overheat. This
increases the stopping distance and can even
cause the braking system to fail. There is a
risk of an accident.
 Driving tips 197

Servicing the brakes Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only

have brake pads/linings installed on your
! If the red brake warning lamp lights up in vehicle which have been approved for
the instrument cluster and you hear a warn-
Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond
ing tone while the engine is running, the
to an equivalent quality standard. Brake
brake fluid level may be too low. Observe

Driving and parking

pads/linings which have not been approved
additional warning messages in the multi-
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not
function display.
of an equivalent quality could affect your vehi-
The brake fluid level may be too low due to cle's operating safety.
brake pad wear or leaking brake lines.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
Have the brake system checked immedi- use brake fluid that has been specially
ately. This work should be carried out at a approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz,
qualified specialist workshop. or which corresponds to an equivalent quality
! A function or performance test should standard. Brake fluid which has not been
only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamom- approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or
eter. If you are planning to have the vehicle which is not of an equivalent quality could
tested on such a dynamometer, contact an affect your vehicle's operating safety.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to
obtain further information first. Otherwise, High-performance brake system for
you could damage the drive train or the AMG vehicles
brake system. The high-performance brake system is only
! Because ESP® is an automatic system, available on AMG vehicles.
the engine and ignition must be switched The high-performance brake system is
off (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 or Start/ designed for heavy loads. This may lead to
Stop button in position 0 or 1) when the noise when braking. This will depend on:
electric parking brake is being tested on a Rspeed
brake dynamometer (maximum Rbraking force
10 seconds).
Renvironmental conditions, such as temper-
Braking triggered automatically by ESP® ature and humidity
may seriously damage the brake system.
The wear of individual components of the
All checks and maintenance work on the brake system, such as the brake pads/linings
brake system must be carried out at a quali- or brake discs, depends on the individual driv-
fied specialist workshop. Consult a qualified ing style and operating conditions.
specialist workshop to arrange this. For this reason, it is impossible to state a
Have brake pads installed and brake fluid mileage that will be valid under all circum-
replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. stances. An aggressive driving style will lead
If the brake system has only been subject to to high wear. You can obtain further informa-
moderate loads, you should test the function- tion about this from your authorized
ality of your brakes at regular intervals. To do Mercedes-Benz Center.
so, depress the brake pedal firmly when driv- New and replaced brake pads and discs only
ing at a high speed. This improves the grip of reach their optimum braking effect after sev-
the brake pads. eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen-
You can find a description of Brake Assist sate for this by applying greater force to the
(BAS) on (Y page 69) or of BAS PLUS on brake pedal. Keep this in mind, and adapt
(Y page 69).

Z
198 Driving tips

your driving and braking accordingly during Off-road fording

this break-in period.
! Under no circumstances should you
Excessive heavy braking results in corre- accelerate before entering the water. The
spondingly high brake wear. Observe the bow wave could cause water to enter and
# brake wear warning lamp in the instru- damage the engine and other assemblies.
Driving and parking

ment cluster and note any brake status mes-

sages in the multifunction display. Especially ! Do not open any of the vehicle's doors
for high performance driving, it is important to while fording. Otherwise, water could get
maintain and have the brake system checked into the vehicle interior and damage the
regularly. vehicle's electronics and interior equip-
ment.
REstablish how deep the water is and the
Driving on wet roads characteristics of the body of water before
Hydroplaning fording.
RVehicles with the AIRMATIC package:
If water has accumulated to a certain depth select the highest possible vehicle level.
on the road surface, there is a danger of RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand
hydroplaning occurring, even if:
steering wheel paddle shifter.
Ryou drive at low speeds. RAvoid high engine speeds.
Rthe tires have adequate tread depth. REnter and exit the water at a flat place and
For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in at a steady walking pace.
conditions in which hydroplaning may occur, RDrive slowly and at an even speed through
you must drive in the following manner: the water.
Rlower your speed. RDo not stop.
Ravoid ruts. RWater offers a high degree of resistance,
Ravoid sudden steering movements. and the ground is slippery and in some
Rbrake carefully. cases unstable. Therefore, it is difficult and
dangerous to pull away in the water.
Driving on flooded roads REnsure that a bow wave does not form as
you drive.
! Do not drive through flooded areas. RClean any mud from the tire tread after
Check the depth of any water before driving
fording.
through it. Drive slowly through standing
RApply the brakes to dry them after fording.
water. Otherwise, water may enter the
vehicle interior or the engine compartment. Always observe the fording depth values
This can damage the electronic compo- (Y page 456).
nents in the engine or the automatic trans-
mission. Water can also be drawn in by the
engine's air suction nozzles and this can Winter driving
cause engine damage.
G WARNING
i Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
set the raised level before driving through an attempt to increase the engine's braking
standing water. effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
There is an increased danger of skidding and
accidents.
 Driving tips 199

Do not shift down for additional engine brak- Indicated temperatures just above the freez-
ing on a slippery road surface. ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-
face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
G DANGER especially in wooded areas or on bridges. You
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate should pay special attention to road condi-

Driving and parking

ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases tions when temperatures are around the
such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the freezing point.
vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle For more information on driving with snow
becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of chains, see (Y page 409).
fatal injury. For more information on driving with summer
If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating tires, see (Y page 408).
running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"
around the vehicle are clear of snow. To section (Y page 408).
ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a
window on the side of the vehicle that is not
facing into the wind. Off-road driving

Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a quali- Important safety notes

fied specialist workshop at the onset of win-
ter.
G WARNING
If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or
Drive particularly carefully on slippery road
turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle
surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering
could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is a
and braking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise
risk of an accident.
control or DISTRONIC PLUS.
Always drive on a steep incline in the line of
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be fall (straight up or down) and do not turn the
stopped when moving at low speed: vehicle.
X Shift the transmission to position N.
Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package: G WARNING
if driving in snow or with snow chains, select If the vehicle level is high, the vehicle center of
the snow program (Y page 256) with the off- gravity is raised. This could cause the vehicle
road program selector wheel in the center to tip over more easily on uphill or downhill
console. gradients. There is a risk of an accident.
Select the lowest possible vehicle level.
i Vehicles with a diesel engine: do not
cover the radiator, e.g. with a protective When driving off-road, sand, mud and water,
cover. The measuring function of the possibly mixed with oil, for example, could get
onboard diagnosis system may otherwise into the brakes. This could result in a reduced
provide inaccurate values. Some of these braking effect or in total brake failure and also
values are required by law and must there- in increased wear and tear. The braking char-
fore always be accurate. acteristics change depending on the material
The outside temperature indicator is not ingressing the brakes. Clean the brakes after
designed to serve as an ice-warning device driving off-road. If you detect a reduced brak-
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. ing effect or grinding noises, have the brake
Changes in the outside temperature are dis- system checked in a qualified specialist work-
played after a short delay. shop as soon as possible. Adapt your driving
style to the different braking characteristics.

Z
200 Driving tips

Driving off-road increases the likelihood of RCheck that items of luggage and loads are
damage to the vehicle, which, in turn, can lead stowed safely and are well secured
to failure of the mechanical assembly or sys- (Y page 347).
tems. Adapt your driving style to suit the ter- RAlways keep the engine running and in gear
rain conditions. Drive carefully. Have damage when driving on a downhill gradient. Acti-
Driving and parking

to the vehicle rectified immediately at a quali- vate DSR (Y page 258).

fied specialist workshop. RAlways keep the doors, tailgate, windows
Do not switch to transmission position N and sliding sunroof closed while driving.
when driving off-road. You could lose control RAdapt your speed to the terrain. The
of the vehicle if you attempt to brake using rougher, steeper or more ruts on the ter-
the service brake. If the gradient is too steep, rain, the slower your speed should be.
drive backwards in reverse gear.
RDrive slowly and at an even speed through
the water. Ensure that a bow wave does not
General notes form as you drive.
Read this section carefully before driving your RDrive with extreme care on unfamiliar off-
vehicle off-road. Practice by driving over more road routes where visibility is poor. For
gentle off-road terrain first. safety reasons, get out of the vehicle first
Familiarize yourself with the characteristics and survey the off-road route.
of your vehicle and the gear shift operation RLook out for obstacles, such as rocks,
before driving through difficult terrain. holes, tree stumps and furrows.
The following driving systems are specially RCheck the depth of water before fording
adapted to off-road driving: rivers and streams.
ROff-road program 1 and 2 (vehicles with the RWhen fording, do not stop and do not
ON&OFFROAD package) (Y page 259) switch off the engine.
RLOW RANGE off-road gear (vehicles with ROn sand, drive quickly to overcome the roll-
the ON&OFFROAD package) ing resistance. Otherwise the vehicle's
(Y page 261) wheels could become stuck in loose
RDifferential lock (vehicles with the ground.
ON&OFFROAD package) (Y page 260) RDo not jump with the vehicle as this will

ROff-road ABS (Y page 69) interrupt the vehicle's propulsion.

ROff-road 4ETS (Y page 73) RAlways keep the engine running and in gear

RAIRMATIC package (vehicle level)

when driving on a slope.
RDo not shift the automatic transmission to
(Y page 219)
RDSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)
transmission position N.
(Y page 258) i Do not use the HOLD function when driv-
Observe the following notes: ing off-road, on steep uphill or downhill gra-
RStop
dients or on slippery or loose surfaces. The
the vehicle before starting to drive
HOLD function cannot hold the vehicle on
along an off-road route.
such surfaces.
RFor vehicles with the AIRMATIC pack-
age: select a vehicle level that is suitable Checklist before driving off-road
for the off-road terrain. To avoid damaging
the vehicle, make sure there is always suf- ! If the engine oil warning lamp lights up
ficient ground clearance. while the vehicle is in motion, stop the vehi-
cle in a safe place as soon as possible.
 Driving tips 201

Check the engine oil level. The engine oil X Clean the headlamps and rear lights and
warning lamp warning must not be ignored. check for damage.
Continuing the journey while the symbol is X Clean the front and rear license plates.
displayed could lead to engine damage. X Clean the wheels/tires with a water jet and
X Engine oil level: check the engine oil level remove any foreign objects.

Driving and parking

and add oil if necessary. X Clean the wheels, wheel housings and the
When driving on steep gradients, the vehicle underside with a water jet; check
engine oil level must be sufficiently high to for any foreign objects and damage.
ensure a correct oil supply in the vehicle. X Check whether twigs or other parts of
X DEF tank (BlueTEC vehicles): check the plants have become trapped. These
level and top up if necessary (Y page 188). increase the risk of fire and can damage
X Tire-changing tool kit: check that the jack fuel pipes, brake hoses or the rubber bel-
is working and make sure you have the lug lows of the axle joints and propeller shafts.
wrench, a robust tow cable and a folding X After the trip, examine without fail the
spade in the vehicle. entire undercarriage, wheels, tires, brakes,
X Wheels and tires: check the tire tread bodywork structure, steering, chassis and
depth and tire pressure. exhaust system for damage.
X After driving for extended periods across
X Check for damage and remove any foreign
objects, e.g. small stones, from the sand, mud, gravel, water or in similarly dirty
wheels/tires. conditions, have the brake discs, wheels,
brake pads/linings and axle joints checked
X Replace any missing valve caps.
and cleaned.
X Replace dented or damaged wheels.
X If you detect strong vibrations after off-road
X Rims: dented or bent rims can result in a travel, check for foreign objects in the
loss of tire pressure and damage the tire wheels and drive train and remove them if
bead. Therefore, check your rims before necessary. Foreign objects can disturb the
driving off-road and replace them as balance and cause vibrations.
required.
Driving over rough terrain places greater
demands on your vehicle than driving on nor-
Checklist after driving off-road mal roads. After driving off-road, check the
! If you detect damage to the vehicle after vehicle. This allows you to detect damage
driving off-road, have the vehicle checked promptly and reduce the risk of an accident to
immediately at a qualified specialist work- yourself and other road users.
shop.
Driving on sand
X Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD pack-
age: activate the on-road program Observe the following rules when driving on
(Y page 259). sand:
X Deactivate the LOW RANGE off-road gear RVehicles with the ON&OFFROAD pack-
(Y page 261). age: select off-road program 1
X Deactivate DSR (Y page 258). (Y page 259).
X Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: RVehicles with the AIRMATIC package:
lower the vehicle to a ride height suitable select a raised vehicle level.
for the road conditions, e.g. to the high- RAvoid high engine speeds.
way/high-speed level.

Z
202 Driving tips

RUse the left-hand steering wheel paddle

shifter to shift to a lower gear appropriate
to the terrain.
RDrive quickly to overcome the rolling resist-
ance. Otherwise the vehicle's wheels could
Driving and parking

become stuck in loose ground.

RDrive in the tracks of other vehicles if pos-
sible. Make sure that:
- the tire ruts are not too deep.
- the sand is sufficiently firm.
- the ground clearance of the vehicle is Observe the following rules when driving over
sufficient. tree stumps, large stones and other obsta-
cles:
Tire ruts and gravel roads RSelect the LOW RANGE (Y page 261) off-

! Check that the ruts are not too deep and road gear.
that your vehicle has sufficient clearance. RRaise the vehicle level.
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged RAvoid high engine speeds.
or bottom out and get stuck. RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand
Observe the following rules when driving steering wheel paddle shifter.
along ruts in off-road terrain or on roads with RDrive very slowly.
loose gravel: RDrive straight over the center of obstacles.
RVehicles with the AIRMATIC package:
select a raised vehicle level.
RAvoid high engine speeds. Traveling uphill
RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand Approach/departure angle
steering wheel paddle shifter.
RDrive slowly. G WARNING
RWhere ruts are too deep, drive with the If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or
wheels of one side on the center grassy turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle
area, if possible. could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is a
risk of an accident.
Driving over obstacles Always drive on a steep incline in the line of
fall (straight up or down) and do not turn the
! Obstacles could damage the floor of the vehicle.
vehicle or components of the chassis. Ask
passengers for guidance when driving over RObserve the rules on off-road driving.
large obstacles. The passenger should RDo not drive at an angle on slopes, inclines
always keep a safe distance from the vehi- or gradients, but instead follow the direct
cle when doing so in order to avoid injury as line of fall. The maximum gradient-climbing
a result of unexpected vehicle movements. capability of your vehicle is 100%, which
After driving off-road or over obstacles, corresponds to an approach/departure
check the vehicle for possible damage, angle of 45°. Note that the climbing ability
especially to the underbody and the com- of your vehicle depends on the terrain con-
ponents of the chassis. ditions.
 Driving systems 203

RWhen driving down an incline, make use of Driving downhill

the engine's braking effect. Observe the
RDrive slowly.
engine speed; do not overrev the engine.
RDo not drive at an angle down steep
RBefore driving on extreme uphill and down-
inclines. Steer into the line of fall and drive
hill gradients, select the LOW RANGE off-
with the front wheels aligned straight. Oth-

Driving and parking

road gear (Y page 261).
erwise, the vehicle could slip sideways, tip
RDrive slowly.
and rollover.
RAvoid high engine speeds. Drive at appro-
RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand
priate engine speeds (maximum paddle shifter before tackling steep down-
3,000 rpm). hill gradients.
RUse the left-hand paddle shifter to shift into
RActivate DSR. If this is not sufficient, brake
a lower gear in good time on long and steep gently. When doing so, make sure that the
downhill gradients. vehicle is facing in the direction of the line
RCheck the brakes after prolonged off-road of fall.
driving. RCheck that the brakes are working normally
i Hill start assist will aid you when pulling after a long downhill stretch.
away on a hill. i The special off-road ABS setting enables a
For further information about hill start precise, brief and repeated locking of the
assist, see (Y page 171). front wheels. This causes them to dig into
Do not switch to transmission position N loose earth. Be aware that the front wheels
when driving off-road. If you try to brake the easily skid across the ground surface if
vehicle using the service brake, you could completely braked and therefore lose their
lose control of the vehicle. If the gradient is ability to steer.
too steep for your vehicle, drive back down in
reverse gear.
Driving systems
Always observe the approach/departure
angle values (Y page 457). Cruise control

Maximum gradient-climbing capability General notes

Always observe the maximum gradient climb- Cruise control maintains a constant road
ing ability values (Y page 457). speed for you. It brakes automatically in order
to avoid exceeding the set speed. You must
Hilltops select a lower gear in good time on long and
steep downhill gradients, especially if the
When driving up an uphill gradient, slightly vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. By doing
reduce pressure on the accelerator immedi- so, you will make use of the braking effect of
ately before reaching the brow of the hill. Use the engine. This relieves the load on the brake
the vehicle's own impetus to drive over the system and prevents the brakes from over-
top of the hill. heating and wearing too quickly.
This style of driving prevents: Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-
Rthe vehicle from lifting off the ground on the ditions make it appropriate to maintain a
brow of a hill steady speed for a prolonged period. You can
Rthe vehicle from traveling too quickly down
store any road speed above 20 mph
the other side (30 km/h).

Z
204 Driving systems

i Cruise control should not be activated Activation conditions

when driving off-road.
To activate cruise control, all of the following
activation conditions must be fulfilled:
Important safety notes
Rthe electric parking brake must be
If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise released.
Driving and parking

control can neither reduce the risk of an acci- Ryou are driving faster than 20 mph
dent nor override the laws of physics. Cruise (30 km/h).
control cannot take into account the road,
RESP® must be active, but not intervening.
traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control
is only an aid. You are responsible for the dis- Rthe transmission must be in position D.
tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, RDSR must be deactivated.
for braking in good time and for staying in Roff-road program 2 must be deactivated
your lane. (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package).
Do not use cruise control:
Rin road and traffic conditions which do not Storing, maintaining and calling up a
allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g. speed
in heavy traffic or on winding roads
Storing and maintaining a speed
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
erating could cause the drive wheels to lose
traction and the vehicle could then skid
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
heavy rain or snow
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
driver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired

speed.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever up :
or down ;.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle
automatically maintains the stored speed.
: To activate or increase speed You can accept the current speed if you are
; To activate or reduce speed driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).
= To deactivate cruise control i Cruise control may be unable to maintain
? To activate at the current speed/last the stored speed on uphill gradients. The
stored speed stored speed is resumed when the gradient
evens out. Cruise control maintains the
When you activate cruise control, the stored
stored speed on downhill gradients by
speed is shown in the multifunction display
automatically applying the brakes.
for five seconds.
 Driving systems 205

Storing or calling up a speed Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
G WARNING until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
the speed set.
If you call up the stored speed and it differs
from the current speed, the vehicle acceler- X Press the cruise control lever up : for a

ates or decelerates. If you do not know the higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.

Driving and parking

stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-
brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci- ments (1 km/h increments): briefly
dent. press the cruise control lever up : or
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi- down ; to the pressure point.
tions before calling up the stored speed. If you Every time the cruise control lever is
do not know the stored speed, store the pressed up : or down ; the last speed
desired speed again. stored is increased or reduced.
X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-
ments (10 km/h increments): briefly
press the cruise control lever up : or
down ; to the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up : or down ; the last speed
stored is increased or reduced.
i Cruise control is not deactivated if you
depress the accelerator pedal. For exam-
ple, if you accelerate briefly to overtake,
cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards to the last speed stored after you have fin-
you :. ished overtaking.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. Deactivating cruise control
The first time cruise control is activated, it
stores the current speed or regulates the
speed of the vehicle to the previously
stored speed.

Setting a speed

There are several ways to deactivate cruise

control:
X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
wards :.
or
X Brake.

Z
206 Driving systems

Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: in front or take evasive action provided it is
Ryou engage the electric parking brake safe to do so.
Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph For DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you, the radar
(30 km/h) sensor system must be operational.
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC
Driving and parking

PLUS operates in the same way as cruise

Ryou activate DSR
control in the speed range between 20 mph
Ryou activate off-road program 2 on vehicles (Canada: 30 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada:
with the ON&OFFROAD package 200 km/h). If a vehicle is driving in front of
Ryou shift the transmission to position N you, it operates in the speed range between
while driving 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada:
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a 200 km/h).
warning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐ Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on
trol Off message in the multifunction dis- roads with steep gradients.
play for approximately five seconds. As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, it
i When you switch off the engine, the last can resemble the radar detectors of the
speed stored is cleared. responsible authorities. You can refer to the
relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if
questions are asked about this.
DISTRONIC PLUS i USA only:
General notes This device has been approved by the FCC
as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar
DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and sensor is intended for use in an automotive
automatically helps you maintain the dis- radar system only. Removing, tampering
tance to the vehicle detected in front. DIS- with, or altering the device will void any
TRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so that warranties, and is not permitted by the
the set speed is not exceeded. FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
You must select a lower gear in good time on any non-approved way.
long and steep downhill gradients, especially Any unauthorized modification to this
if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. By device could void the user’s authority to
doing so, you will make use of the braking operate the equipment.
effect of the engine. This relieves the load on
the brake system and prevents the brakes i Canada only: This device complies with
from overheating and wearing too quickly. RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a slower-moving
vehicle in front, your vehicle is braked in order 1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
to maintain the preset distance to the vehicle ference, and
in front. 2. this device must accept any interference
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk received, including interference that may
of a collision, you will be warned visually and cause undesired operation of the device.
acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot pre- Removal, tampering, or altering of the
vent a collision without your intervention. An device will void any warranties, and is not
intermittent warning tone will then sound and permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
the distance warning lamp will light up in the in any non-approved way.
instrument cluster. Brake immediately in
order to increase the distance to the vehicle
 Driving systems 207

Any unauthorized modification to this ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function

device could void the user's authority to is activated, the vehicle brakes automati-
operate the equipment. cally in certain situations. To prevent dam-
age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC
Important safety notes PLUS and the HOLD function in the follow-

Driving and parking

ing or other similar situations:
G WARNING
Rwhen towing the vehicle
DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:
Rin the car wash
Rpeople or animals
If you fail to adapt your driving style, DIS-
Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop-
TRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk of
ped or parked vehicles
accident nor override the laws of physics.
Roncoming and crossing traffic DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into account
As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give the road, traffic and weather conditions. DIS-
warnings nor intervene in such situations. TRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are respon-
There is a risk of an accident. sible for the distance to the vehicle in front,
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and
uation and be ready to brake. for staying in your lane.
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:
G WARNING Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden- allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.
tify other road users and complex traffic sit- in heavy traffic or on winding roads
uations. Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may: erating could cause the drive wheels to lose
Rgive an unnecessary warning and then traction and the vehicle could then skid
brake the vehicle Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
Rneither give a warning nor intervene heavy rain or snow
Raccelerate unexpectedly DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow
There is a risk of an accident. vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or
vehicles driving on a different line.
Continue to drive carefully and be ready to
brake, in particular when warned to do so by In particular, the detection of obstacles can
DISTRONIC PLUS. be impaired if:
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover-
G WARNING ing the sensors
DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up Rsnow or heavy rain
to 40% of the maximum braking force. If this Rinterference by other radar sources
braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUS Rstrong radar reflections, for example, in
warns you visually and audibly. There is a risk
parking garages
of an accident.
If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehi-
In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and
cle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpect-
try to take evasive action.
edly accelerate the vehicle to the stored
speed.

Z
208 Driving systems

This speed may: Rthe driver's door must be closed when you
Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane shift from P to D or your seat belt must be
or an exit lane fastened.
Rbe so high when driving in the right-hand Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors

lane that you overtake vehicles in the left- must be closed.

Driving and parking

hand lane Roff-road program 2 must be deactivated

Rbe so high when driving in the left-hand lane (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package).
that you overtake vehicles in the right-hand RDSR must be deactivated.
lane Rthe vehicle must not skid.
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
Activating
driver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards

you ; or press it up : or down = .
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.
: To activate or increase speed
X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-
; To activate or reduce speed
ments (1 km/h increments): briefly
= To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
press the cruise control lever up : to the
? To activate at the current speed/last pressure point for a higher speed or down
stored speed = for a lower speed.
A To set the specified minimum distance Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up or down, the last speed stored
Activating DISTRONIC PLUS is increased or reduced.
or
Activation conditions
X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-
In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the fol-
ments (10 km/h increments): briefly
lowing conditions must be fulfilled:
press the cruise control lever up : past
Rthe engine must be started. It may take up
to two minutes after pulling away before
DISTRONIC PLUS is operational.
Rthe electric parking brake must be
released.
RESP® must be active, but not intervening.
Rthe transmission must be in position D.
 Driving systems 209

the pressure point for a higher speed or

down = for a lower speed.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up or down, the last speed stored
is increased or reduced.

Driving and parking

X Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the
vehicle in front, but only up to the desired
stored speed.
When driving at speeds below 20 mph X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
(30 km/h), you can only activate DISTRONIC
you :.
PLUS if the vehicle in front has been detected
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
and is shown in the multifunction display. If
the vehicle in front is no longer detected and pedal.
displayed, for example because it has DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first
changed lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS is deactiva- time it is activated, the current speed is
ted. You will hear a warning tone if this is the stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise
case. speed to the previously stored value.

i If you do not fully release the accelerator Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS
pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Passive mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display. Pulling away and driving
The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle
in front will then not be maintained. You will
be driving at the speed you determine by
the position of the accelerator pedal.
Activating at the current speed/last
stored speed
G WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it differs
from the current speed, the vehicle acceler-
ates or decelerates. If you do not know the
stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or X If you want to pull away with DIS-
brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci- TRONIC PLUS: remove your foot from the
dent.
brake pedal.
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi- X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
tions before calling up the stored speed. If you
you ; or press it up : or down = .
do not know the stored speed, store the
desired speed again. or
X Accelerate briefly.
Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its
speed to that of the vehicle in front.
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC
PLUS operates in the same way as cruise
control.

Z
210 Driving systems

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in Rthe battery is disconnected.

front has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle. Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,
In this way, the distance you have selected is e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
maintained.
There is a risk of an accident.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
Driving and parking

vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed.

DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle
However, the vehicle is only accelerated up to
against rolling away.
the speed you have stored.
If you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS is If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in
deactivated unless your vehicle is stationary. front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it
Changing lanes is stationary.
Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains
If you change to the passing lane, DISTRONIC
stationary and you do not need to depress the
PLUS supports you when:
brake.
Ryou are driving faster than 40 mph After a time, the electric parking brake
(60 km/h) secures the vehicle and relieves the service
RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the dis- brake.
tance to a vehicle in front Depending on the specified minimum dis-
Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at
RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in
of collision front. The specified minimum distance is set
If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is using the control on the cruise control lever.
accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted The electric parking brake automatically
if changing lanes takes too long or if the dis- secures the vehicle if DISTRONIC PLUS is
tance between your vehicle and the vehicle in activated and:
front becomes too small. Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's
i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS seat belt is unfastened.
monitors the left lane on left-hand drive Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
vehicles and the right lane on right-hand matically switched off by the ECO start/
drive vehicles. stop function.
Ra system malfunction occurs.
Stopping
Rthe power supply is not sufficient.
G WARNING
On steep uphill or downhill inclines or if there
When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked
is a malfunction, the transmission may also
only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:
automatically be shifted into position P.
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in
the voltage supply.
RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated
with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi-
cle occupant or from outside the vehicle.
Rthe electrical system in the engine com-
partment, the battery or the fuses have
been tampered with.
 Driving systems 211

Setting a speed Setting the specified minimum distance

Driving and parking

Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment You can set the specified minimum distance
until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span
the speed set. between one and two seconds. With this func-
X Press the cruise control lever up : for a tion, you can set the minimum distance that
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in
X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-
front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can
see this distance in the multifunction display
ments (1 km/h increments): briefly
(Y page 213).
press the cruise control lever up : or
down ; to the pressure point. X To increase: turn control ; in direction

Every time the cruise control lever is =.

pressed up : or down ; the last speed DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater
stored is increased or reduced. distance between your vehicle and the
X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-
vehicle in front.
ments (10 km/h increments): briefly X To decrease: turn control ; in direc-

press the cruise control lever up : or tion :.

down ; to the pressure point. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter
Every time the cruise control lever is distance between your vehicle and the
pressed up : or down ;, the last speed vehicle in front.
stored is increased or reduced.
i Make sure that you maintain a sufficiently
i If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC safe distance from the vehicle in front.
PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if
speed stored after you have finished over- necessary.
taking.

Z
212 Driving systems

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS passenger door or one of the rear doors is

open
Ryou activate DSR
Ryou activate off-road program 2 on vehicles
with the ON&OFFROAD package
Driving and parking

Rthe vehicle has skidded

If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will
hear a warning tone. You will see the DIS‐
TRONIC PLUS Off message in the multifunc-
tion display for approximately five seconds.

Displays in the instrument cluster

There are several ways to deactivate DIS-
TRONIC PLUS: Displays in the speedometer
X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
wards :.
or
X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.
When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you
will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in
the multifunction display for approximately
five seconds.
i The last speed stored remains stored until
you switch off the engine.
Example: DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the speed-
i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you ometer
depress the accelerator pedal. If you accel- When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or
erate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS two segments ; in the set speed range light
adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last up.
speed stored after you have finished over-
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,
taking.
segments ; between speed of the vehicle in
DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactiva- front : and stored speed = light up.
ted if:
i For design reasons, the speed displayed
Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if in the speedometer may differ slightly from
the vehicle is automatically secured with the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.
the electric parking brake
Ryou are driving slower than 15 mph
(25 km/h) and there is no vehicle in front,
or if the vehicle in front is no longer detec-
ted
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position
Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards
you in order to pull away and the front-
 Driving systems 213

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti- X Select the Distance Display function
vated using the on-board computer
(Y page 283).
You will see the stored speed for about five
seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.

Driving and parking

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS
General notes
Pay particular attention in the following traffic
situations:
Rcornering, going into and coming out of a
: Vehicle in front, if detected bend
Rvehicles traveling on a different line
; Distance indicator, current distance to
the vehicle in front Rother vehicles changing lanes

= Specified minimum distance to the vehi- Rnarrow vehicles

cle in front; adjustable Robstructions and stationary vehicles
? Own vehicle Rcrossing vehicles
In the Assistance menu of the on-board com- In such situations, brake if necessary. DIS-
puter, you can select the assistance display. TRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.
X Select the Distance Display function
Cornering, going into and coming out of a
using the on-board computer bend
(Y page 283).

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa-

ted

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehi-

cles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle
may brake unexpectedly or late.
: Vehicle in front, if detected
; Specified minimum distance to the vehi-
cle in front; adjustable
= Own vehicle
? DISTRONIC PLUS activated
In the Assistance menu of the on-board com-
puter, you can select the assistance display.

Z
214 Driving systems

Vehicles traveling on a different line because of its narrow width. The distance to
the vehicle in front will be too short.
Obstructions and stationary vehicles
Driving and parking

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles

traveling on a different line. The distance to
the vehicle in front will be too short.
DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obsta-
Other vehicles changing lanes cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the
detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals
an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC
PLUS will not brake for these.
Crossing vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehi-

cle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle
will be too short.
Narrow vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect
vehicles that are crossing your lane. Activat-
ing DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with
crossing traffic, for example, could cause
your vehicle to pull away unintentionally.

Level control (vehicles with the

ON&OFFROAD package)
Important safety notes
DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the Level control adapts the vehicle level auto-
vehicle in front on the edge of the road, matically to the current operating and driving
situation. This results in reduced fuel con-
sumption and improved handling.
 Driving systems 215

Make changes to the vehicle level while the height if the chassis is raised. There is a risk of
vehicle is in motion. This enables the vehicle an accident.
to adjust to the new level as quickly as pos- Adjust the vehicle level before pulling away.
sible.
The vehicle level may change visibly if you G WARNING

Driving and parking

park the vehicle and the outside temperature Due to the high center of gravity, the vehicle
changes. If the temperature drops, the vehi- may start to skid and roll over in the event of
cle level is lower; with an increase in temper- an abrupt steering maneuver and/or when
ature, the vehicle level rises. the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road
If you unlock the vehicle or open a door, the conditions. There is a risk of an accident.
vehicle begins to compensate for load dis- Always adapt your speed and driving style to
crepancies while still parked. However, for the vehicle's driving characteristics and to the
significant level changes, such as after the prevailing road and weather conditions.
vehicle has been stationary for a long period,
the engine must be on. For safety reasons, ! When driving on extremely rough terrain,
the vehicle is only lowered when the doors are select a high vehicle level in good time.
closed. Lowering is interrupted if a door is Make sure there is always sufficient ground
opened, and it continues once the door has clearance. You will otherwise damage the
been closed. vehicle.
For information about driving off-road, see RUtility vehicles have a significantly higher
(Y page 199). rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
G WARNING Failure to operate this vehicle safely may
When the vehicle is being lowered, people result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,
could become trapped if their limbs are and severe or fatal injury.
between the vehicle body and the wheels or RIn a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of significantly more likely to die than a per-
injury. son wearing a seat belt.
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or You and all vehicle occupants should
in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches always wear your seat belts.
when the vehicle is being lowered.
Basic settings
G WARNING
The extent to which the vehicle is raised or
When you drive with the vehicle raised, the
lowered depends on the basic setting selec-
driving characteristics could be impaired by
ted.
the vehicle's raised center of gravity. The vehi-
cle could rollover more easily, for example on Select:
a bend. There is a risk of an accident. Rhighway/high-speed level for driving on
Always select as low a vehicle level as possi- normal roads
ble and adjust your driving style. Roff-road level 1 for driving on easily nego-
tiable off-road terrain
G WARNING Roff-road level 2 for driving on normal off-
When you drive with the chassis lowered or road terrain
raised, the vehicle's braking and driving char- Roff-road level 3 for freeing the vehicle in
acteristics can be significantly impaired. You particularly rough terrain at low speeds
could also exceed the permissible vehicle only

Z
216 Driving systems

The individual vehicle levels differ from high-

way level as follows:
Rhighway level: +/–0 in (+/–0 mm)
Rhigh-speed level: –0.6 in (–15 mm)
Roff-road level 1: + 1.2 in (+ 30 mm)
Driving and parking

Roff-road level 2: + 2.3 in (+ 60 mm)

Roff-road level 3: + 3.6 in (+ 90 mm)

Highway/high-speed level
! Make sure that there is enough ground During the adjustment, the Lowering mes-
clearance when the vehicle is being low- sage, for example, appears in the multifunc-
ered. It could otherwise hit the ground, tion display.
damaging the underbody.
If you press the % or a button on the
multifunction steering wheel, the message
will disappear. Once highway level has been
reached, all indicator lamps = go out.
The vehicle automatically selects highway
level if you are driving at a speed above
70 mph (115 km/h) or if you drive at a speed
between 62 mph (100 km/h) and 70 mph
(115 km/h) for approximately 20 seconds.
The vehicle is lowered to high-speed level if
you are traveling at higher speeds.
: Selector wheel
Off-road levels
; To raise the level
= Indicator lamps General notes
? To lower the level ROnly select off-road level 3 for driving off-
X Start the engine. road in particularly rough terrain.
X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly press RAdjust your driving style to the altered han-

selector wheel :. dling characteristics.

Selector wheel : extends. RDo not drive at speeds above 12 mph
(20 km/h).
If one or more indicator lamps = are on:
X Turn selector wheel : counter-clock-
wise ? until all indicator lamps = that are
lit start to flash.
The vehicle is lowered to highway level. As
soon as the next lowest level is reached,
the indicator lamp stops flashing and goes
out.
 Driving systems 217

Only select an off-road level when this is

appropriate for road conditions. Otherwise,
fuel consumption increases and handling may
be affected.
X Start the engine.

Driving and parking

X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly press
selector wheel :.
Selector wheel : extends.
X To raise: turn selector wheel : clock-
wise ;.
The vehicle is raised. While the adjustment from off-road level 2 to
or off-road level 3 is taking place, you will see a
X To lower: turn selector wheel : counter- message such as the following in the multi-
clockwise ?. function display: Vehicle Rising Max.
The vehicle is lowered. Speed 12 mph (20 km/h).km/h)
Indicator lamps = for the desired off-road The Max. Speed 12 mph (20 km/h) mes-
level flash: sage draws your attention to the maximum
speed permitted for off-road level 3.
ROff-road level 1: the lower indicator lamp
Once off-road level 3 has been reached, you
flashes
will see a message shown in white in the mul-
ROff-road level 2: the lower and center indi-
tifunction display, for example: Max. Speed
cator lamps flash 12 mph (20 km/h).
km/h)
ROff-road level 3: all three indicator lamps
If you drive above 20 km/h at off-road level 3,
flash you will see the following message shown in
The vehicle adjusts to the off-road level selec- red in the multifunction display: Vehicle
ted. As soon as an off-road level is reached, Lowering Max. Speed 12 mph (20 (20 km/h)
km/h).
the corresponding indicator lamp stops flash-
ing and lights up constantly. i You cannot clear these messages.
You also hear a warning. The vehicle is low-
Raising the vehicle ered and off-road level 3 is canceled.
During the adjustment, the Vehicle Rising If you continue to increase your speed, the
message, for example, appears in the multi- red message continues to be shown in the
function display. multifunction display. The newly set level is
The vehicle rises from highway level to off- not displayed until the vehicle has been set to
road level 1. a level suitable for the current speed.
If you press the % or a button on the
multifunction steering wheel, the message
will disappear.
i Up to off-road level 2, you can hide the
messages using the % or a button
on the multifunction steering wheel.
Once off-road level 2 has been reached, the
lower and center indicator lamps of the selec-
tor wheel are on.

Z
218 Driving systems

Lowering the vehicle You will see a message in the multifunction

display, for example: Lowering
Lowering.

HOLD function
Driving and parking

General notes
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the
following situations:
Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep
slopes
Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes
If you maintain or reduce your speed, you will
Rwhen waiting in traffic
see a message in white in the display while
the vehicle is being lowered, such as the fol- The vehicle is kept stationary without the
lowing: Lowering Max. Speed 12 mph driver having to depress the brake pedal.
(20 km/h).
km/h) The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD
The vehicle is lowered to off-road level 2. function deactivated when you depress the
accelerator pedal to pull away.
If you select an off-road level when driving at
too high a speed, the Drive More Slowly i Do not use the HOLD function when driv-
message appears in the multifunction dis- ing off-road, on steep uphill or downhill gra-
play . dients or on slippery or loose surfaces. The
You can select from the following: HOLD function cannot hold the vehicle on
such surfaces.
ROff-road level 1 at speeds up to 60 mph
(100 km/h)
Important safety notes
ROff-road level 2 at speeds up to 40 mph
(65 km/h) G WARNING
ROff-road level 3 at speeds up to 12 mph When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away
(20 km/h) despite being braked by the HOLD function if:
If you are driving above 50 mph (80 km/h) or Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in
drive between 40 mph (65 km/h) and 50 mph the voltage supply.
(80 km/h) for longer than 20 seconds, off- Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by
road level 2 will be canceled. The vehicle is
pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake
lowered to off-road level 1.
pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
You will see a message in the multifunction Rthe electrical system in the engine com-
display, for example: Lowering
Lowering. partment, the battery or the fuses have
If you are driving above 70 mph (115 km/h) or been tampered with.
drive between 62 mph (100 km/h) and Rthe battery is disconnected
70 mph (115 km/h) for longer than
20 seconds, off-road level 1 will be canceled. There is a risk of an accident.
Depending on the vehicle's speed and the If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
ADS mode selected (Y page 220), the vehicle the HOLD function and secure the vehicle
is automatically lowered to highway or high- against rolling away.
speed level.
 Driving systems 219

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function Deactivating the HOLD function

is activated, the vehicle brakes automati-
The HOLD function is deactivated automati-
cally in certain situations. To prevent dam-
cally if:
age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC
PLUS and the HOLD function in the follow- Ryou accelerate and the transmission is in
position D or R.

Driving and parking

ing or other similar situations:
Rwhen Ryou shift the transmission to position P.
towing the vehicle
Rin the car wash Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a
certain amount of pressure until : disap-
Deactivating the HOLD function pears from the multifunction display.
(Y page 219).
Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric
parking brake.
Activation conditions
Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.
You can activate the HOLD function if:
i After a time, the electric parking brake
Rthe vehicle is stationary secures the vehicle and relieves the service
Rthe engine is running brake.
Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt
The electric parking brake automatically
is fastened secures the vehicle if the HOLD function is
Rthe electric parking brake is released activated and:
Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's
RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated seat belt is unfastened.
Rthe engine is switched off.
Activating the HOLD function Ra system malfunction occurs.
Rthe power supply is not sufficient.
On steep uphill or downhill inclines or if there
is a malfunction, the transmission may also
be automatically shifted into position P.

AIRMATIC package
X Make sure that the activation conditions
are met. General notes
X Depress the brake pedal. AIRMATIC regulates the level of your vehicle.
X Quickly depress the brake pedal further As well as level control (Y page 221), your
until : appears in the multifunction dis- vehicle can be equipped with ADS (Adaptive
play. Damping System) (Y page 220) and ACTIVE
The HOLD function is activated. You can CURVE SYSTEM (Y page 220).
release the brake pedal. Observe the notes on driving with a trailer
(Y page 265).
i If depressing the brake pedal the first
time does not activate the HOLD function,
wait briefly and then try again.

Z
220 Driving systems

ADS (Adaptive Damping System) Comfort tuning

General notes
ADS adapts the damping characteristics to
the current operating and driving situation.
Driving and parking

This depends on:

Ryour driving style
Rthe road surface conditions
Rthe ADS setting
Rthe vehicle level setting
Your selection remains stored even if you
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Example: vehicles without the ON&OFFROAD
package
Sports tuning : Suspension tuning button
; Indicator lamp for sports tuning
= Indicator lamp for comfort tuning
X Press button :.
Indicator lamp = lights up. Comfort tuning
is selected. The vehicle is raised by 0.6 in
(15 mm).
In comfort mode, the driving characteristics
of your vehicle are more comfortable. There-
fore, select this mode if you favor a more
comfortable driving style. Select comfort
Example: vehicles without the ON&OFFROAD mode also when driving fast on straight roads,
package e.g. on straight stretches of highway.
: Suspension tuning button
; Indicator lamp for sports tuning Active Curve System
= Indicator lamp for comfort tuning
The Active Curve System uses active stabil-
X Start the engine. izers to optimize both driving comfort and
X Press button :. vehicle agility. Depending on the ADS mode
Indicator lamp ; lights up. Sports suspen- selected (Y page 220), the Active Curve Sys-
sion tuning is selected. The vehicle is low- tem also changes the setting.
ered by 0.6 in (15 mm). If you select ADS comfort mode:
The firmer suspension tuning in Sport mode Rrolling movement is reduced in the event of
ensures even better contact with the road. changing surface undulations
Select this mode when employing a sporty Rthe roll angle when cornering is reduced
driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. Rthe driving style is agile
If you select ADS sport mode:
Rthe roll angle is reduced significantly
Rthe driving style is even more agile
 Driving systems 221

Level control ! When you raise the vehicle in such a way

that not all wheels have contact with the
Important safety notes ground, remove the SmartKey from the
G WARNING ignition lock.
When the vehicle is being lowered, people RUtility vehicles have a significantly higher

Driving and parking

could become trapped if their limbs are rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
between the vehicle body and the wheels or Failure to operate this vehicle safely may
underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,
injury. and severe or fatal injury.
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or RIn a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches significantly more likely to die than a per-
when the vehicle is being lowered. son wearing a seat belt.
You and all vehicle occupants should
G WARNING always wear your seat belts.
When you drive with the vehicle raised, the
driving characteristics could be impaired by General notes
the vehicle's raised center of gravity. The vehi- Further information about "Driving off-road"
cle could rollover more easily, for example on (Y page 199).
a bend. There is a risk of an accident. Level control adapts the vehicle level auto-
Always select as low a vehicle level as possi- matically to the current operating and driving
ble and adjust your driving style. situation. This results in reduced fuel con-
sumption and improved handling.
G WARNING If you select ADS comfort mode (Y page 220),
When you drive with the chassis lowered or the vehicle is lowered to high-speed level as
raised, the vehicle's braking and driving char- the speed increases. As the vehicle speed
acteristics can be significantly impaired. You decreases, the vehicle is raised back up to
could also exceed the permissible vehicle highway level.
height if the chassis is raised. There is a risk of If you select ADS sport mode (Y page 220),
an accident. the vehicle skips highway level and lowers
Adjust the vehicle level before pulling away. directly to high-speed level depending on the
basic setting (Y page 222).
G WARNING Make changes to the vehicle level while the
Due to the high center of gravity, the vehicle vehicle is in motion. This enables the vehicle
may start to skid and roll over in the event of to adjust to the new level as quickly as pos-
an abrupt steering maneuver and/or when sible.
the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road The vehicle level may change visibly if you
conditions. There is a risk of an accident. park the vehicle and the outside temperature
Always adapt your speed and driving style to changes. If the temperature drops, the vehi-
the vehicle's driving characteristics and to the cle level is lower; with an increase in temper-
prevailing road and weather conditions. ature, the vehicle level rises.
If you unlock the vehicle or open a door, the
! When driving on extremely rough terrain, vehicle begins to compensate for load dis-
select a high vehicle level in good time. crepancies while still parked. However, for
Make sure there is always sufficient ground significant level changes, such as after the
clearance. You will otherwise damage the vehicle has been stationary for a long period,
vehicle. the engine must be on. For safety reasons,

Z
222 Driving systems

the vehicle is only lowered when the doors are If indicator lamp ; is not lit:
closed. Lowering is interrupted if a door is X Press button :.
opened, and it continues once the door has Indicator lamp ; flashes. The vehicle rises
been closed. to raised level.
Basic settings (excluding AMG vehicles)
Driving and parking

The extent to which the vehicle is raised or

lowered depends on the basic setting selec-
ted. Select raised level for off-road driving or
highway/high-speed level for normal roads.
The individual vehicle levels differ from high-
way level as follows:
Rhighway level: +/–0 in (+/–0 mm)
Rhigh-speed level: –0.6 in (–15 mm)
Rraised level: +2.3 in (+60 mm)

Basic settings for AMG vehicles During the adjustment, the Vehicle Rising
message, for example, appears in the multi-
The extent to which the vehicle is raised or function display.
lowered depends on the AMG adaptive sport
If you press the % or a button on the
suspension setting selected. Select the
multifunction steering wheel, the message
raised level for off-road driving or highway/
will disappear.
high-speed level for normal roads.
Once the vehicle has reached raised level,
The raised level corresponds to a vehicle level
indicator lamp ; remains lit. The Vehicle
raised by 50 mm when compared with high-
Rising message disappears from the multi-
way level in comfort mode.
function display.
Raised level If you try to select raised level at a speed
above 40 mph (64 km/h), the Drive More
Slowly message appears in the multifunction
display.
Highway/high-speed level
! Make sure that there is enough ground
clearance when the vehicle is being low-
ered. It could otherwise hit the ground,
damaging the underbody.

Only select raised level if this is appropriate

for the road conditions. Otherwise, fuel con-
sumption may increase and handling may be
affected.
X Start the engine.
 Driving systems 223

Depending on the ADS mode selected

(Y page 220), the vehicle is lowered to high-
speed level at high speeds.

AMG adaptive sport suspension sys-

Driving and parking

tem
Important safety notes
G WARNING
: Level control button When the vehicle is being lowered, people
; Level control indicator lamp could become trapped if their limbs are
between the vehicle body and the wheels or
X Start the engine. underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of
If indicator lamp ; is lit: injury.
X Press button :. Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or
Indicator lamp ; flashes. The vehicle is in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches
adjusting to highway/high-speed level. when the vehicle is being lowered.

G WARNING
The vehicle is lowered if:
Ryou have selected the Comfort or Sport
suspension tuning and
Rlock the vehicle after switching off the
engine
Persons in the vicinity of the wheel arch or the
underbody may thus become trapped. There
is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
During the adjustment, the Lowering mes- wheel arch or the underbody when you switch
sage, for example, appears in the multifunc- off the engine.
tion display.
If you press the % or a button on the ! The vehicle is lowered by approximately
multifunction steering wheel, the message 10 mm if:
will disappear. Ryou have selected the Sport or Comfort
Once highway level has been reached, indi- suspension tuning and
cator lamp ; goes out. The Lowering mes- Ryou switch off the engine and then
sage disappears from the multifunction dis- Rlock the vehicle
play.
When parking, position your vehicle so that
The vehicle automatically adjusts to highway it does not make contact with the curb as
level when you: the vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle could
Rdrive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). otherwise be damaged.
Rdrive between 40 mph (64 km/h) and
50 mph (80 km/h) for approximately
20 seconds.

Z
224 Driving systems

Vehicle level Sport mode

Level control adapts the vehicle level auto-
matically to the current operating and driving
situation. Level control ensures the best pos-
sible suspension and constant ground clear-
Driving and parking

ance, even with a laden vehicle. This improves

driving safety and fuel consumption.
The AIRMATIC package and ACTIVE CURVE
SYSTEM are always components of AMG
adaptive suspension system (Y page 219).
Due to the sportier suspension settings com-
pared to standard vehicles, the levels and
speed thresholds for sinking and raising the The firmer suspension tuning in Sport mode
vehicle are different. ensures even better contact with the road.
Select this mode when employing a sporty
In Comfort and Sport driving modes, after
driving style, e.g. on winding country roads.
locking the vehicle it lowers to the Sport+
level. When locking the vehicle at the raised X Press button : once.

level, the vehicle does not lower. Indicator lamp ; lights up. You have selec-
ted Sport mode.
The settings will remain stored after you
switch off the engine. When starting the The AMG Suspension System SPORT mes-
engine, the selected setting, e.g. AMG adap- sage appears in the multifunction display.
tive suspension system Comfort, is restored.
Sport + mode
i The vehicle level may change visibly if you The very firm setting of the suspension tuning
park the vehicle and the outside tempera- in Sport + mode ensures the best possible
ture changes. If the temperature drops, the contact with the road. Select this mode pref-
vehicle level lowers; with an increase in erably when driving on race circuits.
temperature, the vehicle level rises.
If indicator lamps = and ; are off:
Suspension tuning X Press button : twice.
Indicator lamps = and ; light up. You
General notes have selected Sport + mode. The vehicle is
The electronically controlled damping system lowered by 10 mm.
works continuously. This improves driving The AMG Suspension System SPORT +
safety and ride comfort. message appears in the multifunction dis-
The damping is tuned individually to each play.
wheel and depends on: If indicator lamp ; lights up:
Ryour driving style X Press button : once.
Rthe road surface conditions Second indicator lamp = lights up. You
Ryour individual selection of Sport, Sport + have selected Sport + mode. The vehicle is
or Comfort lowered by 10 mm.
Your selection remains stored even if you The AMG Suspension System SPORT +
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. message appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
 Driving systems 225

Comfort mode PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on

In comfort mode, the driving characteristics uneven terrain.
of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when
this mode if you prefer a comfortable driving you:
style. Select comfort mode also when driving
Rswitch on the ignition

Driving and parking

fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight
Rshift the transmission to position D, R or N
stretches of freeway.
RRelease the electric parking brake
X Press button : repeatedly until indicator
lamps = and ; go out. PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above
You have selected Comfort mode. The vehi- 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower
cle is raised by 10 mm compared with Sport speeds.
+ suspension tuning. PARKTRONIC monitors the area around your
The AMG Suspension System COMFORT vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper
message appears in the multifunction dis- and four sensors in the rear bumper.
play.

PARKTRONIC
Important safety notes
PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with
ultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually and
audibly the distance between your vehicle
and an object.
PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace-
: Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand
ment for your attention to your immediate
side (example)
surroundings. You are always responsible for
safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a park-
Range of the sensors
ing space. When maneuvering, parking or
pulling out of a parking space, make sure that General notes
there are no persons, animals or objects in
PARKTRONIC does not take objects into con-
the area in which you are maneuvering.
sideration that are:
! When parking, pay particular attention to Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani-
objects above or below the sensors, such mals or objects
as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARK-
Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhang-
TRONIC does not detect such objects when
they are in the immediate vicinity of the ing loads, truck overhangs or loading
vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or ramps.
the objects.
The sensors may not detect snow and other
objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic
car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a
truck or a pneumatic drill could cause
PARKTRONIC to malfunction.

Z
226 Driving systems

Minimum distance
Center Approx. 8 in (approx.
20 cm)
Corners Approx. 6 in (approx.
Driving and parking

15 cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, the

relevant warning displays light up and a warn-
ing tone sounds. If the distance falls below
Side view the minimum, the distance may no longer be
shown.

Warning displays

Top view
The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or
slush. They can otherwise not function cor-
rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking Warning display for the front area
care not to scratch or damage them : Segments on the left-hand side of the
(Y page 381). vehicle
; Segments on the right-hand side of the
Front sensors vehicle
Center Approx. 40 in (approx. = Segments showing operational readiness
100 cm) The warning displays show the distance
Corners Approx. 24 in (approx. between the sensors and the obstacle. The
60 cm) warning display for the front area is located
on the dashboard above the center air vents.
Rear sensors The warning display for the rear area is in the
roof lamp in the rear compartment.
Center Approx. 48 in (approx. The warning display for each side of the vehi-
120 cm) cle is divided into five yellow and two red seg-
Corners Approx. 32 in (approx. ments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow
80 cm) segments showing operational readiness =
light up.
The selected transmission position and the
direction in which the vehicle is rolling deter-
mine which warning display is active when the
engine is running.
 Driving systems 227

Transmission Warning display Towing a trailer

position ! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow
D Front area activated hitch is not required. PARKTRONIC meas-
ures the minimum detection range to an
R, N or the vehicle Rear and front areas obstacle from the bumper, not the ball cou-

Driving and parking

is rolling back- activated pling.
wards PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area
P No areas activated when you establish an electrical connection
between your vehicle and a trailer.
One or more segments light up as the vehicle
approaches an obstacle, depending on the
vehicle's distance from the obstacle.
From the:
Rsixthsegment onwards, you will hear an
intermittent warning tone for approx-
imately two seconds.
Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a
warning tone for approximately two sec-
onds. This indicates that you have now
reached the minimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

: Indicator lamp
; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC
If indicator lamp : is on then PARKTRONIC is
deactivated. Active Parking Assist is then also
deactivated.
i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated
when you turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
the ignition lock.

Z
228 Driving systems

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.
in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified
Driving and parking

warning displays are lit. specialist workshop.

You also hear a warning
tone for approximately
two seconds.
PARKTRONIC is deacti-
vated after approx-
imately five seconds,
and the indicator lamp
in the PARKTRONIC
button lights up.
Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.
in the PARKTRONIC X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 381).
warning displays are lit. X
Switch the ignition back on.
PARKTRONIC is deacti-
vated after approx- The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or
imately five seconds. ultrasound waves.
X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Active Parking Assist When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active

Parking Assist is also unavailable.
General notes
G WARNING
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking While parking or pulling out of a parking
aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on space, the vehicle swings out and can drive
both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could
indicates a suitable parking space. Active result in a collision with another road user.
steering intervention can assist you during There is a risk of an accident.
parking.
Pay attention to other road users. Stop the
You may also use PARKTRONIC (Y page 225). vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Park-
ing Assist parking procedure.
Important safety notes
Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not ! If unavoidable, you should drive over
a replacement for your attention to your obstacles such as curbs slowly and not at a
immediate surroundings. You are always sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage
responsible for safe maneuvering, parking the wheels or tires.
and exiting a parking space. When maneu-
vering, parking or pulling out of a parking
space, make sure that there are no persons,
animals or objects in the area in which you are
maneuvering.
 Driving systems 229

Active Parking Assist may possibly indicate procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging
parking spaces which are not suitable for loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods
parking, for example: vehicles.
Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited G WARNING
Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits If there are objects above the detection range,

Driving and parking

Ron unsuitable surfaces Active Parking Assist may turn prematurely.
Parking tips: You may cause a collision as a result. There is
a risk of an accident.
ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the park-
ing space as possible. If there are objects above the detection range,
stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist.
RParking spaces that are littered or over-
grown might be identified or measured For further information on the detection
incorrectly. range (Y page 225).
RParking spaces that are partially occupied
Active Parking Assist does not support you
by trailer drawbars might not be identified with parking spaces parallel to the direction
as such or be measured incorrectly. of travel if:
RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking
Rthe parking space is on a curb
space being measured inaccurately.
Rthe system reads the parking space as
RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC
being blocked, for example by foliage or
(Y page 226) warning messages during the
grass paving blocks
parking procedure.
Rthe area is too small for the vehicle to
RAt any time, you can intervene in the steer-
maneuver into
ing procedure to correct it. Active Parking
Rthe parking space is bordered by an obsta-
Assist will then be canceled.
cle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer
RWhen transporting a load which protrudes
from your vehicle, you should not use
Active Parking Assist.
RNever use Active Parking Assist when snow
chains are installed.
RMake sure that the tire pressures are
always correct. This has a direct influence
on the parking characteristics of the vehi- : Detected parking space on the left
cle.
; Parking symbol
Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces: = Detected parking space on the right
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel
Active Parking Assist is switched on automat-
Rthat are on straight roads, not bends ically when driving forwards. The system is
Rthat are on the same level as the road, e.g. operational at speeds of up to approximately
not on the pavement 22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the
system independently locates and measures
Detecting parking spaces parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.
Objects located above the height range of
Active Parking Assist will not be detected
when the parking space is measured. These
are not taken into account when the parking

Z
230 Driving systems

Active Parking Assist will only detect parking X To cancel the procedure: press the %
spaces: button on the multifunction steering wheel
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel or pull away.
Rthat are at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide or
Rthat are at least 51 in (1.3 m) longer than X To park using Active Parking Assist:
Driving and parking

your vehicle press the a button on the multifunction

steering wheel.
When driving at speeds below 19 mph
The Park Assist Active Accelerate
(30 km/h), you will see parking symbol as a
and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-
status indicator in the instrument cluster.
sage appears in the multifunction display.
When a parking space has been detected, an
arrow towards the right or the left also XLet go of the multifunction steering wheel.
appears. By default, Active Parking Assist XBack up the vehicle, being ready to brake at
only displays parking spaces on the front- all times. When backing up, drive at a speed
passenger side. Parking spaces on the driv- below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
er's side are displayed as soon as the turn Otherwise Active Parking Assist will be can-
signal on the driver's side is activated. When celed.
parking on the driver's side, this must remain i In tight parking spaces, you will achieve
switched on until you acknowledge the use of the best parking results by backing up as
Active Parking Assist by pressing the a far as possible. When doing so, also
button on the multifunction steering wheel. observe the PARKTRONIC messages.
A parking space is displayed while you are
X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the
driving past it, and until you are approx-
continuous warning tone, if not before.
imately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.
Maneuvering may be required in tight park-
ing spaces.
Parking
The Park Assist active Select D
G WARNING Observe surroundings message appears in
Active Parking Assist merely aids you by inter- the multifunction display.
vening actively in the steering. If you do not X Shift the transmission to position D while
brake there is a risk of an accident. the vehicle is stationary.
Always apply the brakes yourself when Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
maneuvering and parking. the other direction.
The Park Assist active Accelerate
X Stop the vehicle when the parking space
and brake Observe surroundings mes-
symbol shows the desired parking space in
sage appears in the multifunction display.
the instrument cluster.
X Shift the transmission to position R.
i You will achieve the best results by wait-
ing for the steering procedure to complete
The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:
before pulling away.
% message appears in the multifunction
display. X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all
times.
X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the
continuous warning tone, if not before.
The Park Assist active Select R
Observe surroundings message appears in
the multifunction display.
 Driving systems 231

As soon as the parking procedure is com- X Switch on the turn signal in the direction
plete, the Park Assist switched off mes- you are pulling away.
sage appears and a warning tone sounds. X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
Active Parking Assist no longer supports you The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:
with steering interventions. When Active % message appears in the multifunction

Driving and parking

Parking Assist is finished, you must steer display.
again yourself. PARKTRONIC is still available. X To cancel the procedure: press the %
Parking tips: button on the multifunction steering wheel
RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the or pull away.
parking space after parking is dependent or
on various factors. These include the posi- X To exit a parking space using Active
tion and shape of the vehicles parked in Parking Assist: press the a button on
front and behind it and the conditions of the the multifunction steering wheel.
location. It may be the case that Active The Park Assist Active Accelerate
Parking Assist guides you too far into a and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-
parking space, or not far enough into it. In sage appears in the multifunction display.
some cases, it may also lead you across or X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
onto the curb. If necessary, you should can-
X Reverse the vehicle or drive forwards, being
cel the parking procedure with Active Park-
ready to brake at all times. Do not exceed a
ing Assist.
maximum speed of approximately 6 mph
RYou can also select preselect transmission
(10 km/h) when exiting a parking space.
position D. The vehicle redirects and does Otherwise Active Parking Assist will be can-
not drive as far into the parking space. celed.
Should the gear change occur too soon to X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the
achieve a sensible parking position, the
continuous warning tone, if not before.
parking procedure will be aborted.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R as

Exiting a parking space required while the vehicle is stationary.

Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
In order that Active Parking Assist can sup- the other direction.
port you when you exit the parking space: i You will achieve the best results by wait-
Ryou need to have parked using Active Park- ing for the steering procedure to complete
ing Assist. before pulling away.
Rthe border of the parking space must be If you back up after activation, the steering
high enough at the front and the rear. A wheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-
curb stone is too small, for example. tion.
Rthe border of the parking space must not be X Drive forwards or back up the vehicle, being
too wide, as the position of the vehicle must ready to brake at all times.
not exceed an angle of 45° to the starting X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the
position as it is maneuvered into the park- continuous warning tone, if not before.
ing space.
X Drive forwards and back up as prompted by
Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft
the PARKTRONIC warning displays, several
(1.0 m) must be available. times if necessary.
X Start the engine.
Once you have exited the parking space com-
X Release the electric parking brake. pletely, the steering wheel is moved to the
straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and
Z
232 Driving systems

the Park Assist Finished message If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle,
appears in the multifunction display. You will you should not use Active Parking Assist.
then have to steer and merge into traffic on Once the electrical connection is established
your own. PARKTRONIC is still available. You between your vehicle and the trailer, Active
can take over the steering, before the vehicle Parking Assist is no longer available. PARK-
Driving and parking

has exited the parking space completely. This TRONIC is deactivated for the rear area.
is useful, for example when you recognize
that it is already possible to pull out of the
parking space. Rear view camera
General notes
Canceling Active Parking Assist
X Stop the movement of the multifunction
steering wheel or steer yourself.
Active Parking Assist will be canceled at
once. The Park Assist Canceled mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
or
X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the cen-
ter console (Y page 227).
PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active
Parking Assist is immediately canceled.
The Park Assist Canceled message Rear view camera : is in the handle on the
appears in the multifunction display. tailgate.
Active Parking Assist is canceled automati- Rear view camera : is an optical parking and
cally if: maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind
Rthe electric parking brake is engaged your vehicle with guide lines in the COMAND
display.
Rtransmission position P is selected
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no
mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.
longer possible
Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h) i The text of messages shown in the
Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. The
COMAND display depends on the language
setting. The following are examples of rear
÷ warning lamp lights up in the instru-
view camera messages in the COMAND
ment cluster.
display.
A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol
goes out and the Park Assist Canceled Important safety notes
message appears in the multifunction dis-
play. The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a
If Active Parking Assist is canceled, you must replacement for your attention to your imme-
steer again yourself. diate surroundings. You are always responsi-
ble for safe maneuvering and parking. When
Towing a trailer maneuvering or parking, make sure that there
are no persons, animals or objects in the area
For vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the min- in which you are maneuvering.
imum length for parking spaces is slightly
increased.
 Driving systems 233

Under the following circumstances, the rear COMAND controller, select symbol : for
view camera will not function, or will function the "Reverse parking" function or sym-
in a limited manner: bol ; for "Coupling up a trailer" (see the
Rif the tailgate is open separate COMAND operating instructions).
The symbol of the selected function is high-
Rin heavy rain, snow or fog

Driving and parking

lighted.
Rat night or in very dark places
To deactivate: the rear view camera deacti-
Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light
vates if you shift the transmission to P or after
Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED
driving forwards a short distance.
lighting (the display may flicker)
Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, Displays in the COMAND display
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in
winter The rear view camera may show a distorted
Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed
view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or
not at all. The rear view camera does not show
Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this
objects in the following positions:
event, have the camera position and setting
checked at a qualified specialist workshop Rvery close to the rear bumper
The field of vision and other functions of the Runder the rear bumper
rear view camera may be restricted due to Rin the area immediately above the tailgate
additional accessories on the rear of the vehi- handle
cle (e.g. license plate holder, bicycle rack).
! Objects not at ground level may appear to
be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
Activating/deactivating the rear view
camera Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle
Rthe drawbar of a trailer
Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
Rthe rear section of an HGV
Ra slanted post
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Approach objects no further than the bot-
tom-most guideline.

X To activate: make sure that the SmartKey

is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
X Make sure that the function "show rear
view camera display" is selected in
COMAND.
X Engage reverse gear.
The area behind the vehicle is shown in the
COMAND display with guide lines.
X To change the function mode for vehi-
cles with trailer tow hitch: using the

Z
234
Driving and parking Driving systems

: White guide line without turning the steer- Additional messages for vehicles with PARK-
ing wheel, vehicle width including the TRONIC
exterior mirrors (static) : Front warning display
; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- ; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement
imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the operational readiness indicator
vehicle = Rear warning display
= Red guide line for the vehicle width includ- Vehicles with PARKTRONIC: if PARK-
ing the exterior mirrors, for current steer- TRONIC is operational (Y page 226), an addi-
ing wheel angle (dynamic) tional operational readiness indicator will
? Yellow lane marking tires at current steer- appear in COMAND display ;. If the PARK-
ing wheel angle (dynamic) TRONIC warning displays are active or light
up, warning displays : and = are also active
or light up correspondingly in the COMAND
display.

"Reverse parking" function

Backing up straight into a parking space
without turning the steering wheel

A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
C Bumper
D Red guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 10 in (0.25 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
: White guide line without turning the steer-
The guide lines are shown when the trans- ing wheel, vehicle width including the
mission is in position R. exterior mirrors (static)
The distance specifications only apply to ; Red guide line for the vehicle width includ-
objects that are at ground level. ing the exterior mirrors, for current steer-
ing wheel angle (dynamic)
 Driving systems 235

= Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- ing space until red guide line : reaches
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the parking space marking ;.
vehicle X Keep the steering wheel in that position
? Red guide line at a distance of approx- and back up carefully.
imately 10 in (0.25 m) from the rear of the

Driving and parking

vehicle
X Make sure that the rear view camera is
switched on (Y page 233).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
X With the help of white guide line :, check
whether the vehicle will fit into the parking
space.
X Using white guide line : as a guide, care-
fully back up until you reach the end posi-
tion.
Backing up with the steering wheel turned
Red guide line ? is then at the end of the
: Red guide line for the vehicle width includ-
parking space. The vehicle is almost paral-
lel in the parking space. ing the exterior mirrors, for current steer-
ing wheel angle (dynamic)
Reverse perpendicular parking with the X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in
steering wheel at an angle front of the parking space.
The white lane should be as close to parallel
with the parking space marking as possi-
ble.

Turning the steering wheel

: Red guide line for the vehicle width includ-
ing the exterior mirrors, for current steer-
ing wheel angle (dynamic) Driving to the final position
; Parking space marking : White guide line at current steering wheel
X Make sure that the rear view camera is angle
switched on (Y page 233). ; Parking space marking
The lane and the guide lines are shown. X Turn the steering wheel to the center posi-
X Drive past the parking space and bring the tion while the vehicle is stationary.
vehicle to a standstill.
X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the park-

Z
236
Driving and parking Driving systems

: Red guide line at a distance of approx- : Vehicle center point on the yellow guide
imately 10 in (0.25 m) from the rear of the line at a distance of approximately 3 ft
vehicle (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle
; White guide line without turning the steer- ; Trailer drawbar
ing wheel = Ball coupling
= End of parking space
This function is only available on vehicles with
X Back up carefully until you have reached a trailer tow hitch.
the final position. X Set the height of trailer drawbar ; so that
Red guide line : is then at end of parking it is slightly higher than ball coupling =.
space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in X Position the vehicle centrally in front of
the parking space.
trailer drawbar ;.

"Coupling up a trailer" function

! The following distance specifications
refer to trailer tow hitches with ball cou-
pling that have been approved for this vehi-
cle by Mercedes-Benz. Distances may dif-
fer if you use other ball couplings. In this
case, take into account that actual distan-
ces will not match the following distance
specifications. Otherwise you could dam-
age the trailer and vehicle.
: Ball coupling
; Red guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 10 in (0.25 m) from the ball cou-
pling
= Trailer drawbar marker assistant
? Trailer drawbar
A Symbol for the "Coupling up a trailer"
function
X Use the COMAND controller to select sym-
bol A, see the separate operating instruc-
tions for COMAND.
The "Coupling up a trailer" function is selec-
ted. The distance specifications now only
 Driving systems 237

apply to objects that are at the same level Rtop view and rear-view images from the
as the ball coupling. exterior mirror cameras (rear wheel view)
X Back up carefully, making sure that trailer Rtop view and forward-view images from the
drawbar marker assistant = points exterior mirror cameras (front wheel view)
approximately in the direction of trailer
i The top view and trailer view are available

Driving and parking

drawbar ?.
for vehicles equipped with a trailer tow
X Reverse carefully until trailer drawbar ?
hitch.
reaches red guide line ;.
When the function is active and you shift the
X Couple up the trailer (Y page 265).
transmission from position D or R to N, you
see the previous view in the COMAND dis-
play. The dynamic guidelines are hidden.
360° camera (surround view)
When you change between transmission
General notes positions D and R, you see the previously
selected front or rear view.
The 360° camera is a system consisting of
four cameras.
Important safety notes
The system analyzes images from the follow-
ing cameras: The 360° camera is only an aid. It is not a
replacement for your attention to your imme-
RRear view camera
diate surroundings. You are always responsi-
RFront camera ble for safe maneuvering and parking. When
RTwo cameras in the exterior rear view mir- maneuvering or parking, make sure that there
rors are no persons, animals or objects in the area
The cameras capture the immediate sur- in which you are maneuvering.
roundings of the vehicle. The system sup- The 360° camera may show a distorted view
ports you, e.g. when parking or if vision is of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at
restricted at an exit. all. It cannot show objects in the following
The 360° camera images can be shown in full areas:
screen mode or in seven different split-screen Runder the front bumper
views on the COMAND display. A split-screen Rvery close to the front bumper
view also includes a top view of the vehicle.
Rvery close to the rear bumper
This view is calculated from the data supplied
Runder the rear bumper
by the installed cameras (virtual camera).
Rin close range above the handle on the
The seven split-screen views are:
trunk lid
Rtop view and picture from the rear view
Rvery close to the exterior mirrors
camera (130° viewing angle)
Rtop view and picture from the front camera You are always responsible for safety, and
(without displaying the maximum steering must always pay attention to your surround-
wheel angle) ings when parking and maneuvering. This
applies to the areas behind, in front of and
Rtop view and enlarged rear view
beside the vehicle. You could otherwise
Rtop view and enlarged front view
endanger yourself and others.
Rtop view and trailer view (vehicles with
The 360° camera will not function or will
trailer tow hitch) function in a limited manner:
Rif the doors are open
Rif the exterior mirrors are folded in
Z
238 Driving systems

Rif the tailgate is open Activating the 360° camera with

Rin heavy rain, snow or fog COMAND
Rat night or in very dark places X Press the W button, see the separate
Rif the cameras are exposed to very bright COMAND operating instructions.
light X Select System by turning cVd the
Driving and parking

Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED COMAND controller and press W to con-
lighting (the display may flicker) firm.
Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, X Select 360° camera and press W to con-
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in firm.
winter Depending on whether position D or R is
Rif the camera lenses are dirty or covered engaged, the following is shown:
Rif the vehicle components in which the Ra split screen with top view and the
cameras are installed are damaged. In this image from the front camera or
event, have the camera position and setting Ra split screen with top view and the
checked at a qualified specialist workshop. image from the rear view camera
Do not use the 360° camera in this case. You For further information about the COMAND
can otherwise injure others or cause damage controller, see the separate COMAND oper-
to objects or the vehicle. ating instructions.

Activation conditions Activating the 360° camera using

The 360° camera image can be displayed if: reverse gear
Ryour vehicle is equipped with a 360° cam- The 360° camera images can be automati-
era cally displayed by engaging reverse gear.
RCOMAND is switched on, see the separate X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
COMAND operating instructions 2 in the ignition lock.
Rthe 360° Camera function is activated X Make sure that the Activation by R
gear function is selected in COMAND, see
Activating the 360° camera using the the separate COMAND operating instruc-
SYS button tions.
X To show the 360° camera image: engage
X Press and hold the W button for longer
than 2 seconds, see the separate COMAND reverse gear.
operating instructions. The COMAND display shows the area
Depending on whether position D or R is behind the vehicle in split screen:
engaged, the following is shown: Rvehicle with guide lines

Rfull screen display with the image from Rtop view of the vehicle

the front camera

Rfull screen display with the image from Selecting the split-screen and full
the rear view camera screen displays
X To switch between split screen views:
switch to the line with the vehicle icons by
sliding Z V the COMAND controller.
X Turn cVd the COMAND controller and
select one of the vehicle symbols.
 Driving systems 239

X To switch to full screen mode: select

Full Screen by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to con-
firm.

Driving and parking

Displays in the COMAND display
Important safety notes
! Objects not at ground level may appear to
be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
Rthe drawbar of a trailer imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the
Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch vehicle
Rthe rear section of an HGV
B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
Ra slanted post
C Red guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the
Use the guidelines only for orientation. vehicle
Approach objects no further than the bot-
D Bumper
tom-most guideline.
The guide lines are shown when the trans-
Top view with picture from the rear view mission is in position R.
camera
The distance specifications only apply to
objects that are at ground level.
Top view with picture from the front cam-
era

: Symbol for the split screen setting with

top view and rear view camera image
; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the
vehicle : Symbol for the split screen setting with
= Yellow guide line for the vehicle width top view and front camera image
including the exterior mirrors, for current ; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
steering wheel angle (dynamic) imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the front of the
? Yellow lane marking tires at current steer- vehicle
ing wheel angle (dynamic) = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
? Yellow lane marking tires at current steer-
ing wheel angle (dynamic)
Z
240 Driving systems

A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- Top view with images from the exterior
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the front of the mirror cameras
vehicle
B Red guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the front of the
Driving and parking

vehicle
Top view and enlarged rear view

: Symbol for the setting with the top view

and forward view from the exterior mirror
cameras
; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors (right side of
vehicle)
: Symbol for the split screen setting with = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
top view and rear view camera image including the exterior mirrors (left side of
enlarged vehicle)
; Red guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the Top view with trailer view
vehicle
This view assists you in estimating the dis-
tance to the vehicle behind you.
i This setting can also be selected as an
enlarged front view.

: Symbol for the trailer view setting

; Trailer drawbar marker assistant
= Red guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the ball cou-
pling
 Driving systems 241

Wide-angle function ATTENTION ASSIST

General notes
ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,
monotonous journeys, such as on highways.

Driving and parking

It is active in the range between 50 mph
(80 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h). If
ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicators
of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentra-
tion on the part of the driver, it suggests you
take a break.

Example: full screen mode with PARKTRONIC dis- Important safety notes
play
: Symbol for the full screen setting with rear ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the
view camera image driver. It might not always recognize fatigue
; PARKTRONIC warning display or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to
recognize them at all. The system is not a
If the vehicle is equipped with PARKTRONIC substitute for a well-rested and attentive
and the function is active (Y page 227), warn- driver.
ing displays ; in the COMAND display are
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is
also active or light up accordingly.
restricted and warnings may be delayed or
PARKTRONIC appears: not occur at all:
Rin split screen view as red or yellow brack- Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the sur-
ets around the vehicle icon in the top view, face is uneven or if there are potholes
or Rif there is a strong side wind
Rin the full screen view, on the right-hand
Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style
side at the bottom as red or yellow brackets
with high cornering speeds or high rates of
around the vehicle icon
acceleration
i The full screen display can also be selec- Rif you are predominantly driving slower
ted as front view. than 50 mph (80 km/h) or faster than
112 mph (180 km/h)
Exiting 360° camera display mode Rif the time has been set incorrectly

As soon as your vehicle exceeds a speed of Rin active driving situations, such as when
19 mph (30 km/h) with the function activa- you change lanes or change your speed
ted, the function switches off. The COMAND ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you con-
display switches back to the previously selec- tinue your journey and starts assessing your
ted view. You can also switch the display by tiredness again if:
selecting the & symbol in the display and Ryou switch off the engine.
pressing W the COMAND controller to con-
Ryou take off your seat belt and open the
firm.
driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or
to take a break.

Z
242 Driving systems

Activating ATTENTION ASSIST In addition to the illumination provided by the

normal headlamps, Night View Assist Plus
X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-
uses infrared light to illuminate the road.
board computer (Y page 284).
Night View Assist Plus camera : picks up the
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the infrared light and displays a monochrome
é symbol appears in the multifunction
Driving and parking

image in COMAND. The image displayed in

display in the assistance graphic display. COMAND corresponds to a road lit up by high-
ATTENTION ASSIST is activated automatically beam headlamps. This enables you to see the
after the engine is started up. road's course and any obstacles in good time.
If pedestrian recognition is activated, pedes-
Warning and display messages in the trians recognized by the system are highligh-
multifunction display ted in the Night View Assist Plus display.
Light from the headlamps of oncoming vehi-
If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentra-
cles does not affect the Night View Assist Plus
tion are detected, a warning appears in the
display in the multifunction display. This is
multifunction display: Attention Assist:
also the case if you cannot switch on the high-
Take a Break!
beam headlamps due to oncoming traffic.
In addition to the message shown in the mul-
tifunction display, you will then hear a warn- i Infrared light is not visible to the human
ing tone. eye and therefore does not glare. Night
X If necessary, take a break.
View Assist Plus can therefore remain
switched on even if there is oncoming traf-
X Confirm the message by pressing the a
fic.
button on the steering wheel.
On long journeys, take regular breaks in good Important safety notes
time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you
do not take a break, you will be warned again Night View Assist Plus is only an aid and is not
after 15 minutes at the earliest. The precon- a substitute for attentive driving. Do not rely
dition for this is that ATTENTION ASSIST still on the Night View Assist Plus display. You are
detects typical indicators of fatigue or responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
increasing lapses in concentration. front, for vehicle speed and for braking in
good time. Drive carefully and always adapt
your driving style to suit the prevailing road
Night View Assist Plus and traffic conditions.
The system may be impaired or may not func-
General notes tion if:
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow,
rain, fog or spray
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up or cov-
ered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity
of the camera
Ron bends, on uphill gradients or downhill
gradients
 Driving systems 243

Pedestrian recognition may be impaired or i The infrared headlamps only switch on

inoperative if: when the vehicle is being driven at speeds
Rpedestrians are partially or entirely of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). This
obscured by objects, e.g. parked vehicles means that you do not have the full visual
range while the vehicle is stationary and
Rthe silhouette of the pedestrian in the Night

Driving and parking

cannot check whether Night View Assist
View Assist Plus display is incomplete or
Plus is working.
interrupted, e.g. by powerful light reflec-
tions
Pedestrian recognition
Rpedestrians do not contrast adequately
from the background
Rpedestrians are not in an upright position,
e.g. sitting, squatting or lying

Activating Night View Assist Plus

Activation conditions
You can only activate Night View Assist Plus
if:
Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition
lock. : Night View Assist Plus display
Rit is dark. ; Pedestrian recognized
Rthe light switch is in the à or L posi- = Framing
tion. ? Symbol for active pedestrian recognition
Rreverse gear has not been engaged.
i Animals are not recognized by pedestrian
Activating Night View Assist Plus recognition.
Night View Assist Plus is able to recognize
pedestrians by typical characteristics, e.g. a
silhouette in the shape of a person.
Pedestrian recognition is then switched on
automatically if:
RNight View Assist Plus is activated.
Ryou are driving faster than approximately
6 mph (10 km/h).
Rthe surroundings are dark, e.g. when driv-
ing outside built-up areas without street
X Make sure that COMAND is switched on. lighting.
X Press button :. If pedestrian recognition is active, symbol ?
The Night View Assist Plus display appears appears. If pedestrians are detected, they are
in the COMAND display. highlighted with framing =. If the pedestrian
recognition system has brought a pedestrian
You can read about how to adjust the bright- to your attention, look through the windshield
ness of the COMAND display in the COMAND to evaluate the situation. The actual distance
operating instructions. to objects and pedestrians cannot be gaged
accurately by looking at a screen.

Z
244 Driving systems

It may be the case that objects are highlighted

as well as pedestrians.

Fogged up or dirty windshield

If the windshield in front of the camera is fog-
Driving and parking

ged up or dirty on the inside or outside, the

Night View Assist Plus display is affected.
X To defrost: check the automatic air condi-
tioning settings (Y page 160) and fold down
the camera cover (Y page 383).
X To defrost the inside of the windshield:
fold down the camera cover (Y page 383)
and clean the windshield (Y page 381).
 Driving systems 245

Problems with Night View Assist Plus

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The picture quality of The windshield wipers are smearing the windshield.
Night View Assist Plus Replace the wiper blades (Y page 141).

Driving and parking

X
has deteriorated.
The windshield is smeared after the vehicle has been cleaned in a
car wash.
X Clean the windshield (Y page 381).

There is windshield chip damage in the camera's field of vision.

X Replace the windshield.

The windshield is fogged up on the inside.

X Defrost the windshield (Y page 160).

The windshield is iced up.

X De-ice the windshield (Y page 159).

There is dirt on the inside of the windshield.

X Clean the inside of the windshield (Y page 381).

Lane Tracking package Important safety notes

General notes G WARNING

Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind
Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,
Spot Assist (Y page 245) and Lane Keeping
placing them in the blind spot area
Assist (Y page 247).
Rvehicles which approach with a large speed

Blind Spot Assist differential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give
General notes warnings in such situations. There is a risk of
Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system an accident.
to monitor the areas on both sides of your Always observe the traffic conditions care-
vehicle. It supports you from a speed of fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warning
display in the exterior mirrors draws your Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to
attention to vehicles detected in the moni- detect some vehicles and is no substitute for
tored area. If you then switch on the corre- attentive driving.
sponding turn signal to change lanes, you will i USA only:
also receive an optical and audible collision
This device has been approved by the FCC
warning. Blind Spot Assist uses sensors in the
as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar
rear bumper for monitoring purposes.
sensor is intended for use in an automotive
radar system only. Removing, tampering
with, or altering the device will void any
Z
246 Driving systems

warranties, and is not permitted by the the case if there are vehicles driving at the
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in inner edge of their lanes.
any non-approved way. Due to the nature of the system:
Any unauthorized modification to this Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv-
device could void the user’s authority to ing close to crash barriers or similar solid
Driving and parking

operate the equipment. lane borders.

Monitoring range of the sensors Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an

In particular, the detection of obstacles can extended period next to long vehicles, such
be impaired if: as trucks.
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist
are integrated into the sides of the rear
covering the sensors
bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free of
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy
dirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors.
rain, snow or spray The sensors must not be covered, for exam-
Rthere are narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles ple by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Fol-
or bicycles lowing a severe impact or in the event of dam-
Rthe road has very wide lanes age to the bumpers, have the condition of the
Rthe road has narrow lanes radar sensors checked at a qualified special-
Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane ist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may other-
wise not work properly.
Rthere are barriers or similar lane borders
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not Indicator and warning display
indicated. Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in
the monitoring range are then not indicated.

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp

When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator
lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yel-
Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft low at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At
(3 m) behind your vehicle and directly next to speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indica-
your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. tor lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist is
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the operational.
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot
be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph
driving in the middle of their lane. This may be (30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corre-
 Driving systems 247

sponding side lights up red. This warning is To do so, switch off Blind Spot Assist when:
always emitted when a vehicle enters the Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the igni-
blind spot monitoring range from behind or tion lock
from the side. When you overtake a vehicle,
Rthe engine is not running
the warning only occurs if the difference in
Rthe electrical connection to the trailer

Driving and parking

speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse has been established
gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot
Assist is no longer active. Lane Keeping Assist
The brightness of the indicator/warning General notes
lamps is adjusted automatically according to
the ambient light.
Collision warning
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range
of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the
corresponding turn signal, a double warning
tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If
the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles
are indicated by the flashing of red warning
lamp :. There are no further warning tones.
Switching on Blind Spot Assist : Lane Keeping Assist camera
X Make sure that the radar sensor system Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
(Y page 287) and Blind Spot Assist front of your vehicle by means of a camera :
(Y page 284) are activated in the on-board at the top of the windshield. Lane Keeping
computer. Assist detects lane markings on the road and
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- warns you before you leave your lane unin-
tion lock. tentionally.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors If you select km on the on-board computer in
light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer func-
and then turn yellow. tion (Y page 285), Lane Keeping Assist is
active starting at a speed of 60 km/h. If the
Towing a trailer miles display unit is selected, the assistance
When you attach a trailer, make sure you have range begins at 40 mph.
correctly established the electrical connec- A warning may be given if a front wheel
tion. This can be accomplished by checking passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by
the trailer lighting. In this event, Blind Spot means of intermittent vibration in the steer-
Assist is deactivated. The indicator lamp in ing wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
the exterior mirrors lights up yellow, and the
Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavail‐ Important safety notes
able See Operator's Manual message G WARNING
appears in the multifunction display.
Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly
i You can deactivate the indicator lamps in recognize lane markings.
the exterior mirrors.

Z
248 Driving systems

In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may: Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too
small and the lane markings thus cannot be
Rgive an unnecessary warning
detected
Rnot give a warning Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.
There is a risk of an accident. lanes branch off, cross one another or
Driving and parking

Always pay particular attention to the traffic merge

situation and stay in lane, in particular if Rthe road is narrow and winding
warned by Lane Keeping Assist. Rthere are strong shadows cast on the lane

G WARNING Switching on Lane Keeping Assist

The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
return the vehicle to the original lane. There is the on-board computer; to do so, select
a risk of an accident. Standard or Adaptive (Y page 284).
You should always steer, brake or accelerate If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep- (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
ing Assist. the lines in the assistance graphics display
(Y page 283) are shown in green. Lane
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use.
Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of
an accident nor override the laws of physics. Standard
Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account If Standard is selected, no warning vibration
the road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane occurs if:
Keeping Assist is merely an aid. You are Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in the warnings are suppressed for a certain
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good period of time.
time and for staying in your lane. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the ABS, BAS or ESP®.
vehicle in the lane.
The system may be impaired or may not func- Adaptive
tion if: When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra-
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi- tion occurs if:
cient illumination of the road, or due to Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
snow, rain, fog or spray the warnings are suppressed for a certain
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, period of time.
the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
surface is wet) ABS, BAS or ESP®.
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the Ryou brake hard.
vicinity of the camera Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
Rthere are no, several or unclear lane mark- obstacle or change lanes quickly.
ings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road con- Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
struction work
In order that you are warned only when nec-
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
essary and in good time if you cross the lane
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow marking, the system recognizes certain con-
ditions and warns you accordingly.
 Driving systems 249

The warning vibration occurs earlier if: G WARNING

Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
bend. Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a high- placing them in the blind spot area
way.

Driving and parking

Rvehicles which approach with a large speed
Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings. differential and overtake your vehicle
The warning vibration occurs later if: As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei-
Rthe road has narrow lanes. ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit-
Ryou cut the corner on a bend. uations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always observe the traffic conditions care-
fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
Active Driving Assistance package
i USA only: This device has been approved
General notes by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System".
The radar sensor is intended for use in an
The Active Driving Assistance package con-
automotive radar system only. Removal,
sists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 206), Active
tampering, or altering of the device will void
Blind Spot Assist (Y page 249) and Active
any warranties, and is not permitted by the
Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 252).
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
any non-approved way.
Active Blind Spot Assist
Any unauthorized modification to this
General notes device could void the user's authority to
Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor operate the equipment.
system to monitor the side areas of your vehi- i Canada only: This device complies with
cle which are behind the driver. A warning RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
display in the exterior mirrors draws your subject to the following two conditions:
attention to vehicles detected in the moni- 1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
tored area. If you then switch on the corre- ference, and
sponding turn signal to change lanes, you will
2. This device must accept any interference
also receive a visual and audible collision
received, including interference that may
warning. If a risk of lateral collision is detec-
cause undesired operation of the device.
ted, corrective braking may help you avoid a
collision. Before a course-correcting brake Removal, tampering, or altering of the
application, Active Blind Spot Assist evalu- device will void any warranties, and is not
ates the space in the direction of travel and at permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
the sides of the vehicle. For this, Active Blind in any non-approved way.
Spot Assist uses radar sensors which are Any unauthorized modification to this
pointed in the direction of travel. device could void the user's authority to
Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a operate the equipment.
speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Radar sensors
Important safety notes The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are
Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may integrated into the front and rear bumpers
fail to detect some vehicles and is no substi- and behind a cover in the radiator trim. Make
tute for attentive driving. sure that the bumpers and the cover in the
radiator grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The

Z
250 Driving systems

rear sensors must not be covered, e.g. by Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect nar-
bicycle racks or overhanging loads. Following row vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicy-
a severe impact or in the event of damage to cles, or may only detect them too late.
the bumpers, have the function of the radar If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
sensors checked at a qualified specialist lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may
Driving and parking

workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist may oth- be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not
erwise no longer work properly. driving in the middle of their lane. This may be
Monitoring area the case if there are vehicles at the inner edge
of your lane.
G WARNING Due to the nature of the system:
Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all
Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv-
traffic situations and road users. There is a
ing close to crash barriers or similar solid
risk of an accident.
lane borders.
Always make sure that there is sufficient dis-
Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving
tance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.
alongside particularly long vehicles, e.g.
trucks, for a prolonged time.
Indicator and warning display

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp

Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at
Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up speeds below approximately 20 mph
to 10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and (30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range
directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the are then not indicated.
diagram. For this purpose, Active Blind Spot When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated,
Assist uses radar sensors in the rear bumper. indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights
In particular, the detection of obstacles can up yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph
be impaired if: (30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes out and
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
Active Blind Spot Assist is operational.
covering the sensors
If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy
monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph
rain, snow or spray (30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corre-
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not sponding side lights up red. This warning is
indicated. always emitted when a vehicle enters the
blind spot monitoring range from behind or
 Driving systems 251

from the side. When you overtake a vehicle,

the warning only occurs if the difference in
speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse
gear is engaged. In this event, Active Blind

Driving and parking

Spot Assist is no longer active.
The brightness of the indicator/warning
lamps is adjusted automatically according to
the ambient light.
Visual and acoustic collision warning
If you switch on the turn signals to change If a course-correcting brake application
lanes and a vehicle is detected in the side occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the
monitoring range, you receive a visual and exterior mirror and a dual warning tone
acoustic collision warning. You then hear a sounds. In addition, display ; underlining
double warning tone and red warning lamp : the danger of a side collision appears in the
flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detec- multifunction display.
ted vehicles are indicated by the flashing of In very rare cases, the system may make an
red warning lamp :. There are no further inappropriate brake application. A course-
warning tones. correcting brake application may be interrup-
ted at any time if you steer slightly in the
Course-correcting brake application opposite direction or accelerate.
If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a The course-correcting brake application is
lateral collision in the monitoring range, a available in the speed range between 20 mph
course-correcting brake application is carried (30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).
out. This is meant to assist you in avoiding a
Either no braking application, or a course-
collision.
correcting brake application adapted to the
G WARNING driving situation occurs if:
A course-correcting brake application cannot Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash
always prevent a collision. There is a risk of an barriers, located on both sides of your vehi-
accident. cle.
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the
especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns side.
you or makes a course-correcting brake appli- Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
cation. Always maintain a safe distance at the high cornering speeds.
sides.
Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake.
RESP® is switched off.
Rthe off-road program is activated (vehicles
without the ON&OFFROAD package).
Roff-road program 1 or 2 is activated (vehi-
cles with the ON&OFFROAD package).

Z
252 Driving systems

Rthe LOW RANGE off-road gear is activated Active Lane Keeping Assist
(vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package).
Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is
General notes
detected.
Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist
Driving and parking

Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area

in front of your vehicle by means of camera :
at the top of the windshield. Active Lane
X Make sure that the radar sensor system Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the
(Y page 287) and Active Blind Spot Assist road and warns you before you leave your
(Y page 284) are activated in the on-board lane unintentionally. If you do not react to the
computer. warning, a lane-correcting application of the
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- brakes can bring the vehicle back into the
tion lock. original lane.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors If you select km in the Display Unit
light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds Speed-/Odometer: function on the on-board
and then turn yellow. computer (Y page 285), Active Lane Keeping
Assist is activated starting at a speed of
Towing a trailer 60 km/h. If the miles display unit is selected,
When you attach a trailer, make sure you have the assistance range begins at 40 mph.
correctly established the electrical connec-
Important safety notes
tion. This can be accomplished by checking
the trailer lighting. Active Blind Spot Assist is If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active
then deactivated. The indicator lamp lights up Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the
yellow in the exterior mirrors and the Active risk of accident nor override the laws of phys-
Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavail‐ ics. Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into
able See Operator's Manual message account the road, traffic and weather condi-
appears in the multifunction display. tions. Lane Keeping Assist is merely an aid.
You are responsible for the distance to the
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking
in good time and for staying in your lane.
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continu-
ously keep your vehicle in its lane.
G WARNING
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always
clearly detect lane markings.
 Driving systems 253

In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist means of intermittent vibration in the steer-
can: ing wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
Rgive an unnecessary warning and then In order that you are warned only when nec-
make a course-correcting brake application essary and in good time if you cross the lane
to the vehicle marking, the system recognizes certain con-

Driving and parking

ditions and warns you accordingly.
Rnot give a warning or intervene
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
There is a risk of an accident.
Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and keep within the lane, especially bend.
if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Ter- Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a high-
minate the intervention in a non-critical driv- way.
ing situation. Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.
The warning vibration occurs later if:
The system may be impaired or may not func-
Rthe road has narrow lanes.
tion if:
Ryou cut the corner on a bend.
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-
cient illumination of the road, or due to Lane-correcting brake application
snow, rain, fog or spray
G WARNING
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
A lane-correcting brake application cannot
the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road
always bring the vehicle back into the original
surface is wet)
lane. There is a risk of an accident.
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns
vicinity of the camera
you or makes a lane-correcting brake appli-
Rthere are no, several or unclear lane mark-
cation.
ings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road con-
struction work G WARNING
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow traffic conditions or road users. In very rare
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too cases, the system may make an inappropriate
small and the lane markings thus cannot be brake application, e.g. after intentionally driv-
detected ing over a solid lane marking. There is a risk of
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. an accident.
lanes branch off, cross one another or An inappropriate brake application may be
merge interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in
Rthe road is narrow and winding the opposite direction. Always make sure that
Rthere are highly variable shade conditions there is sufficient distance on the side for
on the roadway other traffic or obstacles.
Rno vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane
and there are broken lane markings
Warning vibration in the steering wheel
A warning may be given if a front wheel
passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by

Z
254 Driving systems

Rthe transmission is not in position D.

Ron vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the
electrical connection to the trailer has been
correctly established.
Rthe off-road program is activated (vehicles
Driving and parking

without the ON&OFFROAD package).

Roff-road program 1 or 2 is activated (vehi-
cles with the ON&OFFROAD package).
Rthe LOW RANGE off-road gear is activated
(vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package).
If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has
display : appears in the multifunction dis- been detected and displayed.
play. Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect
If you leave your lane, under certain circum- traffic situations or road users. An inappro-
stances the vehicle will brake briefly on one priate brake application may be interrupted at
side. This is meant to assist you in bringing any time if you:
the vehicle back to the original lane. Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction
This function is available in the range between Rswitch on the turn signal
40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and
Rclearly brake or accelerate
200 km/h).
A lane-correcting brake application is inter-
A lane-correcting brake application can only
rupted automatically if:
be made after driving over a solid, recogniz-
able lane marking. Before this, a warning Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
must be given by means of intermittent vibra- ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind
tion in the steering wheel. In addition, a lane Spot Assist.
with lane markings on both sides must be Rlane markings can no longer be recognized.
recognized. The brake application also
slightly reduces vehicle speed. Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist
X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
i A further lane-correcting brake applica- the on-board computer; to do so, select
tion can only occur after your vehicle has
Standard or Adaptive (Y page 284).
returned to the original lane.
If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
No lane-correcting brake application occurs (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
if: the lines in the assistance graphics display
Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or (Y page 283) are shown in green. Lane
accelerate. Keeping Assist is ready for use.
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. When Standard is selected, no warning
Ryou have switched on the turn signal.
vibration occurs if:
Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
event, the warnings are suppressed for a
ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind
certain period of time.
Spot Assist.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such
Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
as ABS, BAS or ESP®.
high cornering speeds or high rates of
acceleration. When Adaptive is selected, no warning
RESP® is switched off.
vibration occurs if:
 Driving systems 255

Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this AUTO program

event, the warnings are suppressed for a
certain period of time.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ABS, BAS or ESP®.

Driving and parking

Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
Ryou brake hard.
Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
obstacle or change lanes quickly.
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.

Towing a trailer
When you attach a trailer, make sure you have
correctly established the electrical connec-
tion. This can be accomplished by checking
the trailer lighting.

On-road programs (vehicles with the

ON&OFFROAD package)
General notes
The on-road programs assist you during on- Select the AUTO program for a more com-
road driving and the off-road programs when fortable ride under all normal driving condi-
driving off-road (Y page 259). tions.
The following program messages remain in Your selection remains stored even if you
the multifunction display until the corre- remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
sponding vehicle level has been set. Up to off-
X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly press
road level 2, you can hide the program mes-
sages using the % or a button on the selector wheel :.
multifunction steering wheel. Selector wheel : extends.
X To select: turn selector wheel : until indi-
cator lamp ; comes on.
AUTO indicator = appears in the multi-
function display.
RHighway level is set.
RADS (Adaptive Damping System) adapts
comfortable damping characteristics to
the current operating and driving condi-
tions.
RThe automatic transmission selects the
automatic drive program for a comforta-
ble driving style that provides for opti-
mum fuel consumption.

Z
256 Driving systems

SPORT program longer has to be pressed as far to accel-

erate.
RThe sporty steering curve is selected,
e.g. greater force is required when steer-
ing.
Driving and parking

i You cannot select the SPORT program if

LOW RANGE has been selected. The
Drive Program SPORT Not in LOW
RANGE message then appears in the multi-
function display.

Snow program

Select the SPORT program for sporty,

dynamic handling.
Your selection remains stored even if you
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly press
selector wheel :.
Selector wheel : extends.
X To select: turn selector wheel : until indi-
cator lamp ; comes on.
SPORT indicator = appears in the multi-
function display.
RHigh-speed level, –15 mm compared to Select the snow program for driving in snow
highway level, is set. with or without snow chains.
RADS (Adaptive Damping System) adapts X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly press
sporty damping characteristics to the selector wheel :.
current operating and driving conditions. Selector wheel : extends.
RThe automatic transmission selects the X To select: turn selector wheel : until indi-
automatic drive program for a sporty cator lamp ; comes on.
driving style. Snow indicator = appears in the multi-
RThe sporty accelerator pedal curve is function display.
selected, e.g. the accelerator pedal no
 Driving systems 257

RHighway level is set. X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly press

RADS (Adaptive Damping System) adapts selector wheel :.
comfortable damping characteristics to Selector wheel : extends.
the current operating and driving condi- X To select: turn selector wheel : until indi-
tions. cator lamp ; comes on.

Driving and parking

R4ETS and the differential lock are adap- Trailer indicator = appears in the multi-
ted for driving on snow-covered roads. function display.
RThe automatic transmission selects the RHighway level is set.
automatic drive program for a comforta- RADS (Adaptive Damping System) adapts
ble driving style that provides for opti- comfortable damping characteristics to
mum fuel consumption. the current operating and driving condi-
RThe soft accelerator pedal curve is selec- tions.
ted, e.g. the accelerator pedal must be RThe automatic transmission selects the
pressed significantly further to acceler- automatic drive program for a comforta-
ate. ble driving style that provides for opti-
RThe optimum gear for pulling away is mum fuel consumption, changing gear at
engaged. optimum points.
RWhile pulling away, the differential locks
Trailer program are engaged.

Off-road driving systems

4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive)
If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC
can neither reduce the risk of accident nor
override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot
take account of road, weather and traffic con-
ditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good
time and for staying in your lane.
! Never tow the vehicle with one axle
raised. This may damage the transfer case.
Damage of this sort is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All
wheels must remain either on the ground or
be fully raised. Observe the instructions for
towing the vehicle with all wheels in full
contact with the ground.

Select the trailer program when towing a ! A function or performance test should
trailer. only be carried out on a two-axle dyna-
mometer. Before you operate the vehicle
on such a dynamometer, please consult a

Z
258 Driving systems

qualified workshop. You could otherwise prevailing conditions and when necessary,
damage the drive train or the brake system. apply the brakes manually.
4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are per- G WARNING
manently driven. Together with ESP® and If the speed driven and the set speed deviate
4ETS, it improves the traction of your vehicle and you activate DSR on a slippery road sur-
Driving and parking

whenever a drive wheel spins due to insuffi- face, the wheels may lose traction. There is an
cient grip. increased danger of skidding and accidents.
i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum Before switching DSR on, please take into
effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if consideration the road surface and the differ-
you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow ence between driving speed and the set
chains if necessary. speed.
Further information about "Driving off-road" Activating DSR
(Y page 199).
G WARNING
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) If you drive faster than the set speed and acti-
vate DSR, the vehicle will decelerate on down-
Important safety notes hill gradients. If you do not know the set
DSR assists you when driving downhill. It speed, the vehicle could decelerate unexpect-
keeps the speed of travel at the speed set on edly. There is a risk of an accident.
the on-board computer. The steeper the Decelerate the vehicle to the set speed before
downhill gradient, the greater the DSR brak- activating DSR. If you do not know what the
ing effect on the vehicle. When driving on flat stored set speed is, store the desired set
stretches of road or on an uphill gradient, the speed again.
DSR braking effect is minimal or nonexistent.
DSR controls the set speed when it is active
and the automatic transmission is in the D, R
or N position. By accelerating or braking, you
can always drive at a higher or a lower speed
than that set on the on-board computer.
Further information about "Driving off-road"
(Y page 199).
If you fail to adapt your driving style, DSR can
neither reduce the risk of accident nor over-
ride the laws of physics. DSR cannot take
account of road, weather and traffic condi- Example: vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package
tions. DSR is only an aid. You are responsible : DSR button
for the distance to the vehicle in front, for ; DSR indicator lamp
vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for
staying in your lane.
X Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
You are always responsible for keeping con-
trol of the vehicle and for assessing whether The à DSR symbol appears in the mul-
the downhill gradient can be managed. DSR tifunction display.
may not always be able to keep to the set You can only activate DSR when driving at
speed, depending on road surface and tire speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).
conditions. Select a set speed suitable for the
 Driving systems 259

If the current vehicle speed is too high, the for a higher set speed or down ; for a
à DSR symbol appears in the multifunc- lower set speed.
tion display with the Max. speed 25 mph The set speed appears in the multifunction
message (Canada: 40 km/h).
km/h display with the à DSR symbol. It is also
displayed in status indicator =.
i You cannot activate DSR if the SPORT on-

Driving and parking

road program is activated. The à DSR When DSR is activated, you can change the
symbol and the Not in Drive Program set speed to a value between 1 mph and
SPORT message then appears in the multi- 11 mph (Canada: between 2 km/h and
function display. 18 km/h).

Deactivating DSR i The DSR set speed is always changed in

1 mph increments (Canada: 1 km/h incre-
XPress button :.
ments). This is regardless of whether you
Indicator lamp ; goes out.
press the cruise control lever to or beyond
The à DSR symbol appears in the mul- the pressure point.
tifunction display with the Off message.
DSR switches off automatically if you drive Off-road programs (vehicles with the
faster than 28 mph (Canada: 45 km/h). The ON&OFFROAD package)
à DSR symbol appears in the multifunc-
tion display with the Off message. The status General notes
indicator in the multifunction display goes The off-road programs assist you in driving
out. You also hear a warning. On vehicles with off-road. The engine's performance charac-
the ON&OFFROAD package, if you select a teristics and the gearshifting characteristics
different on-road/off-road program, DSR is of the automatic transmission are adapted for
also deactivated. this purpose. ABS, ESP® and 4ETS programs
especially adapted to off-road driving are acti-
Changing the set speed
vated. An accelerator pedal curve suitable for
the terrain is selected, i.e. the accelerator
pedal must be depressed further to acceler-
ate.
Do not use the off-road programs on roads
that are snow-covered or icy or if you have
mounted snow chains on your vehicle.
For information on driving off-road, see
(Y page 199).
The following program messages are shown
in the multifunction display until the applica-
ble vehicle level is set. Up to off-road level 2,
you can hide the program messages using the
% or the a button on the multifunction
steering wheel.

X To increase or decrease in 1 mph incre-

ments (Canada: 1 km/h increments):
briefly press the cruise control lever up :
Z
260 Driving systems

Off-road program 1 Off-road program 2

Driving and parking

X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly press X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly press
selector wheel :. selector wheel :.
Selector wheel : extends. Selector wheel : extends.
X To select: turn selector wheel : until indi- X To select: turn selector wheel : until indi-
cator lamp ; comes on. cator lamp ; comes on.
Off-road indicator = appears in the multi- Off-road indicator = appears in the multi-
function display. function display.
Off-road level 1 is set to +1.2 in (+30 mm) ROff-road level 1 is set to +2.4 in (+60 mm)
above the vehicle's "highway" level. above the vehicle's "highway" level.
Off-road program 1 switches to the AUTO RDSR is switched on.
program if you drive faster than 70 mph RThe differential lock is closed.
(110 km/h). Off-road program 2 automatically switches to
Select off-road program 1 for gentle off-road off-road program 1 if you drive faster than
terrain, e.g. for gravel or sand surfaces or 30 mph (45 km/h).
tracks. The engine's torque is restricted to a Select off-road program 2 for rough terrain,
limited degree and the drive wheels can spin. e.g. for steep and/or rough terrain or driving
The spinning wheels produce a cutting effect on rocky terrain.
for better traction.
You can only activate off-road program 1 i Your vehicle has an automatically activa-
when driving at speeds of 60 mph (100 km/h) ted differential lock for the transfer case. It
or below. The Drive Program OFFROAD 1 controls the balance between the front and
Max. 60 mph (100(100 km/h) message appears rear axles.
in the multifunction display.
 Driving systems 261

The differential lock improves the vehicle's General notes

traction. 4ETS (Y page 73) controls the bal-
ance between both wheels on an axle.
You can only activate off-road program 2
when driving at speeds of 25 mph (40 km/h)

Driving and parking

or below.

LOW RANGE off-road gear (vehicles

with the ON&OFFROAD package)
Important safety notes
G WARNING
: LOW RANGE off-road gear button
If you select the LOW RANGE off-road gear on
; LOW RANGE off-road gear indicator lamp
a slippery road surface, the wheels could lose
traction: HIGH RANGE Position for all normal on-
Rif you remove your foot from the accelera- road driving conditions
tor pedal when driving
LOW RANGE Off-road position for driv-
Rif off road ABS intervenes when braking
ing off-road and fording
If the wheels lose traction. the vehicle can no The transmission ratio
longer be steered. There is an increased dan- between the engine and
ger of skidding and accidents. wheels is only approx-
Never select the LOW RANGE off-road gear imately one third of that in
when driving on slippery road surfaces. the HIGH RANGE road
position. Drive torque is
G WARNING thus proportionately
If you do not wait for the transfer case gear higher.
change process to complete, the transfer Do not use LOW RANGE:
case could remain in the neutral position. The Ron slippery road surfa-
power transmission to the driven wheels is
ces, e.g. in the case of
then interrupted. There is a danger of the
slush
vehicle rolling away unintentionally. There is a
Ron snow or ice-covered
risk of an accident.
roads
Wait until the transfer case shift process is
Rif you have mounted
completed.
snow chains to your
Do not turn off the engine while changing gear vehicle
and do not shift the automatic transmission
to another position. The LOW RANGE off-road gear assists you in
driving off-road and when fording. When LOW
RANGE is engaged, the engine’s performance
characteristics and the gearshifting charac-
teristics of the automatic transmission are
adapted for this purpose.
Further information about "Driving off-road"
(Y page 199). You will find information about
driving safety systems in conjunction with
Z
262 Driving systems

LOW RANGE in the "Safety" section

(Y page 68).
From HIGH RANGE to LOW RANGE
! Only change from LOW RANGE to HIGH
RANGE if:
Driving and parking

Rthe engine is running.

Rthe transmission is in position N
Ryou are driving at a speed below
40 km/h
X Press LOW RANGE button :.
Indicator lamp ; flashes.
When the gear change is complete, indica-
tor lamp ; lights up. LOW RANGE indica-
tor appears in the multifunction display and
in the status indicator.
While indicator lamp ; is flashing, you can
cancel the gear change by pressing LOW
RANGE button : again.
i You cannot activate LOW RANGE if the
SPORT on-road program is activated. The
LOW RANGE Not in Drive Program
SPORT message then appears in the multi-
function display.
From LOW RANGE to HIGH RANGE
! Only change from LOW RANGE to HIGH
RANGE if:
Rtheengine is running.
Rthetransmission is in position N
Ryou are driving at a speed below
70 km/h
X Press LOW RANGE button :.
Indicator lamp ; flashes.
When the gear change is complete, indica-
tor lamp ; goes out. In the multifunction
display, the LOW RANGE Off message
appears and status indicator = goes out.
While indicator lamp ; is flashing, you can
cancel the gear change by pressing LOW
RANGE button : again.
 Driving systems 263

Messages in the multifunction display

If a gear change process has not been successful, the following messages may be displayed in
the multifunction display:
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Driving and parking

LOW RANGE Max. You have been driving faster than 40 km/h. Additionally, the indi-
Speed 40 km/h cator lamp on the button in the center console blinks.
X Drive more slowly to carry out the gear change process.

LOW RANGE Shift to The transmission is in position D and you are driving at below
Position N Briefly 40 km/h.
X Shift the transmission to N to complete the gear change proc-
ess.

LOW RANGE Shifting The gear change process was not carried out.
Canceled Please X Ensure that all gear change conditions are fulfilled and carry out
Reactivate the gear change process again.

LOW RANGE Stop A warning tone also sounds. The gear change process has not been
Apply Parking Brake completed. LOW RANGE is in the neutral position. There is no
connection between the engine and the drive wheels.
! Do not drive any further. You could otherwise damage the
vehicle's drive train.
X Stop the vehicle. Take into account the road and traffic condi-
tions when doing this.
X Depress the electric parking brake (Y page 192).
X Carry out the gear change process again.
If the gear change process has been carried out, the LOW RANGE
Stop Apply Parking Brake message disappears.

ON&OFFROAD menu in the COMAND You can display some driving systems, driving
display (vehicles with the ON&OFF- programs and additional information in the
ROAD package) COMAND display.
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
2 in the ignition lock.
X Make sure that COMAND is activated, see
the separate COMAND operating instruc-
tions.
X Press function button :.
The corresponding displays appear in the
COMAND display:
Rlevel control
Rsteering angle
Rvehicle's angle of inclination

Z
264 Towing a trailer

Ruphillor downhill gradient in percentage cause the braking system to fail. There is a
Ron-road/off-road program selected risk of an accident.
Rcondition of the differential lock for the Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never
transfer case depress the brake pedal and the accelerator
Rthe LOW RANGE off-road gear is selected pedal at the same time.
Driving and parking

Rcondition of the LOW RANGE off-road

gear G WARNING
Rthe on-road trailer program is selected When the vehicle/trailer combination begins
to lurch, you could lose control of it. The vehi-
cle/trailer combination could even rollover.
There is a risk of an accident.
Towing a trailer
On no account should you attempt to
Important safety notes straighten up the vehicle/trailer combination
by increasing the speed. Reduce vehicle
G WARNING speed and do not countersteer. Apply the
Installing an unsuitable ball coupling may brake as necessary.
result in overloading of the trailer tow hitch
and the rear axle. This applies especially if the ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly
ball coupling in question is longer or angled results in excessive and premature wear to
differently. This could seriously impair the the brake pads.
driving characteristics and the trailer can
Please observe the manufacturer's operating
come loose. There is a risk of an accident.
instructions for the trailer coupling if a
You should only ever install a ball coupling detachable trailer coupling is used.
that has the permissible dimensions and that
Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If
is designed to meet your trailer-towing
you do not couple the trailer to the towing
requirements. Do not modify the ball coupling
vehicle correctly, the trailer could become
or the trailer tow hitch.
detached.
You will find the values approved by the man- Make sure that the following values are not
ufacturer on the vehicle identification plates exceeded:
and those for the towing vehicle under "Tech- Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweight
nical data" (Y page 459). Rthe permissible trailer load
G WARNING Rthe permissible rear axle load of the towing

If the ball coupling is not installed correctly or vehicle

not secured with the bolt provided and the Rthe maximum permissible gross vehicle
corresponding spring cotter, the trailer may weight of both the towing vehicle and the
come loose. There is a risk of an accident. trailer
Always install and secure the ball coupling as The applicable permissible values, which
described. Before every journey, ensure that must not be exceeded, can be found:
the ball coupling is secured with the bolt and Rin the vehicle documents
the corresponding spring cotter.
Ron the identification plates for the trailer
tow hitch and the trailer
G WARNING
Ron the vehicle identification plate
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, the braking system can overheat. This If the values differ, the lowest value applies.
increases the stopping distance and can even
 Towing a trailer 265

When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling for a maximum load; see the tire pressure
characteristics will be different in comparison table in the fuel filler flap (Y page 427).
with when driving without a trailer. Please note that when towing a trailer, PARK-
The vehicle/trailer combination: TRONIC (Y page 225) and Blind Spot Assist
Ris heavier (Y page 245) are only available with limita-

Driving and parking

Ris restricted in its acceleration and gradi- tions, or not at all.
ent-climbing capability You will find installing dimensions and loads
Rhas an increased braking distance under "Technical data" (Y page 458).
Ris affected more by strong crosswinds
Driving tips
Rdemands more sensitive steering
Rhas a larger turning radius i Observe the information on ESP® trailer
This could impair the handling characteris- stabilization (Y page 75) and on pulling
tics. away with a trailer (Y page 171).
When towing a trailer, always adjust your The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/
speed to the current road and weather con- trailer combinations depends on the type of
ditions. Do not exceed the maximum permis- trailer. Before beginning the journey, check
sible speed for your vehicle/trailer combina- the trailer's documents to see what the max-
tion. imum permissible speed is. Observe the
legally prescribed maximum speed in the rel-
evant country.
Notes on towing a trailer For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, the max-
imum permissible rear axle load is increased
General notes when towing a trailer. See "Technical data" to
RDo not exceed the legally prescribed max- find out whether this applies to your vehicle
imum speed for vehicle/trailer combina- (Y page 459). If you utilize any of the added
tions in the relevant country. maximum rear axle load when towing a trailer,
This lowers the risk of an accident. the vehicle/trailer combination may not
exceed a maximum speed of 60 mph
ROnly install an approved trailer coupling on
(100 km/h) for reasons concerning the oper-
your vehicle.
ating permit. This also applies in countries in
Further information on availability and on which the permissible maximum speed for
installation is available from any authorized vehicle/trailer combinations is above 60 mph
Mercedes-Benz Center. (100 km/h).
RThe bumpers of your vehicle are not suita-
When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling
ble for installing detachable trailer cou- characteristics will be different in comparison
plings. with when driving without a trailer.
RDo not install hired trailer couplings or
Use the left-hand paddle shifter to shift into a
other detachable trailer couplings on the lower gear in good time on long and steep
bumpers of your vehicle. downhill gradients.
RIf you no longer need the ball coupling,
remove it from the ball coupling recess. i This also applies if you have activated
This will reduce the risk of damage to the cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS.
ball coupling. This will use the braking effect of the engine,
so that less braking will be required to main-
i When towing a trailer, set the tire pres- tain the speed. This relieves the load on the
sure on the rear axle of the towing vehicle
brake system and prevents the brakes from
Z
266 Towing a trailer

overheating and wearing too quickly. If you G WARNING

need additional braking, depress the brake If the ball coupling is not installed and secured
pedal repeatedly rather than continuously. correctly the trailer may come loose. There is
a risk of an accident.
Driving tips
Install and secure the ball coupling as descri-
Driving and parking

If the trailer swings from side to side: bed in the ball coupling installation instruc-
tions. Make sure that the ball coupling is
X Do not accelerate.
installed and secured correctly before every
X Do not counter-steer. journey.
X Brake if necessary.

RMaintain a greater distance from the vehi-

cle in front than when driving without a
trailer.
RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake
gently at first to allow the trailer to run on.
Then, increase the braking force rapidly.
RThe values given for gradient-climbing
capabilities from a standstill refer to sea
level. When driving in mountainous areas,
note that the power output of the engine
and, consequently, the vehicle's gradient- Cover cap
climbing capability, decreases with X Pull protective cap : in the direction of the
increasing altitude. arrow, out of the ball coupling recess.
X Place protective cap : in the ball coupling

Installing the ball coupling recess.

G WARNING
If the ball coupling is not correctly installed
and secured, it can come loose during the
journey and endanger other road users. There
is a risk of an accident and injury.
Always install and secure the ball coupling as
described. Before every journey, ensure that
the ball coupling is secured with the bolt and
the corresponding spring cotter.

G WARNING
If the ball coupling is not installed correctly or
not secured with the bolt provided and the
corresponding spring cotter, the trailer may
come loose. There is a risk of an accident.
Always install and secure the ball coupling as
described. Before every journey, ensure that
the ball coupling is secured with the bolt and
the corresponding spring cotter.
 Towing a trailer 267

Driving and parking

Ball coupling recess Bolt and spring cotter
X Secure the bolt using spring cotter B.

Holes in the ball coupling and ball coupling recess

X Insert the ball coupling horizontally into ball Correctly installed and secured ball coupling
coupling recess ; in the direction of the X Check the ball coupling, bolt and spring
arrow until the holes in ball coupling = are cotter for correct installation.
in line with the holes in ball coupling
recess ?. If the ball coupling cannot be correctly moun-
ted, remove the ball coupling. Under these
circumstances, the ball coupling must not be
used for trailer towing.
If the ball coupling cannot be locked and the
key cannot be removed, remove the ball cou-
pling and clean it. If the ball coupling can still
not be installed (locked) after it has been
cleaned, remove the ball coupling. The trailer
tow hitch must then not be used to tow a
trailer, as safe operation cannot be guaran-
teed.
Bolt Have the entire trailer tow hitch checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
X Slide bolt A into the hole in the ball cou-
pling recess and the ball coupling to the
stop. Coupling up a trailer
! Do not connect the trailer's brake system
(if featured) to the hydraulic brake system

Z
268 Towing a trailer

of the towing vehicle, as the latter is equip- Leave enough play in the chains to make
ped with an anti-lock brake system. Doing tight cornering possible.
so will result in a loss of function of the RA separate brake system for certain types
brake systems of both the vehicle and the of trailer.
trailer. RA safety switch for braked trailers. Check
Driving and parking

X Make sure that the automatic transmission the specific legal requirements applicable
is set to position P. to your state.
X Apply the vehicle's electric parking brake. If the trailer detaches from the towing vehi-
X Start the engine. cle, the safety switch applies the trailer's
X Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package:
brakes.
select highway level.
X Vehicles with ADS: set ADS to AUTO or
Towing a trailer
COMF.
X Switch off the engine.
There are numerous legal requirements con-
cerning the towing of a trailer, e.g. speed
X Close all doors and the tailgate.
restrictions. Make sure that your car/trailer
X Couple up the trailer. combination complies with the local regula-
X Establish all electrical connections. tions:
X Check that the trailer lighting system is Rin your place of residence
working. Rin the location to which you are driving
i Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: The police and local authorities can provide
with a trailer attached, the vehicle will reliable information.
always remain at highway level. When cou- Observe the following when towing a trailer:
pling up a trailer, please observe the fol- RTo gain driving experience and to become
lowing:
accustomed to the new handling charac-
RUnless highway level has been set man-
teristics, you should practice the following
ually, the vehicle is automatically low- in a traffic-free location:
ered to highway level. This is the case if a - cornering
speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) is reached.
- stopping
RHigh-speed level is not available.
- backing up
These restrictions apply to all accessories
RBefore driving, check:
powered through a connection to the trailer
power socket of your vehicle, e.g. a bicycle - trailer tow hitch
carrier. - safety switch for braked trailers

Observe the maximum permissible trailer - safety chains

dimensions (width and length). - electrical connections
Most U.S. states and all Canadian provinces - lights
require by law: - wheels
RSafety chains between the towing vehicle RAdjust the exterior mirrors to provide an
and the trailer. The chains should be cross- unobstructed view of the rear section of the
wound under the trailer drawbar. They must trailer.
be fastened to the vehicle's trailer cou- RIf the trailer has electronically controlled
pling, not to the bumper or the axle. brakes, pull away carefully. Brake manually
 Towing a trailer 269

using the brake controller and check ventilation blower and the interior temper-
whether the brakes function correctly. ature to the highest level.
RSecure any objects on the trailer to prevent RWhen overtaking, pay particular attention
the cargo from slipping when the vehicle is to the extended length of your vehicle/
in motion. trailer combination.

Driving and parking

RWhen you couple up a trailer, check at reg- Due to the length of the vehicle/trailer
ular intervals that the load is firmly secured. combination, you require additional road
If the trailer is equipped with trailer lights space in relation to the vehicle you are
and brakes, check the trailer to ensure that overtaking before you can change back to
these are working. the original lane.
RBear in mind that the handling will be less
stable when towing a trailer than when driv-
ing without one. Avoid sudden steering Decoupling a trailer
movements.
G WARNING
RThe vehicle/trailer combination is heavier,
If you uncouple a trailer with the overrun
accelerates more slowly, has a decreased
brake engaged, you could trap your hand
gradient climbing capability and a longer
between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar.
braking distance.
There is a risk of injury.
It is more susceptible to side winds and
Do not uncouple a trailer if the overrun brake
requires more careful steering.
is engaged.
RIf possible, do not brake suddenly, but
instead depress the brake pedal moder- G WARNING
ately at first so that the trailer can activate
Vehicles with level control:
its brakes. Then increase the pressure on
the brake pedal. The vehicle is lowered as soon as you discon-
nect the trailer cable. This could result in your
RIf the automatic transmission repeatedly
limbs or those of other people that are
shifts between gears on uphill or downhill
between the vehicle body and tires or under-
gradients, shift to a lower gear using the
neath the vehicle being trapped. There is a
left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter.
risk of injury.
A lower gear and lower speed reduce the
Make sure that nobody is in the immediate
risk of engine failure.
vicinity of the wheel housings or under the
RWhen driving downhill, shift to a lower gear
vehicle when you disconnect the trailer cable.
to utilize the engine's braking effect.
Avoid continuous brake application as this ! Do not disconnect a trailer with an
may overheat the vehicle brakes and, if engaged overrun brake. Otherwise, your
installed, the trailer brakes. vehicle could be damaged by the rebound-
RIf the coolant temperature increases dra- ing of the overrun brake.
matically while the air-conditioning system X Make sure that the automatic transmission
is switched on, switch off the air-condition- is set to position P.
ing system. X Apply the vehicle's electric parking brake.
Coolant heat can also be dissipated by X Start the engine.
opening the windows and switching the
X Close all doors and the tailgate.
X Apply the trailer's parking brake.

Z
270 Towing a trailer

X Detach the trailer cable and decouple the accounts for 8% to 15% of the trailer's per-
trailer. missible gross weight.
X Switch off the engine.
i The weight of additional accessories, pas-
sengers, and cargo reduces the permissi-
ble trailer load and drawbar load for your
Driving and parking

Permissible trailer loads and drawbar vehicle.

loads
Weight specifications Checking the vehicle and trailer weight
RTo check that the weights of the towing
Maximum permissible gross vehicle vehicle and the trailer comply with the max-
weight rating imum permissible values, have the vehicle/
The gross trailer weight is calculated by add- trailer combination (including the driver,
ing the weight of the trailer to the weight of passengers, and cargo with a fully laden
the load and equipment on the trailer. trailer) weighed on a calibrated weigh-
You will find installing dimensions and loads bridge.
under "Technical data" (Y page 458). RCheck the gross axle weight rating of the
front and rear axles, the gross weight of the
Permissible noseweight
trailer and trailer drawbar load.
You will find installing dimensions and loads
under "Technical data" (Y page 458).
Removing the ball coupling
Loading a trailer
X Remove the spring cotter.
RWhen loading the trailer, make sure that X Remove the bolt from the ball coupling
neither the permissible gross weight of the recess.
trailer nor the gross vehicle weight is
X Remove the ball coupling from the ball cou-
exceeded. The permissible gross vehicle
pling recess.
weight is indicated on the identification
X Clean the ball coupling if it is dirty.
plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side of
the vehicle. X Stow the ball coupling so that it cannot be

You can find the maximum permissible val- thrown around.

ues on the type plates of your vehicle and Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 342)
the trailer. When calculating how much and the safety notes regarding stowage
weight the vehicle and trailer may carry, spaces (Y page 343).
pay attention to the respective lowest val- Information on cleaning and care of the trailer
ues. tow hitch can be found at (Y page 382).
RThe trailer drawbar load on the ball coupling
must be added to the rear axle load to avoid
exceeding the permissible gross axle Storing the ball coupling
weight. The permissible gross vehicle
weight is indicated on the identification G WARNING
plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side of Do not carry the ball coupling in the vehicle
the vehicle. interior if it is not secured.
Otherwise, you and others could be injured by
i Mercedes-Benz recommends a trailer
the ball coupling being thrown around if you:
load where the trailer drawbar noseweight
 Towing a trailer 271

Rbrake sharply
Rchange direction suddenly
Rare involved in an accident

Driving and parking

Trailer power supply
! You can connect accessories with a max-
imum power consumption of 240 W to the
permanent power supply.
You must not charge a trailer battery using
the power supply.
The trailer socket of your vehicle is equipped
at the factory with a permanent power supply.
The permanent power supply is supplied via
trailer socket pin 4.
The trailer's permanent power supply is
switched off in the event of low vehicle supply
voltage and after six hours at the latest.
A qualified specialist workshop can provide
more information about installing the trailer
electrics.

Z
272
 273

Useful information ............................ 274

On-board computer and displays

Important safety notes .................... 274
Displays and operation .................... 274
Menus and submenus ...................... 277
Display messages ............................. 292
Warning and indicator lamps in the
instrument cluster ............................ 327
274 Displays and operation

Useful information times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is not oper-

On-board computer and displays

ating safely may cause an accident.

i This Operator's Manual describes all For an overview, see the instrument panel
models and all standard and optional equip- illustration (Y page 35).
ment of your vehicle available at the time of
publication of the Operator's Manual.
Country-specific differences are possible. Displays and operation
Please note that your vehicle may not be
Instrument cluster lighting
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the
functions. displays and the controls in the vehicle inte-
rior can be adjusted using the brightness con-
i Read the information on qualified special-
trol knob.
ist workshops (Y page 29).
The brightness control knob is located on the
bottom left of the instrument cluster
Important safety notes (Y page 35).
X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise
G WARNING or counter-clockwise.
If you operate information systems and com- If the light switch is set to Ã, T or
munication equipment integrated in the vehi- L, the brightness is dependent upon
cle while driving, you will be distracted from the brightness of the ambient light.
traffic conditions. You could also lose control i The light sensor in the instrument cluster
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. automatically controls the brightness of
Only operate the equipment when the traffic the multifunction display.
situation permits. If you are not sure that this In daylight, the displays in the instrument
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention cluster are not illuminated.
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
Coolant temperature display
G WARNING
If the instrument cluster has failed or mal- G WARNING
functioned, you may not recognize function Opening the hood when the engine is over-
restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The heated or when there is a fire in the engine
operating safety of your vehicle may be compartment could expose you to hot gases
impaired. There is a risk of an accident. or other service products. There is a risk of
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked injury.
at a qualified specialist workshop immedi- Let an overheated engine cool down before
ately. opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
You must observe the legal requirements for and contact the fire department.
the country in which you are currently driving
when operating the on-board computer. ! A display message is shown if the coolant
The on-board computer only shows messages temperature is too high.
or warnings from certain systems in the mul- If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡
tifunction display. You should therefore make (120 †), do not continue driving. The
sure your vehicle is operating safely at all engine will otherwise be damaged.
 Displays and operation 275

The coolant temperature gauge is in the Operating the on-board computer

On-board computer and displays

instrument cluster on the right-hand side
(Y page 35). Overview
Under normal operating conditions and with
the specified coolant level, the coolant tem-
perature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

Tachometer
! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as
this could damage the engine.
The red band in the tachometer indicates the
engine's overrevving range.
The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
engine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature display

: Multifunction display
You should pay special attention to road con-
ditions when temperatures are around freez- ; Switches on the Voice Control System;
ing point. see the separate operating instructions
Bear in mind that the outside temperature = Right control panel
display indicates the temperature measured ? Left control panel
and does not record the road temperature. A Back button
The outside temperature display is in the mul- X To activate the on-board computer: turn
tifunction display (Y page 276). the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition
Changes in the outside temperature are dis- lock.
played after a short delay. You can control the multifunction display and
the settings in the on-board computer using
the buttons on the multifunction steering
Speedometer with segments
wheel.
The segments in the speedometer indicate
which speed range is available.
RCruise control activated (Y page 203):
The segments light up from the stored
speed to the maximum speed.
RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 206):
One or two segments in the set speed
range light up.
RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:
The segments between the speed of the
vehicle in front and the stored speed light
up.

Z
276 Displays and operation

Left control panel W RAdjusts the volume

On-board computer and displays

X
= RCalls up the menu and menu bar
; 8 RMute

9 Press briefly:
Back button
: RScrolls in lists
RSelects a submenu or function % Press briefly:
RIn the Audio menu: selects a RBack
stored station, an audio track or RSwitches off the Voice Control
a video scene System; see the separate oper-
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: ating instructions
switches to the phone book and RHides display messages/calls
selects a name or telephone up the last Trip menu function
number used
9 Press and hold: RExits the telephone book/redial

: RIn
memory
the Audio menu: selects the
previous/next station or selects % Press and hold:
an audio track or a video scene RCalls up the standard display in
using rapid scrolling
the Trip menu
RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:
starts rapid scrolling if the phone
book is open Multifunction display
a RConfirms a selection/display
message
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu:
switches to the telephone book
and starts dialing the selected
number
RIn the Audio menu: stops the
station search function at the
desired station

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a call

RExits phone book/redial mem-
ory
6 RMakes or accepts a call : Time
RSwitches to the redial memory ; Permanent display: outside temperature
or speed (Y page 285)
= Text field
? Menu bar
 Menus and submenus 277

A Drive program (Y page 176) RDriveAssist menu (assistance)

On-board computer and displays

B Transmission position (Y page 176) (Y page 283)
RServ menu (Y page 284)
X To show menu bar ?: press the =
RSett menu (settings) (Y page 285)
or ; button on the steering wheel.
RON&OFFROAD menu (Y page 289)
Menu bar ? disappears after a few seconds.
RAMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 289)
Text field = shows the selected menu or
submenu as well as display messages.
i You can set the time using the audio sys- Trip menu
tem or COMAND; see the separate operat-
ing instructions. Standard display
The following messages may appear in the
multifunction display:
Z Gearshift recommendation, when
shifting manually (Y page 181)
XjY Active Parking Assist
(Y page 228)
CRUISE Cruise control (Y page 203) X Press and hold the % button on the
LOW LOW RANGE off-road gear steering wheel until the Trip menu with
RANGE (Y page 261) trip odometer : and odometer ; is
_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist shown.
(Y page 134)
¤ ECO start/stop function Trip computer "From Start" or "From
(Y page 171) Reset"
ë HOLD function (Y page 218)

Menus and submenus

Menu overview
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to call up the menu bar and select a Example: trip computer "From Start"
menu. : Distance
Operating the on-board computer ; Time
(Y page 275). = Average speed
Depending on the equipment installed in the ? Average fuel consumption
vehicle, you can call up the following menus: X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
RTrip menu (Y page 277) ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
RNavi menu (navigation instructions) X Press 9 or : to select From Start
(Y page 279) or From Reset.
Reset
RAudio menu (Y page 280) The values in the From Start submenu are
RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 281) calculated from the start of a journey, while
the values in the From Reset submenu are

Z
278 Menus and submenus

calculated from the last time the submenu X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
On-board computer and displays

was reset (Y page 278). ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
The From Start trip computer is automati- X Press the 9 or : button to select the
cally reset when: approximate range and the current fuel
Rthe ignition has been switched off for more consumption (not for AMG vehicles).
than four hours. The approximate range that can be covered
R999 hours have been exceeded. depends on the fuel level and your current
R9,999 miles have been exceeded. driving style. If there is only a small amount of
The From Reset trip computer is automati- fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows a
cally reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or vehicle being refueled C instead of the
99,999 miles. range.

ECO display Digital speedometer

: Shift recommendation (Y page 181)

Example: ECO display
; Digital speedometer
The ECO display is not available for AMG vehi-
cles. Gearshift recommendation : is not given on
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
AMG vehicles.
ing wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the = or ; button on the steer-

X Select ECO DISPLAY with 9 or :. ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
If the ignition remains switched off for longer
digital speedometer.
than four hours, the ECO display will be auto-
matically reset.
Resetting values
For further information on the ECO display,
see (Y page 195).

Displaying the range and current fuel

consumption

Example: resetting the trip computer "From Start"

X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
function that you wish to reset.
 Menus and submenus 279

X Press the a button. Route guidance active

On-board computer and displays

X Press the : button to select Yes and
No change of direction announced
press the a button to confirm.
You can reset the values of the following func-
tions:
RTripodometer
R"From Start" trip computer
R"From Reset" trip computer
RECO display
: Distance to the destination
i If you reset the values in the ECO display, ; Distance to the next change of direction
the values in the "From start" trip computer = Current road
are also reset. If you reset the values in the
? "Follow the road's course" symbol
"From start" trip computer, the values in
the ECO display are also reset. Change of direction announced without a
lane recommendation

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructions
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display
shows navigation instructions.
For more information, see the separate oper-
ating instructions. : Road into which the change of direction
X Switch on the audio system with Becker® leads
MAP PILOT or COMAND; see the separate ; Distance to change of direction and visual
operating instructions. distance display
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- = Change-of-direction symbol
ing wheel to select the Navi menu. When a change of direction is announced, you
will see symbol = for the change of direction
Route guidance not active and distance graphic ;. The distance indi-
cator shortens towards the top of the display
as you approach the point of the announced
change of direction.

: Direction of travel
; Current road

Z
280 Menus and submenus

Change of direction announced with a Audio menu

On-board computer and displays

lane recommendation
Selecting a radio station

: Road into which the change of direction

leads : Waveband
; Distance to change of direction and visual ; Station frequency with memory position
distance display i Station ; is displayed with the station
= Recommended lane and new lane during a frequency or station name. The memory
change of direction position is only displayed along with sta-
? Lanes not recommended tion ; if this has been stored.
A Recommended lane X Switch on COMAND and select Radio; see
B Change-of-direction symbol the separate operating instructions.
On multilane roads, new lane recommenda- X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
tions can be displayed for the next change of ing wheel to select the Audio menu.
direction if the digital map supports this data. X To select a stored station: briefly press
During the change of direction, new lanes the 9 or : button.
may be added. X To select a station from the station list:
Recommended lane and new lane during a press and briefly hold the 9 or :
change of direction =: in this lane you will be button.
able to complete the next two changes of
If no station list is received:
direction without changing lane.
X To select a station using the station
Lane not recommended ?: you will not be
search: press and briefly hold the 9
able to complete the next change of direction
or : button.
if you stay in this lane.
Recommended lane A: in this lane you will i For information on switching waveband
only be able to complete the next change of and storing stations; see the separate oper-
direction without changing lane. ating instructions.
i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a
Other status indicators of the naviga- normal radio.
tion system
For more information on satellite radio
RO: you have reached the destination or an operation, see the separate operating
intermediate destination. instructions.
RNew Route... or Calculating Route:Route
calculating a new route.
ROff Map or Off Mapped Road Road: the vehicle
position is outside the area of the digital
map (off-map position).
RNo Route:
Route no route could be calculated to
the selected destination.
 Menus and submenus 281

Operating an audio player or audio X Switch on COMAND and select video DVD;

On-board computer and displays

media see the separate operating instructions.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Audio menu.
X To select the next/previous scene:
briefly press the 9 or : button.
X To select a scene from the scene list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9
or : button until desired scene : has
Audio data from various audio devices or been reached.
media can be played, depending on the equip-
ment installed in the vehicle.
X Switch on COMAND Online and select Telephone menu
audio CD or MP3 mode, see the separate Introduction
operating instructions.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- G WARNING
ing wheel to select the Audio menu. If you operate information systems and com-
X To select the next/previous track: munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
briefly press the 9 or : button. cle while driving, you will be distracted from
X To select a track from the track list traffic conditions. You could also lose control
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
or : button until the desired track has Only operate the equipment when the traffic
been reached :. situation permits. If you are not sure that this
If you press and hold 9 or :, the is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
audio drives or data carriers support this ment when the vehicle is stationary.
function.
When telephoning, you must observe the
If track information is stored on the audio legal requirements for the country in which
device or medium, the multifunction display you are currently driving.
will show the number and title of the track. X Switch on the mobile phone (see the sep-
The current track does not appear in audio arate operating instructions).
AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external
X Switch on COMAND (see the separate
audio source connected).
operating instructions).
X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to
Video DVD operation
COMAND; see the separate operating
instructions.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Tel menu.

Example: CD/DVD changer display

Z
282 Menus and submenus

You will see one of the following display mes- X Press the 9 or : button to select the
On-board computer and displays

sages in the multifunction display: desired name.

RPhone READY or the name of the network or
provider: the mobile phone has found a X To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold
network and is ready to receive. the 9 or : button for longer than
RPhone No Service:
Service there is no network one second.
available or the mobile phone is searching Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
for a network. button or reach the end of the list.
X If only one telephone number is stored
Accepting a call for a name: press the 6 or a button
to start dialing.
or
X If there is more than one number for a
particular name: press the 6 or a
button to display the numbers.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
number you want to dial.
Example: incoming call X Press the 6 or a button to start dial-
If someone calls you when you are in the Tel ing.
menu, a display message appears in the mul- or
tifunction display. X To exit the telephone book: press the
X Press the 6 button on the steering ~ or % button.
wheel to accept an incoming call.
You can accept a call even if you are not in the Redialing
Tel menu.
The on-board computer saves the last names
or numbers dialed in the redial memory.
Rejecting or ending a call
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
X Press the ~ button on the steering ing wheel to select the Tel menu.
wheel. X Press the 6 button to switch to the
You can end or reject a call even if you are not redial memory.
in the Tel menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the
desired name or number.
Dialing a number from the phone book X Press the 6 or a button to start dial-
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- ing.
ing wheel to select the Tel menu. or
X Press the 9, : or a button to X To exit the redial memory: press the
switch to the phone book. ~ or % button.
 Menus and submenus 283

Assistance menu X Press the = or ; button on the steer-

On-board computer and displays

ing wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
Introduction X Press 9 or : to select Assistance
Graphic.
Graphic
X Press the a button.
The multifunction display shows the DIS-
TRONIC PLUS distance display in the assis-
tance graphic.
The assistance graphic displays the status of
and information from the following driving
In the DriveAssist menu, you have the fol- systems or driving safety systems:
lowing options: RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 241)
RDisplaying the assistance graphic
RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 213)
(Y page 283)
RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 247) or Active
RActivating/deactivating the distance warn-
Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 252)
ing function (Y page 283)
RDistance warning function (Y page 70)
RActivating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake
RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 76)
(Y page 284)
RDSR (Y page 258)
RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION
ASSIST (Y page 284) ROff-road program (vehicles with the

RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist ON&OFFROAD package) (Y page 259)

or Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 284)
RActivating/deactivating Lane Keeping
Activating/deactivating the distance
warning function
Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist
(Y page 284) X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
Displaying the assistance graphic X Press 9 or : to select Distance
Warning.
Warning
X Press the a button.
The current selection is displayed.
X To activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
When the distance warning function is
deactivated, the assistance graphic shows
the æ symbol in the multifunction dis-
play.
Further information on the distance warning
function (Y page 70).

Z
284 Menus and submenus

Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® X Press the a button.

On-board computer and displays

Brake The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press the a
PRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles
button again.
with DISTRONIC PLUS.
For further information about Active Blind
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
Spot Assist, see (Y page 249).
to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping
PRE-SAFE Brake.
Brake Assist
X Press the a button.
The current selection is displayed. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
X To activate/deactivate: press the a
to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press 9 or : to select Lane Keep‐
button again.
When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, the ing Assist.
Assist
assistance graphic shows the æ symbol X Press the a button.
in the multifunction display. The current selection is displayed.
X Press a to confirm.
For more information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake,
X Press the : or 9 button to set Off Off,
see (Y page 76).
Standard or Adaptive
Adaptive.
Activating/deactivating ATTENTION When Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane
ASSIST Keeping Assist is activated, the multifunc-
tion display shows the lane markings as
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- bright lines in the assistance graphic.
ing wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press the a button to save the setting.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
For further information about Lane Keeping
ATTENTION ASSIST.
ASSIST
Assist, see (Y page 247).
X Press the a button.
For further information about Active Lane
The current selection is displayed.
Keeping Assist, see (Y page 252).
X To activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, Maintenance menu
the é symbol appears in the multifunc-
tion display in the assistance graphics dis-
play.
For further information about ATTENTION
ASSIST, see (Y page 241).

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot

Assist In the Serv menu, you have the following
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel options:
to select the DriveAssist menu. RCalling up display messages in message
X Press the 9 or : button to select memory (Y page 292)
Blind Spot Assist.
Assist RRestarting the tire pressure loss warning
system (Y page 414)
 Menus and submenus 285

RChecking the tire pressure electronically X Press the : or 9 button to select the

On-board computer and displays

(Y page 414) Display Unit Speed-/Odometer func-
RCalling up the service due date tion.
(Y page 377) You will see the selected setting: km or
miles.
miles
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Settings menu The selected unit of measurement for dis-
Introduction tance applies to:
RDigitalspeedometer in the Trip menu
ROdometer and the trip odometer
RTrip computer
RCurrent consumption and the range
RNavigation messages in the Navi menu
RCruise control
RDISTRONIC PLUS
In the Sett. menu, you have the following
RASSYST PLUS service interval display
options:
RChanging the instrument cluster settings Selecting the permanent display function
(Y page 285) You can determine whether the multifunction
RChanging the light settings (Y page 285) display permanently shows your speed or the
RChanging the vehicle settings outside temperature.
(Y page 287) X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
RChanging the convenience settings ing wheel to select the Sett menu.
(Y page 287) X Press the : or 9 button to select the
RRestoring the factory settings Instrument Cluster submenu.
(Y page 289) X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Instrument cluster submenu
Permanent Display: function.
Selecting the unit of measurement for dis- You will see the selected setting Outside
tance Temperature or Speedometer [mph]/ [mph]
Speedometer [km/h].
[km/h]
The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:
X Press the a button to save the setting.
function allows you to choose whether cer-
tain displays appear in kilometers or miles in i The speed is highlighted in km/h or in
the multifunction display. mph conversely to your speedometer.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. Light submenu
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Instrument Cluster submenu. Setting the daytime running lamps
X Press a to confirm. i This function is not available in Canada.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Light submenu.

Z
286 Menus and submenus

X Press a to confirm. Surround lighting and exterior lighting

On-board computer and displays

X Press : or 9 to select the Daytime delayed switch-off

Running Lights function. X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
If the Daytime Running Lights function ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.
has been switched on, the cone of light and X Press the : or 9 button to select the
the W symbol in the multifunction dis- Lights submenu.
play are shown in orange. X Press a to confirm.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
X Press : or 9 to select the Sur‐
Further information on daytime running round Lighting function.
lamps (Y page 128). When the Surround Lighting function is
activated, the light cone and the area
Setting the brightness of the ambient around the vehicle are displayed in orange
lighting in the multifunction display.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
X Press the a button to save the setting.
ing wheel to select the Sett menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exte-
Light submenu. rior lighting temporarily:
X Press a to confirm. X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the Smart-
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Key to position 0 in the ignition lock.
Amb. Light +/-. function. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
You will see the selected setting. tion lock.
X Press a to confirm. The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is
X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the
deactivated.
brightness to any level from Off to Level 5 Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is
(bright). reactivated the next time you start the
X Press the a or % button to save the engine.
setting. If you have activated the Surround Light‐
ing function and the light switch is set to
Setting the ambient lighting color Ã, the following functions are activated
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- when it is dark:
ing wheel to select the Sett. menu. Rsurround lighting: the exterior lighting
X Press the : or 9 button to select the remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking
Lights submenu. with the SmartKey. If you start the engine,
X Press a to confirm. the surround lighting is switched off and
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
automatic headlamp mode is activated
(Y page 128).
Ambient Light Color function.
Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: the
X Press a to confirm.
exterior lighting remains lit for 60 seconds
X Press the : or 9 button to set the
after the engine is switched off. If you close
color to SOLAR
SOLAR, NEUTRAL or POLAR
POLAR. all the doors and the tailgate, the exterior
X Press the a or % button to save the lighting goes off after 5 seconds.
setting.
i Depending on your vehicle's equipment,
when the surround lighting and delayed
switch-off exterior lighting are on, the fol-
lowing light up:
 Menus and submenus 287

RParkinglamps Activating/deactivating the acoustic

On-board computer and displays

RDaytime running lamps locking verification signal
RSide marker lamps If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function,
RSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the
vehicle.
Activating/deactivating the interior light- X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing delayed switch-off ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.
If you activate the Interior Lighting X Press : or 9 to select the Vehicle
Delay function, the interior lighting remains submenu.
on for 20 seconds after you remove the X Press a to confirm.
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
Acoustic Lock function.
ing wheel to select the Sett menu. If the Acoustic Lock function is activated,
X Press the : or 9 button to select the the & symbol in the multifunction dis-
Light submenu. play lights up orange.
X Press a to confirm. X Press the a button to save the setting.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Interior Lighting Delay function. Activating/deactivating the radar sensor
If the Interior Lighting Delay function system
has been switched on, the vehicle interior is X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
displayed in orange in the multifunction ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.
display. X Press : or 9 to select the Vehicle
X Press the a button to save the setting. submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
Vehicle submenu X Press the 9 or : button to select
Radar Sensor (See Oper. Manual):.
Manual):
Activating/deactivating the automatic You will see the selected setting: Enabled
door locking mechanism or Disabled
Disabled.
If you activate the Automatic Door Lock X Press the a button to save the setting.
function, the vehicle is centrally locked above
a speed of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h). The following systems are switched off when
the radar sensor system is deactivated:
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett menu. RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 206)
X Press the : or 9 button to select the RBAS PLUS (Y page 69)
Vehicle submenu. RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 76)
X Press a to confirm. RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 245)
X Press the : or 9 button to select the RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 249)
Automatic Door Lock function.
When the Automatic Door Lock function Convenience submenu
is activated, the vehicle doors are displayed
in orange in the multifunction display. Activating/deactivating the EASY-
X Press the a button to save the setting. ENTRY/EXIT feature
For further information on the automatic lock- G WARNING
ing feature, see (Y page 90). When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
the steering wheel, you and other vehicle

Z
288 Menus and submenus

occupants – particularly children – could Switching the fold-in mirrors when lock-
On-board computer and displays

become trapped. There is a risk of injury. ing feature on/off

While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak- This function is only available on vehicles with
ing adjustments, make sure that no one has the memory function (Y page 124).
any body parts in the sweep of the steering When you activate the Auto. Mirror Fold‐
wheel. ing function, the exterior mirrors are folded
If somebody becomes trapped: in when the vehicle is locked. If you unlock the
vehicle and then open a door, the exterior
Rpress one of the memory function position
mirrors fold out again.
buttons, or
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjust-
ment in the opposite direction to that in
ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.
which the steering wheel is moving. X Press the : or 9 button to select the

The adjustment process is stopped.

Convenience submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- X Press : or 9 to select the Auto.
ing wheel to select the Sett menu. Mirror Folding function.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the If the Auto. Mirror Folding function is
Convenience submenu. activated, the vehicle's exterior mirror is
X Press a to confirm. displayed in orange in the multifunction
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
display.
Easy Entry/Exit: function. X Press the a button to save the setting.

If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activa-

ted, the vehicle steering wheel is displayed
in orange in the multifunction display.
X Press the a button to save the setting.

Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT

feature (Y page 121).
Switching the belt adjustment on/off
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
: To fold the exterior mirrors in or out
Convenience submenu.
X Press a to confirm. If you have switched the Auto. Mirror
Folding on and you fold the exterior mirrors
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
in using button : , they will not fold out
Belt Adjustment function.
automatically (Y page 123).
If the Belt Adjustment function is activa-
ted, the vehicle seat belt is shown in orange You can then only fold out the exterior mirrors
in the multifunction display. using button :.
X Press the a button to save the setting.

For further information on belt adjustment,

see (Y page 49).
 Menus and submenus 289

Restoring the factory settings AMG menu in AMG vehicles

On-board computer and displays

X Press the = or ; button on the steer- AMG displays
ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Factory Setting submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
The Reset All Settings? message
appears.
X Press the : or 9 button to select No
or Yes
Yes. : Digital speedometer
X Press a to confirm the selection. ; Gear indicator
If you select Yes
Yes, the multifunction display = Upshift indicator
shows a confirmation message. ? Engine oil temperature
For safety reasons, the Daytime Running A Coolant temperature
Lights function in the Lights submenu is B Transmission fluid temperature
only reset if the vehicle is stationary.
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
to select the AMG menu.
ON&OFFROAD menu Upshift indicator UP = indicates that the
engine has reached the overrevving range
when in the manual gearshift program.
Upshift indicator UP = fades out other mes-
sages until you have shifted up.
If the engine oil temperature is below 176 ‡
(80 †), oil temperature ? is shown in blue.
Avoid driving at full engine output during this
Example: multifunction display time.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- If the transmission fluid temperature is below
ing wheel to select the ON&OFFROAD menu. 122 ‡ (50 †), oil temperature B is shown in
blue. Avoid driving at full engine output during
You can set the current settings to appear in this time.
the ON&OFFROAD menu:
ROn-road program (Y page 255) SETUP
ROff-road program (Y page 259)

: Drive program (C
C/SS/MM)
; ESP® mode (ON
ON/OFF
OFF)
= Suspension tuning (COMFORT
COMFORT/SPORT
SPORT/
SPORT+)
SPORT+

Z
290 Menus and submenus

SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP® X Press the = or ; button to select
On-board computer and displays

(Electronic Stability Program) mode and the Interm. Time.

Time
suspension tuning. X Press a to confirm.
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel The intermediate time is displayed for five
to select the AMG menu. seconds.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until
Starting a new lap
SETUP is displayed.

RACETIMER
Displaying and starting RACETIMER
The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a
closed race circuit. Do not use the function on
public roads. : RACETIMER
; Fastest lap time (best lap)
= Lap
X Press a to confirm New Lap.
Lap
i It is possible to store a maximum of six-
teen laps. The 16th lap can only be com-
pleted with Finish Lap.
Lap
: Lap
; RACETIMER Stopping the RACETIMER
You can start the RACETIMER when the
engine is running or if the SmartKey is in posi-
tion 2 in the ignition lock.
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
to select the AMG menu.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
RACETIMER is shown.
X Press the % button on the steering
X To start: press the a button to start the
wheel.
RACETIMER. X Press a to confirm Yes
Yes.
Displaying the intermediate time The RACETIMER interrupts timing when you
stop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey to
position 1 in the ignition lock. If you turn the
SmartKey to position 2 or 3 and then press
a to confirm StartStart, timing is continued.
Resetting the current lap
X Stop the RACETIMER.
X Press the = or ; button to select
Reset Lap.
Lap
X Press a to reset the lap time to "0".
 Menus and submenus 291

Deleting all laps Lap statistics

On-board computer and displays

If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER is : Lap
reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are ; Lap time
deleted. = Average lap speed
You cannot delete individual stored laps. If ? Lap length
you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap A Top speed during lap
does not have to be reset.
This function is only available if you have
X Reset the current lap.
stored at least two laps and have stopped the
X Press a to confirm Reset Reset. RACETIMER.
Reset Race Timer? appears in the multi-
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
function display.
to select the AMG menu.
X Press the : button to select Yes and
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
press the a button to confirm.
lap evaluation is shown.
All laps are deleted.
Each lap is shown in a separate submenu.
The fastest lap is indicated by flashing sym-
Overall statistics bol :.
X Press the 9 or : button to select a
different lap evaluation.

: RACETIMER overall evaluation

; Total time driven
= Average speed
? Distance covered
A Maximum speed
This function is shown if you have stored at
least one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
to select the AMG menu.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
overall evaluation is shown.

Z
292 Display messages

Display messages
On-board computer and displays

Introduction
General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's
Manual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this
Operator's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:
RHOLD function (Y page 218)
RParking (Y page 190)

Hiding display messages

X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.
The display message is cleared.
The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority dis-
play messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the mes-
sages have been remedied.

Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call
up the display messages:
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages,
Messages for example.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages.
Messages
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.

When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-
priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been
rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.
 Display messages 293

Safety systems

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!÷ ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-

gram), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill
Currently Unavail‐
start assist, crosswind assistance and ESP® trailer stabilization
able See Opera‐
are temporarily unavailable.
tor's Manual
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS and
PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Possible causes are:
RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete.
RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

!÷ ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist,
crosswind assistance and ESP® trailer stabilization are unavailable
Inoperative See due to a malfunction.
Operator's Manual
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS and
PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
The $ (USA only)/J (Canada only), ÷, å and !
warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING

Z
294 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

The brake system continues to function normally, but without the

functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

÷ ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist, cross-
wind assistance and ESP® trailer stabilization are unavailable due
Currently Unavail‐ to a malfunction.
able See Opera‐
tor's Manual COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS and
PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages 295

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

÷ ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist, cross-
wind assistance and ESP® trailer stabilization are unavailable due
Inoperative See to a malfunction.
Operator's Manual
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS and
PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

T! EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-

SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist, crosswind driving
÷ assistance and ESP® trailer stabilization are unavailable due to a
Inoperative See malfunction.
Operator's Manual COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS and
PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Z
296 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

F(USA The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp

flashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic
only)!(Canada release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 192).
only) You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.
Please Release X Release the electric parking brake manually.
Parking Brake
The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp
flashes and a warning tone sounds.
You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking
(Y page 192).

F(USA The yellow ! warning lamp lights up.

The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
only)!(Canada To apply:
only)
X Switch the ignition off.
Parking Brake See
Operator's Manual X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.
X Shift the transmission to P.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USA only)/!

(Canada only) indicator lamp light up.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To release:
X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X Release the electric parking brake manually.
or
X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 192).
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
X Do not drive on.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages 297

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp
flashes and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To release:
X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X Release the electric parking brake manually.
To apply:
X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X Apply the electric parking brake manually.
If the red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp
continues to flash:
X Do not drive on.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 430).
X Shift the transmission to P.
X Turn the front wheels towards the curb.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA

only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten
seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or
released. It then goes out or remains lit.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X Apply the electric parking brake.

If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:

X Shift the transmission to P.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake:
X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 192).
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
298 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or

release the electric parking brake, the red F (USA only)/!
(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to
apply the electric parking brake manually.
X Shift the transmission to P.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

F(USA The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA
only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten
only)!(Canada seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or
only) released. It then goes out or remains lit.
Parking Brake Inop‐ The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over-
erative voltage or undervoltage.
X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by
charging the battery or restarting the engine.
X Engage or release the electric parking brake.

If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking

brake:
X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X Engage or release the electric parking brake.

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USA

only)/ ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.
X Shift the transmission to P.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

F(USA The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights
up.
only)!(Canada You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the igni-
only) tion was switched off.
Turn On the Igni‐ X SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.
tion to Release X KEYLESS-GO: switch on the ignition.
the Parking Brake
 Display messages 299

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

$(USA There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In
addition, the $ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warning lamp
only)J(Canada lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
only) G WARNING
Check Brake Fluid
The braking effect may be impaired.
Level
There is a risk of an accident.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 190).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

# The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Brake Wear

G USA only: one or more of the main functions in the mbrace system
are malfunctioning.
mbrace Inoperative Canada only: one or more of the main functions of the TELEAID
system are malfunctioning.
X USA only: have the mbrace system checked at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
X Canada only: have the TELEAID system checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.

PRE-SAFE Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant

Inoperative See safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.
Operator's Manual X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Z
300 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

PRE-SAFE Vehicles without the Active Driving Assistance package: Adaptive

Functions Cur‐ Brake Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:
rently Limited See Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
Operator's Manual Rthe sensor in the bumper is dirty.
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-
tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-
sage disappears.
Adaptive Brake Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 190).
X Clean the bumpers (Y page 381).
X Restart the engine.
X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP® (Y page 74).
 Display messages 301

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

PRE-SAFE Vehicles with the Active Driving Assistance package:
Functions Cur‐ PRE‑SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:
rently Limited See Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
Operator's Manual Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and the bumper are dirty.
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-
tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-
sage disappears.
PRE‑SAFE® Brake is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 190).
X Clean the sensors in the radiator trim and the bumper
(Y page 381).
X Restart the engine.
X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP® (Y page 74).

PRE-SAFE Vehicles without the Active Driving Assistance package: Adaptive

Functions Limited Brake Assist is faulty. The distance warning function may also have
See Operator's Man‐ failed.
ual Vehicles with the Active Driving Assistance package:
PRE‑SAFE® Brake is faulty. BAS PLUS or the distance warning
function may also have failed.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6 The restraint system is faulty.

The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Restraint Sys. Mal‐
function Service G WARNING
Required The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

For further information about the restraint system, see

(Y page 44).

Z
302 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

6 The restraint system has malfunctioned at the front on the left or

right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-
Front Left Malfunc‐ ter.
tion Service
Required or Front G WARNING
Right Malfunction The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
Service Required gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6 The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or

right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-
Rear Left Malfunc‐ ter.
tion Service
Required or Rear G WARNING
Right Malfunction The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
Service Required gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6 The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear center. The

6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Rear Center Mal‐
function Service G WARNING
Required The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6 There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window cur-

tain air bag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument
Left Side Curtain cluster.
Airbag Malfunction
Service Required G WARNING
or Right Side Cur‐ The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered
tain Airbag Mal‐ unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be trig-
function Service gered.
Required There is an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages 303

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Front Passenger The front-passenger air bag is deactivated during the journey, even
Airbag Disabled though:
See Operator's Man‐ Ran adult
ual or
Ra person larger than a certain size is occupying the front-
passenger seat
If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may inter-
pret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.
G WARNING
The front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 190).
X Switch the ignition off.
X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the
center console and the multifunction display and check the fol-
lowing:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up and
remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has deactivated the
front-passenger air bag (Y page 54).
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper‐
ator's Manual display messages must not be shown in the
multifunction display.
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-
tem checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul-
tifunction display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the
occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-
rectly.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Z
304 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Front Passenger The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, even
Airbag Enabled though:
See Operator's Man‐ Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the sys-
ual tem's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat
or
Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied
The system may detect objects or forces applying additional
weight on the seat.
G WARNING
The air bag may deploy unintentionally.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 190).
X Switch the ignition off.
X Open the front-passenger door.
X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-
passenger seat.
X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the
weight.
The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and
interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually
is.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the
center console and the multifunction display and check the fol-
lowing:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up and
remain lit. When the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant Clas-
sification System) has disabled the front-passenger air bag
(Y page 54).
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper‐
ator's Manual display messages must not be shown in the
multifunction display.
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-
tem checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul-
tifunction display.
 Display messages 305

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the
occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-
rectly.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Lights
i Display messages about LEDs:
This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

b The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Left Corner‐
ing Light or Check
Right Cornering
Light

b The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Check Left Low
(Y page 138).
Beam or Check
Right Low Beam or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The left or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is defective.

X Observe the separate operating instructions provided by the
Check Trailer Left
trailer manufacturer.
Turn Signal or
Check Trailer
Right Turn Signal

b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Check Rear Left
(Y page 138).
Turn Signal or
Check Rear Right or
Turn Signal X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
306 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

b The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Front Left
Turn Signal or
Check Front Right
Turn Signal

b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is

defective.
Check Left Mirror
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Turn Signal or
Check Right Mirror
Turn Signal

b The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Center Brake
Lamp

b The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Check Left Brake
(Y page 138).
Lamp or Check
Right Brake Lamp or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Check Left Tail
(Y page 138).
and Brake Lamps or
Check Right Tail or
and Brake Lamps X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The left or right-hand high beam is defective.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Check Left High
(Y page 138).
Beam or Check
Right High Beam or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The left or right-hand license plate lamp is defective.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
License Plate Lamp
 Display messages 307

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

b The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.
X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Check Front Left
(Y page 138).
Parking Lamp or
Check Front Right or
Parking Lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The backup lamp is defective.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Backup Light

b The left or right front side marker lamp is defective.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Front Left
Sidemarker Lamp or
Check Front Right
Sidemarker Lamp

b The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective.

or
Check Left Tail
Lamp or Check The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective.
Right Tail Lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The left-hand or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Left Daytime
Running Light or
Check Right Day‐
time Running Light

b The active light function is defective.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Light Sys‐
tem Inoperative

b The exterior lighting is defective.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Malfunction See
Operator's Manual Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown.
X Check the fuses (Y page 402).
X If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning notes.

If the display message continues to be displayed:

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
308 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

b The light sensor is defective.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Auto Lamp Function
Inoperative

b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A
warning tone also sounds.
Switch Off Lights
X Turn the light switch to Ã.

Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.

Assist Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoper-

Assist Currently ative. Possible causes are:
Unavailable See Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
Operator's Manual
Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.

X Clean the windshield.

If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is dis-
played.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

+ The coolant level is too low.

Check Coolant ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine
Level See Opera‐ cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
tor's Manual X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so
(Y page 375).
X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.

? The fan motor is faulty.

X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in moun-
tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.
 Display messages 309

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

? The coolant is too hot.
A warning tone also sounds.
Coolant Too Hot
Stop Vehicle Turn G WARNING
Engine Off Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns
which can occur just by opening the hood.
There is a risk of injury.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 190).
X Wait until the engine has cooled down.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out
and the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Other-
wise, the engine could be damaged.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.
X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.
Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant
level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

# The battery is not being charged.

A warning tone also sounds.
See Operator's Man‐
ual Possible causes are:
Ra defective alternator
Ra torn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 190).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
310 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

# The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level
is too low.
Stop Vehicle See A warning tone also sounds.
Operator's Manual
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 190).
X Observe the instructions in the display message # See
Operator's Manual.
Manual
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

A warning tone also sounds.
Check Engine Oil
X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest
At Next Refueling
(Y page 373).
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 374).
X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if the
engine oil needs topping up more often than usual.
! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will
otherwise be damaged.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any
qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://
bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

4 AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.

Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest
X
Check Engine Oil
(Y page 373).
Level (Add 1 quart)
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 374).
X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if the
engine oil needs topping up more often than usual.
! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will
otherwise be damaged.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any
qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://
bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
Fuel Level Low

C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.
 Display messages 311

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

8 The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed
correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
Gas Cap Loose
X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.

If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:

X Close the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

8 Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel level has fallen below the
reserve range.
Ultra Low-sulfur
X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
Diesel Fuel Only
X Only use commercially available vehicular ULTRA-LOW SULFUR
HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL (ULSD, 15 ppm sulfur MAXIMUM).

¸ Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and must
be replaced.
Replace Air Filter
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

! Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. The
water must be drained off.
Check Fuel Filter
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Ø The DEF tank is almost empty.

X Have the DEF tank filled as soon as possible at a qualified spe-
Check Additive See
cialist workshop (Y page 188).
Operator's Manual

Ø The DEF level has fallen to a minimum. You can start the engine a
further 16 times.
Remaining Starts:
X Have the DEF tank filled immediately at a qualified specialist
16
workshop (Y page 188).
i You can start the engine a further 16 times. If DEF is not added,
it will then not be possible to restart the engine. Refill the DEF
tank with approximately 1 gal (3.8 l) DEF (Y page 188).

Z
312 Display messages

Driving systems
On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

À Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue

or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone
Attention Assist: also sounds.
Take a Break!
X If necessary, take a break.

During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get
enough rest.

À ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Attention Assist
Inoperative

Á You cannot change the vehicle level. Possible causes are:

Ryou are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level.
Drive More Slowly
Ryou are towing a trailer.
Rthe trailer-coupling socket is being used, e.g. for a bicycle rack.

X Drive more slowly and then select the desired vehicle level
again.
RVehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package (Y page 214)
RVehicles with the AIRMATIC package (Y page 221)
X Observe the notes on towing a trailer (Y page 265).

Á You have selected a higher vehicle level. The compressor first

needs to cool down because of frequent level changes.
Compressor Is Cool‐
X Drive in a manner appropriate for the current vehicle level.
ing
X Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.
X Allow the compressor to cool down.
When the compressor has cooled down, the display message
disappears. The vehicle then continues rising to the selected
level.

Á AIRMATIC is malfunctioning.
X Drive as appropriate for the current vehicle level, but do not
ABC Malfunction
exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
X Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.
X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages 313

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Á You are exceeding the speed permissible for the selected off-road
level.
Max. Speed 12 mph In addition, the vehicle level display appears between the vehicle
icon and the display message, and a warning tone sounds.
G WARNING
The vehicle could tip and rollover.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Adjust your driving style to the altered handling characteristics.
X Only make slight steering movements and avoid fast steering
movements.
X Do not exceed 12 mph (20 km/h) until the vehicle has reached
off-road level 2.

ACTIVE CURVE SYS‐ The Active Curve System is faulty. The vehicle's handling charac-
TEM malfunctioning teristics may be affected.
X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

ACTIVE CURVE SYS‐ The Active Curve System is faulty. The vehicle's handling charac-
TEM Malfunction teristics are severely impaired. A warning tone also sounds.
See Operator's Man‐
ual G WARNING
There is a risk of an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
X Adjust your driving style to the altered handling characteristics.
X Avoid sudden acceleration in tight bends and fast steering
movements.
X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Á The vehicle is being adjusted to off-road level 3. The display mes-

sage informs you of the maximum speed permissible for off-road
Raising Max. Speed level 3.
12 mph
X Do not drive at speeds above 12 mph (20 km/h).

g The vehicle is being lowered from off-road level 3 to off-road level

2. The display message informs you of the maximum speed per-
Lowering Max. missible for off-road level 3.
Speed 12 mph
X Do not exceed 12 mph (20 km/h) until the vehicle has reached
off-road level 2.

Z
314 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

8 The differential lock is faulty.

X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
Different. Lock
X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Sys. Malfunction

8 The differential lock is too hot and has been disengaged.

X Drive on carefully.
Different. Locking
X Allow the differential lock to cool down.
Sys. Cooling Down
Please Wait The differential lock re-engages as soon as it has cooled down.

LOW RANGE Stop A gearshift process has been canceled. LOW RANGE is in the neu-
Apply Parking Brake tral position. There is no connection between the engine and the
drive wheels.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Apply the electric parking brake. Do not continue driving under
any circumstances.
X Repeat the gearshift process.

LOW RANGE Malfunc‐ LOW RANGE is malfunctioning.

tion To Park, X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
Apply Parking Brake X
When parking, secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 190).
X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

LOW RANGE Max. You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshift process.
Speed 25 mph X Drive more slowly.
The gear change is made.

LOW RANGE Max. You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshift process.
Speed 40 mph X Drive more slowly.
The gear change is made.

LOW RANGE Shift to You have reduced the vehicle speed, but the automatic transmis-
Position N Briefly sion is not in position N.
X Briefly shift the automatic transmission to position N.

LOW RANGE Shifting The gearshift process has been canceled.

Canceled Please X Repeat the gearshift process.
Reactivate

à DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) is deactivated due to a malfunc-

tion.
Inoperative
X Have DSR checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages 315

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

ë The HOLD function is deactivated. the vehicle is skidding.
A warning tone also sounds.
Off
X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 218).

Radar Sensors Deac‐ The radar sensor system is deactivated.

tivated See Opera‐ X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 287).
tor's Manual

Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated
Assist Currently and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:
Unavailable See Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
Operator's Manual
Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
or Active Lane
Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.
Keeping Assist Cur‐
rently Unavailable Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.
See Operator's Man‐ When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-
ual sage disappears.
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational
again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 190).
X Clean the windshield.

Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective.
Assist Inopera‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
tive or Active
Lane Keeping
Assist Inoperative

Z
316 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inop-
Currently Unavail‐ erative. Possible causes are:
able See Opera‐ Rthe sensors are dirty.
tor's Manual or
Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
Active Blind Spot
Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature
Assist Currently
Unavailable See range.
Operator's Manual Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-
tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir-
rors.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-
sage disappears.
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 190).
X Clean the sensors (Y page 381).
X Restart the engine.

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is deactivated while

towing a trailer.
You have established the electrical connection between the trailer
and your vehicle.
X Press a on the steering wheel to confirm the display mes-
sage.

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is defective.
Inoperative or The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir-
Active Blind Spot rors.
Assist Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park Assist Can‐ The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been
celed fastened.
X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the
driver's door closed.

You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel

while steering intervention was active.
X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multi-
function steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.
 Display messages 317

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.
X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 228).

Park Assist Inoper‐ You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking
ative maneuvers.
Active Parking Assist will become available again after approx-
imately ten minutes (Y page 228).
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Switch off and restart the engine.

If the display message continues to be displayed:

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

PARKTRONIC is defective.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park Assist Fin‐ The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.
ished The display message disappears automatically.
DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 206).
If it was deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONIC PLUS Now DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been tempo-
Available rarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 206).

Z
318 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

DISTRONIC PLUS Cur‐ DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:
rently Unavailable Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
See Operator's Man‐
Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and the bumper are dirty.
ual
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-
tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.
A warning tone also sounds.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-
sage disappears.
DISTRONIC is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 190).
X Clean the sensors in the radiator trim and the bumper
(Y page 381).
X Restart the engine.

DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is defective.

Inoperative BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) and PRE-SAFE® Brake may be
inoperative as well.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUS Sus‐ You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no
pended longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.

- - - mph X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 206).
 Display messages 319

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Cruise Control Cruise control is defective.
Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise Control A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.
--- mph You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for
example.
X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and
store the speed.
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 203).

Z
320 Display messages

Tires
On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Check Tire Pres‐ The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant
sure Soon loss in pressure.
A warning tone also sounds.
Possible causes:
Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or instal-
led new wheels and tires.
Rthe tire pressure in one or more tires is not correct.
G WARNING
With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-
lowing hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 190).
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tire (Y page 389).
X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pres-
sure.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire
pressure is correct (Y page 414).

Check Tire Pres‐ The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display mes-
sure Then Restart sage and has not been restarted since.
Run Flat Indicator X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 414).

Run Flat Indicator The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.
Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages 321

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Please Correct The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire
Tire Pressure pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 414).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 417).

Check Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.
The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.
A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-
lowing hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 190).
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tire (Y page 389).
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 414).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Z
322 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Warning Tire Mal‐ The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The
function wheel position is shown in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
If you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:
Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.
Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-
up and possibly a fire.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 190).
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tire (Y page 389).

Tire Press. Moni‐ Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received
tor Currently from the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily
Unavailable malfunctioning.
X Drive on.
The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the
problem has been solved.

Wheel Sensor Miss‐ There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several
ing wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the
multifunction display.
X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.

Tire Pressure Mon‐ The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.
itor Inoperative The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.
No Wheel Sensors X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving
for a few minutes.

Tire Press. Moni‐ The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

tor Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages 323

Vehicle

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Shift to 'P' or You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in
'N' to Start Engine position R or D.
X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

Auxiliary Battery The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer
Malfunction being charged.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity.
X Until then, set the automatic transmission to position P before
you switch off the engine.
X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 190).

Apply Brake to You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to
Shift from 'P' position D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.
X Depress the brake pedal.

Transmission Not The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position R, N or
in P Risk of Vehi‐ D.
cle Rolling Away A warning tone also sounds.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 190).

Service Required You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.
Do Not Shift Gears A warning tone also sounds.
Visit Dealer
If transmission position D is selected:
X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the
transmission from position D.
If transmission position R, N or P is selected:
X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Only Shift to 'P' The vehicle is moving.

when Vehicle is X Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to
Stationary road and traffic conditions.
X Shift the transmission to position P.

Z
324 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

A The tailgate is open.

G WARNING
When the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle
interior if the tailgate is open.
There is a risk of poisoning.
X Close the tailgate.

? The hood is open.

G WARNING
The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 190).
X Close the hood.

C At least one door is open.

A warning tone also sounds.
X Close all the doors.

_ The second row of seats is not engaged on the left-hand or right-

hand side.
2nd Seat Row, Left
X Fold back the second row of seats until it engages.
Not Locked or 2nd
Seat Row, Right
Not Locked

_ The third row of seats is not engaged on the left-hand or right-hand

side.
3rd Seat Row, Left
X Fold back the third row of seats until it engages.
Not Locked or 3rd
Seat Row, Left Not
Locked
 Display messages 325

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Ð The power steering is malfunctioning.
A warning tone also sounds.
Power Steering Mal‐
function See Oper‐ G WARNING
ator's Manual You will need to use more force to steer.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified
specialist workshop.
X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.

No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/

receiver range.
X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol
appears in the multifunction display.

¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped
below the minimum.
Check Washer Fluid
X Add washer fluid (Y page 376).

Wiper malfunction‐ The windshield wipers are malfunctioning.

ing X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Hazard warning The hazard warning lamps are faulty.

lamps malfunction‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ing

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

 You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.

X Use the correct SmartKey.
Key Does Not
Belong to Vehicle

 The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.

X Remove the SmartKey.
Take Your Key from
Ignition

 The SmartKey needs to be replaced.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Obtain a New Key

Z
326 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

 The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged.

X Change the batteries (Y page 85).
Replace Key Battery

 This display message is displayed for a maximum of 60 seconds

and is simply a reminder.
Don't Forget Your You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off.
Key The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the ignition lock.
X Remember to take the KEYLESS-GO key with you when you
leave the vehicle.

 The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle.

A warning tone also sounds.
Key Not Detected
(red display message) If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle
centrally or start the engine.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 190).
X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key.

The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is running

because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 190).
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

 The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present.

X Change the location of the SmartKey with the KEYLESS-GO
Key Not Detected
functions in the vehicle.
(white display mes-
sage) If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected:
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

 KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warn-

ing tone also sounds.
Remove 'Start' But‐
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the
ton and Insert Key
desired position.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 327

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

On-board computer and displays

Safety
Seat belts

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ü The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger
After starting the to fasten their seat belts.
engine, the red seat X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).
belt warning lamp lights
up for 6 seconds.
ü The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
After starting the X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).
engine, the red seat The warning tone ceases.
belt warning lamp lights
up. In addition, a warn-
ing tone sounds for up
to 6 seconds.
ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
The red seat belt warn- X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).
ing lamp lights up after The warning lamp goes out.
the engine starts, as
soon as the driver's or There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
the front-passenger X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
door is closed. them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out.

ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The
The red seat belt warn- vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly
ing lamp flashes and an been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
intermittent audible X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).
warning sounds. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
ceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being

driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven
faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
ceases.

Z
328 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Safety systems
On-board computer and displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

$ (USA only) G WARNING
J (Canada only) The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking char-
The red brake system acteristics may be affected.
warning lamp comes on There is a risk of an accident.
while the engine is run-
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
ning. A warning tone
also sounds. attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 190).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.

$ (USA only) There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
J (Canada only) G WARNING
The red brake system
The braking effect may be impaired.
warning lamp comes on
while the engine is run- There is a risk of an accident.
ning. A warning tone X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
also sounds. attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 190).
X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the mal-
function.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 329

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

! ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunc-
The yellow ABS warning tion. Therefore, BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, ESP® (Electronic
lamp is lit while the Stability Program), PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, COLLISION
engine is running. PREVENTION ASSIST, the HOLD function, hill start assist, cross-
wind assistance and ESP® trailer stabilization, for example, are
also deactivated.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other
systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic trans-
mission, will not be available.

Z
330 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

! ABS is temporarily unavailable. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®,

The yellow ABS warning EBD (electronic brake force distribution), PRE‑SAFE®,
lamp is lit while the PRE‑SAFE® Brake, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, the HOLD
engine is running. function, hill start assist, crosswind assistance and ESP® trailer
stabilization, for example, are also deactivated.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Possible causes are:
RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete.
RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the
warning lamp goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 331

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

! EBD is malfunctioning. Therefore, ABS, BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®,
The yellow ABS warning PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST,
lamp is lit while the the HOLD function, hill start assist, crosswind assistance and
engine is running. A ESP® trailer stabilization, for example, are also unavailable.
warning tone also ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
sounds.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

$ (USA only) ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS,
J (Canada only) PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST,
֌! the HOLD function, hill start assist, crosswind assistance and
The red brake warning ESP® trailer stabilization, for example, are also unavailable.
lamp, the yellow ESP® ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
and ESP® OFF warning G WARNING
lamps and the yellow
ABS warning lamp are The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
lit while the engine is functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
running. lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
332 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

÷ ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of

The yellow ESP® warn- skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.
ing lamp flashes while Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
the vehicle is in motion. X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X Do not deactivate ESP®.

In rare cases (Y page 73), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.

å ESP® is deactivated.
®
The yellow ESP OFF G WARNING
warning lamp is lit while
® ®
the engine is running. If ESP is switched off, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Reactivate ESP®.
In rare cases (Y page 73), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

If ESP® cannot be activated:

X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

÷å ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, COLLISION

The yellow ESP® and PREVENTION ASSIST, the HOLD function, hill start assist, cross-
ESP® OFF warning wind assistance and ESP® trailer stabilization are not available due
lamps are lit while the to a malfunction.
engine is running. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 333

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

÷å ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist, cross-
The yellow ESP® and wind assistance and ESP® trailer stabilization are temporarily
ESP® OFF warning unavailable.
lamps are lit while the COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS and
engine is running. PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the
warning lamp goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
334 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

F (USA only) X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

! (Canada only) display.
The red electric parking
brake indicator lamp
flashes or lights up
and/or
!
warning lamp for the
electric parking brake
lights up.
6 The restraint system is faulty.
The red restraint sys- G WARNING
tem warning lamp is lit
while the engine is run- The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
ning. gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Have the restraint system checked at a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.
For further information about the restraint system, see
(Y page 44).
 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 335

Engine

On-board computer and displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
; There may be a malfunction, for example:
The yellow Check Rin the engine management
Engine warning lamp Rin the fuel injection system
lights up while the
Rin the exhaust system
engine is running.
Rin the ignition system (for vehicles with gasoline engines)
Rin the fuel system
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be
in emergency mode.
X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified
specialist workshop.
i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified special-
ist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp
lights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect in these
states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply in
the state in which you are currently driving.

Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry
(Y page 188).
X Start the engine three to four times after refueling.
If the yellow Check Engine warning lamp goes out, emergency
running mode is canceled. The vehicle need not be checked.

8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

The yellow reserve fuel X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
warning lamp lights up
while the engine is run-
ning.
8 The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed
The yellow reserve fuel correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
warning lamp flashes X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
while the vehicle is in X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler
motion. cap.
In addition, the ; X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist work-
Check Engine warning shop.
lamp may light up.

Z
336 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

? The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gage is defec-

The red coolant warn- tive.
ing lamp lights up while The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a
the engine is running risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
and the coolant tem- X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
perature gauge is at the paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue
start of the scale. driving under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 190).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 337

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

? The coolant level is too low.
The red coolant warn- ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine
ing lamp comes on cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
while the engine is run-
ning. If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may
be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunc-
tioning.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled
sufficiently.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 190).
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning
notes (Y page 375).
X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is
below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in moun-
tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

? The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The air-
The red coolant warn- flow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may
ing lamp comes on be too low.
while the engine is run- G WARNING
ning. A warning tone
also sounds. The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns
which can occur just by opening the hood.
There is a risk of injury.

Z
338 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 190).
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning
notes (Y page 375).
X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in moun-
tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

Driving systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

· You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line
The red distance warn- of travel at too high a speed.
ing function warning X Be prepared to brake immediately.
lamp comes on while X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to
the vehicle is moving. A brake or take evasive action.
warning tone also
sounds. Further information on DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 206).
Further information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake (Y page 76).
Further information on the distance warning function (Y page 70).
 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 339

Tires

On-board computer and displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
h The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at
The yellow tire pressure least one of the tires.
monitor warning lamp G WARNING
(pressure loss/
malfunction) is lit. With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-
lowing hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 190).
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tire (Y page 389).
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 414).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

h The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

The yellow tire pressure G WARNING
monitor warning lamp
(pressure loss/ The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire
malfunction) flashes for pressure.
approximately one There is a risk of an accident.
minute and then X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
remains lit. display.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
340
 341

Useful information ............................ 342

Stowage areas .................................. 342
Features ............................................. 350

Stowage and features

342 Stowage areas

Useful information Always be particularly careful around the

exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow
i This Operator's Manual describes all these components to cool down before touch-
models and all standard and optional equip- ing them.
ment of your vehicle available at the time of
publication of the Operator's Manual. The gross vehicle weight (GVW) is the vehicle
Country-specific differences are possible. weight including fuel, vehicle tool kit, spare
Please note that your vehicle may not be wheel, installed accessories, vehicle occu-
equipped with all features described. This pants and luggage/cargo.
Stowage and features

also applies to safety-related systems and The gross load limit and the gross vehicle
functions. weight rating (GVWR) for your vehicle must
never be exceeded. The gross load limit and
i Read the information on qualified special- the GVWR are specified on the vehicle iden-
ist workshops (Y page 29).
tification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's
door (Y page 418).
Stowage areas The load must also be distributed so that the
weight on each axle never exceeds the gross
Loading guidelines axle weight rating (GAWR) for the front and
rear axles. The specifications for GVWR and
G WARNING GAWR are on the vehicle identification plate
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or on the B-pillar of the driver's door
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip (Y page 418).
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle Observe the notes on loading the vehicle
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu- (Y page 418).
larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-
The handling characteristics of a laden vehi-
den change in direction.
cle are dependent on the distribution of the
Always store objects so that they cannot be load within the vehicle. For this reason, you
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or should observe the following notes when
loads against slipping or tipping before the transporting a load:
journey.
RNever exceed the maximum permissible
G WARNING gross vehicle weight or the gross axle
weight rating of the vehicle (including occu-
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
pants).
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate
RThe cargo compartment is the preferred
is open when the engine is running, particu-
larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes place to carry objects.
could enter the passenger compartment. RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as pos-
There is a risk of poisoning. sible and as low down in the cargo com-
Turn off the engine before opening the tail- partment as possible.
gate. Never drive with the tailgate open. RThe load must not protrude above the
upper edge of the seat backrests.
G WARNING RAlways place the load against the rear or
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can front seat backrests. Make sure that the
become very hot. If you come into contact seat backrests are securely locked into
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn place.
yourself. There is a risk of injury. RAlways place the load behind unoccupied
seats if possible.
 Stowage areas 343

RUse the cargo tie-down rings and the parcel X To open: pull handle : and open glove box
nets to transport loads and luggage. flap ;.
RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards
materials appropriate for the weight and until it engages.
size of the load.
RHook in the cargo net when loading.
i The glove box can be cooled and ventila-
ted (Y page 163).
RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and
wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges
for protection.

Stowage and features

Stowage space
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If objects in the passenger compartment are
stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be
thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. 1 Glove box unlocked
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the 2 Glove box locked
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
The glove box can be locked and unlocked
in direction.
using the mechanical key.
RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be
thrown around in such situations.
RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-
trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or
stowage nets.
RClose the lockable stowage spaces while
driving.
RStow and secure objects that are heavy,
hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too
large in the cargo compartment.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 342). Partition : for stowing flat objects is located
in the upper section of the glove box. It can be
Glove box removed to increase the stowage space in the
glove box.
X To remove: pull partition : forwards and
out
X To install: insert partition : and push it
back until it engages.

Z
344 Stowage areas

Stowage compartment under the arm- X To open: press marking :.

rest The eyeglasses compartment opens down-
wards.
X To close: press marking : again and the
eyeglasses compartment returns upwards
and engages.
Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment
is always closed while the vehicle is in motion.
Stowage and features

Stowage compartment in the front cen-

ter console

X To open: pull handle : up.

The armrest folds out.
In the stowage compartment, there is a stow-
age tray.
i Depending on the vehicle equipment, a
USB connection or a Media Interface is
installed in the stowage compartment.
A Media Interface is a universal interface
for mobile audio equipment, e.g. for an
X To open: slide cover : forwards.
iPod® or MP3 player (see the separate
COMAND Operating Instructions). Stowage compartment ; appears.
X To close: pull cover : back as far as it will
i There is a removable stowage tray in the go.
storage compartment, in which objects
such as an iPod® can be stored.
Stowage compartment in the rear cen-
ter console
Eyeglasses compartment

X To open: briefly press the stowage com-

partment marking.
The stowage compartment opens.
 Stowage areas 345

i Depending on the vehicle's equipment,

there may be open stowage spaces above
and below the stowage compartment.

Stowage nets
G WARNING
Vehicles with the Occupant Classification
System (OCS):

Stowage and features

If the gross weight of the objects in the stow-
age net on the back of the front-passenger : Stowage net in cargo compartment
seat is greater than 4.4 lb (2 kg), OCS cannot Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 342)
correctly assess the occupant's weight cate- and the safety notes regarding stowage
gory. The front-passenger front air bag could spaces (Y page 343).
deploy without cause, or may fail to deploy in
the event of an accident. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Through-loading facility in the rear
Never exceed the permissible gross weight of If objects or loads are not secured when being
4.4 lb (2 kg). Stow and secure heavy objects in transported in the through-loading facility,
the cargo compartment. they could slip or be thrown around and
thereby hit vehicle occupants.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 342)
and the safety notes regarding stowage
spaces (Y page 343).

: Stowage net in front-passenger footwell

The through-loading facility is opened from

the cargo compartment.
X Release the seat backrests in the second
row of seats and tilt them in the cargo/load
position (Y page 111).
X Fold down the rear seat armrest.

: Stowage net on the back of the front seats

Z
346 Stowage areas

X Pull the center head restraint on the rear forward. Otherwise, the backrests may be
bench seat into the uppermost position damaged.
(Y page 108). When the backrest is folded forwards, the
X Slide release catch : to the left and swing front seats cannot be moved to their rear-
flap ; to the left until it is lying on the rear most position. Otherwise, the front seats
side of the rear bench seat. and the rear bench seat could be damaged.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 342).
The left-hand and right-hand backrests in the
second row of seats can be folded forwards
Stowage and features

separately to increase the cargo compart-

ment capacity.
On vehicles with a 3rd row of seats, you must
fold down the 3rd row of seats beforehand
(Y page 111) to obtain maximum cargo com-
partment enlargement.

Folding the rear bench seat forwards

X Push cover = forward until it is lying on the
rear seat armrest. ! The backrest is heavy. Therefore, take
care when folding it down. Make sure that
the head restraints are pushed all the way
Cargo compartment enlargement in so that the backrests and seat cushions
are not damaged.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold for-
wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
event of an accident.
RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be
pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench
seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The
seat belt can no longer offer the intended
level of protection and could even cause i If the driver's or front-passenger seat is
injuries. set for a larger person, it may not be pos-
RObjects or loads in the trunk/cargo com- sible to fold the rear bench seat forwards.
partment cannot be restrained by the seat In this case, move the front seats as far
backrest. forward as possible.
There is an increased risk of injury. X Move the head restraints to the lowest
Before every trip, make sure that the seat position (Y page 110).
backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat X Pull release loop : of seat cushion ;.
are engaged.
X Fold seat cushion ; upwards.

! Release and fold the seat cushion

upwards before folding the rear bench seat
 Stowage areas 347

X Fold seat backrest ; back until it engages.

Make sure not to trap the seat belt while
doing so.
X Swing seat cushion : back.
X Pull up and adjust the head restraints if
necessary (Y page 110).

Securing cargo

Stowage and features

Cargo tie-down rings
X Pull release handle = in the direction of
the arrow. General notes
The backrest is released. G WARNING
X Fold the backrest forwards until it reaches
The Top Tether anchorages cannot secure a
the cargo compartment position. load. If you secure a load with the Top Tether
anchorages, the Top Tether anchorages could
be pulled out during braking, abrupt changes
in direction or in the event of an accident. The
load could slip, tip over or be flung around and
thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk
of injury.
Only use the cargo tie down rings when secur-
ing a load.

Observe the following notes on securing

loads:
X Guide seat belts ; under respective RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down
clips :. rings.
RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-down
Folding the rear bench seat back rings evenly.
RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure
a load, as these are only intended as an
anti-slip protection for light loads.
RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges
or corners.
RPad sharp edges for protection.

Z
348 Stowage areas

Cargo compartment Cargo compartment cover

Important safety notes
G WARNING
On its own, the cargo compartment cover
cannot secure or restrain heavy objects,
items of luggage and heavy loads. You could
be hit by an unsecured load during sudden
changes in direction, braking or in the event of
Stowage and features

an accident. There is an increased risk of

injury or even fatal injury.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
There are four cargo tie-down rings : in the
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
cargo compartment.
loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by
using tie downs, even if you are using the
Bag hook
cargo compartment cover.
G WARNING
! When loading the vehicle, make sure that
The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects
you do not stack the load in the cargo com-
or items of luggage. Objects or items of lug-
partment higher than the lower edge of the
gage could be flung around and thereby hit
side windows. Do not place heavy objects
vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly
on top of the cargo compartment cover.
changing directions. There is a risk of injury.
Only hang light objects on the bag hooks. The cargo compartment cover may be instal-
Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile led behind the 2nd or 3rd row of seats.
objects on the bag hooks.
Extending/retracting the cargo com-
! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of partment cover
6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to
secure a load.

There is a bag hook in the cargo compartment

on the right-hand side.
X Press bag hook marking :.
X Turn bag hook : until it engages.
 Stowage areas 349

X To extend: pull the cargo compartment

cover back by grab handle : and clip it into
retainers ; on the left and right.
X To retract: unhook the cargo compartment
cover from left-hand and right-hand retain-
ers ;.
X Guide cargo compartment cover forwards
by grab handle : until it is completely rol-
led up.

Stowage and features

The TIREFIT kit, tire-change tool kit, etc. are
Coat hooks on the tailgate located in the stowage compartment.
X To open: holding the ribbing, press han-
dle : downwards ;.
Handle : folds up.
X Swing the cargo compartment floor
upwards using handle : until it rests
against the cargo compartment cover.

: Coat hook

Stowage well under the cargo com-

partment floor
G WARNING
If you drive when the cargo compartment floor X Fold out hook = on the underside of the
is open, objects could be flung around, thus cargo compartment floor in the direction of
striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of the arrow.
injury, particularly in the event of sudden
braking or a sudden change in direction.
Always close the cargo compartment floor
before a journey.

Z
350 Features

X Attach hook = to the cargo compart- Position the load on the roof carrier in such
ment's upper seal ?. a way that the vehicle will not sustain dam-
X To close: detach hook = from the cargo age even when it is in motion.
compartment's upper seal ?. Depending on the vehicle equipment,
X Fasten hook = to the bracket on the ensure that when the roof carrier is instal-
underside of the cargo compartment floor. led you can:
X Fold the trunk floor down. Rraise the sliding sunroof fully
X Press the cargo compartment floor Ropen the panorama roof with power tilt/
down ; until it engages. sliding panel fully
Stowage and features

Ropen the tailgate fully

The maximum roof load is 220 lbs(100 kg).

Attaching the roof carrier

1 Cargo compartment floor unlocked

2 Cargo compartment floor locked
The cargo compartment floor can be locked
and unlocked using the mechanical key.
X Secure the roof carrier to roof rails :. In
doing so, observe the manufacturer's
Roof carrier installation instructions.
Important safety notes
G WARNING Features
When you load the roof, the center of gravity
Cup holder
of the vehicle rises and the driving character-
istics change. If you exceed the maximum roof Important safety notes
load, the driving characteristics, as well as
steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. G WARNING
There is a risk of an accident. If objects in the passenger compartment are
Never exceed the maximum roof load and stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be
adjust your driving style. thrown around and hit vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you event of sudden braking or a sudden change
only use roof carriers that have been tested in direction.
and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
This helps to prevent damage to the vehi-
cle.
 Features 351

RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be X To open: slide cover ; to its foremost
thrown around in such situations. position.
RAlways make sure that objects do not pro- X To close: pull cover ; back as far as it will
trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or go.
stowage nets. You can remove the cup holder's rubber mat
RClose the lockable stowage spaces while for cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm
driving. water only.
RStow and secure objects that are heavy,
hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too Temperature-controlled cup holder in

Stowage and features

large in the cargo compartment. the front-compartment center console

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 342).

! Only use the cup holders for containers of
the right size and which have lids. The
drinks could otherwise spill.
Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key in the tem-
perature-controlled cup holder (Y page 351).
Otherwise, the KEYLESS-GO key will not be
recognized.
The stowage compartments in the doors pro-
vide space for bottles with a capacity of up to : Cup holder
34 fl. oz. (1.0 l).
; Residual heat indicator lamp
The bottles are not secured or prevented from
= Switch
tipping over. Therefore, do not place any open
drink containers in the stowage compart- The temperature-controlled cup holder can
ments. be used to keep cold drinks cool and warm
drinks warm.
Cup holder in the front-compartment X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
center console tion lock.
X To switch on the cooling function: press
and hold button = until the blue indicator
lamp on the button lights up.
X To switch on the heating function: press
and hold button = until the red indicator
lamp on the button lights up.
X To switch off the function: press and hold
button = until the indicator lamp on the
button goes out.
When the heating function is used, the metal
: Cup holder insert of the cup holder is heated. Once a cer-
; Cover tain temperature is reached, residual heat
indicator lamp ; lights up. This means that
the metal insert of the cup holder is hot. For
this reason, you must not reach into the cup
holder metal insert.
Z
352 Features

Do not use hard or sharp objects to clean the blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an
cup holder. Use only a soft cloth to clean it. accident.
Always keep the mirror cover folded down
Cup holder in the rear seat armrest while driving.
! Do not sit on or support your body weight
on the rear seat armrest when it is folded
down, as you could otherwise damage it.
Stowage and features

: Mirror light
; Bracket
= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
X Fold down the rear seat armrest. ? Vanity mirror
Cup holder : is located in the rear seat
A Mirror cover
armrest.
Vanity mirror in the sun visor
Cup holder in the third row of seats
Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor
is clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover A
has been folded up.

Glare from the side

: Cup holder
The cup holders are located in the side trim on
the left and right-hand sides.

Sun visors X Fold down sun visor :.

X Pull sun visor : out of retainer =.
Overview
X Swing sun visor : to the side.
G WARNING X Slide sun visor : horizontally as required.
If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded X Fold down additional sun visor ; to the
up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be windshield.
 Features 353

Roller sunblinds on the rear side win- X Tilt pull-out profile : as illustrated.
dows X Slip guide bush ; into open area of guide
rail =.
! Always guide the roller sunblind by hand.
X Straighten up pull-out profile : again.
Do not let it snap back suddenly as this
would damage the automatic roller mech-
anism.
Ashtray
! Do not drive the vehicle with the roller
sunblind hooked in and the side windows Front ashtray

Stowage and features

opened simultaneously. The roller sunblind
can jump out of the retainers and spring ! The holder under the ashtray is not heat
back suddenly when driving at high speeds, resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in the
e.g. when driving on the freeway. This could ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is prop-
damage the inertia reel. Therefore, either erly engaged. Otherwise, the holder could
close the side window or retract the roller be damaged.
sunblind before driving at high speeds.

X To open: slide cover : to its foremost

position.
X To extend: pull the roller sunblind out by X Fold cover = of the insert upwards.
tab : and hook it onto retainers ; at the
X To remove the insert: push insert = to
back of the window.
the left ?.
Insert = slides out slightly to the right.
X Lift insert = up ; and out.
X To re-install the insert: place insert =
into the holder and press it down on the
right until it engages.
X To close: pull cover : back as far as it will
go.

Rear-compartment ashtray

The roller sunblind can be hooked back into ! Close the ashtray when it is not in use and
before you fold the rear seats forward. You
place should it pop out from the top of the
can otherwise damage the ashtray.
guide rail.

Z
354
Stowage and features Features

X To open: briefly press cover ; at the top. Your attention must always be focused on the
The ashtray opens. traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette
X To remove the insert: push into recess = lighter when road and traffic conditions per-
from the right. mit.
Ashtray insert : slides out slightly to the X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
right. tion lock (Y page 167).
X Lift insert : up and out. X To open: slide cover : to its foremost
X To re-install the insert: place insert : position.
into the holder and press down on the right X Press in cigarette lighter ;.
until it engages. Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automati-
Vehicles without a Rear Seat Entertainment cally when the heating element is red-hot.
System have an ashtray in the center console X To close: pull cover : back as far as it will
in the rear compartment. go.

Cigarette lighter 12 V sockets

G WARNING General notes
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-
heating element or the socket of the cigarette
tion lock (Y page 167).
lighter.
In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: With the exception of the socket in the front
center console, all sockets can be used for
Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls accessories with a maximum current draw of
Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to 240 W (20 A). The socket in the front center
objects, for example console can be used for accessories with a
There is a risk of fire and injury. maximum current draw of 180 W (15 A).
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. Accessories include such items as lamps or
Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is chargers for mobile phones.
out of reach of children. Never leave children If you use the sockets for long periods when
unsupervised in the vehicle. the engine is switched off, the battery may
discharge.
! The cigarette lighter in the center console
in the front compartment is not intended i An emergency cut-out ensures that the
on-board voltage does not drop too low. If
for operating the tire inflation compressor.
the on-board voltage is too low, the power
 Features 355

to the sockets is automatically cut. This Socket in the cargo compartment

ensures that there is sufficient power to
start the engine.

Socket in the front-compartment center

console
! The socket is not suitable for operating
the tire inflation compressor.

Stowage and features

X Lift up the cover of socket :.

115 V socket
Important safety notes
G DANGER
X To open: slide cover : to its foremost When a suitable device is connected, the
position. 115 V power socket will be carrying a high
X Lift up the cover of socket ;. voltage. You could receive an electric shock if
X To close: pull cover : back as far as it will the connector cable or the 115 V power
go. socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged
or wet. There is a risk of fatal injury.
RUse only connector cables that are dry and
Socket in the rear-compartment center
console free of damage.
RWhen the ignition is off, make sure that the
115 V power socket is dry.
RHave the 115 V power socket checked or
replaced immediately at a qualified speci-
alized workshop if it is damaged or has been
pulled out of the trim.
RNever plug the connector cable into a 115 V
power socket that is damaged or has been
pulled out of the trim.

G DANGER
X Lift up the cover of socket :. If you reach into the power socket or plug
inappropriate devices into the power socket,
Vehicles with the Rear Seat Entertainment
you could receive an electric shock. There is a
System have two sockets in the center con-
risk of fatal injury.
sole in the rear compartment.
Only connect appropriate devices to the
power socket.

Z
356 Features

! Note that work and repairs on the 115 V Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.
power socket should only be carried out by
qualified specialist personnel.

General notes
115 V power socket provides an alternating
voltage of 115 V so that small electronic devi-
ces can be connected. These devices, such as
games consoles, chargers and laptops,
Stowage and features

should not consume more than a maximum of

150 watts altogether.
Requirements for operation of these devices:
Rthe electronic device that you connect has
a suitable connector and conforms to
standards specific to the country you are in.
Rthe plug of the electronic device is plugged
correctly into 115 V power socket.
Rthe maximum wattage of the device to be
connected must not exceed 150 watts.
Rthe on-board power supply is within a per-
missible voltage range.
Rthe 12 V sockets in the rear compartment
and the cargo compartment are opera-
tional.

Using the 115 V power socket

X To switch on: switch the ignition on.

X Open flap =.
X Insert the plug of the electronic device into
115 V power socket :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
X To turn off: disconnect the plug from 115 V
power socket :.
 Features 357

Problems with the 115 V power socket

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The warning lamp on The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak.
the 115 V power socket X Start the engine.
is not lit.
or
X Charge the battery (Y page 395).

If the indicator lamp still does not light up:

Stowage and features

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The temperature of the DC/AC converter is temporarily too high.

X Remove the electronic device connector from the 115 V socket.
X Let the DC/AC converter cool down.

If the indicator lamp still does not light up after cooling down the
converter:
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

You have connected an electronic device that has a constant

nominal power of less than 150 watts, but a very high switch-on
current. This device will not work. If you connect such a device, the
115 V power socket will not supply it with power.
X Connect a suitable device.

mbrace Shortly after successfully registering with the

service, a user ID and password will be sent to
General notes you by post.
You must have a license agreement to acti- USA only: you can use this password to log
vate the mbrace service. Make sure that your onto the mbrace area under "Owners Online"
system is activated and operational. To log in, at http://www.mbusa.com.
press the ï MB Info call button. If any of The system is available if:
the steps mentioned are not carried out, the Rit has been activated and is operational
system may not be activated.
Rthe corresponding mobile phone network is
If you have questions about the activation,
available for transmitting data to the Cus-
contact one of the following telephone hot-
tomer Center
lines:
Ra service subscription is available
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 i Determining the location of the vehicle on
RCanada: Customer Service at a map is only possible if:
1-888-923-8367 RGPS reception is available.
Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to
the Customer Assistance Center.

Z
358 Features

The mbrace system Have the system checked at the nearest

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact
To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as
the following service hotlines:
follows:
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
X Press the W or X button on the mul-
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
tifunction steering wheel.
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
or
RCanada: Customer Service at
X Use the volume controller of the audio sys- 1-888-923-8367
tem/COMAND.
Stowage and features

The system offers various services, e.g.: Emergency call

RAutomatic and manual emergency call
Important safety notes
RRoadside Assistance call
RMB Info call
G WARNING
It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,
USA only: you can find information and a
even if you have pressed the SOS button in an
description of all available features under
emergency if:
"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-
System self-test cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident
Rthe vehicle is on a dangerous section of
After you have switched on the ignition, the
road
system carries out a self-diagnosis.
Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be
A malfunction in the system has been detec-
seen by other road users, particularly when
ted if one of the following occurs:
dark or in poor visibility conditions
RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does There is a risk of an accident and injury.
not come on during the system self-test.
Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi-
RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside
lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.
Assistance button does not light up during Move to a safe location along with other vehi-
self-diagnosis of the system. cle occupants. In such situations, secure the
RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call vehicle in accordance with national regula-
button does not light up during self-diag- tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.
nosis of the system.
RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the You must have a license agreement to acti-
following buttons continues to light up red vate the mbrace service. Make sure that your
after the system self-diagnosis: system is activated and operational. To reg-
- SOS button
ister, press the ï MB Info call button. If
any of the steps mentioned are not carried
- F Roadside Assistance call button
out, the system may not be activated.
- ï MB Info call button
If you have questions about the activation,
RAfter the system self-diagnosis, the Inop‐ contact one of the following telephone hot-
erative or Service Not Activated lines:
message appears in the multifunction dis-
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
play.
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
above, the system may not operate as expec-
RCanada: Customer Service at
ted. In the event of an emergency, help will
have to be summoned by other means. 1-888-923-8367
 Features 359

General notes In this case, summon assistance by other

An emergency call is dialed automatically if an means.
air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is Making an emergency call
triggered.
i You cannot end an automatically trig-
gered emergency call yourself.
An emergency call can also be initiated man-
ually.

Stowage and features

As soon as the emergency call has been ini-
tiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button
flashes. The multifunction display shows the
Connecting Call message.
The audio output is muted.
Once the connection has been made, the X To initiate an emergency call manually:
Call Connected message appears in the press cover : briefly to open.
multifunction display.
X Press SOS button ; briefly.
All important information on the emergency is The indicator lamp in SOS button ;
transmitted, for example: flashes until the emergency call is conclu-
Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as deter- ded.
mined by the GPS system) X Wait for a voice connection to the
Rvehicle identification number Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
Rinformation on the severity of the accident ter.
Shortly after the emergency call has been ini- X After the emergency call, close cover :.
tiated, a voice connection is automatically
i If the mobile phone network is unavaila-
established between the Customer Assis-
ble, mbrace will not be able to make the
tance Center and the vehicle occupants.
emergency call. If you leave the vehicle
RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the
immediately after pressing the SOS button,
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- you will not know whether mbrace placed
ter attempts to get more information on the the emergency call. In this case, always
emergency. summon assistance by other means.
RIf there is no response from the vehicle
occupants, an ambulance is immediately Roadside Assistance button
sent to the vehicle.
If no voice connection can be established to
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center, the system has been unable to initiate
an emergency call.
This can occur, for example, if the relevant
mobile phone network is not available. The
indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes con-
tinuously.
The Call Failed message appears in the
multifunction display and must be confirmed.

Z
360 Features

X Press Roadside Assistance button :. i The system has not been able to initiate a
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance call, if:
Customer Assistance Center. Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assis-
The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance tance call button : is flashing continu-
button : flashes while the call is active. ously.
The multifunction display shows the Con‐ Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-
necting Call message. The audio output Benz Customer Assistance Center was
is muted. established.
If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐ This can occur if the relevant mobile phone
Stowage and features

nected message appears in the multifunction network is not available, for example.
display. The Call Failed message appears in the
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception multifunction display.
are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
for example: multifunction steering wheel.
or
Rcurrent location of the vehicle
X Press the corresponding button for ending
Rvehicle identification number
a phone call on the audio system or on
i The audio system or COMAND display COMAND.
indicates that a call is active. During the
call, you can change to the navigation menu MB Info call button
by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND,
for example.
Voice output is not available.
A voice connection is established between
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center and the vehicle occupants.
From the vehicle remote malfunction diagno-
sis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center can ascertain the nature of the prob-
lem (Y page 364).
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center either sends a qualified Mercedes- X Press MB Info call button :.
Benz technician or makes arrangements for This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz
your vehicle to be transported to the nearest Customer Assistance Center.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The indicator lamp in MB Info call button :
You may be charged for services such as flashes while the connection is being made.
repair work and/or towing. The multifunction display shows the Con‐
Further details are available in your mbrace necting Call message. The audio system
manual. is muted.
If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐
nected message appears in the multifunction
display.
 Features 361

If a mobile phone network and GPS reception Call priority

are available, the system transfers data to the
When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency
for example:
call can still be initiated. In this case, an emer-
Rcurrent location of the vehicle gency call will take priority and override all
Rvehicle identification number other active calls.
i The audio system or COMAND display The indicator lamp of the respective button
indicates that a call is active. During the flashes until the call is ended.
An emergency call can only be terminated by

Stowage and features

call, you can change to the navigation menu
by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
for example. Center.
Voice output is not available. All other calls can be ended by pressing:
A voice connection is established between Rthe ~ button on the multifunction steer-
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance ing wheel
Center and the vehicle occupants. Rthe corresponding button on the audio sys-
You receive information about operating your tem or on COMAND for ending a telephone
vehicle, about the nearest authorized call
Mercedes-Benz Center and about other prod- i When a call is initiated, the audio system
ucts and services from Mercedes-Benz. is muted. The mobile phone is no longer
USA only: you can find further information on connected to COMAND. However, if you
the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at want to use your mobile phone, do so only
http://www.mbusa.com. when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe
i The system has not been able to initiate location.
an MB Info call, if:
Downloading destinations in COMAND
Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call but-
ton : is flashing continuously. Downloading destinations
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes- Downloading destinations gives you access
Benz Customer Assistance Center was to a database with over 15 million points of
established. interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone the navigation system in your vehicle. If you
network is not available, for example. know the destination, the address can be
The Call Failed message appears in the downloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain the
multifunction display. location of Points of Interest (POIs)/impor-
tant destinations in the vicinity.
X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
Furthermore, you can download routes with
multifunction steering wheel.
up to 20 way points.
or
You are prompted to confirm route guidance
X Press the corresponding button for ending to the address entered.
a phone call on the audio system or on
The system calculates the route and subse-
COMAND.
quently starts the route guidance with the
address entered.
i If you select No
No, the address can be saved
in the address book.

Z
362 Features

i The destination download function is i Example:

available if the relevant mobile phone net- If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then
work is available and data transfer is pos- 'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address
sible. will be sent to your vehicle.
i The destination download function can X When the "Send" dialog window appears:
only be used if the vehicle is equipped with Enter the e-mail address you specified
a navigation system. when setting up your mbrace account into
Route Assistance the corresponding field.
Stowage and features

X Click "Send".
This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Pack-
age and cannot be purchased separately. i Information on specific commands such
i You can also use the Route Assistance as "Address entry" or "Send" can be found
function if your vehicle is not equipped with on the website.
a navigation system. Calling up destination addresses
Within the framework of this service, you X Switch on the ignition.
receive a professional and reliable form of The destination address is loaded into the
navigation support without having to leave vehicle's navigation system.
your vehicle. A display message appears, asking
The customer service representative finds a whether navigation should be started.
suitable route depending on your vehicle's X Select Yes by turning cVd or sliding XVY
current position and the desired destination. the COMAND controller and press W to
You will then be guided live through the cur- confirm.
rent route section. The system calculates the route and sub-
sequently starts the route guidance with
Search & Send the address entered.
General notes i If you select No
No, the address can be saved
i To use "Search & Send", your vehicle in the address book.
must be equipped with mbrace and a navi-
i If you have sent more than one destina-
gation system. Additionally, an mbrace ser-
tion address, each individual destination
vice subscription must be completed.
must be confirmed separately.
"Search & Send" is a destination entry ser-
vice. A destination address which is found on i Destination addresses are loaded in the
same order as the order in which they were
Google Maps® can be transferred via mbrace
sent.
directly to your vehicle's navigation system.
If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehi-
Specifying and sending the destination cles with mbrace and activated mbrace
address accounts:
X Go to the website http:// If multiple vehicles are registered under the
www.maps.google.com and enter a desti- same e-mail address, the destination will
nation address into the entry field. be sent to all the vehicles.
X To send the destination address to the
e-mail address of your mbrace account:
click on the corresponding button on the
website.
 Features 363

Vehicle remote opening may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After

30 days the vehicle can no longer be locked
You can use the vehicle remote opening if you
remotely.
have unintentionally locked your vehicle and
a replacement SmartKey is not available. X Contact the following service hotlines:

The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes- RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-

Benz Customer Assistance Center. tance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes

The vehicle can be immediately opened (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
remotely within four days of the ignition being RCanada: Customer Service at
turned off. After this time, the remote unlock- 1-888-923-8367

Stowage and features

ing may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After You will be asked for your password.
30 days, the vehicle can no longer be opened The next time you are inside the vehicle and
remotely. you switch on the ignition, the Doors
X Contact the following service hotlines: Locked Remotely message appears in the
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis- multifunction display.
tance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 locked via:
RCanada: Customer Service at Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"
1-888-923-8367 section
You will be asked for your password. Rthe telephone applications (e.g. iPhone®,
X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed Blackberry)
upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer To do this, you will need your identification
Assistance Center. number and password.
USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be
i The vehicle remote closing feature is
opened via:
available when the relevant mobile phone
Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" network is available and data connection is
section possible.
Rthe telephone applications (e.g. iPhone®,
Blackberry) Stolen vehicle recovery service
To do this, you will need your identification If your vehicle has been stolen:
number and password.
X Notify the police.
i Vehicle remote opening is only possible if The police will issue a numbered incident
the corresponding mobile phone network is report.
accessible. X This number will be forwarded to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
Vehicle remote closing ter together with your PIN.
The vehicle remote locking feature can be The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
used when you have forgotten to lock the Center then tries to locate the system. The
vehicle and you are no longer nearby. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter contacts you and the local law enforce-
The vehicle can then be locked by the
ment agency if the vehicle is located.
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
However, only the law enforcement agency
The vehicle can be immediately remotely
is informed of the location of the vehicle.
locked within four days of the ignition being
turned off. After this time, remote locking

Z
364 Features

i If the anti-theft alarm system is activated When the diagnosis is completed, the Send
for longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes- vehicle diagnostics data//(Voice
Benz Customer Assistance Center is auto- connection may be//interrupted dur‐
matically notified. ing data transfer) message appears. The
vehicle data can now be sent to the Customer
Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis Assistance center.
X Press OK to confirm the message.
With the vehicle remote malfunction diagno-
sis (Vehicle Health Check), the Customer The voice connection with the Customer
Assistance center can provide improved sup- Assistance center is terminated.
Stowage and features

port for problems with your vehicle. During an You will see the Vehicle Diagnosis:
existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the Transferring data... message.
Customer Assistance center. The customer The vehicle data is sent to the Customer
service representative can use the received Assistance center.
data to decide what kind of assistance is Depending on what the customer service rep-
required. You are then, for example, guided to resentative agreed with you, the voice con-
the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- nection is re-established after the transfer is
ter or a recovery vehicle is called. complete. If necessary, you will be contacted
If vehicle data needs to be transferred during at a later time by another means, e.g. by e-
an MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, mail or phone.
this is initiated by the Customer Assistance Further functions of the vehicle remote mal-
center. You will see the Roadside Assis‐ function diagnosis include, for example:
tance Connected message in the COMAND
Rtransfer of service data to the Customer
display. If the vehicle remote malfunction
diagnosis can be started, the Request for Assistance center. If a service is overdue,
vehicle diagnosis received. Start the COMAND display shows a message
vehicle diagnosis? message appears in about various special offers at your work-
the display. shop.
Rmonthly status information e-mail on oil
X Confirm the message with Yes Yes.
level, air pressure, maintenance, brakes,
X When the Vehicle Diagnosis Please
etc. If applicable, you will receive informa-
start ignition message appears, turn tion on special offers in the e-mail.
the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
USA only: this information can also be
lock (Y page 167).
called up under "Owners Online" at http://
X When the Please follow the instruc‐
www.mbusa.com.
tions received by phone and move
Information on the data stored in the vehicle
your vehicle to a safe position.
(Y page 30).
message appears, follow the customer ser-
vice representative's instructions. Information on Roadside Assistance
The message in the display disappears. (Y page 26).
If you select Cancel
Cancel, the vehicle remote
malfunction diagnosis is canceled com- Downloading routes
pletely. Downloading routes allows you to transfer
The vehicle operating state check begins. and save predefined routes in the navigation
You will see the Vehicle diagnosis system. To do this, an SD memory card must
activated. message. be inserted into the COMAND system. If no
SD memory card is inserted, you must insert
 Features 365

the card into the card slot on the COMAND Geo fencing
system before saving.
Geo fencing allows you to select areas which
A route can be prepared and sent either by a the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will
customer service representative or via the be informed if the vehicle crosses the boun-
mbrace portal on the Internet. daries of the selected areas. You can select
Each route can include up to 20 way points. the way in which you receive this information
Once a route has been received by the navi- beforehand. Possible options include text
gation system, you will see the <route message, e-mail or an automated call.
name> has been saved to memory card. The area can be determined as either a circle

Stowage and features

Do you want to start route guidance? or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners.
message in the COMAND display. The route is You can specify up to ten areas simultane-
saved to the SD memory card. ously. Different settings are possible for each
X To start route guidance: select YesYes. area.
An overview of the route is shown in the USA only: these settings can be called up
display. under "Owners Online" at http://
i If you select No
No, the saved route can be www.mbusa.com.
called up later via the navigation menu. Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call
X Select Start
Start. and inform the customer service representa-
Route guidance is started. tive that you wish to activate geo fencing.
Currently inactive areas can be activated by
i Downloaded and saved data can be called text message.
up again in COMAND.
You can find further information in the sep- Triggering the vehicle alarm
arate COMAND Operating Instructions.
With this function, you can trigger the vehi-
Speed alert cle's panic alarm via text message. An alarm
sounds and the exterior lighting flashes.
You can define the upper speed limit, which Depending on the setting, the panic alarm
must not be exceeded by the vehicle. lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, the
If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehi- alarm switches off.
cle, a message will be sent to the Customer
Assistance Center. The Customer Assistance
Center then forwards this information to you. Garage door opener
You can select the way in which you receive General notes
this information beforehand. Possible options
include text message, e-mail or an automated The HomeLink® garage door opener integra-
call. ted in the rear-view mirror allows you to oper-
The data you receive contains the following ate up to three different door and gate sys-
information: tems.
Rthe location where the speed limit was Use the integrated garage door opener only
exceeded on garage doors that:
Rthe time at which the speed limit was Rhave safety stop and reverse features and
exceeded Rmeet current U.S. federal safety standards
Rthe selected speed limit which was excee- Once programed, the integrated garage door
ded opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the
function of the garage door system's remote
Z
366 Features

control. Please also read the operating the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
instructions for the garage door system. out sufficient ventilation.
When programing a garage door opener, park
the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the Programming
engine while programing.
Certain garage door drives are incompatible Programing buttons
with the integrated garage door opener. If you Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
have difficulty programing the integrated (Y page 366).
garage door opener, contact an authorized
Stowage and features

Mercedes-Benz Center.
Alternatively, you can call the following tele-
phone assistance services:
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
RCanada: Customer Service at
1-800-387-0100
RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free
of charge)
More information on HomeLink® and/or Garage door remote control A is not inclu-
compatible products is also available online ded with the integrated garage door opener.
at http://www.homelink.com. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
Notes on the declaration of conformity tion lock (Y page 167).
(Y page 28). X Select one of buttons ; to ? to use to
USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4 control the garage door drive.
Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4 X To start programing mode: press and
hold one of buttons ; to ? on the inte-
Important safety notes grated garage door opener.
The garage door opener is now in program-
G WARNING ing mode. After a short time, indicator
When you operate or program the garage door lamp : lights up yellow.
with the integrated garage door opener, per-
Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon
sons in the range of movement of the garage
as button ;, = or ? is programed for the
door can become trapped or struck by the
first time. If the selected button has already
garage door. There is a risk of injury.
been programed, indicator lamp : will
When using the integrated garage door only light up yellow after ten seconds have
opener, always make sure that nobody is elapsed.
within the range of movement of the garage
X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator
door.
lamp : flashes yellow.
X To program the remote control: point
G WARNING
garage door remote control A towards
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
buttons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to 20 cm).
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
 Features 367

X Press and hold button B on remote control X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
A until indicator lamp : lights up green. tion lock (Y page 167).
When indicator lamp : lights up green: X Get out of the vehicle.
programing is finished. X Press the programing button on the door
When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro- drive unit.
graming was successful. The next step is to Usually, you now have 30 seconds to ini-
synchronize the rolling code. tiate the next step.
X Release button B on remote control A for
X Get into the vehicle.
the garage door drive system.

Stowage and features

X Press previously programed button ;, =
If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the
programing procedure for the correspond- or ? on the integrated garage door opener
ing button on the rear-view mirror. When until the door closes.
doing so, vary the distance between remote The rolling code synchronization is then
control A and the rear-view mirror. complete.
The required distance between remote Notes on programing the remote control
control A and the integrated garage door Canadian radio frequency laws require a
opener depends on the garage door drive "break" (or interruption) of the transmission
system. Several attempts might be neces- signals after broadcasting for a few seconds.
sary. You should test every position for at Therefore, these signals may not last long
least 25 seconds before trying another enough for the integrated garage door
position. opener. The signal is not recognized during
Synchronizing the rolling code programing. Comparable with Canadian law,
some U.S. garage door openers also feature a
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" "break".
(Y page 366).
Proceed as follows:
If the garage door system uses a rolling code,
you will also have to synchronize the garage Rif you live in Canada
door system with the integrated garage door Rif you have difficulties programing the
opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you garage door opener (regardless of where
will need to use the programing button on the you live) when using the programing steps.
door drive control panel. The programing but- X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on
ton may be positioned at different locations the integrated garage door opener.
depending on the manufacturer. It is usually After a short time, indicator lamp : lights
located on the door drive unit on the garage up yellow.
ceiling. X Release the button.
Familiarize yourself with the garage door Indicator lamp : flashes yellow.
drive operating instructions, e.g. under "Pro- X Press button B of garage door remote
graming of additional remote controls", control A for two seconds, then release it
before carrying out the following steps. for two seconds.
Your vehicle must be within reach of the X Press button B again for two seconds.
garage door or gate opener drive. Make sure
X Repeat this sequence on button B of
that neither your vehicle nor any persons/
objects are present within the sweep of the remote control A until indicator lamp :
door or gate. lights up green.
When indicator lamp : lights up green:
programing is finished.

Z
368 Features

When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro- Before performing these steps, make sure
graming was successful. The next step is to that new batteries have been installed in
synchronize the rolling code. garage door drive remote control A.
X Release button B of remote control A of RNote that some remote controls only trans-
the garage door drive. mit for a limited amount of time (the indi-
If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the cator lamp on the remote control goes out).
programing process for the corresponding Press button B on remote control A again
button on the rear-view mirror. When doing before transmission ends.
so, vary the distance between remote con- RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door
Stowage and features

trol A and the rear-view mirror. opener unit. This can improve signal recep-
The required distance between remote tion/transmission.
control A and the integrated garage door
opener depends on the garage door drive Opening/closing the garage door
system. Several attempts might be neces-
sary. You should test every position for at After it has been programed, the integrated
least 25 seconds before trying another garage door opener performs the function of
position. the garage door system remote control.
Please also read the operating instructions
Problems when programing for the garage door system.
If you are experiencing problems programing X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
the integrated garage door opener on the tion lock (Y page 167).
rear-view mirror, take note of the following X Press button ;, = or ? which you have
instructions: programed to operate the garage door.
RCheck the transmitter frequency used by Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-
garage door drive remote control A and cator lamp : lights up green.
whether it is supported. The transmitter Garage door system with a rolling code:
frequency can usually be found on the back indicator lamp : flashes green.
of the garage door drive remote control. The transmitter will transmit a signal as long
The integrated garage door opener is com- as the button is pressed. The transmission is
patible with devices that have units which halted after a maximum of ten seconds and
operate in the frequency range of 280 to indicator lamp : lights up yellow. Press but-
433 MHz. ton ;, = or ? again if necessary.
RReplace the batteries in garage door
remote control A. This increases the like- Clearing the memory
lihood that garage door remote control A
Make sure that you clear the memory of the
will transmit a strong and precise signal to
integrated garage door opener before selling
the integrated garage door opener.
the vehicle.
RWhen programing, hold remote control A
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
at varying distances and angles from the
button which you are programing. Try vari- tion lock (Y page 167).
ous angles at a distance between 2and X Press and hold buttons ; and ?.
12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same angle The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow
but at varying distances. and then green.
RIf another remote control is available for the X Release buttons ; and ?.
same garage door drive, repeat the same The memory of the integrated garage door
programing steps with this remote control. opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.
 Features 369

Floormats Infrared reflective windshield

G WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter

Stowage and features

the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
The infrared reflecting glass prevents the
top of one another.
vehicle interior from becoming too hot. It also
blocks radio waves up into the gigahertz
range.
To enable operation of radio-controlled equip-
ment, e.g. toll recording systems, areas on
the windshield are permeable to radio
waves :. In these areas, you can install
radio-controlled systems.
These areas can best be seen from outside
the vehicle by observing the light reflected off
the windshield.

Floormat on the driver's side (example)

X Driver's seat/front-passenger seat:
slide the respective seat back.
X Rear seats: slide the respective seat for-
wards.
X To install: place the floormat in the foot-
well.
X Press studs : onto retainers ;.
X To remove: pull the floormat from retain-
ers ;.
X Remove the floormat.

Z
370
 371

Useful information ............................ 372

Engine compartment ........................ 372
ASSYST PLUS .................................... 376
Care .................................................... 377

Maintenance and care

372 Engine compartment

Useful information G WARNING

The engine compartment contains moving
i This Operator's Manual describes all components. Certain components, such as
models and all standard and optional equip- the radiator fan, may continue to run or start
ment of your vehicle available at the time of again suddenly when the ignition is off. There
publication of the Operator's Manual. is a risk of injury.
Country-specific differences are possible. If you need to do any work inside the engine
Please note that your vehicle may not be compartment:
equipped with all features described. This
Rswitch off the ignition
also applies to safety-related systems and
functions. Rnever reach into the area where there is a
risk of danger from moving components,
Maintenance and care

i Read the information on qualified special- such as the fan rotation area
ist workshops (Y page 29).
Rremove jewelry and watches
Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-

Engine compartment ple, away from moving parts

Hood G WARNING
Important safety notes The ignition system and the fuel injection sys-
tem work under high voltage. If you touch
G WARNING components which are under voltage, you
If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when could get an electric shock. There is a risk of
the vehicle is in motion and block your view. injury.
There is a risk of an accident. Never touch components of the ignition sys-
Never unlatch the hood while driving. tem or fuel injection system when the ignition
is switched on.
G WARNING
When opening and closing the hood, it may Opening the hood
suddenly fall into the closed position. There is
a risk of injury to persons within range of G WARNING
movement of the hood. Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
Open and close the hood only when no one is
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
within its range of movement.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
G WARNING
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
Opening the hood when the engine is over-
touch only the components described in the
heated or when there is a fire in the engine
following.
compartment could expose you to hot gases
or other service products. There is a risk of
injury. G WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield
Let an overheated engine cool down before
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department. Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before opening the hood.
 Engine compartment 373

! Make sure that the windshield wipers are Radiator

not folded away from the windshield. You
could otherwise damage the windshield Vehicles with a diesel engine: do not cover
wipers or the hood. the radiator, for example with a winter front or
bug cover. The readings of the on-board-diag-
nostic system may otherwise be inaccurate.
Some of these readings are required by law
and must be accurate at all times.

Engine oil
General notes

Maintenance and care

Depending on your driving style, the vehicle
consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per
600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption
X Make sure that the windshield wipers are
may be higher than this when the vehicle is
turned off.
new or if you frequently drive at high engine
X Pull release lever : on the hood. speeds.
The hood is released.
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may
be in a different location.
When checking the oil level:
Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.
Rthe engine should be switched off for
approximately five minutes if the engine is
at normal operating temperature.
Rif the engine is not at normal operating
temperature, e.g. if the engine was only
started briefly, wait about 30 minutes
before carrying out the measurement.
X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch han-
dle ; up and lift the hood. Checking the oil level using the oil dip-
If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in stick
(40 cm), the hood is opened and held open
G WARNING
automatically by the gas-filled strut.
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
Closing the hood of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height Working in the engine compartment poses a
of approximately 8 in (20 cm). risk of injury.
X Check that the hood has engaged properly. Where possible, let the engine cool down and
If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not touch only the components described in the
properly engaged. Open it again and close following.
it with a little more force.

Z
374 Engine compartment

G WARNING
If engine oil comes into contact with hot com-
ponents in the engine compartment, it may
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to
the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and
thoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-
ponents before starting the engine.

H Environmental note
Example: vehicles with a gasoline engine When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If
Maintenance and care

oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to

the environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters that

have been approved for vehicles with a ser-
vice system. You can obtain a list of the
engine oils and oil filters tested and
approved in accordance with the
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service
Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service
center.
Example: vehicles with a diesel engine Damage to the engine or exhaust system is
X Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide caused by the following:
tube. Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have
X Wipe off oil dipstick :. not been specifically approved for the
X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide service system
tube to the stop, and take it out again. Rreplacing engine oil and oil filters after
If the level is between MIN mark = and the interval for replacement specified by
MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct. the service system has been exceeded
X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = Rusing engine oil additives.
or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) engine oil.
! Do not add too much oil. adding too much
engine oil can result in damage to the
Adding engine oil engine or to the catalytic converter. Have
G WARNING excess engine oil siphoned off.
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
 Engine compartment 375

Let the engine cool down before opening the

cap. Wear eye and hand protection when
opening the cap. Open the cap slowly half a
turn to allow pressure to escape.

Example: engine oil cap

Maintenance and care

X Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove
it.
X Add engine oil.
If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on
the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of X Park the vehicle on a level surface.
engine oil. Only check the coolant level when the vehi-
X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn cle is on a level surface and the engine has
clockwise. cooled down.
Ensure that the cap locks into place X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
securely. tion lock (Y page 167).
X Check the oil level again with the oil dip- On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the
stick (Y page 373). Start/Stop button twice (Y page 167).
X Check the coolant temperature gauge in
Further information on engine oil
(Y page 451). the multifunction display.
The coolant temperature must be below
158 ‡ (70 †).
Additional service products X Turn the SmartKey to position
0 (Y page 167) in the ignition lock.
Checking coolant level X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter-

G WARNING clockwise to allow excess pressure to

escape.
Certain components in the engine compart-
X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot. remove it.
Working in the engine compartment poses a If the coolant is at the level of marker bar =
risk of injury. in the filler neck when cold, there is enough
coolant in coolant expansion tank ;.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in
following. (1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the filler
neck when warm, there is enough coolant
G WARNING in expansion tank ;.
X If necessary, add coolant that has been tes-
The engine cooling system is pressurized, par-
ticularly when the engine is warm. When ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
opening the cap, you could be scalded by hot X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far
coolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury. as it will go.

Z
376 ASSYST PLUS

For further information on coolant, see X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.
(Y page 452). X Add the premixed washer fluid.
X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck
Adding washer fluid to the windshield until it engages.
washer system
If the washer fluid level drops below the rec-
G WARNING ommended minimum of 1 liter, a message
Certain components in the engine compart- appears in the multifunction display prompt-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts ing you to add washer fluid (Y page 325).
of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Further information on windshield washer
Working in the engine compartment poses a fluid/antifreeze (Y page 453).
risk of injury.
Maintenance and care

Where possible, let the engine cool down and

touch only the components described in the ASSYST PLUS
following.
Service message
G WARNING The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
Windshield washer concentrate is highly flam- informs you of the next service due date.
mable. If it comes into contact with hot engine Information on the type of service and service
components or the exhaust system it could intervals (see the separate Maintenance
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Booklet).
Make sure that no windshield washer con- You can obtain further information from an
centrate is spilled next to the filler neck. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
does not show any information on the
engine oil level. Observe the notes on the
engine oil level (Y page 373).
The multifunction display shows a service
message for several seconds, e.g.:
RService A in .. Days
RService A Due
RService A Exceeded by .. Days
Example: washer fluid reservoir Depending on the operating conditions of the
vehicle, the remaining time or distance until
the next service due date is displayed.
The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a
number or another letter, shows the type of
service. A stands for a minor service and B for
a major service.
You can obtain further information from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
does not take into account any periods of
Example: washer fluid reservoir in AMG vehicles
 Care 377

time during which the battery is disconnec- after the service work has been carried out.
ted. You can also obtain further information on
Maintaining the time-dependent service maintenance work, for example.
schedule:
Special service requirements
X Note down the service due date displayed
in the multifunction display before discon- The specified maintenance interval takes only
necting the battery. the normal operation of the vehicle into
or account. Under arduous operating conditions
X After reconnecting the battery, subtract or increased load on the vehicle, mainte-
the battery disconnection periods from the nance work must be carried out more fre-
service date shown on the display. quently, for example:

Maintenance and care

Rregular city driving with frequent intermedi-
ate stops
Hiding a service message Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel
short distances
X Press the % or a button on the steer-
Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor road
ing wheel.
surfaces
Rif the engine is often left idling for long peri-

Displaying service messages ods

Under these or similar conditions, have, for
X Switch on the ignition. example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- replaced or changed more frequently. Under
ing wheel to select the Serv. menu. arduous operating conditions, the tires must
X Press the 9 or : button to select the be checked more often. Further information
ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by can be obtained at a qualified specialist work-
pressing the a button. shop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
The service due date appears in the multi- ter.
function display.
Driving abroad
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network
Information about Service
is also available in other countries. You can
Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service obtain further information from any author-
interval display ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis-

play has been inadvertently reset, this set- Care
ting can be corrected at a qualified special-
ist workshop. General notes
Have service work carried out as described H Environmental note
in the Maintenance Booklet. This may oth-
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning
erwise lead to increased wear and damage
cloths in an environmentally responsible man-
to the major assemblies or the vehicle.
ner.
A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset
the ASSYST PLUS service interval display

Z
378 Care

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function
of the following: is activated, the vehicle brakes automati-
Rdry, rough or hard cloths cally in certain situations. To prevent dam-
age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC
Rabrasive cleaning agents
PLUS and the HOLD function in the follow-
Rsolvents
ing or other similar situations:
Rcleaning agents containing solvents
Rwhen towing the vehicle
Do not scrub. Rin the car wash
Do not touch the surfaces or protective
films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice ! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless
scraper. You could otherwise scratch or Automatic Car Wash as these use special
damage the surfaces and protective film. cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can
Maintenance and care

damage the paintwork or plastic parts.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extended
period straight after cleaning it, particularly ! Make sure that:
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause are fully closed.
increased corrosion of the brake discs and Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you (the OFF button has been pressed).
should drive for a few minutes after clean- Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position
ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the 0.
brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The
Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.
vehicle can then be parked.
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for ! In car washes with a towing mechanism,
retaining the quality in the long term. make sure that the automatic transmission
is in transmission position N, otherwise the
Use care products and cleaning agents rec-
vehicle could be damaged.
ommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
RVehicles with a SmartKey:
Do not remove the SmartKey from the
Washing the vehicle and cleaning the ignition lock. Do not open the driver's
paintwork door or front-passenger door when the
engine is switched off. Otherwise, the
Automatic car wash automatic transmission selects park
position P automatically and locks the
G WARNING
wheels. You can prevent this by shifting
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing
the automatic transmission to N before-
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
hand.
After the vehicle has been washed, brake
RVehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
carefully while paying attention to the traffic
conditions until full braking power is restored. Do not open the driver's door or front-
passenger door when the engine is
switched off. Otherwise, the automatic
transmission selects park position P
automatically and locks the wheels.
Observe the following to make sure that the
automatic transmission stays in position N:
 Care 379

X Make sure the vehicle is stationary and the When using the vehicle in winter, remove all
ignition is switched off. traces of road salt deposits carefully and as
X Turn the SmartKey to position soon as possible.
2 (Y page 167) in the ignition lock.
Use the SmartKey instead of the Start/ Power washers
Stop button on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO.
G WARNING
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
tion N. to the tires or chassis components. Compo-
X Release the brake pedal. nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-
X Release the electric parking brake. edly. There is a risk of an accident.

Maintenance and care

X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart- Do not use power washers with circular jet
Key in the ignition lock. nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car tires or chassis components replaced imme-
wash from the very start. diately.
If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before ! Always maintain a distance of at least
cleaning it in an automatic car wash. 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off power washer nozzle. Information about
wax from the windshield and the wiper the correct distance is available from the
blades. This will prevent smears and reduce equipment manufacturer.
wiping noises caused by residue on the wind- Move the power washer nozzle around
shield. when cleaning your vehicle.
Do not aim directly at any of the following:
Washing by hand
Rtires
In some countries, washing by hand is only Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.
allowed at specially equipped washing bays.
Relectrical components
Observe the legal requirements in all coun-
tries concerned. Rbattery
Rconnectors
X Do not use hot water and do not wash the
vehicle in direct sunlight. Rlights

X Use a soft sponge to clean. Rseals

X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car Rtrim

shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz. Rventilation slots
X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a Damaged seals or electrical components
gentle jet of water. can lead to leaks or failures.
X Do not point the water jet directly towards
the air inlets. Cleaning the paintwork
X Use plenty of water and rinse out the
! Do not affix:
sponge frequently.
Rstickers
X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
Rfilms
thoroughly with a chamois.
X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the Rmagnetic plates or similar items
paintwork. to painted surfaces. You could otherwise
damage the paintwork.
Z
380 Care

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected ! The following may cause the paint to
by corrosion and damage caused by inade- become shiny and thus reduce the matte
quate care cannot always be completely effect:
repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe- RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable mate-
cialist workshop. rials.
X Remove dirt immediately, where possible, RFrequent use of car washes.
while avoiding rubbing too hard.
RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.
X Soak insect remains with insect remover
and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol-
X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.
off the treated areas afterwards. wax. These products are only suitable for
high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles
Maintenance and care

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,

with matte finish leads to considerable sur-
oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently
face damage (shiny, spotted areas).
with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or
lighter fluid. Always have paintwork repairs carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.
X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
X Use silicone remover to remove wax. ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax
treatment under any circumstances.
If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint
surface, use the paint care products recom- Observe these notes if your vehicle has a
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. clear matte finish. This will help you to avoid
This is the case approximately every three to damage to the paintwork due to incorrect
five months, depending on the climate con- treatment.
ditions and the care product used. These notes also apply to light alloy wheels
If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if with a clear matte finish.
the paint has become dull, the paint cleaner i The vehicle should preferably be washed
recommended and approved by Mercedes- by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo
Benz should be used. and plenty of water.
Do not use these care products in the sun or
on the hood while the hood is hot. i Use only insect remover and car shampoo
from the range of recommended and
X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB
approved Mercedes-Benz care products.
Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to
the paintwork quickly and provisionally.
Cleaning the vehicle parts
Matte finish care
Cleaning the wheels
! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy
wheels. Polishing causes the finish to ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products
shine. to remove brake dust. This could damage
wheel bolts and brake components.
! Do not park the vehicle for an extended
period straight after cleaning it, particularly
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
 Care 381

should drive for a few minutes after clean- ! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,
ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the the wiper blade could be damaged.
brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The
vehicle can then be parked.
! Do not clean wiper blades too often and
do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the
graphite coating could be damaged. This
Cleaning the windows
could cause wiper noise.
G WARNING ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
You could become trapped by the windshield back. The windshield could be damaged if
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from
injury.

Maintenance and care

the windshield.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
damp cloth.
wiper blades.
X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, before switching on the ignition.
solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-
vents to clean the inside of the windows. Do Cleaning the exterior lighting
not touch the insides of the windows with
hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
There is otherwise a risk of damaging the cloths which are suitable for plastic light
windows. lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or
cleaning cloths could scratch or damage
! Clean the water drainage channels of the the plastic light lenses.
windshield and the rear window at regular X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior
intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals
lighting using a wet sponge and a mild
and pollen may under certain circumstan-
cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car
ces prevent water from draining away. This
shampoo or cleaning cloths.
can lead to corrosion damage and damage
to electronic components.
Mirror turn signals
X Clean the inside and outside of the win-
dows with a damp cloth and a cleaning ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
product that is recommended and cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths could scratch or damage the plastic
Cleaning wiper blades lenses of the mirror turn signals.
X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn
G WARNING signals in the exterior mirror housing using
You could become trapped by the windshield a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of cloths.
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and Cleaning the sensors
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
wiper blades. ! If you clean the sensors with a power
washer, make sure that you keep a dis-
tance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between
Z
382 Care

the vehicle and the power washer nozzle.

Information about the correct distance is
available from the equipment manufac-
turer.

X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean

Maintenance and care

camera lens :.

Cleaning the exhaust pipe

G WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can
become very hot. If you come into contact
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn
X Clean sensors : of the driving systems yourself. There is a risk of injury.
with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. Always be particularly careful around the
exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow
these components to cool down before touch-
Cleaning the rear view camera
ing them.
! Do not clean the camera lens and the area
around the rear view camera with a power ! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-
washer. based cleaning agents such as sanitary
cleansers or wheel cleaners.
Impurities combined with the effects of road
grit and corrosive environmental factors may
cause flash rust to form on the surface. You
can restore the original shine of the exhaust
pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in win-
ter and after washing.
X Clean the exhaust pipe with a chrome care
product tested and approved by Mercedes-
Benz.

X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean Cleaning the trailer tow hitch
camera lens :.
H Environmental note
Cleaning the 360° camera Dispose of rags soaked in oil and grease in an
environmentally responsible manner.
! Do not clean the camera lens and the area
around the 360° camera with a power ! Do not clean the ball coupling with a
washer.360 power washer. Do not use solvents.
 Care 383

! Please note the care instructions in the X Before cleaning the display, make sure that
trailer coupling manufacturer's operating it is switched off and has cooled down.
instructions. X Clean the display surface using a commer-
cially available microfiber cloth and
TFT/LCD display cleaner.
X Dry the display surface using a dry micro-
fiber cloth.

Cleaning Night View Assist Plus

! Never clean the camera lens. When clean-
ing the field of vision of the driving systems,

Maintenance and care

make sure that you do not spray glass
cleaner on the camera lens. If the camera
The ball coupling must be cleaned if it lens is dirty, visit a qualified specialist work-
becomes dirty or corroded. shop.
X Remove rust on the ball of the ball coupling,
e.g. with a wire brush.
X Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or a
brush.
X After cleaning, lightly oil or grease ball cou-
pling :.
X Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch is
working properly.
i You can also have the maintenance work
on the ball coupling and the trailer tow hitch
X Fold down the camera cover by recess :.
carried out by a qualified specialist work-
shop.

Interior care
Cleaning the display
! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol-
lowing:
Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline
Rabrasive cleaning agents
Rcommercially-available household clean- X Use a soft cloth to clean the windshield in
ing agents front of camera ;.
These may damage the display surface. Do
not put pressure on the display surface
when cleaning. This could lead to irrepara-
ble damage to the display.

Z
384 Care

Cleaning the plastic trim can lose their shine if chrome polish is
used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead
G WARNING when cleaning the trim pieces.
Care products and cleaning agents containing If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very
solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you
become porous. As a result, plastic parts may are unsure as to whether the trim pieces
come loose in the event of air bag deploy- are chrome-plated or not, consult an
ment. There is a risk of injury. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Do not use any care products and cleaning
X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with
agents to clean the cockpit.
a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber
! Do not affix the following to plastic surfa- cloth.
Maintenance and care

ces: X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning

products recommended and approved by
Rstickers
Mercedes-Benz.
Rfilms
Rscented oil bottles or similar items Cleaning the seat covers
You can otherwise damage the plastic.
General notes
! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent
or sunscreen to come into contact with the ! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean gen-
plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality uine leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA
look of the surfaces. covers. If used often, these can damage the
cover.
X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free
cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth. i Note that regular care is essential to
X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod- ensure that the appearance and comfort of
ucts recommended and approved by the covers is retained over time.
Mercedes-Benz. Genuine leather seat covers
The surface may change color temporarily.
! To retain the natural appearance of the
Wait until the surface is dry again.
leather, observe the following cleaning
instructions:
Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or
RClean genuine leather covers carefully
selector lever
with a damp cloth and then wipe the cov-
X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use ers down with a dry cloth.
leather care agents that have been recom- RMake sure that the leather does not
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. become soaked. It may otherwise
become rough and cracked.
Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele- ROnly use leather care agents that have
ments been tested and approved by Mercedes-
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents Benz. You can obtain these from a quali-
such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, pol- fied specialist workshop.
ishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of Leather is a natural product.
damaging the surface. It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for
! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces. example:
The trim pieces have a chrome look but are
mostly made of anodized aluminum and
 Care 385

Rdifferences in the texture Cleaning the headliner and carpets

Rmarks caused by growth and injury X Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush
Rslight nuances of color or dry shampoo.
These are characteristics of leather and not X Carpets: use the carpet and textile clean-
material defects. ing agents recommended and approved by
Seat covers of other materials Mercedes-Benz.
! Observe the following when cleaning:
RClean artificial leather covers with a cloth
moistened with a solution containing 1%
detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).

Maintenance and care

RClean cloth covers with a microfiber
cloth moistened with a solution contain-
ing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liq-
uid). Rub carefully and always wipe entire
seat sections to avoid leaving visible
lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards.
Cleaning results depend on the type of
dirt and how long it has been there.
RClean Alcantara® covers with a damp
cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire
seat sections to avoid leaving visible
lines.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNING
Seat belts can become severely weakened if
bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat
belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of
an accident. This poses an increased risk of
injury or fatal injury.
Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical

cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts
by heating at temperatures above 176 ‡
(80 †) or in direct sunlight.
X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solu-
tion.

Z
386
 387

Useful information ............................ 388

Where will I find...? ........................... 388
Flat tire .............................................. 389
Battery (vehicle) ................................ 393
Jump-starting .................................... 397
Towing and tow-starting .................. 399
Fuses .................................................. 402

Breakdown assistance
388 Where will I find...?

Useful information Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

i This Operator's Manual describes all

models and all standard and optional equip-
ment of your vehicle available at the time of
publication of the Operator's Manual.
Country-specific differences are possible.
Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and
functions.
i Read the information on qualified special-
: Lug wrench
ist workshops (Y page 29).
; Towing eye
Breakdown assistance

= Ratchet wrench
Where will I find...? ? Alignment bolt
A Tire sealant filler bottle
Vehicle tool kit
B Tire inflation compressor
General notes C Folding wheel chock
The vehicle tool kit can be found in the stow- D Jack
age well under the cargo compartment floor. E Wheel bolts
i Apart from certain country-specific varia- X Lift the cargo compartment floor up
tions, the vehicles are not equipped with a (Y page 349).
tire-change tool kit. Some tools for chang- X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 390).
ing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For
more information on which tools are Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency
required to perform a wheel change on your spare wheel
vehicle, consult a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Tools required for changing a wheel may
include, for example:
RJack
RWheel chock
RLug wrench
RRatchet wrench
RAlignment bolt

: Alignment bolt
; Velcro fastener
= Folding wheel chock
? Ratchet wrench
A Lug wrench
B Jack
 Flat tire 389

C Wheel bolts X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the

D Towing eye Start/Stop button from the ignition lock
(Y page 167).
X Lift the cargo compartment floor up
X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.
(Y page 349).
Make sure that they are not endangered as
they do so.
X Make sure that no one is near the danger
Flat tire
area while a wheel is being changed. Any-
Preparing the vehicle one who is not directly assisting in the
wheel change should, for example, stand
Your vehicle may be equipped with:
behind the barrier.
RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat prop- X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traf-
erties) (Y page 389) fic conditions when doing so.
Vehicle preparation is not necessary on

Breakdown assistance
X Close the driver's door.
vehicles with MOExtended tires.
X Unload heavy luggage.
Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 388)
Ran emergency spare wheel (only for certain i Only operate the tire inflation compressor
countries) (Y page 440) using a 12 V socket, even if the ignition is
Information on changing/mounting a wheel turned off (Y page 354).
(Y page 429). An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-
X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
board voltage does not drop too low. If the
on-board voltage is too low, the power to
level ground, as far away as possible from
the sockets is automatically cut. This
traffic.
ensures that there is sufficient power to
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
start the engine.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 190).
X If possible, bring the front wheels into the MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
straight-ahead position. properties)
X Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD pack-
General notes
age: make sure that highway level is selec-
ted (Y page 214). With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat
X Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD pack- characteristics), you can continue to drive
age: make sure that highway level is selec- your vehicle even if there is a total loss of
ted (Y page 214). pressure in one or more tires. The affected
tire must not show any clearly visible damage.
X Switch off the engine.
You can recognize MOExtended tires by the
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove
MOExtended marking which appears on the
the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the
next to the tire size designation, the load-
driver's door. bearing capacity and the speed index
The on-board electronics now have status (Y page 423).
0. This is the same as the SmartKey having MOExtended tires may only be used in con-
been removed. junction with an active tire pressure loss
warning system or with an active tire pressure
monitor.
390 Flat tire

If the pressure loss warning message Important safety notes

appears in the multifunction display:
G WARNING
RObserve the instructions in the display
When driving in emergency mode, the driving
messages (Y page 320).
characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-
RCheck the tire for damage.
ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.
RIf driving on, observe the following notes. There is a risk of an accident.
The maximum driving distance is approx- Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.
imately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehicle is Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,
partially laden and approximately 18 miles and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,
(30 km) when the vehicle is fully laden. off-road). This applies in particular to a laden
In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis- vehicle.
tance possible depends upon: Stop driving in emergency mode if:
RSpeed Ryou hear banging noises.
Breakdown assistance

RRoad condition Rthevehicle starts to shake.

ROutside temperature Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode RESP® is intervening constantly.
may be reduced by extreme driving condi- Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.
tions/maneuvers, or it can be increased
After driving in emergency mode, have the
through a moderate style of driving.
wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist
The maximum permissible distance which workshop with regard to their further use. The
can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from defective tire must be replaced in every case.
the moment the tire pressure loss warning
appears in the multifunction display.
You must not exceed a maximum speed of TIREFIT kit
50 mph (80 km/h).
Important safety notes
i When replacing one or all tires, make sure
that you use only tires: TIREFIT is a tire sealant.
Rof the size specified for the vehicle and You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to
Rmarked "MOExtended" 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire
tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tem-
If a tire has gone flat and cannot be
peratures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).
replaced with a MOExtended tire, a stand-
ard tire may be used as a temporary meas- G WARNING
ure. Make sure that you use the proper size In the following situations, the tire sealant is
and type (summer or winter tire). unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-
i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:
are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger
factory. It is therefore recommended that than those mentioned above.
you additionally equip your vehicle with a Rthe wheel rim is damaged.
TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or
feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.
on a flat tire.
A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a quali-
fied specialist workshop. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
 Flat tire 391

G WARNING X Do not remove any foreign objects which

The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita- have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or
tion. It must not come into contact with your nails.
skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accom-
inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away panying TIREFIT sticker and the tire infla-
from children. There is a risk of injury. tion compressor from the stowage well
If you come into contact with the tire sealant, underneath the cargo compartment floor
observe the following: (Y page 388).
X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker within
RRinse off the tire sealant from your skin
the driver's field of vision.
immediately with water.
X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the
RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with
valve on the wheel with the defective tire.
your eyes, immediately rinse them thor-
oughly with clean water.

Breakdown assistance
RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately
rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink
plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,
and seek medical attention immediately.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with tire sealant.
RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
attention immediately.

! Do not operate the tire inflation compres-

sor for longer than eight minutes at a time
X Pull plug ? with the cable and hose A out
without a break. It may otherwise overheat. of the housing.
X Screw hose A onto flange B of tire seal-
The tire inflation compressor can be oper-
ated again once it has cooled down. ant bottle :.
X Place tire sealant bottle : head down-
Comply with the manufacturer’s safety wards into recess ; of the tire inflation
instructions on the sticker on the tire inflation compressor.
compressor.

Using the TIREFIT kit

X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty

tire.
TIREFIT sticker, 2-part X Screw filler hose D onto valve C.

Z
392 Flat tire

X Insert connector ? into a 12 V socket in G WARNING

your vehicle. If the required tire pressure is not reached
Observe the notes on sockets after the specified time, the tire is too badly
(Y page 354). damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni- tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire
tion lock (Y page 167). pressure that is too low can significantly
X Press on/off switch = on the tire inflation impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-
compressor to I. acteristics. There is a risk of accident.
The tire inflation compressor is switched Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
on. The tire is inflated. specialist workshop.
i First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire.
The pressure can briefly rise to approx- Tire pressure reached
imately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
G WARNING
Breakdown assistance

Do not switch off the tire inflation com-

pressor during this phase. A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant
impairs the driving characteristics and is not
X Allow the tire inflation compressor to run suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of
for five minutes. The tire should then have accident.
attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa
You should therefore adapt your driving style
(1.8 bar/26 psi).
accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed
If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) the specified maximum speed with a tire that
has been attained after five minutes: has been repaired using tire sealant.
(Y page 392).
If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) ! Residue from the tire sealant may come
has not been attained after five minutes: out of the filler hose after use. This could
(Y page 392). cause stains.
Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic
i If tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. It
bag which contained the TIREFIT kit.
can then be removed like a layer of film.
If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, H Environmental note
have them cleaned with perchloroethylene Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of
at a dry cleaner as soon as possible. professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Tire pressure not reached
If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has has been attained after five minutes:
not been attained after five minutes:
X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire.
the faulty tire. X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire
X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse inflation compressor.
approximately 30 ft (10 m). X Pull away immediately.
X Pump up the tire again.
The maximum speed for a tire sealed with
After a maximum of five minutes the tire tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper
pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/ part of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed
26 psi).
 Battery (vehicle) 393

to the instrument cluster in the driver's X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire
field of vision. inflation compressor.
X Stop after driving for approximately ten X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist
minutes and check the tire pressure with workshop and have the tire changed there.
the tire inflation compressor. X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as
The tire pressure must now be at least soon as possible at a qualified specialist
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). workshop.
X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every
G WARNING
four years at a qualified specialist work-
If the required tire pressure is not reached
shop.
after driving for a short period, the tire is too
badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair
the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a
tire pressure that is too low can significantly Battery (vehicle)

Breakdown assistance
impair the vehicle's braking and driving char- Important safety notes
acteristics. There is a risk of accident.
Special tools and expert knowledge are
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
required when working on the battery, e.g.
specialist workshop.
removal and installing. You should therefore
i In cases such as the one mentioned have all work involving the battery carried out
above, contact an authorized Mercedes- at a qualified specialist workshop.
Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes G WARNING
(in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Can- Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
ada). can lead, for example, to a short circuit and
X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and lead to function restrictions applying to
Loading Information placard on the driver's safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting sys-
side B-pillar or the tire pressure table in the tem, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP®
fuel filler flap for values. (Electronic Stability Program). The operating
X To increase the tire pressure: switch on safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You
the tire inflation compressor. could lose control of the vehicle, for example:
Rbraking
Rin the event of abrupt steering maneuver
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not
adapted to the road conditions
There is a risk of an accident.
In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-
dent, contact a qualified specialist workshop
immediately. Do not drive any further. You
should have all work involving the battery car-
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
E Pressure release button
i For further information about ABS and
F Pressure gauge ESP®, see (Y page 68) and (Y page 73).
X To reduce the tire pressure: press pres-
sure release button E on the filler hose.

Z
394 Battery (vehicle)

G WARNING G WARNING
Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
of sparks, which could ignite the highly explo- Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean
explosion. over the battery. Keep children away from
Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with
body to remove any existing electrostatic water and seek medical attention.
build-up.
H Environmental note
The highly flammable gas mixture forms when Batteries contain dangerous
charging the battery as well as when jump- substances. It is against the
starting. law to dispose of them with
Always make sure that neither you nor the the household rubbish. They
battery is electrostatically charged. A build-
Breakdown assistance

must be collected separately

up of electrostatic charge can be caused, for and recycled to protect the
example: environment.
Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic Dispose of batteries in an
fibers environmentally friendly
Rdue to friction between clothing and seats manner. Take discharged
Rif you push or pull the battery across the batteries to a qualified spe-
carpet or other synthetic materials cialist workshop or a special
collection point for used bat-
Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth
teries.
G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produ- ! Have the battery checked regularly at a
ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or qualified specialist workshop.
sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can Observe the service intervals in the Main-
ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. tenance Booklet or contact a qualified spe-
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a cialist workshop for more information.
connected battery does not come into con- ! You should have all work involving the
tact with vehicle parts. battery carried out at a qualified specialist
RNever place metal objects or tools on a bat- workshop. In the exceptional case that it is
tery. necessary for you to disconnect the battery
RIt is important that you observe the descri- yourself, make sure that:
bed order of the battery terminals when Ryou switch off the engine and remove the
connecting and disconnecting a battery. SmartKey. On vehicles with KEYLESS-
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the GO, ensure that the ignition is switched
battery poles with identical polarity are off. Check that all the indicator lamps in
connected. the instrument cluster are off. Otherwise,
RIt is particularly important to observe the electronic components, such as the
described order when connecting and dis- alternator, may be damaged.
connecting the jumper cables. Ryou first remove the negative terminal

RNever connect or disconnect the battery clamp and then the positive terminal
terminals while the engine is running. clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.
 Battery (vehicle) 395

Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic sys- In order for the battery to achieve the maxi-
tem may be damaged. mum possible service life, it must always be
Rthe transmission is locked in position P sufficiently charged.
after disconnecting the battery. The vehi- The vehicle battery, like other batteries, can
cle is secured against rolling away. You discharge over time if you do not use the
can then no longer move the vehicle. vehicle. In this case, have the battery discon-
The battery and the cover of the positive nected at a qualified specialist workshop. You
terminal clamp must be installed securely can also charge the battery with a charger
during operation. recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a
qualified specialist workshop for further infor-
Comply with safety precautions and take pro- mation.
tective measures when handling batteries.
Have the battery condition of charge checked
Risk of explosion. more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly
for short trips or if you leave it standing idle

Breakdown assistance
for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified spe-
Fire, open flames and smoking are cialist workshop if you wish to leave your
prohibited when handling the bat- vehicle parked for a long period of time.
tery. Avoid creating sparks. i Remove the SmartKey if you park the
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid con- vehicle and do not require any electrical
tact with skin, eyes or clothing. consumers. The vehicle will then use very
little energy, thus conserving battery
Wear suitable protective clothing,
power.
especially gloves, apron and face-
guard. i If the power supply has been interrupted,
Rinse any acid spills immediately e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you will
with clear water. Contact a physi- have to:
cian if necessary. Rset the clock. Information on setting the
Wear eye protection. clock can be found in the separate oper-
ating instructions.
On vehicles with COMAND and a naviga-
Keep children away. tion system, the clock is set automati-
cally.
Rreset the function for folding the exterior
mirrors in/out automatically, by folding
Observe this Operator's Manual. the mirrors out once (Y page 123)

Charging the battery

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use batteries which have G WARNING
been tested and approved for your vehicle by During charging and jump-starting, explosive
Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide gases can escape from the battery. There is a
increased impact protection to prevent vehi- risk of an explosion.
cle occupants from suffering acid burns Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating
should the battery be damaged in the event of sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
an accident.

Z
396 Battery (vehicle)

ventilation while charging and jump-starting. The jump-starting connection point is in the
Do not lean over a battery. engine compartment (Y page 397).
Read the battery charger's operating instruc-
G WARNING tions before charging the battery.
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. X Open the hood.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. X Connect the battery charger to the positive
Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean terminal and ground point in the same
over the battery. Keep children away from order as when connecting the donor bat-
batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with tery in the jump-starting procedure
water and seek medical attention. (Y page 397).

G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at tempera-
Breakdown assistance

tures below freezing point. When jump-start-

ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases
can escape from the battery. There is a risk of
an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
charging it or jump-starting.

! Only use battery chargers with a maxi-

mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
! Only charge the battery using the jump-
starting connection point.
If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/
warning lamps in the instrument cluster do
not light up, it is highly likely that the dis-
charged battery has frozen. In this case you
may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge
the battery. The service life of a thawed-out
battery may be shorter. The starting charac-
teristics can be impaired, particularly at low
temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Never charge a battery still installed in the
vehicle unless a battery charger unit
approved by Mercedes-Benz is being used. An
accessory battery charge unit specially adap-
ted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available.
It permits the charging of the battery in its
installed position. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for further informa-
tion and availability. Charge the battery in
accordance with the separate instructions for
the battery charger.
 Jump-starting 397

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a
positive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment.
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the
battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek
medical attention.

G WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk
of an explosion.

Breakdown assistance
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-
tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks
are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.
RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting
and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting
the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the
vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

! Vehicles with a gasoline engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Other-
wise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by non-combusted fuel.
If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not
light up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither
jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be
shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have
the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
398 Jump-starting

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,
the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper
cables. Observe the following points:
RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,
jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
RVehicles with a gasoline engine: only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust
system are cold.
RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.
ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected
for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.
RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Breakdown assistance

Make sure that:

Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.
Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal
clamp do not come into contact with other metal sections.
Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is
running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 167). On vehicles
with KEYLESS-GO, make sure the ignition is switched off (Y page 167). All indicator lamps
in the instrument cluster must be off.
X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.
X Open the hood.

(Example)
 Towing and tow-starting 399

Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-
starting device.
X Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow.
X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B
using the jumper cable, always begin with positive terminal ; on your own vehicle first.
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using
the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicle B first.
X Start the engine.
X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.
X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point A and negative terminal ?, then from
positive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own
vehicle first.

Breakdown assistance
X Close cover : of positive terminal ; after removing the jumper cables.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any
qualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting G WARNING

If the weight of the vehicle to be towed or tow-
Important safety notes
started is greater than the permissible gross
G WARNING weight of your vehicle:
Functions relevant to safety are restricted or Rthe towing eye could detach itself
no longer available if: Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll-
Rthe engine is not running. over.
Rthe brake system or the power steering is There is a risk of an accident.
malfunctioning. When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,
Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply its weight should not be greater than the per-
or the vehicle's electrical system. missible gross weight of your vehicle.
If your vehicle is being towed, much more
force may be necessary to steer or brake. ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function
There is a risk of an accident. is activated, the vehicle brakes automati-
cally in certain situations. To prevent dam-
In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,
age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC
make sure that the steering moves freely.
PLUS and the HOLD function in the follow-
ing or other similar situations:
Rwhen towing the vehicle
Rin the car wash
! Make sure that the electric parking brake
is released. If the electric parking brake is
faulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
400 Towing and tow-starting

! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the It is better to have the vehicle transported
towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could than to have it towed.
be damaged. If the vehicle has suffered transmission dam-
! Do not use the trailer tow hitch for recov- age, have it transported on a transporter or
ery or towing. Do not use the towing eye for trailer.
recovery. this could damage the vehicle. If The automatic transmission must be in posi-
in doubt, have the vehicle recovered using tion N when the vehicle is being towed.
a crane. The battery must be connected and charged.
Otherwise, you:
! When towing, pull away slowly and
smoothly. Pull the towed vehicle as straight Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
as possible and not at an acute angle. the ignition lock
Excessive tractive power could damage the Rcannot release the electric parking brake
vehicles. Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to
Breakdown assistance

i When towing, it is preferable to use a rigid position N

towing bar as opposed to a tow rope. A rigid i Disarm the automatic locking feature
towing bar helps to keep the tractive power before the vehicle is towed (Y page 287).
low. You could otherwise be locked out when
! When towing vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, pushing or towing the vehicle.
use the key instead of the Start/Stop but-
ton. Otherwise, the automatic transmission
may shift to position P when the driver's or Installing/removing the towing eye
front-passenger door are opened, which Installing the towing eye
could lead to damage to the transmission.
! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
This could damage the vehicle.
! Vehicles with differential locks: make
sure the differential locks are in automatic
mode. When towing, the differential locks
must not be switched on. The transmission
may otherwise be damaged.
! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of
30 miles (50km). The towing speed of
30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded.
If the vehicle has to be towed more than
30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be
raised and transported.
! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its
weight must not exceed the maximum per- Example: towing eye mounting covers
missible gross vehicle weight of your vehi- : Front cover
cle. ; Back cover

i Information on your vehicle's gross vehi- The brackets for the screw-in towing eyes are
cle weight rating can be found on the vehi- located in the bumpers. They are at the front
cle identification plate (Y page 446). and at the rear, behind the covers.
 Towing and tow-starting 401

X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle Towing a vehicle with both axles on
tool kit (Y page 388). the ground
X To open the cover at the front: press the
It is important that you observe the safety
mark on cover : inwards in the direction instructions when towing away your vehicle
of the arrow. (Y page 399).
X To open the cover at the rear: insert a
The automatic transmission automatically
flat, blunt object into the cutout and lever shifts to position P when you open the driver's
cover ; out of the bumper. or front-passenger door or when you remove
X Take cover : or ; off the opening. the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X Screw in and tighten the towing eye clock-
In order to ensure that the automatic trans-
wise to the stop. mission stays in position N when towing the
vehicle, you must observe the following
Removing the towing eye points:

Breakdown assistance
X Unscrew and remove the towing eye. X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and
X Attach cover : or ; to the bumper and the SmartKey in the ignition lock is in posi-
press until it engages. tion 0.
X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the
Towing the vehicle with the rear axle SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button
raised (Y page 167).
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
! The ignition must be switched off if you
X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-
are towing the vehicle with the rear axle
raised. Intervention by ESP® could other- tion N.
wise damage the brake system. X Release the brake pedal.
X Release the electric parking brake.
Only possible for vehicles without
4MATIC. X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps ignition lock.

(Y page 132). X Switch on the hazard warning lamps

X Bring the front wheels into the straight-

(Y page 132).
ahead position. i In order to signal a change of direction
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni- when towing the vehicle with the hazard
tion lock and remove the SmartKey from warning lamps switched on, use the com-
the ignition lock. bination switch as usual. In this case, only
the indicator lamps for the direction of
X When leaving the vehicle, take the Smart-
travel flash. After resetting the combina-
Key or the KEYLESS-GO key with you.
tion switch, the hazard warning lamp starts
When towing your vehicle with the rear axle flashing again.
raised, it is important that you observe the
safety instructions (Y page 399).
Transporting the vehicle
! You may only secure the vehicle by the
wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as

Z
402 Fuses

axle or steering components. Otherwise, i You can find information on "Jump-start-

the vehicle could be damaged. ing" under (Y page 397).
The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle
onto a trailer or transporter for transporting
purposes. Fuses
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- Important safety notes
tion lock.
G WARNING
X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-
tion N. If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if
you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-
As soon as the vehicle has been loaded: age, the electric cables could be overloaded.
X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an
applying the electric parking brake. accident and injury.
Always replace faulty fuses with the specified
Breakdown assistance

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-

tion P. new fuses having the correct amperage.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-
! For the fuse boxes in the engine compart-
tion lock and remove it. ment and under the rear bench seat, only
X Secure the vehicle. use fuses with the suffix "S". Otherwise,
components or systems could be dam-
aged.
Information on 4MATIC vehicles The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-
with either the front or the rear axle raised, nents on the circuit and their functions stop
as doing so will damage the transmission. operating.
If the vehicle has transmission damage or Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of
damage to the front or rear axle, have it trans- the same rating, which you can recognize by
ported on a transporter or trailer. the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed
in the fuse allocation chart.
In the event of damage to the electrical
system If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
cause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-
If the battery is defective, the automatic
cialist workshop, e.g. an authorized
transmission will be locked in position P. To
Mercedes-Benz Center.
shift the automatic transmission to position
N, you must provide power to the vehicle's
electrical system in the same way as when Before changing a fuse
jump-starting (Y page 397).
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter Observe the important safety notes
or trailer. (Y page 402)
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 190).
Tow-starting (emergency engine X Switch off all electrical consumers.
starting) X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-
! Vehicles with automatic transmission tion lock and remove it (Y page 167). On
must not be tow-started. You could other-
wise damage the automatic transmission.
 Fuses 403

vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure the X To close: clip in cover : on the front of the
ignition is switched off (Y page 167). dashboard.
All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster X Fold cover : inwards until it engages.
must be off.
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
RFuse box on the front-passenger side of the Fuse box in the engine compartment
dashboard Pay attention to the important safety notes
RFuse box in the engine compartment on the (Y page 402).
right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed
G WARNING
in the direction of travel
When the hood is open and the windshield
RFuse box under the rear bench seat
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
The fuse allocation chart is located in the fuse the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
box under the rear bench seat (Y page 404).

Breakdown assistance
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before opening the hood.
Dashboard fuse box ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
Observe the important safety notes fuse box when the cover is open.
(Y page 402) ! When closing the cover, make sure that it
! Do not use a pointed object such as a is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
screwdriver to open the cover in the dash- seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
board. You could damage the dashboard or the operation of the fuses.
the cover.
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.
! When closing the cover, make sure that it
is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
the operation of the fuses.

X Open the hood.

X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture
from the fuse box.
X To open: open clamps ;.
X Fold up cover : in the direction of the
arrow and remove it.
X To close: check whether the seal is seated
X Open the front-passenger door. correctly in cover :.
X To open: pull cover : outwards in the X Insert cover : at the side of the fuse box
direction of the arrow and remove it. into the retainers.

Z
404 Fuses

X Fold down cover : and close clamps ;.

X Close the hood.

Fuse box under the rear bench seat

Pay attention to the important safety notes
(Y page 402).
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.
! When closing the cover, make sure that it
is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
Breakdown assistance

the operation of the fuses or the cover

could be damaged by the rear bench seat.

X Fold the left-hand rear bench seat forward

(Y page 346).
X To open: reach into recesses ; on each
side of fuse box cover :.
X Fold cover : up in the direction of the
arrow and remove it from the fuse box.
i The fuse allocation chart is located in a
recess at the side of the fuse box.
X To close: place cover : on the fuse box.
X Press cover : down until you feel the
clamps engage.
X Fold back the left-hand rear bench seat
(Y page 346).
 405

Useful information ............................ 406

Important safety notes .................... 406
Operation ........................................... 406
Winter operation ............................... 408
Tire pressure ..................................... 410
Loading the vehicle .......................... 418
All about wheels and tires ............... 421
Changing a wheel ............................. 429
Wheel and tire combinations ........... 434
Emergency spare wheel ................... 440

Wheels and tires

406 Operation

Useful information Tires with run-flat characteristics:

Rpay attention to the information and warn-
i This Operator's Manual describes all ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires with
models and all standard and optional equip- run-flat characteristics).
ment of your vehicle available at the time of
publication of the Operator's Manual. Accessories that are not approved for your
Country-specific differences are possible. vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or that are not
Please note that your vehicle may not be being used correctly can impair operating
equipped with all features described. This safety.
also applies to safety-related systems and Before purchasing and using non-approved
functions. accessories, visit a qualified specialist work-
i Read the information on qualified special- shop and inquire about:
ist workshops (Y page 29). Rsuitability
Rlegal stipulations
Rfactory recommendations
Important safety notes
Information on the dimensions and types of
wheels and tires for your vehicle can be found
G WARNING
in the "Wheel/tire combinations" section
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,
Wheels and tires

(Y page 434).
the wheel brakes or suspension components
Information on air pressure for the tires on
may be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-
your vehicle can be found:
dent.
Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa-
Always replace wheels and tires with those
that fulfill the specifications of the original tion placard on the B-pillar (Y page 418)
part. Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler

When replacing wheels, make sure to use the flap (Y page 187)
correct: Rin the "Tire pressure" section

Rdesignation
Rmodel
Operation
When replacing tires, make sure to use the
correct: Information on driving
Rdesignation If the vehicle is heavily loaded, check the tire
Rmanufacturer pressures and correct them if necessary.
Rmodel While driving, pay attention to vibrations,
noises and unusual handling characteristics,
G WARNING e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that
the wheels or tires are damaged. If you sus-
A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer-
pect that a tire is defective, reduce your
ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.
speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon
There is a risk of accident.
as possible to check the wheels and tires for
Tires without run-flat characteristics: damage. Hidden tire damage could also be
Rdo not drive with a flat tire. causing the unusual handling characteristics.
Rimmediately replace the flat tire with your If you find no signs of damage, have the tires
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or and wheels checked at a qualified specialist
consult a qualified specialist workshop. workshop.
 Operation 407

When parking your vehicle, make sure that The service life of tires depends on the fol-
the tires do not get deformed by the curb or lowing factors amongst other things:
other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over RDrivingstyle
curbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try
RTirepressure
to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Oth-
RDistance covered
erwise, the tires, particularly the sidewalls,
may be damaged.
Important safety notes on the tire
Regular checking of wheels and tires tread

G WARNING G WARNING
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres- Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.
sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.
your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk
of hydroplaning increases, in particular where
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
speed is not adapted to suit the driving con-
and replace any damaged tires immediately.
ditions. There is a risk of accident.
Regularly check the wheels and tires of your If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires
vehicle for damage at least once a month, as may exhibit different levels of wear at differ-

Wheels and tires

well as after driving off-road or on rough ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, you
roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of should regularly check the tread depth and
tire pressure. Pay particular attention to dam- the condition of the tread across the entire
age such as: width of all tires.
Rcuts in the tires Minimum tire tread depth for:
Rpunctures RSummer tires: â in (3 mm)
Rtears in the tires RM+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
Rbulges on tires For safety reasons, replace the tires before
Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels the legally prescribed limit for the minimum
tire tread depth is reached.
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the
condition of the tread across the whole width
of the tire (Y page 407). If necessary, turn the
front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the
inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect
the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not
mount anything onto the valve other than the
standard valve cap or other valve caps
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
Do not use any other valve caps or systems,
e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.
Regularly check the pressure of all the tires Bar indicator : for tread wear is integrated
particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire into the tire tread.
pressure as necessary (Y page 410). Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
Observe the notes on the emergency spare law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire
wheel (Y page 440). tread. They are visible once the tread depth is

Z
408 Winter operation

approximately á in (1.6 mm). If this is the TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not
case, the tire is so worn that it must be feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.
replaced. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a quali-
fied specialist workshop.

Selecting, mounting and replacing

tires Winter operation
ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same General notes
type and make.
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a quali-
Exception: it is permissible to install a dif-
fied specialist workshop at the onset of win-
ferent type or make in the event of a flat
ter.
tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires
with run-flat characteristics" section Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"
(Y page 389). section (Y page 429).
ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto
the wheels. Driving with summer tires
RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for
the first 60 miles (100 km). They only reach At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer
their full performance after this distance. tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and
Wheels and tires

RDo not drive with tires which have too little

braking power. Change the tires on your vehi-
cle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very
tread depth, as this significantly reduces
cold temperatures could cause cracks to
the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).
form, thereby damaging the tires perma-
RReplace the tires after six years at the lat-
nently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept
est, regardless of wear. responsibility for this type of damage.
Observe the notes on the emergency spare
wheel (Y page 440). G WARNING
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-
sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
properties) Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat and replace any damaged tires immediately.
characteristics), you can continue to drive
your vehicle even if there is a total loss of
pressure in one or more tires. M+S tires
MOExtended tires may only be used in con- G WARNING
junction with an active tire pressure loss
M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than
warning system or with an active tire pressure
ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter
monitor and on wheels specifically tested by
and do not provide sufficient traction. There is
Mercedes-Benz.
a risk of an accident.
Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with
M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in
a flat tire (Y page 389).
(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires
are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use win-
factory. It is therefore recommended that ter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire
you additionally equip your vehicle with a are identified by the M+S marking.
 Winter operation 409

Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake you have installed snow chains. The vehicle
symbol in addition to the M+S marking pro- may otherwise be damaged.
vide the best possible grip in wintry road con-
! On some tire sizes there is not enough
ditions.
space for snow chains. To avoid damage to
Only these tires will allow driving safety sys- the vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel and
tems such as ABS and ESP® to function opti- tire combinations" section under "Tires and
mally in winter. These tires have been devel- wheels".
oped specifically for driving in snow.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on mends that you only use snow chains that
all wheels to maintain safe handling charac- have been specially approved for your vehicle
teristics. by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding
Always observe the maximum permissible standard of quality.
speed specified for the M+S tires you have If you intend to mount snow chains, please
mounted. bear the following points in mind:
Once the winter tires are mounted:
ROnly use snow chains when driving on
X Check the tire pressures (Y page 413). roads completely covered by snow.
X Restart the tire pressure monitor Remove the snow chains as soon as possi-
(Y page 414). ble when you come to a road that is not

Wheels and tires

X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire pres- snow-covered.
sure loss warning system (Y page 414). RDo not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).
For more information on driving with the
RLocal regulations may restrict the use of
emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 440).
snow chains. Observe the appropriate reg-
ulations if you wish to mount snow chains.
Snow chains RSnow chains may not be mounted on all
wheel/tire combinations. Permissible
G WARNING wheel-tire combinations (Y page 434).
If snow chains are installed to the front
wheels, they may drag against the vehicle i You may wish to deactivate ESP® when
body or chassis components. This could pulling away with snow chains installed
cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. (Y page 74). You can thereby allow the
There is a risk of an accident. wheels to spin in a controlled manner, ach-
ieving an increased driving force (cutting
To avoid hazardous situations:
action).
Rnever install snow chains to the front
For more information on driving with the
wheels
emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 440).
Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the
rear wheels.

! You must drive at raised vehicle level

(height 1) if snow chains have been instal-
led. The vehicle may otherwise be dam-
aged.
! Vehicles with Adaptive Damping Sys-
tem (ADS): do not use the sports mode if

Z
410 Tire pressure

Tire pressure pressure value stated in the table inside the

fuel filler flap.
Tire pressure specifications Further information on tire pressures can be
Important safety notes obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING Tire and Loading Information placard

Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the
following risks:
Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load
and vehicle speed increase.
Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or
unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-
ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures : Recommended tire pressures
and check the pressure of all the tires includ-
The Tire and Loading Information placard is
Wheels and tires

ing the spare wheel:

on the B-pillar on the driver's side
Rmonthly, at least (Y page 418).
Rif the load changes The Tire and Loading Information placard con-
Rbefore beginning a long journey tains the recommended tire pressures for
Runder different operating conditions, e.g. cold tires. The recommended tire pressures
off-road driving are valid for the maximum permissible load
If necessary, correct the tire pressure. and up to the maximum permissible vehicle
speed.
i The specifications on the sample Tire and
Loading Information placard and tire pres- Tire pressure table
sure tables are examples. Tire pressure The tire pressure table is on the inside of the
specifications are vehicle-specific and may fuel filler flap.
deviate from the data shown here. The tire
pressure specifications that are valid for
your vehicle can be found on the Tire and
Loading Information placard and tire pres-
sure table on the vehicle.

General notes
The recommended tire pressures for the tires
mounted at the factory can be found on the
labels described here.
Operation with the emergency spare
wheel(Y page 440). Example: tire pressure table for all tires permitted
for this vehicle by the factory
Operation with a trailer: the applicable
The tire pressure table contains the recom-
value for the rear tires is the maximum tire
mended pressures for cold tires for various
 Tire pressure 411

operating conditions, i.e. differing load and tire pressure table, may have a negative
speed conditions. effect on driving comfort.
If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this
can lead to an excessive build up of heat and
a sudden loss of pressure.
For more information, contact a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNING
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the
Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire
If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire pressure that is too low may result in a tire
pressure information following is only valid blow-out. There is a risk of an accident.
for that tire size. The load conditions "partially RCheck the tire for foreign objects.
laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the
table for different numbers of occupants and valve is leaking.

Wheels and tires

amounts of luggage. The actual number of
If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-
seats may differ.
tact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING
If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and
malfunction, which can cause tire pressure
loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-
sure monitors keep the tire valve open. This
can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a
risk of an accident.
Only screw the standard valve cap or other
valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for
Some tire pressure tables show only the rim
your vehicle onto the tire valve.
diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.
R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the
and can be found on the tire sidewall tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire
(Y page 423). does not permit any reliable conclusion about
If the tire pressures have been set to the the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with
lower values for lighter loads and/or lower the electronic tire pressure monitoring sys-
road speeds, the pressures should be reset to tem, the tire pressure can be checked using
the higher values: the on-board computer.
Rif you want to drive with an increased load The tire temperature and pressure increase
and/or when the vehicle is in motion. This is depend-
Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds ent on the driving speed and the load.
Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-
i The tire pressures for increased loads sures when the tires are cold.
and/or higher road speeds, shown in the
Z
412 Tire pressure

The tires are cold: Underinflated tires may:

Rif the vehicle has been parked without Roverheat, leading to tire defects
direct sunlight on the tires for at least three Rhave an adverse effect on handling charac-
hours and teristics
Rif the vehicle has not been driven further Rwear quickly and unevenly
than 1 mile (1.6 km) Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption
The tire temperature changes depending on
the outside temperature, the vehicle speed Overinflation
and the tire load. If the tire temperature
changes by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure G WARNING
changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/ Tires with excessively high pressure can burst
1.5 psi). Take this into account when check- because they are damaged more easily by
ing the pressure of warm tires. Only correct road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they
the tire pressure if it is too low for the current also suffer from irregular wear, which can
operating conditions. If you check the tire severely impair the braking properties and the
pressure when the tires are warm, the result- driving characteristics. There is a risk of an
ing value will be higher than if the tires were accident.
cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tire Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the
pressure to the value specified for cold tires. tires, including the spare wheel.
Wheels and tires

The tire pressure would otherwise be too low.

Observe the recommended tire pressures for Overinflated tires may:
cold tires: Rincrease the braking distance
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard Rhave an adverse effect on handling charac-
on the B-pillar on the driver's side teristics
Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of the Rwear quickly and unevenly
fuel filler flap Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort
Rprinted in yellow on the rim of the emer- Rbe more susceptible to damage
gency/collapsible spare wheel (depending
on vehicle equipment) Maximum tire pressures

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflation
G WARNING
Tires with pressure that is too low can over-
heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,
they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-
ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-
ing properties and the driving characteristics.
There is a risk of an accident. : Example: maximum permissible tire pres-
Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the sure
tires, including the spare wheel. Never exceed the maximum permissible tire
inflation pressure. Always observe the rec-
ommended tire pressure for your vehicle
 Tire pressure 413

when adjusting the tire pressure Tire pressure loss warning system
(Y page 410).
General notes
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-
specific and may deviate from the values in While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pres-
the illustration. sure loss warning system monitors the set
tire pressure using the rotational speed of the
wheels. This enables the system to detect
Checking the tire pressures significant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed
of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a
Important safety notes loss of pressure, a corresponding warning
Observe the notes on tire pressure message will appear in the multifunction dis-
(Y page 410). play.
Information on air pressure for the tires on You can recognize the tire pressure loss warn-
your vehicle can be found: ing by the Run Flat Indicator Active
Press 'OK' to Restart message which
Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa- appears in the Service menu of the multi-
tion placard on the B-pillar (Y page 418) function display. Information on the message
Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler display can be found in the "Restarting the tire
flap (Y page 187) pressure loss warning system" section

Wheels and tires

Rin the "Tire pressure" section (Y page 414).
Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 410)
Important safety notes
Checking tire pressures manually The tire pressure warning system does not
To determine and set the correct tire pres- warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure.
sure, proceed as follows: Observe the notes on the recommended tire
pressure (Y page 410).
X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to
be checked. The tire pressure loss warning does not
replace the need to regularly check the tire
X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto
pressure. An even loss of pressure on several
the valve. tires at the same time cannot be detected by
X Read the tire pressure and compare it with the tire pressure loss warning system.
the recommended value on the Tire and The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn
Loading Information placard (Y page 410). you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
X If the tire pressure is too low, increase it to tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the
the recommended value. event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the
X If the tire pressure is too high, release air by vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid
pressing down the metal pin in the valve. abrupt steering maneuvers.
Use the tip of a pen, for example. Then, The function of the tire pressure loss warning
check the tire pressure again using the tire system is limited or delayed if:
pressure gauge.
Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's
X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
tires.
X Repeat these steps for the other tires.
Rroad conditions are wintry.
Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.

Z
414 Tire pressure

Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cor- If you wish to confirm the restart:
nering at high speeds or driving with high X Press the a button.
rates of acceleration). The Tire Pressure Now OK? message
Ryou are towing a very heavy or large trailer. appears in the multifunction display.
Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the X Press the 9 or : button to select
vehicle or on the roof). Yes.
Yes
X Press the a button.
Restarting the tire pressure loss warn- The Run Flat Indicator Restarted
ing system message appears in the multifunction dis-
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system play.
if you have: After a teach-in period, the tire pressure
Rchanged the tire pressure loss warning system will monitor the set
tire pressures of all four tires.
Rchanged the wheels or tires
Rmounted new wheels or tires If you wish to cancel the restart:
X Before restarting, make sure that the tire X Press the % button.
pressures are set properly on all four tires or
for the respective operating conditions. X If the Tire Pressure Now OK? message
The recommended tire pressures can be appears, use the 9 or : button to
Wheels and tires

found on the Tire and Loading Information select Cancel

Cancel.
placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side X Press the a button.
or the tire pressure table on the fuel filler The tire pressure values stored at the last
flap. restart will continue to be monitored.
The tire pressure loss warning system can
only give reliable warnings if you have set
the correct tire pressure. If an incorrect tire Tire pressure monitor
pressure is set, these incorrect values will
be monitored. General notes
X Also observe the notes in the section on tire
If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi-
pressures (Y page 410). cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pres-
2 in the ignition lock (Y page 167). sure monitor warns you if the pressure drops
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- in one or more of the tires. The tire pressure
ing wheel to select the Service menu. monitor only functions if the correct sensors
X Press the 9 or : button to select are installed on all wheels.
Tire Pressure.
Pressure Information on tire pressures is displayed in
X Press the a button. the multifunction display. After a few minutes
The Run Flat Indicator Active of driving, the current tire pressure of each
Press 'OK' to Restart message tire is shown in the Service menu of the mul-
appears in the multifunction display. tifunction display.
 Tire pressure 415

USA only:
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the
low tire pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will
Example: current tire pressure display
flash for approximately a minute and then
For information on the message display, refer remain continuously illuminated. This
to the "Checking the tire pressure electroni- sequence will be repeated every time the vehi-
cally" section (Y page 416). cle is started as long as the malfunction
exists.
Important safety notes When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect or signal
G WARNING
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc-
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), tions may occur for a variety of reasons,
should be checked at least once a month including the mounting of incompatible
when cold and inflated to the pressure rec- replacement or alternate tires or wheels on
ommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func-
the Tire and Loading Information placard on

Wheels and tires

tioning properly. Always check the TPMS mal-
the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure function telltale after replacing one or more
label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that
vehicle has tires of a different size than the the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
size indicated on the Tire and Loading Infor- allow the TPMS to continue to function prop-
mation placard or the tire pressure label, you erly.
should determine the proper tire pressure for
those tires. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has pressure to that recommended for cold tires
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring which is suitable for the operating situation
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- (Y page 410). Note that the correct tire pres-
sure telltale when one or more of your tires sure for the current operating situation must
are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor.
when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the
you should stop and check your tires as soon warning threshold for the warning message is
as possible, and inflate them to the proper aligned to the reference values taught-in.
pressure. Driving on a significantly underin- Restart the tire pressure monitor after adjust-
flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can ing the pressure of the cold tires
lead to tire failure. Underinflation also (Y page 417). The current pressures are
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and saved as new reference values. As a result, a
may affect the vehicle's handling and stop- warning message will appear if the tire pres-
ping ability. sure drops significantly.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute The tire pressure monitor does not warn you
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv- of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe
er's responsibility to maintain correct tire the notes on the recommended tire pressure
pressure, even if underinflation has not (Y page 410).
reached the level to trigger illumination of the The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn
TPMS low tire pressure telltale. you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the

Z
416 Tire pressure

tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the Checking the tire pressure electroni-
event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the cally
vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
abrupt steering maneuvers.
2 (Y page 167) in the ignition lock.
The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warn-
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing lamp in the instrument cluster for indicat-
ing a pressure loss or malfunction. Whether ing wheel to select the Service menu.
the warning lamp flashes or lights up indi- X Press the 9 or : button to select

cates whether a tire pressure is too low or the Tire Pressure.

Pressure
tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning: X Press the a button.

Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the The current tire pressure of each tire is
tire pressure on one or more tires is signif- shown in the multifunction display.
icantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is If the vehicle has been parked for longer than
not malfunctioning. 20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be
Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a displayed after driving a few
minute and then remains lit constantly, the minutes message appears.
tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. After a teach-in process, the tire pressure
monitor automatically detects new wheels or
i In addition to the warning lamp, a mes- new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of
sage appears in the multifunction display.
Wheels and tires

the tire pressure value to the individual

Further information can be found on wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure
(Y page 320). Monitor Active display message is shown
If the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning, instead of the tire pressure display. The tire
it may take more than ten minutes for the tire pressures are already being monitored.
pressure warning lamp to inform you of the
i If an emergency spare wheel is mounted,
malfunction by flashing for approximately one the system may continue to show the tire
minute and then remaining lit. When the mal- pressure of the wheel that has been
function has been rectified, the tire pressure removed for a few minutes. If this occurs,
warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of note that the value displayed for the posi-
driving. tion where the spare wheel is mounted is
The tire pressure values indicated by the on- not the same as the current tire pressure of
board computer may differ from those meas- the emergency spare wheel.
ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge.
The tire pressures shown by the on-board Tire pressure monitor warning mes-
computer refer to those measured at sea sages
level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure val-
ues indicated by a pressure gauge are higher If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure
than those shown by the on-board computer. loss in one or more tires, a warning message
In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures. is shown in the multifunction display and the
The operation of the tire pressure monitor can yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp
be affected by interference from radio trans- comes on.
mitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, RIf the Please Correct Tire Pressure
two-way radios) that may be being operated message appears in the multifunction dis-
in or near the vehicle. play, the tire pressure in at least one tire is
 Tire pressure 417

too low and must be corrected at the next X Press the 9 or : button to select
opportunity. Tire Pressure.
Pressure
RIf the Check Tires message appears in the X Press the a button.
multifunction display, the tire pressure in The multifunction display shows the cur-
one or more tires has dropped significantly rent tire pressure for the individual tires or
and the tires must be checked. the Tire pressure will be displayed
RIf the Warning Tire Malfunction after driving a few minutes mes-
appears in the multifunction display, the sage.
tire pressure in one or more tires has drop- X Press the : button.
ped suddenly and the tires must be The Use Current Pressures as New
checked. Reference Values message appears in
the multifunction display.
i If the wheel positions on the vehicle are
rotated, the tire pressures may be dis- If you wish to confirm the restart:
played for the wrong positions for a short X Press the a button.
time. This is rectified after a few minutes of The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted
driving, and the tire pressures are displayed message appears in the multifunction dis-
for the correct positions. play.
After driving for a few minutes, the system
Restarting the tire pressure monitor

Wheels and tires

checks whether the current tire pressures
When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all are within the specified range. The new tire
existing warning messages are deleted and pressures are then accepted as reference
the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses values and monitored.
the currently set tire pressures as the refer- If you wish to cancel the restart:
ence values for monitoring. In most cases, the
tire pressure monitor will automatically X Press the % button.
detect the new reference values after you The tire pressure values stored at the last
have changed the tire pressure. However, you restart will continue to be monitored.
can also define reference values manually as
described here. The tire pressure monitor Radio type approval for the tire pres-
then monitors the new tire pressure values. sure monitor
X Set the tire pressure to the value recom-
mended for the corresponding driving sit- Country Radio type approval number
uation on the Tire and Loading Information USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433A
placard on the driver's side FCC ID: MRXGG4
B-pillar (Y page 410).
FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4
Additional tire pressure values for different
loads can also be found on the tire pressure Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433A
table on the inside of the fuel filler flap IC: 2546A-GG4
(Y page 410). IC: 2546A-MC34MA4
X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct
on all four wheels.
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
2 in the ignition lock.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Service menu.

Z
418 Loading the vehicle

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads
G WARNING
Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a
blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the
steering and driving characteristics and lead
to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.
Observe the load rating of the tires. The load
rating must be at least half of the GAWR of
your vehicle. Never overload the tires by
exceeding the maximum load.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle show

the maximum possible load.
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard : B-pillar, driver's side
is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The
Tire and Loading Information placard
shows the maximum permissible number Maximum permissible gross vehicle
Wheels and tires

of occupants and the maximum permis- weight rating

sible vehicle load. It also contains details
of the tire sizes and corresponding pres-
sures for tires mounted at the factory.
(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the
B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle
identification plate informs you of the
gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up
of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occu-
pants, the fuel and the cargo. You can
also find information about the maximum
gross axle weight rating on the front and
rear axle. X Specification for maximum gross vehicle
The maximum gross axle weight rating is weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading
the maximum weight that can be carried Information placard: "The combined weight
by one axle (front or rear axle). Never of occupants and cargo should never
exceed the maximum load or the maxi- exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."
mum gross axle weight rating for the The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,
front or rear axle. load and luggage must not exceed the speci-
fied value.
i The specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the illustra-
tion are examples. The maximum permis-
sible gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-
specific and may differ from that in the
illustration. You can find the valid maximum
 Loading the vehicle 419

permissible gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
your vehicle on the Tire and Loading Infor- placard.
mation placard. X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
Number of seats X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX kilo-
grams or XXX lbs.
X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount
equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five
150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) =
650 lbs).
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
Maximum number of seats : indicates the
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
maximum number of occupants allowed to
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed

Wheels and tires

travel in the vehicle. This information can be
the available cargo and luggage load capa-
found on the Tire and Loading Information
city calculated in step 4.
placard.
i The specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the illustra-
tion are examples. The number of seats is
vehicle-specific and can differ from the
details shown. The number of seats in your
vehicle can be found on the Tire and Load-
ing Information placard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructions
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575
pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".
X Step 1: Locate the statement "The com-
bined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on

Z
420 Loading the vehicle

Example: steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with
varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use
a maximum load of 1,500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you
are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard (Y page 418).
The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.
Additional information when towing a trailer (Y page 265).
Step 1

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Combined maximum 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)
weight of occupants
and cargo (data from
the Tire and Loading
Information placard)

Step 2
Wheels and tires

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Number of people in 5 3 1
the vehicle (driver
and occupants)
Distribution of the Front: 2 Front: 1 Front: 1
occupants Rear: 3 Rear: 2
Weight of the occu- Occupant 1: 150 lbs Occupant 1: 200 lbs Occupant 1: 150 lbs
pants (68 kg) (91 kg) (68 kg)
Occupant 2: 180 lbs Occupant 2: 190 lbs
(82 kg) (86 kg)
Occupant 3: 160 lbs Occupant 3: 150 lbs
(73 kg) (68 kg)
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
(63 kg)
Occupant 5: 120 lbs
(54 kg)
Gross weight of all 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
occupants
 All about wheels and tires 421

Step 3

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Permissible load 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)
(maximum gross vehi- Ò750 lbs (340 kg) = Ò540 lbs (245 kg) Ò150 lbs (68 kg) =
cle weight rating from 750 lbs (340 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg) 1350 lbs (612 kg)
the Tire and Loading
Information placard
minus the gross
weight of all occu-
pants)

Vehicle identification plate All about wheels and tires

Even if you have calculated the total cargo Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-
carefully, you should still make sure that the ards
gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle
weight rating are not exceeded. Details can Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand-
be found on the vehicle identification plate on ards

Wheels and tires

the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle
(Y page 418).
Permissible gross vehicle weight: the
gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers,
load and trailer load/noseweight (if applica-
ble) must not exceed the permissible gross
vehicle weight.
Gross axle weight rating: the maximum per-
missible weight that can be carried by one
axle (front or rear axle).
To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed
the maximum permissible values (gross vehi- Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are
cle weight and maximum gross axle weight U.S. government specifications. Their pur-
rating), have your loaded vehicle (including pose is to provide drivers with uniform relia-
driver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load if ble information on tire performance data. Tire
applicable) weighed on a suitable vehicle manufacturers have to grade tires using three
weighbridge. performance factors: : tread wear grade, ;
traction grade and = temperature grade.
These regulations do not apply to Canada.
Trailer load/noseweight Nevertheless, all tires sold in North America
are provided with the corresponding quality
The trailer load/noseweight affects the gross grading markings on the sidewall of the tire.
weight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached, Where applicable, the tire grading informa-
the trailer load/noseweight is included in the tion can be found on the tire sidewall between
load along with occupants and luggage. The the tread shoulder and maximum tire width.
trailer load/noseweight is usually approx-
imately 8% of the gross weight of the trailer
and its cargo.
Z
422 All about wheels and tires

Example: The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy

RTreadwear grade: 200 road is always lower than on dry road surfa-
ces.
RTraction grade: AA
You should pay special attention to road con-
RTemperature grade: A
ditions when temperatures are around freez-
All passenger car tires must conform to the ing point.
statutory safety requirements in addition to Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum
these grades. tread depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter
i The actual values for tires are vehicle- tires. Observe the legally required minimum
specific and may deviate from the values in tire tread depth (Y page 407). Winter tires can
the illustration. reduce the braking distance on snow-covered
surfaces in comparison with summer tires.
Treadwear The braking distance is still much further than
on surfaces that are not icy or covered with
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating snow. Take appropriate care when driving.
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested Further information on winter tires (M+S
under controlled conditions on a specified tires) (Y page 408).
U.S. government course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
Temperature
times as well on the government test track as
Wheels and tires

a tire graded 100. G WARNING

The relative performance of tires depends The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
upon the actual conditions of their use, how- lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
ever, and may depart significantly from the not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
norm, due to variations in driving habits, ser- tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
vice practices and differences in road char- in combination, can cause excessive heat
acteristics and climate conditions. build-up and possible tire failure.

Traction The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,

and C. These represent the tire's resistance
G WARNING to the generation of heat and its ability to dis-
The traction grade assigned to this tire is sipate heat when tested under controlled
based on straight-ahead braking traction conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor- test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char- cause the material of the tire to degenerate
acteristics. and reduce tire life, and excessive tempera-
ture can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade
! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage C corresponds to a level of performance
to the drive train. which all passenger car tires must meet under
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher
the tire's ability to stop on a wet surface as levels of performance on the laboratory test
measured under controlled conditions on wheel than the minimum required by law.
specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
 All about wheels and tires 423

Tire labeling Therefore, only use tire types and sizes

approved for your vehicle model. Observe the
Overview tire load rating and speed rating required for
your vehicle.

: Tire width
; Nominal aspect ratio in %
= Tire code
: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard ? Rim diameter

Wheels and tires

(Y page 427) A Load bearing index
; DOT, Tire Identification Number B Speed rating
(Y page 426) General: depending on the manufacturer's
= Maximum tire load (Y page 425) standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall
? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 412) may not contain any letters or may contain
A Manufacturer one letter that precedes the size description.
B Tire material (Y page 426) If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-
C Tire size designation, load-bearing capa- tion (as shown above): these are passenger
city and speed index (Y page 423) vehicle tires according to European manufac-
D Load index (Y page 425) turing standards.
E Tire name If "P" precedes the size description: these are
passenger vehicle tires according to U.S.
The markings described above are on the tire
manufacturing standards.
in addition to the tire name (sales designa-
tion) and the manufacturer's name. If "LT" precedes the size description: these
are light truck tires according to U.S. manu-
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi- facturing standards.
ate from the data in the example. If "T" precedes the size description: these are
compact emergency spare wheels at high tire
Tire size designation, load-bearing pressure, to be used only temporarily in an
capacity and speed rating emergency.
G WARNING Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa- tire width in millimeters.
city and the approved maximum speed could Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ; is the
lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There size ratio between the tire height and tire
is a risk of accident. width and is shown in percent. The aspect

Z
424 All about wheels and tires

ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by Index Speed rating

the tire height.
Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type. S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
"R" represents radial tires; "D" represents T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial
tires. H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in
the size description, depending on the man- W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diam-
eter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in
ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)
inches (in).
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)
is a numerical code that specifies the maxi-
mum load-bearing capacity of a tire. ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in
specified load limit. The maximum permissi- the size description, depending on the
Wheels and tires

ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on The service specification is made up of
the driver's side (Y page 418). load-bearing index A and speed rating B.
Example: RIf the size description of your tire includes
Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum "ZR" and there are no service specifica-
load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can tions, ask the tire manufacturer in order to
bear. For further information on the maximum find out the maximum speed.
tire load in kilograms and lbs, see If a service specification is available, the
(Y page 425). maximum speed is limited according to the
For further information on the load bearing speed rating in the service specification.
index, see "Load index" (Y page 425). Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this exam-
Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the ple, "97 Y" is the service specification. The
approved maximum speed of the tire. letter "Y" represents the speed rating. The
maximum speed of the tire is limited to
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi- 186 mph (300 km/h).
ate from the data in the example. RThe size description for all tires with maxi-
Regardless of the speed rating, always mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)
observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and must include "ZR", and the service specifi-
adapt your driving style to the traffic condi- cation must be given in parentheses. Exam-
tions. ple: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating
Summer tires "(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed of
the tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask
Index Speed rating the tire manufacturer about the maximum
speed.
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
 All about wheels and tires 425

All-weather tires and winter tires Load index

Index Speed rating
Q M+S2 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S2 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S2 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S2 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide

the driving characteristics of winter tires. In
addition to the M+S marking, winter tires In addition to the load bearing index, load
also have the i snowflake symbol on index : may be imprinted after the letters
the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill that identify the speed index B on the side-
the requirements of the Rubber Manufac- wall of the tire (Y page 423).
turers Association (RMA) and the Rubber RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the
Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the example above), represents a standard
tire traction on snow. They have been espe- load (SL) tire

Wheels and tires

cially developed for driving on snow. RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced

An electronic speed limiter prevents your tire

vehicle from exceeding the following speeds: RLight Load: represents a light load tire

Rall RC, D, E: represents a load range that

vehicles (except AMG vehicles):
130 mph (210 km/h) depends on the maximum load that the tire
RAMG vehicles: 155 mph (250 km/h)
can carry at a certain pressure
RAMG vehicles with increased top speed: i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
174 mph (280 km/h) ate from the data in the example.
The speed rating of tires mounted at the fac-
tory may be higher than the maximum speed Maximum load rating
that the electronic speed limiter permits.
Make sure that your tires have the required
speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The
required speed rating for your vehicle can be
found in the "Tires" section (Y page 434).
Further information about reading tire data
can be obtained from any qualified specialist
workshop.

Maximum tire load : is the maximum per-

missible weight for which the tire is approved.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum permissi-
2 Or M+Si for winter tires.

Z
426 All about wheels and tires

ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on by the manufacturer as a code to describe
the driver's side (Y page 418). specific characteristics of the tire.
i The actual values for tires are vehicle- Date of manufacture: date of manufacture
specific and may deviate from the values in A provides information about the age of a
the illustration. tire. The first and second positions represent
the week of manufacture, starting with "01"
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) for the first calendar week. Positions three
and four represent the year of manufacture.
U.S. tire regulations prescribe that every tire For example, a tire that is marked with
manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN "3208", was manufactured in week 32 in
in or on the sidewall of every tire produced. 2008.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
ate from the data in the example.

Tire characteristics
Wheels and tires

The TIN is a unique identification number. The

TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retread-
ers to inform purchasers of recalls and other
safety-relevant matters. It makes it possible
for the purchaser to easily identify the affec-
ted tires. This information describes the type of tire
The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifi- cord and the number of layers in sidewall :
cation code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? and under tire tread ;.
and manufacturing date A. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire ate from the data in the example.
symbol : indicates that the tire complies
with the requirements of the U.S. Department Definition of terms for tires and loading
of Transportation.
Manufacturer identification code: manu- Tire ply composition and material used
facturer identification code ; provides Describes the number of plies or the number
details on the tire manufacturer. New tires of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire
have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tread and sidewall. These are made of steel,
tires have a code with four symbols. nylon, polyester and other materials.
For further information about retreaded tires, Bar
see (Y page 434).
Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds
Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size. per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals
(kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar.
 All about wheels and tires 427

DOT (Department of Transportation) Speed rating

DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements of The speed rating is part of the tire identifica-
the United States Department of Transporta- tion. It specifies the speed range for which the
tion. tire is approved.
Normal occupant weight GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)
The number of occupants which the vehicle is The GTW is the weight of a trailer including the
designed for, multiplied by 68 kilograms weight of the load, luggage, accessories etc.
(150 lb). on the trailer.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
A uniform standard to grade the quality of The gross vehicle weight includes the weight
tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare
and temperature characteristics. Ratings are wheel, accessories installed, occupants, lug-
determined by tire manufacturers using U.S. gage and the drawbar noseweight, if applica-
government testing procedures. The ratings ble. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed
are molded into the sidewall of the tire. the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as
specified on the vehicle identification plate on
Recommended tire pressure the B-pillar on the driver's side.
The recommended tire pressure applies to

Wheels and tires

the tires mounted at the factory. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
The Tire and Loading Information placard con- The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross
tains the recommended tire pressures for weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of
cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the the vehicle including all accessories, occu-
maximum permissible vehicle speed. pants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar nose-
The tire pressure table contains the recom- weight, if applicable). The gross vehicle
mended pressures for cold tires for various weight rating is specified on the vehicle iden-
operating conditions, i.e. differing load and tification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's
speed conditions. side.

Increased vehicle weight due to optional Maximum loaded vehicle weight

equipment The maximum weight is the sum of:
This is the combined weight of all standard Rthe curb weight of the vehicle
and optional equipment available for the vehi- Rthe weight of the accessories
cle, regardless of whether it is actually instal- Rthe load limit
led on the vehicle or not.
Rthe weight of the factory installed optional
Rim equipment
This is the part of the wheel on which the tire Kilopascal (kPa)
is mounted.
Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure
The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight is bar. There are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to
rating. The actual load on an axle must never 1 bar.
exceed the gross axle weight rating. The Load index
gross axle weight rating can be found on the
In addition to the load-bearing index, the load
vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on
index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of
the driver's side.

Z
428 All about wheels and tires

the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capa- Tread

city more precisely. The part of the tire that comes into contact
Curb weight with the road.
The weight of a vehicle with standard equip- Bead
ment including the maximum capacity of fuel, The tire bead ensures that the tire sits
oil and coolant. It also includes the air-condi- securely on the wheel. There are several steel
tioning system and optional equipment if wires in the bead to prevent the tire from
these are installed in the vehicle, but does not coming loose from the wheel rim.
include passengers or luggage.
Sidewall
Maximum load rating The part of the tire between the tread and the
The maximum tire load is the maximum per- bead.
missible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a
tire is approved. Weight of optional extras
The combined weight of those optional extras
Maximum permissible tire pressure that weigh more than the replaced standard
Maximum permissible tire pressure for one parts and more than 2.3 kilograms (5 lbs).
tire. These optional extras, such as high-perform-
Maximum load on one tire ance brakes, level control, a roof rack or a
Wheels and tires

high-performance battery, are not included in

Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated the curb weight and the weight of the acces-
by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle sories.
by two.
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
PSI (pounds per square inch)
This is a unique identifier which can be used
A standard unit of measure for tire pressure. by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for
Aspect ratio example for a product recall, and thus identify
the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the
Relationship between tire height and tire
manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire
width in percent.
type code and the manufacturing date.
Tire pressure
Load bearing index
This is pressure inside the tire applying an
The load bearing index (also load index) is a
outward force to each square inch of the tire's
code that contains the maximum load bearing
surface. The tire pressure is specified in
capacity of a tire.
pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal
(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only Traction
be corrected when the tires are cold. Traction is the result of friction between the
Cold tire pressure tires and the road surface.
The tires are cold: TWR (Tongue Weight Rating)
Rif the vehicle has been parked without The TWR specifies the maximum permissible
direct sunlight on the tires for at least three weight that the ball coupling of the trailer tow
hours and hitch can support.
Rif the vehicle has been driven for less than
1 mile (1.6 km).
 Changing a wheel 429

Treadwear indicators may also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-

Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are dis- dent.
tributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels
level with the bars, the wear limit of á in and tires are of the same dimensions.
(1.6 mm) has been reached.
! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure
Occupant distribution
monitor, electronic components are loca-
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at ted in the wheel.
their designated seating positions. Tire-mounting tools should not be used
Total load limit near the valve. This could damage the elec-
Rated cargo and luggage load plus tronic components.
68 kilograms (150 lb) multiplied by the num- Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-
ber of seats in the vehicle. cialist workshop.
Always observe the instructions and safety
notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
Changing a wheel (Y page 430).
Flat tire The wear patterns on the front and rear tires
differ, depending on the operating conditions.
You can find information on what to do in the Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern

Wheels and tires

event of a flat tire in the "Breakdown assis- has formed on the tires. Front tires typically
tance" section (Y page 389). Information on wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires
driving with MOExtended tires in the event of in the center.
a flat tire can be found under "MOExtended If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you
tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" can rotate the wheels according to the inter-
(Y page 389). vals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book
The "Breakdown assistance" section in your vehicle documents. If no warranty
(Y page 389) contains information and notes book is available, the tires should be rotated
on how to deal with a flat tire. Information on every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to
driving with MOExtended tires in the event of 10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear requires. Do
a flat tire can be found under "MOExtended not change the direction of wheel rotation.
tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and
(Y page 389). the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel
Vehicles with an emergency spare wheel: is rotated. Check the tire pressure and, if nec-
in the event of a flat tire, mount the emer- essary, restart the tire pressure loss warning
gency spare wheel according to the descrip- system or the tire pressure monitor.
tion under "Mounting a wheel" (Y page 430).

Direction of rotation
Rotating the wheels
Tires with a specified direction of rotation
G WARNING have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk
Interchanging the front and rear wheels may of hydroplaning. You will only gain these ben-
severely impair the driving characteristics if efits if the correct direction of rotation is
the wheels or tires have different dimensions. observed.
The wheel brakes or suspension components An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates
its correct direction of rotation.

Z
430 Changing a wheel

Storing wheels X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the

driver's door.
Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, The on-board electronics now have status
dry and preferably dark place. Protect the 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having
tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.
been removed.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the

Cleaning the wheels Start/Stop button from the ignition lock

(Y page 167).
G WARNING X If included in the vehicle equipment,
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt remove the tire-change tool kit from the
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage vehicle.
to the tires or chassis components. Compo- X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect- away.
edly. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use power washers with circular jet i Apart from certain country-specific varia-
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tions, vehicles are not equipped with a tire-
tires or chassis components replaced imme- change tool kit. For information on which
diately. tools are required to perform a wheel
change on your vehicle, consult an author-
Wheels and tires

ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Mounting a wheel Necessary wheel-changing tools can
include, for example:
Preparing the vehicle RJack
X Vehicle with emergency spare wheel: RWheel chock
when mounting the emergency spare RLug wrench
wheel in the event of a flat tire, follow the
additional notes on vehicle preparation Securing the vehicle to prevent it from
under "Flat tire" (Y page 389). rolling away
X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground.
X Unload heavy luggage.
X Apply the electric parking brake manually.
X Bring the front wheels into the straight-
ahead position.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD pack-
age: make sure that highway level is selec-
ted (Y page 214).
X Switch off the engine.
If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock,
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove
it can be found in the tire-change tool kit
the SmartKey from the ignition lock. (Y page 388).
The folding wheel chock is an additional
securing measure to prevent the vehicle from
rolling away, for example when changing a
wheel.
 Changing a wheel 431

X Fold both plates upwards :. must be positioned vertically, directly under

X Fold out lower plate ;. the jacking point of the vehicle.
X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into
the openings in base plate =. ! AMG vehicles with "Minispare" emer-
gency spare wheel: use the "Minispare"
emergency spare wheel only on the rear
axle. If you mount the "Minispare" emer-
gency spare wheel on the front axle, this
could result in damage to the brake system.
If a tire on the front axle is defective, an
intact wheel from the rear axle must first be
replaced with the "Minispare" emergency
spare wheel. The faulty wheel on the front
axle may only then be replaced by the
undamaged wheel from the rear axle.
Securing the vehicle on level ground Make sure to note the placard on the
X On level ground: place chocks or other "Minispare" emergency spare wheel.
suitable items under the front and rear of ! The jack is designed exclusively for jack-
the wheel that is diagonally opposite the ing up the vehicle at the jacking points.

Wheels and tires

wheel you wish to change. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.
Observe the following when raising the vehi-
cle:
RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-
specific jack that has been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incor-
rectly, the jack could tip over with the vehi-
cle raised.
RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold
the vehicle for a short time while a wheel
is being changed. It is not suited for per-
Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients forming maintenance work under the vehi-
cle.
X On light downhill gradients: place
RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and
chocks or other suitable items in front of
downhill slopes.
the wheels of the front and rear axle.
RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from
rolling away by applying the parking brake
Raising the vehicle and inserting wheel chocks. Do not disen-
G WARNING gage the parking brake while the vehicle is
raised.
If you do not position the jack correctly at the
RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a
There is a risk of injury. large, flat, load-bearing underlay must be
used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip
Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-
underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats.
ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack

Z
432 Changing a wheel

RDo not use wooden blocks or similar X Take the ratchet wrench out of the vehicle
objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of
jack will not be able to achieve its load- the jack so that the letters AUF are visible.
bearing capacity due to the restricted
height.
RMake sure that the distance between the
underside of the tires and the ground does
not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).
RDo not place your hands or feet under the
raised vehicle.
RDo not lie under the vehicle.
RDo not start the engine when the vehicle is
raised.
RNever open or close a door or the tailgate
; Jacking point
when the vehicle is raised.
= Jack
RMake sure that no persons are present in
? Crank
the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
X Position jack = at jacking point ;.
The alignment bolt on the jack must be
Wheels and tires

inserted into the intended opening on the

jacking point.

X Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on

the wheel you wish to change by about one
full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com-
pletely.
Example
X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly
beneath the jacking point.
X Turn ratchet wrench ? until jack = sits
completely on jacking point ; and the
base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
X Turn ratchet wrench ? until the tire is
raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the
ground.

The jacking points are located just behind the

front wheel housings and just in front of the
rear wheel housings (arrows).
 Changing a wheel 433

Removing a wheel ! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold

the wheel securely against the wheel hub
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a
while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub
threads could otherwise be damaged when Always pay attention to the instructions and
you screw them in. safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" sec-
tion (Y page 429).
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-
sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
only use wheel bolts which have been
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the
respective wheel.
! Always use wheel bolts ; to mount the
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel. Using
other wheel bolts to mount the "Minispare"
emergency spare wheel could damage the
X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com- brake system.
pletely.
X Screw alignment bolt : into the thread

Wheels and tires

instead of the wheel bolt.
X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
: Wheel bolts for all wheels supplied by the
bolts to come loose. As a result, you could
lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of factory
accident. ; Wheel bolts for the collapsible spare
wheel
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of
damage to the threads, contact a qualified
specialist workshop immediately. Have the
damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

G WARNING
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip
over. There is a risk of injury.
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.

Z
434 Wheel and tire combinations

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact X Stow the jack and the rest of the tire-
surfaces. change tool kit in the stowage well under
X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the the cargo compartment floor again.
alignment bolt and push it on. X Check the tire pressure of the newly moun-
X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin- ted wheel and adjust it if necessary.
ger-tight. Observe the recommended tire pressure
X Unscrew the alignment bolt. (Y page 410).
X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-
i Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: all
tight. wheels mounted must be equipped with
functioning sensors.
Lowering the vehicle
G WARNING Wheel and tire combinations
The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts
and bolts are not tightened to the specified General notes
tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec-
Have the tightening torque immediately ommends that you only use tires and
checked at a qualified specialist workshop wheels which have been approved by
after a wheel is changed. Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehi-
Wheels and tires

cle.
These tires have been specially adapted for
use with the control systems, such as ABS
or ESP®, and are marked as follows:
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)
RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-
tain AMG tires)
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires
may only be used on wheels that have been
X Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon
specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.
nut of the jack so that the letters AB are
visible. Only use tires, wheels or accessories tes-
ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cer-
X Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle is
tain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle
once again standing firmly on the ground.
noise emissions or fuel consumption, may
X Place the jack to one side. otherwise be adversely affected. In addi-
X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross- tion, when driving with a load, tire dimen-
wise pattern in the sequence indicated (: sion variations could cause the tires to
to A). The tightening torque must be come into contact with the bodywork and
110 lb-ft (150 Nm). axle components. This could result in dam-
X Turn the jack back to its initial position. age to the tires or the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for
damage resulting from the use of tires,
wheels or accessories other than those tes-
ted and approved.
 Wheel and tire combinations 435

Information on tires, wheels and approved i Not all wheel and tire combinations are
combinations can be obtained from any available at the factory for all countries.
qualified specialist workshop.
i On the following pages, you can find infor-
! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec- mation on approved wheel rims and tire
ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since pre- sizes for equipping your vehicle with winter
vious damage cannot always be detected tires. Winter tires are not available at the
on retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes- factory as standard equipment or optional
Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if extras.
retreaded tires are mounted. Do not mount If you would like to equip your vehicle with
used tires if you have no information about approved winter tires, you may also, in cer-
their previous usage. tain circumstances, require rims of the
Overview of abbreviations used in the follow- appropriate size. The size of the approved
ing tire tables: winter tires may deviate from that of the
standard tires. This is dependent on the
RBA: both axles
model and the equipment installed at the
RFA: front axle factory.
RRA: rear axle
The tires and wheel rims, as well as further
The recommended pressures for various information, can be obtained at a qualified
operating conditions can be found: specialist workshop.

Wheels and tires

Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
with the recommended tire pressures on
the B-pillar on the driver's side
Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of the
fuel filler flap
Observe the notes on recommended tire
pressures under various operating conditions
(Y page 410).
Check tire pressures regularly, and only when
the tires are cold. Comply with the mainte-
nance recommendations of the tire manufac-
turer in the vehicle document wallet.
Notes on the vehicle equipment – always
equip the vehicle with:
Rtires of the same size on a given axle (left/
right)
Rthe same type of tires at a given time (sum-
mer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires)
Vehicles with MOExtended tires are not
equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is
therefore recommended that you additionally
equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you
mount tires that do not feature run-flat prop-
erties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be
obtained from a qualified specialist work-
shop.

Z
436 Wheel and tire combinations

Tires
GL 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC
All-weather tires
R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 275/55 R 19 111 H M+S3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 275/50 R 20 109 H M+S3, 4 BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

All-terrain tires
R 18
Wheels and tires

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 265/60 R 18 110 H M+S BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 2.22 in (56.5 mm)

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 275/55 R 19 111 H M+S3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

Winter tires
R 18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 265/60 R 18 110 H M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 2.22 in (56.5 mm)

3 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".
4 Available as MOExtended tires.
 Wheel and tire combinations 437

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 265/55 R 19 109 H M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 275/50 R 20 109 H M+S i BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

GL 450
All-weather tires
R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

Wheels and tires

BA: 275/55 R 19 111 H M+S3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 275/50 R 20 109 H M+S3, 4 BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

All-terrain tires
R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 275/55 R 19 111 H M+S3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

Winter tires
R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 265/55 R 19 109 H M+S i BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

3 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".
4 Available as MOExtended tires.

Z
438 Wheel and tire combinations

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 275/50 R 20 109 H M+S i BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

GL 450 4MATIC
All-weather tires
R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 275/55 R 19 111 H M+S3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

Wheels and tires

BA: 275/50 R 20 109 H M+S3, 4 BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2

Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

All-terrain tires
R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 275/55 R 19 111 H M+S3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

Winter tires
R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 265/55 R 19 109 H M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 275/50 R 20 109 H M+S i BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

3 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".
4 Available as MOExtended tires.
 Wheel and tire combinations 439

GL 550 4MATIC
All-weather tires
R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 275/50 R 20 109 H M+S3, 4 BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

R 21

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 295/40 R 21 111 V XL M+S3, 5 BA: 10.0 J x 21 H2
Wheel offset: 1.81 in (46 mm)

All-terrain tires
R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

Wheels and tires

BA: 275/55 R 19 111 H M+S3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

Winter tires
R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 265/55 R 19 109 H M+S i BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 275/50 R 20 109 H M+S i BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)
BA: 275/45 R 20 110 V XL M+S i5 BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)

3 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".
4 Available as MOExtended tires.
5 Only available on vehicles with the AMG Sports-package (code P 31).

Z
440 Emergency spare wheel

GL 63 AMG 4MATIC
Summer tires
R 21

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 295/40 ZR 21 111 Y XL3 BA: 10.0 J x 21 H2
Wheel offset: 1.81 in (46 mm)

Winter tires
R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 275/45 R 20 110 V XL M+S i BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)

Emergency spare wheel emergency spare wheel only on the rear

axle. If you mount the "Minispare" emer-
Wheels and tires

Important safety notes gency spare wheel on the front axle, this
G WARNING could result in damage to the brake system.
The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type of If a tire on the front axle is defective, an
the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel intact wheel from the rear axle must first be
and the wheel to be replaced may differ. replaced with the "Minispare" emergency
Mounting an emergency spare wheel may spare wheel. The defective wheel on the
severely impair the driving characteristics. front axle can then be replaced with the
There is a risk of an accident. intact wheel from the rear axle.
To avoid hazardous situations: Make sure to note the placard on the
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel.
Radapt your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully. When using an emergency spare wheel or
spare wheel of a different size, you must not
Rnever mount more than one spare wheel or
exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph
emergency spare wheel that differs in size.
(80 km/h).
Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency spare
Snow chains must not be mounted on emer-
wheel of a different size briefly.
gency spare wheels.
Rdo not switch ESP® off.
Rhave a spare wheel or emergency spare
wheel of a different size replaced at the General notes
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Mounting the emergency spare wheel is
Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions
described under "Mounting a wheel"
as well as the tire type must be correct.
(Y page 430).
! AMG vehicles with "Minispare" emer- You should regularly check the pressure of
gency spare wheel: use the "Minispare" the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior
to long trips, and correct the pressure as nec-
3 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".
 Emergency spare wheel 441

essary (Y page 410). The value on the wheel X Lift the cargo compartment floor up
or as given in the "Wheels and tires" section is (Y page 349).
valid (Y page 443). X Vehicles with a lockable cargo compart-
An emergency spare wheel may also be ment floor: remove the stowage tray.
mounted against the direction of rotation. X Release the Velcro fastener (Y page 388).
Observe the time restriction on use as well as X Take out the jack.
the speed limitation specified on the emer-
X Turn emergency spare wheel retainer :
gency spare wheel.
counter-clockwise and remove it.
Replace the tires after six years at the latest,
X Remove stowage well ;.
regardless of wear. This also applies to the
emergency spare wheel. X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel =.
i When you are driving with the collapsible
spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure
loss warning system or the tire pressure
monitor cannot function reliably. Only
restart the tire pressure loss warning sys-
tem/the tire pressure monitor when the
damaged wheel has been replaced with a
new wheel.

Wheels and tires

Vehicles with tire pressure monitor:
after mounting an emergency spare wheel,
the system may still display the tire pres-
sure of the removed wheel for a few
minutes. The value displayed for the moun- On vehicles with a Bang & Olufsen sound sys-
ted emergency spare wheel is not the same tem, the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel
as the current tire pressure of the emer- is packed in the emergency spare wheel bag.
gency spare wheel. The emergency spare wheel bag is secured to
the cargo tie down rings in the cargo com-
partment.
Removing the emergency spare wheel To stow the "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel, the rear seats in the third row must be
folded in (Y page 111).
X To remove the emergency spare wheel:
open the tailgate.
X Detach fastening straps ;.
X Unhook retaining spring hooks : and =
of fastening straps ; from the lasing eye-
lets.
X Remove the emergency spare wheel bag
with the "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel.
Emergency spare wheel (example: vehicle without
lockable cargo compartment floor) X Open the emergency spare wheel bag and
remove the "Minispare" emergency spare
The "Minispare" emergency spare wheel can
wheel.
be found in the stowage well under the cargo
compartment floor.

Z
442 Emergency spare wheel

X To stow the emergency spare wheel:

place the "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel into the emergency spare wheel bag
and close the emergency spare wheel bag.
X Place the emergency spare wheel bag with
the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel
into the cargo compartment with the car-
rying strap at the back.
X Hook retaining spring hooks : and = of
fastening straps ; into the lasing eyelets.
X Tighten fastening straps ;.

Always observe the instructions and safety

notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
(Y page 430).
Wheels and tires
 Emergency spare wheel 443

Technical data
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel

Tires Alloy wheels

T 165/90 R19 119 M 4.5 B x 19 H2
Tire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) Wheel offset: 1.58 in (40 mm)

Wheels and tires

Z
444
 445

Useful information ............................ 446

Information regarding technical
data .................................................... 446
Identification plates ......................... 446
Service products and filling capaci-
ties ..................................................... 447
Vehicle data ...................................... 455
Vehicle data for off-road driving ..... 456
Trailer tow hitch ................................ 458

Technical data
446 Identification plates

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes all

models and all standard and optional equip-
ment of your vehicle available at the time of
publication of the Operator's Manual.
Country-specific differences are possible.
Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and
functions.
Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)
i Read the information on qualified special- ; Vehicle model
ist workshops (Y page 29). = VIN

Information regarding technical data

i The data stated here specifically refers to

a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
the data for all vehicle variants and trim
levels.
Technical data

Identification plates Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only)

Vehicle identification plate with vehi- ; Vehicle model
cle identification number (VIN) = VIN
i The data shown on the vehicle identifica-
tion plate is used only as an example. This
data is different for every vehicle and can
deviate from the data shown here. You can
find the data applicable to your vehicle on
the vehicle identification plate.

X Open the driver's door.

You will see vehicle identification plate :.
 Service products and filling capacities 447

VIN Service products and filling capaci-

ties
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Service products may be poisonous and haz-
ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with instructions on the use, storage
and disposal of service products on the labels
of the respective original containers. Always
store service products sealed in their original
containers. Always keep service products out
X Open the front right-hand door. of the reach of children.
X Open cover : in the direction of the arrow
and remove it. H Environmental note
You will see the VIN. Dispose of service products in an environ-
The VIN can also be found in the following mentally responsible manner.
locations:
Service products include the following:
Ron the lower edge of the windshield
RFuels
(Y page 447)
RExhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g.
Ron the vehicle identification plate
(Y page 446) DEF

Technical data
RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
RCoolant
Engine number RBrake fluid
RWindshield washer fluid
RClimate control system refrigerant
Comply with all valid regulations with respect
to handling, storing, and disposing of service
fluids.
Components and service products must be
matched. You should therefore only use prod-
ucts that have been tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Information on tested and approved products
: Emission control information plate, can be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-
including the certification of both federal Benz Center or on the Internet at
and Californian emissions standards http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
; Engine number (stamped into the crank- You can recognize service products approved
case) by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip-
= VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield) tion on the containers:
RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)

Z
448 Service products and filling capacities

Other designations or recommendations indi- Tank capacity

cate a level of quality or a specification in
accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. Model Total capa-
MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been city
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
All other models 26.4 US gal
(100.0 l)
Fuel
Model Of which
Important safety notes
reserve
G WARNING AMG vehicles Approx.
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel 3.7 US gal
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo- (14.0 l)
sion.
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating All other models Approx.
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine 3.2 US gal
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before (12.0 l)
refueling.
Gasoline
G WARNING
Fuel grade
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
There is a risk of injury. ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-
Technical data

You must make sure that fuel does not come

into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
tion if you accidentally refuel with the
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter
vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
the fuel system. Even small amounts of the
wrong fuel could result in damage to the
If you or others come into contact with fuel, fuel system and the engine. Notify a quali-
observe the following: fied specialist workshop and have the fuel
RWash away fuel from skin immediately tank and fuel lines drained completely.
using soap and water.
! Only refuel using unleaded premium
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
grade gasoline with at least 91 AKI/
immediately rinse them thoroughly with 95 RON.
clean water. Seek medical assistance with-
out delay. ! Only use the fuel recommended. Operat-
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis- ing the vehicle with other fuels can lead to
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- engine failure.
ing. ! Do not use the following:
RImmediately change out of clothing which
RE85(gasoline with 85% ethanol)
has come into contact with fuel.
RE100 (100% ethanol)
RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)
RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)
RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)
RM100 (100% methanol)
 Service products and filling capacities 449

RGasoline with metalliferous additives Information on refueling (Y page 186).

RDiesel
Additives
Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-
! Operating the engine with fuel additives
mended for your vehicle. Do not use addi-
added later can lead to engine failure. Do
tives. This can otherwise lead to engine
not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does
damage. This does not include cleaning
not include additives for the removal and
additives for the removal and prevention of
prevention of residue buildup. gasoline
residue build-up. gasoline may only be
must only be mixed with additives recom-
mixed with cleaning additives recommen-
mended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply with
ded by Mercedes-Benz; see "Additives".
the instructions for use on the product
You can obtain further information from
label. More information about recommen-
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
ded additives can be obtained from any
! To ensure the longevity and full perform- authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
ance of the engine, only premium-grade Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
unleaded gasoline must be used. branded fuels that have additives.
If standard unleaded gasoline is unavaila- The quality of the fuel available in some coun-
ble and you have to refuel with unleaded tries may not be sufficient. Residue could
gasoline of a lower grade, observe the fol- build up in the injection system as a result. In
lowing precautions: such cases, and in consultation with an
ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with reg- authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the gaso-
ular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest line may be mixed with the cleaning additive
with premium-grade unleaded gasoline recommended by Mercedes-Benz. You must

Technical data
as soon as possible. observe the notes and mixing ratios specified
RDo not drive at the maximum speed. on the container.
RAvoid sudden acceleration and engine
speeds over 3,000 rpm. Diesel
Using mixtures of methanol and ethanol is not Fuel grade
permitted. E10 fuel or E15 fuel (unleaded gas-
oline with 10% or 15% ethanol) can be used.
G WARNING
If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash
You will usually find information about the fuel
point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.
grade on the pump. If you cannot find the
When the engine is running, exhaust system
label on the pump, ask the staff for assis-
components could overheat without being
tance.
noticed. There is a risk of fire.
i For further information, consult a quali- Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline
fied specialist workshop or visit with diesel fuel.
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
All other models: as a temporary measure, if ! Refuel only using diesel fuel that con-
the recommended fuel is not available, you forms to European standard EN 590 or an
may also use regular unleaded gasoline with equivalent specification. Fuel that does not
an octane rating of 87 RON/91 MON. This conform to EN 590 can lead to increased
may reduce engine performance and increase wear and damage the engine and exhaust
fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle system.
and sudden acceleration. Never refuel using
fuel with a lower AKI.

Z
450 Service products and filling capacities

! Do not use the following: Do not refuel your vehicle with fuels unless
Rmarine diesel they have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Rheating oil Information on refueling (Y page 186).
Rbio-diesel Low outside temperatures
Rvegetable oil i Diesel fuel with improved cold flow prop-
Rgasoline erties is available during the winter months.
Rparaffin Further information about fuel properties
Rkerosene
can be obtained from oil companies, e.g. at
gas stations.
Do not mix such fuels with diesel fuel and
do not use any special additives. This can
otherwise lead to engine damage. DEF
! Vehicles with diesel particle filters: in Important safety notes
countries outside the EU, only use low sul-
fur Euro diesel with a sulfur content of Comply with the important safety notes for
under 50 ppm. Otherwise, the emission service products when handling DEF
control system could be damaged. (Y page 447).
! Vehicles without a diesel particle fil- DEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust
ter: in countries where only diesel fuel with gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is:
a high sulfur content is available, you will Rnot poisonous
need to carry out your vehicle's oil change Rcolorless and odorless
at shorter intervals. Further information on
Technical data

Rnot flammable
oil change intervals can be obtained at a
When you open the DEF container, small
qualified specialist workshop.
amounts of ammonia vapor may be released.
You will usually find information about the fuel Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and are
grade on the pump. If you cannot find the particularly irritating to the skin, to mucous
label on the pump, ask the staff for assis- membranes and to the eyes. You may expe-
tance. rience a burning sensation in your eyes, nose
Information on refueling (Y page 186). and throat. Coughing and watering of the
eyes are possible.
Bio-diesel – FAME (fatty acid methyl ester)
Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEF
Mercedes-Benz USA approves the use of bio-
tank only in well-ventilated areas.
diesel B5 for all BlueTEC diesel engines. The
concentration of bio-diesel in the ULSD may
Low outside temperatures
not exceed 5% by volume.
Pure bio-diesel and diesel fuel with a higher DEF freezes at a temperature of approx-
percentage of bio-diesel, such as B20, can imately 12 ‡ (-11 †). The vehicle is delivered
damage the engine and the fuel system. For from the factory equipped with a DEF pre-
this reason, they are not approved. heating system. Winter operation can thus be
For more information, consult the gas station guaranteed even at temperatures below 12 ‡
staff. The bio-diesel B5 label on the gasoline (-11 †).
pump must clearly state that the standard for
ULSD has been fulfilled. If the label is not
clear, do not refuel the vehicle.
 Service products and filling capacities 451

Additives Follow the instructions in the service inter-

val display regarding the oil change. Other-
! Only use DEF in accordance with ISO wise, you may damage the engine and the
22241. Do not use additives with DEF and
exhaust gas aftertreatment.
do not dilute DEF with water. This may
destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas after- When handling engine oil, observe the impor-
treatment system. tant safety notes on service products
(Y page 447).
Purity The engine oils are matched to the perform-
ance of Mercedes-Benz engines and service
! Impurities in DEF (e.g. due to other ser- intervals. You should therefore only use
vice products, cleaning agents or dust) lead engine oils and oil filters that are approved for
to: vehicles with maintenance systems.
Rincreased emission values For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,
Rdamage to the catalytic converter consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
Rengine damage ter. Or visit the website
Rmalfunctions in the BlueTEC exhaust gas
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
aftertreatment system The table shows which engine oils have been
approved for your vehicle.
Assuring the purity of DEF is particularly
important with respect to avoiding malfunc- Missing values were not available at time of
tions in the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreat- going to print.
ment system. Model Engine MB
If DEF is pumped out of the DEF tank, e.g. model Approval

Technical data
during repair work, it must not be returned to
the tank. The purity of the fluid can no longer GL 450 276 229.5
be guaranteed. GL 450 4MATIC
GL 550 4MATIC 278 229.5
Filling capacities
AMG vehicles 157 229.5
Model Total capacity
GL 350 Blue- 642 228.51,
GL 350 Blue- 8.2 US gal TEC 4MATIC 229.31,
TEC 4MATIC (31.2 l) 229.51,
229.52

Engine oil i MB approval is indicated on the oil con-

General notes tainers.

! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a Filling capacities

specification other than is necessary to ful-
fill the prescribed service intervals. Do not The following values refer to an oil change
change the engine oil or oil filter in order to including the oil filter.
achieve longer replacement intervals than
those prescribed. You could otherwise
cause engine damage or damage to the
exhaust gas aftertreatment.

Z
452 Service products and filling capacities

Model Capacity Brake fluid

GL 450 7.4 US qt (7.0 l) G WARNING
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture
GL 350 Blue- 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
TEC 4MATIC
the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake
AMG vehicles Without external oil fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the
cooler: 9.0 US qt brake system when the brakes are applied
(8.5 l) hard. This would impair braking efficiency.
There is a risk of an accident.
All other models 9.0 US qt (8.5 l) You should have the brake fluid renewed at
the specified intervals.
Additives
Comply with the important safety notes for
! Do not use any additives in the engine oil. service products when handling brake fluid
This could damage the engine. (Y page 447).
The brake fluid change intervals can be found
Engine oil viscosity
in the Maintenance Booklet.
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-
Benz according to MB Approval 331.0.
Information about approved brake fluid can
be obtained at any qualified specialist work-
shop or on the Internet at
Technical data

http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at
a qualified specialist workshop and the
replacement confirmed in the Maintenance
Booklet.
Viscosity describes the flow characteristics
of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,
this means that it is thick; a low viscosity Coolant
means that it is thin.
Important safety notes
Select an engine oil with an SAE classification
(viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outside G WARNING
temperatures. The table shows you which If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-
SAE classifications are to be used. The low- ponents in the engine compartment, it may
temperature characteristics of engine oils ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
can deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a result Let the engine cool down before you add anti-
of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is therefore freeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled
strongly recommended that you carry out reg- next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the
ular oil changes using an approved engine oil antifreeze from components before starting
with the appropriate SAE classification. the engine.

! Only add coolant that has been premixed

with the desired antifreeze protection. You
could otherwise damage the engine.
 Service products and filling capacities 453

Further information on coolants can be adequate antifreeze and corrosion protec-

found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications tion.
for Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g.
i The coolant is checked with every main-
on the Internet at
tenance interval at a qualified specialist
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or con-
workshop.
tact a qualified specialist workshop.
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, Filling capacities
even in countries where high temperatures
prevail. Model Capacity
Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not GL 450 Approx. 10.9 US qt
sufficiently protected from corrosion and (10.3 l)
overheating.
GL 450 4MATIC Approx. 12.0 US qt
i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a
GL 550 4MATIC (11.4 l)
qualified specialist workshop and the
replacement confirmed in the Maintenance GL 350 Blue- Approx. 12.2 US qt
Booklet. TEC 4MATIC (11.5 l)
Comply with the important safety precautions
AMG vehicles Approx. 13.1 US qt
for service products when handling coolant
(12.4 l)
(Y page 447).
The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-
freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the i Use MB 325.0 or MB 326.0 antifreeze/
following tasks: corrosion inhibitor.

Technical data
Rcorrosion protection
Rantifreeze protection Windshield washer system
Rraising the boiling point
Important safety notes
If the coolant has antifreeze protection down
to -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the cool- G WARNING
ant during operation is approximately 266 ‡ Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if
(130 †). it comes into contact with hot engine compo-
The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra- nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of
tion in the engine cooling system should: fire and injury.
Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine Make sure that no windshield washer con-
cooling system against freezing down to centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).
Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection
! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to
the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the
down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat
level sensor may be damaged.
will not be dissipated as effectively.
Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/ ! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit
corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accord- washer fluid should be mixed together. The
ance with MB Specifications for Service Prod- spray nozzles may otherwise become
ucts 310.1. blocked.
i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is fil- When handling washer fluid, observe the
led with a coolant mixture that ensures important safety notes on service products
(Y page 447).

Z
454 Service products and filling capacities

At temperatures above freezing: Always have work on the climate control sys-
X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture tem carried out at a qualified specialist work-
of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. shop.
MB SummerFit.
Refrigerant instruction label
Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.
At temperatures below freezing:
X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB Winter-
Fit.
Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside temper-
ature.
RDown to 14 ‡ (Ò10 †): mix 1 part MB Win-
terFit to 2 parts water.
RDown to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †): mix 1 part MB Win-
terFit to 1 part water. Example: refrigerant instruction label
RDown to Ò20.2 ‡ (Ò29 †): mix 2 parts MB : Warning symbol
WinterFit to 1 part water. ; Refrigerant filling capacity
i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB = Applicable standards
SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer ? PAG oil part number
fluid all year round. A Type of refrigerant
Technical data

Warning symbol : advises you about:

Climate control system refrigerant Rpossible dangers
Rhaving service work carried out at a quali-
Important safety notes
fied specialist workshop
The climate control system of your vehicle is
filled with refrigerant R‑134a. Filling capacities
The instruction label regarding the refrigerant Missing values were not available at time of
type used can be found on the radiator cross going to print.
member.
! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG AMG vehicles Capacity
oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be Refrigerant
used. The approved PAG oil may not be
mixed with any other PAG oil that is not PAG oil
approved for R-134a refrigerant. Other-
wise, the climate control system may be
All other models Capacity
damaged.
Service work, such as topping up refrigerant Refrigerant 37.0 ± 0.4 oz
or replacing components, may only be carried (1050 ± 10 g)
out by a qualified specialist workshop. All
PAG oil 4.9 ± 0.4 oz
applicable regulations must be adhered to,
SAE standard J639 included. (140 ± 10 g)
 Vehicle data 455

Vehicle data All other mod- : ;

General notes els with: Opening Max.
height headroom
Please note that for the specified vehicle
data: AIRMATIC 83.9 in - 76.1 in -
Rthe heights specified may vary as a result package 86.9 in 79.1 in
of: (2132 mm - (1934 mm -
- tires 2207 mm) 2009 mm)
- load ON&OFF- 83.9 in - 76.1 in -
- condition of the suspension ROAD pack- 88.1 in 80.3 in
- optional equipment age 2132 mm - (1934 mm -
Roptional equipment reduces the maximum 2237 mm 2039 mm)
payload.
AMG vehicles
Dimensions and weights Vehicle length 202.6 in
(5146 mm)
Vehicle width including 84.3 in
exterior mirrors (2141 mm)
Vehicle width without 78.0 in

Technical data
exterior mirrors (1982 mm)
Maximum vehicle height 74.9 in
(1902 mm)
Minimum vehicle height 72.4 in
(1839 mm)
Model : ;
Opening Max. Wheelbase 121.1 in
height headroom (3075 mm)
AMG vehicles 84.1 in - 78.8 in Maximum ground clear- 9.8 in
86.6 in 2002 mm ance (249 mm)
2136 mm - Minimum ground clear- 7.4 in
2199 mm ance (188 mm)
Turning radius 40.8 ft
(12.45 m)
Maximum roof load 220 lb
(100 kg)

Z
456 Vehicle data for off-road driving

All other models Vehicle data for off-road driving

Vehicle width including 84.3 in Fording depth
exterior mirrors (2141 mm)
Maximum vehicle height 75.2 in
(1910 mm)
Maximum vehicle height 76.4 in
(ON&OFFROAD package) (1940 mm)
Minimum vehicle height 72.8 in
(highway driving level) (1850 mm)
Wheelbase 121.1 in
(3075 mm) : Fording depth

Maximum ground clear- 10.9 in Fording

ance (276 mm) depth

Maximum ground clear- 12.0 in Vehicles without the

ance (ON&OFFROAD ON&OFFROAD package
(306 mm)
package) Raised level 20 in
Minimum ground clear- 7.9 in (50 cm)
Technical data

ance (201 mm) Vehicles with the ON&OFF-

Turning radius ROAD package
40.7 ft
(12.40 m) Off-road level 1 20 in
(50 cm)
Maximum roof load 220 lb
(100 kg) Off-road level 2 20 in
(50 cm)

Model (except AMG vehi- Vehicle Off-road level 3 23.6 in

cles) length (60 cm)

GL 550 4MATIC 202.6 in AMG vehicles 20 in

(5146 mm) (50 cm)

All other models 201.6 in For more information about off-road fording,
(5120 mm) see (Y page 198).
 Vehicle data for off-road driving 457

Approach/departure angle : ;
Raised level 24° 24°
Vehicles with the
ON&OFFROAD package
Highway level 20° 20°
Off-road level 1 22° 22°
Off-road level 2 24° 24°
Off-road level 3 26° 26°
All vehicles (except vehicles with AMG
bodystyling) For further information about approach/
departure angles, see (Y page 202).
: ;
Vehicles without the Maximum gradient-climbing capabil-
ON&OFFROAD package ity
Highway level 25° 20° Note that the vehicle's gradient-climbing
capability depends on the off-road conditions
Raised level 30° 25°
and the road surface conditions.
Vehicles with the Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package:

Technical data
ON&OFFROAD package the maximum gradient climbing ability is
100% when the LOW RANGE off-road gear is
Highway level 25° 20°
selected.
Off-road level 1 28° 23° Vehicles without the ON&OFFROAD pack-
age: the maximum gradient climbing ability is
Off-road level 2 30° 25°
80%.
Off-road level 3 33° 27° Accelerate carefully and make sure that the
AMG vehicles wheels do not spin when driving on steep ter-
rain.
Highway level (in sports 19° 19°
i If the load on the front axle is reduced
mode with the AMG adap-
when pulling away on a steep uphill slope,
tive suspension system
the front wheels have a tendency to spin.
activated)
4ETS recognizes this and brakes the
Raised level 23° 22° wheels accordingly. The rear wheel torque
is increased, making it easier to drive off.
Vehicles with AMG bodystyling For further information about the maximum
gradient climbing ability, see (Y page 203).
: ;
Vehicles without the
ON&OFFROAD package
Highway level 20° 20°

Z
458 Trailer tow hitch

Trailer tow hitch

Mounting dimensions
! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,
changes to the cooling system and drive
train may be necessary, depending on the
vehicle type.
If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,
observe the anchorage points on the chas-
sis frame.
Technical data

Anchorage points for the trailer tow hitch (exam-

ple)
: Anchorage points
; Rear axle center line
 Trailer tow hitch 459

Trailer loads
Trailer loads, trailer drawbar noseweights and axle loads
Missing values were not available at time of going to print.
GL 450
Permissible trailer load, unbraked
Permissible trailer load, braked (at a minimum gradient- 6613 lbs (3000 kg)
climbing capability of 12% from a standstill)
Maximum drawbar noseweight (the drawbar nose- 529 lbs (240 kg)
weight is not included in the trailer load)
Permissible rear axle load when towing a trailer 3970 lbs (1800 kg)

GL 450 4MATIC, GL 550

4MATIC and GL 350 Blue-
TEC 4MATIC
Permissible trailer load, unbraked
Permissible trailer load, braked (at a minimum gradient- 7500 lbs (3402 kg)
climbing capability of 12% from a standstill)

Technical data
Maximum drawbar noseweight (the drawbar nose- 600 lbs (272 kg)
weight is not included in the trailer load)
Permissible rear axle load when towing a trailer 3970 lbs (1800 kg)

GL 63 AMG 4MATIC
Permissible trailer load, unbraked
Permissible trailer load, braked (at a minimum gradient- 7165 lbs (3250 kg)
climbing capability of 12% from a standstill)
Maximum drawbar noseweight (the drawbar nose- 309 lbs (140 kg)
weight is not included in the trailer load)
Permissible rear axle load when towing a trailer 4189 lbs (1900 kg)

The actual noseweight may not be higher than the value which is given. The value can be found
on the trailer tow hitch or trailer identification plates. The lowest weight applies.
The maximum permissible trailer drawbar noseweight is the maximum weight with which the
trailer drawbar can be loaded. Limit for Mercedes-Benz-approved trailer couplings.

Z
460 Trailer tow hitch

Ball position

Ball position of the ball coupling

When choosing a ball coupling, the dimen-
sions stated in the illustration must not be
exceeded.
Technical data